Call/WhatsApp/Text: +44 20 3289 5183

Question: Scenario: In 2019, the Carri Windfarm Authority (CWA) of Carriland, a country in the Caribbean with the same laws as England, advertised a tender

30 Mar 2023,3:15 PM

 

 

Topic 1: Introduction to International Construction Contracts

c Preview

 

 

This first topic will consider the following:

1.     Understanding international construction practice

2.     Differences between domestic construction and international construction practice

3      Brief history of international construction contracts

4.     Why use standard form contracts in international projects 5.        Major forms of International Construction Contracts

6.     Brief introduction to procurement/delivery methods

 

 

Topic Content

 

 

1. Understanding International Construction practice

 

 

International construction practice has provided the world with many beautiful sights to behold and has made possible the provision of essential infrastructure in very challenging and in previously impossible locations. Employing innovative technological structures and complex financing instruments, the sector connects designs from one part of the world to expertise and finance in another, translate theminto completedprojects undertaken by workers of different nationalities in yet another part of our world, thus traversing a variety of languages and cultures.

 

International Construction project in its basic form is aptly described by S B Stebbings as ‘…projects where the contractor, lead consultant or the employer is not of the same domicile and at least one of them is working outside its country of origin’. International Construction entails engaging resources (whether technical or financial)fromdifferentsourcesacrosstheglobeforthedelivery of major aspects of construction/engineeringprojects. Duetotheincreasinginvolvementof lendersin projects,apredominantlyforeignfinancedconstructionproject (especially where the project is funded by one of the multilateral development banks) will qualify as an international project.

 

International projects involve complex and multidimensional contractual relationships; these could include a joint venture comprising localandinternational contractors,anemployerthatlieswithinalarger bureaucraticstructure with different levels of authority, or international lenders acting in a syndicate. Each set of relationship is governed by seriesof documents. The mix of possible documents in an international construction project could include:

 

1. An agreement of “business terms” indicating such things as the names of the parties, description of the project, and the contract sum.

1 | P a g e

 

Topic 1 -Introduction

 

 

 

 

2. The construction contract indicating the general and special conditions of the contract, stating the basic rights, duties, and obligations of the parties.

 

3. The agreementwith the lendersincludingguaranteesand step-in rights.

 

4. The tender documents.

 

5. Time and cost schedules.

 

6. Insurance agreements,consultancy, and confidentiality agreements.

 

7. Others i.e., ancillary agreements, exceptions, manuals, protocols, payment schedules, specifications, and appendices etc.

 

These documents usually translate to thousands of gigabytes in electronic data and an avalanche of paper if printed out.

 

International construction is usually concerned with high net worth projects which create a different matrix of risks and challenges. These projects are often large and technically complex. Examples of international construction projects with complex characteristics abound and can be found across different regions of the world. Let’s look at the Hong Kong airport project as an illustration here. The project required 1248-hectare reclamation, a 34km rail and road access, over 30,000 site workers andawebof225agreementswithcontractorsfrommorethantendifferentcountries including China, Japan, Hong Kong, United Kingdom, Holland, France, Belgium, New Zealand, Australia, South Africa, Italy amongst others, at a cost of approximately US$20billion. The construction industry accounts for approximately 10% of global Gross Domestic Product (GDP) translating into receipts of over 7.5 trillion US Dollars. Information from the European International contractors (the EIC is Europe’s trade association of construction contractors involved in international projects) indicates that the turnover of its members in 2016 (for international projects only) was more than one hundred and seventy-one billion Euros.1 The 2017 figure stands at EUR 176 billion plus.2 In spite of the pandemic, there are still signs that infrastructure development remains a priority of many governments around the world.

 

The growth of international construction is attributable to the increased demand for infrastructure services across the globe in the past three decades. Bruner and O’Connor on construction Law, list seven reasons for the growth of international construction projects, to wit:

1. Advances in communicationtechnology.

2. Increased political stability and military security.

3. Democratisation of national governments and movement towards

 

 

1 https://www.eic-federation.eu/services/statistics 2 ibid

2 | P a g e

 

Topic 1 -Introduction cooperation between nations.

4. Increased interdependency in trade and banking between nations evidenced by various trade agreements i.e., GATT.

5. The desire of project controllersto obtain the best available resource at the lowestpricelocatedinanypartoftheworld,thistrendisspecially

promoted by multinational corporations and multilateral lending agencies.

6. Continuous increase in the size and financial requirements of construction projects prompting action to spread risks

7. Willingness by international construction companies to compete for jobs in different jurisdictions. The global economic problems make going international even more crucial.

 

 

 

2. What differentiates domestic construction from international construction projects?

 

Complexity and size have been used to differentiate domestic and international constructionprojects.Thelatterisoftenthoughttoinvolvemore complex processes. However, this is not a very helpful analytical tool: many domestic projects have matched their international counterparts in terms of size and complexity. So, what makes a project international and another domestic?

 

Professor Nael G Bunni has suggested that a series of factors are peculiar to international construction. His list includes:

1. Vast sums of money are frequently provided by various banks, financial institutions, and insurance companies,with guarantees.

2. Construction people usually come from different social classes, and from different countries and cultures.

3. Construction people also come from different firms. Extensive interaction is required between many of the firms involved in construction, including those engaged as suppliers, manufacturers,subcontractors, and contractors,each with its own set of commitments and goals.

4. International construction projects are susceptible to unusual risk, i.e., cultural risk.

5. Many international construction projects are constructed in isolated regions of difficult terrain, sometimesstretching over extensive areas,

being exposed to natural hazards of unpredictable intensity, frequency, and return.

 

Again, there is another category of projects which will often come under the description of international construction contracts. These are international development projects. Mainly championed/sponsored by multilateral development banks (MDB), UN related agencies, bilateral agencies, or non-governmental organisations in partnership with national governments in developing economies, they may be medium or large. These traditionally are “hard” projects (physical construction projects) but are increasingly being extended to cover “soft” projects

 

 

3 | P a g e

 

(education, health projects) as well.3 Our interest here is on the “hard” projects. Such projects will often have at least five different set of stakeholders involved4:

(a)     a national project manager or coordinator.

(b)     a task manager who may be in the headquarters of the MDB involved who supervises the project implementation.

(c)     the national supervisor, often a civil servant of the host State, who works closely with the national coordinator as a supervisor.

(d)      the project team under the coordinators authority-playing mainly an administrative role; and

(d)     the various firms (designers/consultants, contractors, sub-contractors etc.). This group will invariably involve teams and entities which are foreign.

 

From the above discussions, one could identify two important factors that distinguish a local construction project from an international construction project:

 

1. The existence of significant foreign element to the project and

2. The project’s ‘unusual risks’ on account of 1) above – these are risks that are not common to domestic projects. There may be some risks often associated with domestic projects, but in the context of international construction,thesemayassumeenhanced significance due to the structure of an international project.

 

While the first factor is self-explanatory, the second requires further study.

 

2.A. Risks in International Construction Practice

 

 

Risk has been the subject of different definitions by various bodies. To understand the risks involved in international construction practice it is useful to understand what risk means. The Royal Society in a study on risk analysis, perception, and managementin1992definedrisk using the point of view of an adverse occurrence as “a combination of the probability, or frequency, of occurrence of a defined hazard and the magnitude of the consequences of the occurrence.” Hazard as used in the definition was described as “a situation that could occur during the lifetime of a product, system or plant that has the potential for human injury, damage to property, damage to the environment, or economic loss.” Another definition from this viewpoint defines risks as “the probability that a particular adverse event occurs during a stated period of time or results from a particular challenge.”

 

The approach of the latest Australia/New Zealand Standard for Risk Management

 

 

3 Amadou Diallo and Denis Thuillier, ‘The success of international development projects, trust and communication: an African perspective’, International Journal of Project Management

Volume 23, Issue 3, April 2005, Pages 237-252

 

4 ibid

4 | P a g e

 

(AS/NZS ISO 31000: 2009) is significantly different; their definition focuseson thedualnatureofriskandthepossibilityofapositiveoutcome. It definesrisk as “the effect of uncertainty on objectives”. This effect may be negative or positive. The definition of risk in the Risk Analysis and Management of Projects (RAMP) (the third edition published 2014), a collaboration between the Institute of Civil Engineers (ICE) and the Institute of Actuaries in the United Kingdom, has also traditionally viewed risk, from the point of view of an event with two possible outcomes.

 

In construction practice, risk is generally understood as the existence of potential or actual threats that would affect the objective of a project during the different stages of construction and use. The fact that a risk could result in a positive consequence is a relatively recent notion in the industry.

 

In terms of the risks the construction industry faces, E.J Rimmer5 writing in 1939putstheuniquepositionof theindustryaptlywhenhe stated thus:

“The subject-matter of an engineering contract is generally such as necessitates that the documents of which the contract is composed must make provision for contingencies and events of a special nature, and it is chiefly in this respect that it has peculiarities not to be found in other forms of contract, and is often inevitably of considerable length”.

 

He added:

“The facts that contract works are to be constructed in or erected and fixed on to land, and cannot be rejected and sent back to the Contractor if they prove to be unsatisfactory; that the works are to be carried out in open air under unstable conditions with material and labour of varying quality; that the conditions of excavation and foundation cannot be entirely foreseen until the ground is opened up; that execution of the works may result in damage to property belonging to other persons; that works of specialists may have to be carried out concurrently with work done by the generalcontractor;that the period of the contractmay extend over several years and the Employer may desire the use of completed parts of the work before final completion of the whole; and that the amount of money involved is often such as to imperil the financial resources of a contractor who has made an unwise tender.”

 

He concluded that

...[This] necessitate that terms should be inserted in engineering contracts which would be superfluous to ordinary commercial

contracts of purchase and sale.”

 

 

A casual observation of a minor construction project will reveal the various layers of risk inherent therein. From accurate design layouts, to purchasing the right materials, to successfully supervising workers, meeting budgetary targets etc.,

 

5 E.J. Rimmer, The Conditions of Engineering Contacts, Journal of The Institution of Civil Engineers

(London, England) No. 4 1938-39, February 1939, p. 3. Reproduced in Christopher Seppala, ‘Contractor’s Claims Under the FIDIC Contracts for Major Works’ (2005) 21 Construction Law Journal 278

5 | P a g e

 

constructionprojects pose considerable challenges and uncertainties.

 

These challenges are multiplied in international construction practice. Materials may besourced from different locations, in different currencies. Workers may come from different nationalities andwork in different locations. The financier or lending bank may have an official language different from the language of the lead contractor. The employer could be a sovereign government creating both payment and enforcement risks. The sheer volume of papers when disputes arise - design papers, comments, instructions, emails correspondence, telephone messages etc. all created during one internationalconstruction project could fill a small office. Below is a non-exhaustive list of the common risks associated with international construction practice:

1.        Profit reparation and currency exchange risk

2.        Political risk – disruption of project due to wars, unrest etc. 3.        Cultural risk

4.        Double taxation risk

5.        Expropriation risk especially in build–operate–transfer type agreements

6. Corruption and money laundering risk 7. Regulatory and payment risk

 

Where projects carry some or all the above in its risk profile, it would indicate that it is most probably an international construction project.

 

Theappropriate allocation of these risksis one of the main concerns of construction contracts especially in common law countries. The understanding of the risk inherent in a project influence, to a large extent, the choice of contract (contract terms) for the project. This is very important in international construction practice where it has been observedthatasubstantialpercentageofparticipating stakeholders (contractors,sub-contractors,consultants)donotaddresstheirminds sufficiently to the risks and severity of impact that such risks will have on the delivery of the project. One reason for this is that the nature of international projects requires segmentation of activities into phases, this usually creates compartmentalization and information disconnect between stakeholders. This will oftenobscurethe riskprofile of a projectleaving the undiscerning participant open to various unfavourable outcomes.

 

2.B. Difference between International Construction Contracts and Domestic Construction Contracts

There is a historical and ongoing argument over the utility of creating different contracts for domestic and international projects. The difference in opinion is premised on the argument that, whatever favourable provisions are included for the benefit of an employer/ contractor in either segment [domestic or international] should be passed to the stakeholder in the other.

 

The counter argument points to the difference in the risk profile of domestic and international projects and the need to create contracts, which specifically cater for the risk of each segment of the industry. The decision on the choice of contract

6 | P a g e

 

for any project is determined by the parties. However, as a general trend, domestic projects use one of the many standard forms available within the jurisdiction. For instance, in the United Kingdom the Joint Contract Tribunal (JCT) forms and the NEC3 are popular. While standard forms used domestically are increasingly being used for international projects, it is worth noting that parties to international projects will usually use standard contract forms with established reputation and association with successful international project delivery. The rationale here is that these internationally recognised forms provide mechanisms to manage some, or all the risks associated with international projects. Another rationale is that while domestic contracts are amended and drafted with a particular legal system in view, international construction contracts are drafted with multiple jurisdictions in mind.

 

3. Brief History of International Construction Contracts

From the start the institutions that issue industry standard agreements have been minded to separate domestic and international contracts. ICE’s ‘General Conditions of contract and forms of Tender, Agreement, and Bond for use in connection with Works of Civil Engineering Construction’, is arguably the first form to go international. Aftervariousamendmentsthe last being by1950, itwasfinally prepared for the international audience. This was because the ICE took notice of the increasing appeal of its form among many professional groupings in the world. Many contracts adopted the format and content of the ICE contract for international projects. To go beyond the minor changes usually employed when using the forms in those countries, and to provide for a fair international contract, the association drew up a new version of the contract differentiated from the domestic version by the blue colour of its cover. The major changes in the international version when compared to the domestic form included:

1. The allocation of risk of damage due to unforeseenforces of nature; this was shifted to the employer from the contractor.

2. Requirementforjointinsurancebetweenthepartiestosecure against third party risks.

3. Provision for amendment of the contract price where the net effect of a variationisfoundtoresultinthereductionoradditionofthesum stated in the tender by 15%.

 

The culture of designating a contract form as ‘international’ was followed by the Fédération Internationale des Ingénieurs Conseils6 (FIDIC) when it released its first form in 1957. This practice has been preserved by the Engineering Advancement Association of Japan (ENAA) whose standard forms maintain the tag ‘international’ and Institution of Chemical Engineers (IChemE) which publishes two parallel forms one for domestic projects and another designated international for international projects.

 

Over the years there was a shift of emphasis from differentiating domestic and international contracts. FIDIC in the 1987 fourth edition of the Red Book deliberately dropped the word ‘international’ in its name and invited parties to use

 

 

6 International Federation of Consulting Engineers

7 | P a g e

 

the contract for both domestic and international projects. The NEC (formerly New Engineering Contract) published by the ICE is used for both international and domestic projects; it provides alternative terms that cater for the risk profile of domestic and international projects.

 

For a particular contract to be fit for purpose it must anticipate the challenges and the risk in a project. Some contract forms have embraced the risk and challenges inherent in international construction and provide appropriate provisions. These contracts are therefore regularly used in international construction projects. The nextsectionexamineswhythe industryadoptsstandardforms. This is followed by an overview of international construction contracts.

 

4. Why use Standard form in International Projects

International commerce has seen a movement towards harmonization of rules and practice. The need to allow less burdensome transfer of goods and services has seen the development of rules and guidelines by various international organisations with the aim of harmonizing rules and practices in different sectors. Notable examples of such harmonizing efforts include the Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development’s (OECD) contract guidelines, the New York Convention on the enforcement of arbitration awards in different jurisdictions and the United Nation’s Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods (CISG) amongst others. In the area of contract law, there are the UNIDROIT Principles of International Commercial Contracts 2016 (PICC), the Principles of European Contract Law (PECL) and the EU’s Draft Common Frame of Reference (DCFR) as examples of soft laws which are outcomes of efforts to harmonise rules of contract. Construction law’s contribution to this process has been germane even though somewhat different. Standard form contracts have been the basis for international construction projects for nearly 70 years. Unlike other spheres of commerce where standard form contracts are developed by individual organisations /companies based on cumulative experience and drafted mainly to protect the organization, in the construction industry standard forms are prepared by professional organisations with the aim to share risk equitably and improve efficiency.

 

The advantages of using standard forms of contract in international construction projects are numerous. Beyond providing predictability, familiarity with the form and certainty, it also reduces the costs of negotiating anagreementofsimilarnature on a repetitive basis. It also removes the balance of bargaining power conundrum, where the party with superior bargaining power would force onerous terms on the other party. Standard forms also allow for a more comprehensive coverage of risk and points the parties to the areas where beneficial and substantial negotiations could be undertaken without dissipating energy on the less important aspects.

 

 

 

5. What are the major forms of international construction contracts?

There are many forms of international construction contracts as well as domestic contracts which are increasingly gaining grounds in the international construction

 

8 | P a g e

 

market. It would be an error to assume that all the contracts say the same thing in a different way. As this module progresses, you will gain knowledge of the significant differences between the popular types of international construction contracts in use. The following overview acknowledges the work of International Bar Association subcommittee TI, whose work forms the basis of the overview. Please note that what follows is exactly what it is meant to be, an outline. As this module progresses, we shall look at some of the contracts, particularly the FIDIC and the NEC forms in much detail.

 

 

 

5.1. Fédération Internationale des Ingénieurs-Conseils (FIDIC)

FIDIC produces standard forms of contract for civil engineering construction which are used throughout the world. FIDIC contracts are often referred to as the international standard. They are best known by their colours. This module will study the major colours of the FIDIC suites of contract, these will include, the old Red Book (1987), the 1999 Rainbow suite- the Red Book, the Yellow Book and the Silver Book; also the Pink Book and the Gold Book. We shall also introduce you to the new FIDIC forms released in December 2017.

 

Contracts under the FIDIC family include:

1. Conditions of Contract for Construction (First Edition, 1999) - Red Book.7

2. Conditions of Contract for Plant and Design-Build (First Edition, 1999)-Yellow Book.8

3. Conditions of Contract for EPC/Turnkey Projects (First Edition, 1999)- Silver Book.9

4. Short Form of Contract (First Edition, 1999) - Green Book

5. Conditions of Contract for Design, Built and Operate (First Edition, 2008) – Gold Book

6. Conditions of Contract for Construction (the MDB Harmonised Edition, 2010) -Pink Book

7. Conditions for Subcontract for Construction (First Edition, 2011) -also in Pink 8. Conditions of Contract for Construction (Second Edition, 2017) - Red Book 2. 9. Conditions of Contract for Plant and Design-Build (Second Edition, 2017)-Yellow

Book 2.

10.Conditions of Contract for EPC/Turnkey Projects (Second Edition, 2017)- Silver Book 2.

11. ConditionsofSubcontractfor PlantandDesign-Build(FirstEdition,2019)-Yellow Book

12.Conditions of Contract for Underground Works (First Edition, 2019) – Emerald Book

 

7 Conditions of Contract for Construction are recommended for building or engineering works designed by the employer or by its representative, the engineer. However, this may still include some elements of contractor-design.

8 Conditions of Contract for Plant and Design-Build are recommended for the provision of electrical and/or mechanical plant, and for the design and execution of building or engineering works where the majority of the design is undertaken by the contractor.

9 Conditions of Contract for EPC Turnkey Projects is recommended where the contractor takes total responsibility for the design and execution of an engineering project. Here, the contractor is expected to deliver a fully equipped facility, ready for operation at the “turn of the key”.

9 | P a g e

 

Other Forms of FIDIC Contracts:

13.Form of Contract for Dredging and Reclamation Works “Dredgers Contract” -Blue Book

14.AformofagreementforengagementofConsultants-WhiteBook 15.A form of agreement for Sub-consultants

16.A joint venture agreement form

 

We will not have the time to examine all these forms in detail so we will focus on the most popular and commonly used, namely the Red, Yellow and Silver Books. As part of the discussion, we may touch on some of the other forms briefly.

 

5.2. Institution of Civil Engineers (ICE)

ICE is an independent engineering institution and represents approximately 80,000 civil engineers worldwide. Principal membership is in the United Kingdom, but it has memberships in China, Hong Kong, Russia, India and roughly 150 other countries. The ICE documents are traditionally for Engineering Contractors. Pre-1987 versions of FIDIC were based on ICE forms but there is far less similarity now. Traditionally, they were Engineer-based contracts where the Employer appointed the Engineer.

 

Available Documents

1. ICE Conditions of Contract MeasurementVersion 7th Edition: July 2004

2. ICE Conditions of Contract Design and Construct 2nd Edition: July 2004

3. ICE Conditions of Contract Minor Works 3rd Edition: July 2004 4. ICE Conditions of Contract Term Version: July 2004

5. ICE Conditions of Contract Ground Investigation 2nd Edition: July 2004

6. Agreement for Consultancy Work in respect of Domestic or Small Works: amendments.

 

From August 2011, ICE withdrew from the publication of the ICE conditions. It has now been taken over by other organisations (Association for Consultancy and Engineering (ACE) and the Civil Engineering Contractors Association (CECA)) and renamed the Infrastructure and Construction Contract (ICC).

 

The New Engineering Contract/ the NEC

The NEC was developed by ICE in the early 1990s with the aim of introducing a new form of non-adversarial contract strategy which would contribute towards more effective and smoother management of projects. NEC is now in its Fourth Edition. The third edition is currently used across the spectrum of engineering and construction activities by a wide range of clients, consultants, and contractors. Its use encompasses projects large and small, civil engineering and building, national and international. It has been used on several high-profile projects including the 2012 Olympics and the on-going Crossrail project. Internationally, NEC has been used on projects such as the Christchurch Art Gallery re-level project in New Zealand, the Mt. Mercer wind farm project completed in 2014 in Australia and the Witwatersrand University project in South Africa.

10 | P a g e

 

The NEC is radically different from previous standard forms. It is a legal framework of project management procedures designed to handle all aspects of the managementofengineering and constructionprojects.Inthismodule, we willstudy the provisions of NEC with emphasis on the NEC 3 ECC. The NEC4 Contract refines, and fills gaps identified with NEC3. To this extent, it represents an improvement over the forms preceding it. Details of the changes introduced by NEC4 together with the subsequent amendments will be examined under Topic 10.

 

Structure of the NEC

The main NEC3 contract, the Engineering and Construction Contract (ECC) and its associated sub-contract, are based on nine core clauses, a set of main clauses (six main options) and a series of secondary option clauses. The six main Option clauses are:

 

Option A: Priced contract with activity schedule Option B: Priced contract with bill of quantities Option C: Target contract with activity schedule Option D: Target contract with bill of quantities Option E: Cost reimbursable contract

Option F: Managementcontract

 

 

Depending on the Main Option Clause selected, an Employee may incorporate additional clauses by selecting from series of secondary options (19 in total). These include Options X1(price adjustment for inflation), X2 (changes in the law) and X3 (Multiple currencies). The Main Options under both NEC3 and NEC4 are the same but NEC4 introducessome additionalsecondary option clauses and hasalsomodified the names of some of the existing secondary options under NEC3. We shall examine the content of the NEC Conditions in some detail under Topics 9 and 10.

 

5.3. III. Institution of Electrical Engineers (IEE) (now the Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET))

The IET, based in London, England, is an international organization for electronics, electrical, manufacturing and IT professionals, with specifically tailored products, services, and qualifications to meet the needs of today's technology industry.

 

The IET, jointlywith the Institution of MechanicalEngineers (IMechE), issues arange of model forms of general conditions of contract (including, inter alia, Forms of Tender, Agreements and Performance Bonds) and guides (known as "commentaries") to their use. These are Model Forms of Contract for electrical, electronic, and mechanical work and consultancy. The contents of these publications are decided by a joint committee of IET /IMechE members and others representing the various interests of the electrical and mechanical engineering industries. IEE has developed the Joint IMechE/IET Model Forms of General Conditions of Contract. Apart from Model Form MF/4 and Model Form MF/3, the model forms have also been adopted and are recommended by the Association of Consulting Engineers (ACE).

 

A Model Forms Information Pack which expands on the Model Forms and which 11 | P a g e

 

contains copies of all Supplements, Amendment Slips and Amendment Lists relating to the current range of Model Forms is available on the IET website. The website also sets forth the terms and conditions upon which a licence to install and use the texts of the IET copyright Model Forms on users' computing systems may be purchased.10

 

5.4. Institute of Chemical Engineers

IChemE as an organisation is like IMechE/IET but is interested in production of contracts for the specialist process industry. The forms of contract have been significantly updated in recent years to cover the spectrum of contract possibilities. Like FIDIC, IChemE contracts are often known by their colour and a list of available contracts is set out below:

 

IChemE (Green): Form of Contract –Reimbursable Contracts, 4th Edn. 2013 IChemE (Brown): Form of Contract – Subcontract for Civil Engineering Works, 3rd Edn. 2013

IChemE (Orange): Minor Works 2nd Ed 2003

 

 

IChemE (Red): Form of Contract – Lump Sum Contracts, 5th Edn. 2013 IChemE (Yellow): Subcontracts 4th Edn. 2013

IChemE (Burgundy): Target Cost, 2nd Edn. 2013 IChemE (Silver): Professional Services Agreement, 2015

IChemE (White): Rules for Expert Determination 3rd Ed 2001 IChemE (Pink): Arbitration Procedures

 

Currently, there are two suites of forms, one for the UK market and the other for the international market. The suites contain model form of agreement, general conditions, and guide notes. The distinguishing feature of these suits is that they are performance-based. This follows from the fact that process plants are judged by their performance in operation.11

 

5.5. The Joint Contracts Tribunal (JCT)

Since 1931, the JCT, based in London, England, has been producing standard forms of contract, guidance notes and other standard documents used in the construction industry. The JCT range of contracts are fundamentally building rather than civil engineering contracts but are used for projects where both building and civil engineering works are involved. They cover orthodox contracting and design and build and management contracts. Some forms deal with less complicated or expensive forms of contract. The major types of form are listed below. Traditionally, English building contracts have been divided into ‘With’ and ‘Without’ Quantities forms to cover both methods of measurement.

 

The JCT helpfully publishes a document entitled – Practice Note – Deciding on the appropriate JCT Contract, which provides guidance on what they would consider to

 

 

10 The Model Forms and their commentaries can be purchased from the IEE Publication Sales Department, email: sales@iee.org

11 https://www.icheme.org/knowledge/forms-of-contract/

12 | P a g e

 

be the appropriate JCT Contract for different situations, e.g., design and build, traditional contracting, cost plus or management. The note also contains a detailed list of JCT style contracts available.

 

In a radical departure from previous JCT forms, the JCT launched on 1 March 2007, a new set of contract documents entitled JCT – Constructing Excellence. JCT following changes in legislation in the UK, published in September

2011, the 2011 set of JCT contracts:12

 

 

1. 2011 Standard Form of Building Contract

2. 2011 Intermediate Form of Building Contract

3. 2011 Minor Works Building contract among others

 

 

The body released the 2016 Edition of the JCT suite of contracts during the latter part of 2016. The following is a list of the forms included in the new (2016) edition:

 

1. Standard Building Contract with Quantities (SBC/Q)

2. Standard Building Contract without Quantities (SBC/XQ)

3. Standard Building Contract with Approximate Quantities (SBC/AQ) 4. Standard Building Contract Guide (SBC/G)

5. Standard Building Sub-Contract Agreement (SBC Sub/A) 6. Standard Building Sub-Contract Conditions (SBC Sub/C)

7. Standard Building Sub-Contract withsub-contractor’s design Agreement (SBC Sub/D/A)

8. Standard Building Sub-Contract with sub-contractor’s design Conditions (SBC Sub/D/C)

9. Standard Building Sub-Contract Guide (SBC Sub/G)

10.Standard Building Contract with Quantities (SBC/Q) Tracked Change Document

11.Standard Building Contract without Quantities (SBC/XQ) Tracked Change Document

12.Standard Building Contract with Approximate Quantities (SBC/AQ) Tracked Change Document

13. Collateral Warranties for different types of Works, 2016.

 

 

5.6. International Chamber of Commerce (ICC)

The Commission on Commercial Law and Practice (CLP) (one of the Commissions of the ICC) based in Paris, France, has developed the ICC model contracts and ICC model clauses, which give parties a neutral framework for their contractual relationships. These contracts and clauses were carefully drafted by the experts of the CLP Commission without expressing a bias for any one legal system. The idea behind ICC model contracts and clauses is to provide a sound legal basis upon which parties to international contracts can quickly establish an even-handed agreement acceptable to both sides. The contracts are constructed to protect the interests of all parties, combining a single framework of rules with

 

 

12 Information can be accessed at: http://www.jctltd.co.uk

 

13 | P a g e

 

flexible provisions allowing the parties to insert their own requirements. Currently, the following ICC model contracts have been developed:13

 

1. ICC Model Turnkey Supply of an Industrial Plant Contract, 2003 2. ICC Model Turnkey Contract for Major Projects, 2007

2. ICC Model Sub-contract (for Turnkey Projects), 2011

 

 

 

5.7. Liaison Group of the European Mechanical, Electrical, Electronic and Metalworking Industries (ORGALIME)

ORGALIME publishes Model forms covering a wide range of issues including construction. In March 2003, the ORGALIME Turnkey Contract for Industrial Works was published. It is their most comprehensive contract publication on the subject. ORGALIME’s premise was that purchasers and contractors in the engineering sector, who had used existing models, had not found them as suitable for industrial works as for civil engineering contracts. In April 2015, it published the Model form of Consortium Agreement to be used where two or more companies agree to cooperate to tender and deliver a large industrial installation(s).14

 

5.8. ENAA the Engineering Advancement Association of Japan (ENAA)

ENAA is a non-profit organization established in 1978 with the support of the Ministry of International Trade & Industries Japan to promote the advancement of engineering capabilities and the development of the engineering service industry. A major feature of ENAA is the close cooperation it receives from its numerous member engineering firms which cover a broad spectrum of the industry.

 

ENAA publishes model contract form for international construction; these include International Contract for Process Plant construction (Turnkey Lump sum Basis),2010, the ENAA Model Form - International Contract for Power Plant Construction, 2012 and the ENAA Model Form-International Contract for Engineering, Procurement and Supply for Plant Construction, 2013.15 In preparing theseformsENAA pointto having engaged in substantial consultations.

 

6. Procurement/Project delivery Methods

You would have been introduced to this subject in Semester 1. This sub-section reiterates some of the issues discussed and serves as a reminder of the relevance of that content. Several factors may determine what type of contract form may be used on an international project. These include the procurement or delivery method and types of construction contracts (which invariably also reflect payment arrangements). There are different types of delivery methods suitable for international construction projects. These include the traditional design-bid-build method, design and build, management contracting and construction management. Others, often used on major projects, include prime contracting, alliancing,

 

13 https://iccwbo.org/resources-for-business/model-contracts-clauses/turnkey-transactions/ 14 For more information on the available contract forms, go to: https://licensing.orgalime.org/index.php/publications/en/

15 https://www.enaa.or.jp/EN/activities/model.html

14 | P a g e

 

partnering (though there remain some debate on whether partnering is a procurement method), Public-Private Partnerships (PPP), Build-Operate and Transfer (BOT) and Design – Build and Operate (DBO).16 The procurement option is also dictated by several factors including the nature of the project, the parties, the project location, and funding requirements.

 

Whatever the options may be, the choices parties make regarding the delivery method influences substantially the kind of contract form they will ultimately use. A close observation of the various forms reviewed will disclose that some of them are modelled on the various types of delivery methods outlined above. The JCT Suite of contract forms provides a good example of standard forms which have been fashioned to cater for most of these procurement/delivery options. The FIDIC Red Book, 1999 is said to be suitable for situations where the Employer or its representative is primarily responsible for the design of the project. In most instances where the Red Book will be used, the design is likely to be separated from construction. This reflects the traditional design-bid-build procurement method. Similarly, the Yellow Book is suitable for design and build projects, whilst the Silver Book is primarily suitable for turnkey projects.

 

Some of the standard forms make contract type primary distinguishing feature. Thus, a standard form may be more suitable for use where the proposed contract is a lump sum or fixed price, prime cost/cost plus or reimbursable contract, target cost contract or unit price. A good example here is the NEC3 Options A-F (see Section 5.2 above).

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

16 For more on these methods, see Klee, International Construction Contracts (Wiley Blackwell,2015) (available in the reading list/Library)

15 | P a g e

 

Topic 2: Introduction to FIDIC and the Old Books

 

 

Topic Preview

 

This topic will examine the history of FIDIC, introduce FIDIC contracts and examine key provisions of the fourth edition of the FIDIC Red Book, the old Yellow, and Orange Books.

 

Topic Content

 

1. A Brief history of FIDIC

FIDIC is a French language acronym for Federation Internationale des Ingenieurs Conseils, known in English as the International Federation of Consulting Engineers. It was started in 1913 by the trio of France, Belgium, and Switzerland. The United Kingdom joined the Federation in 1949. Primarily, FIDIC is the international federation of national associations of independent consulting engineers. It is head quartered in Switzerland and now boasts of about 100 member associations.1 These associations represent over a million engineering professionals working with about 40 000 firms worldwide. Then there are affiliate members, which are mainly corporate entities operating in many countries globally.2 The constituting national associations have expanded to also represent other groups of professionals including architects. The main objective of FIDIC is to promote the interest of consulting engineers worldwide. Over the years, FIDIC has become famous for its secondary activity of producing standard form contracts for the construction and engineering industry.

 

FIDIC published its first contract titled ‘Conditions of Contract (international) for works of Civil Engineering construction’ in 1957. As the title indicated, this first contract was aimed at the Civil Engineering sector and it soon became known as the ‘Red Book’, after the colour of its cover. It has become the tradition that FIDIC contracts are known in popular parlance by the colour of their cover.

 

This first contract by FIDIC was undertaken jointly with the then International Federation of Building and Public works.3 FIDIC’s concerted effort at achieving broad consultation and acceptance of its contract forms has seen subsequent editions of its contracts being ratified by the International Federation of Asian and Western Pacific Contractors Association, Associated GeneralContractorsofAmerica and theInter-AmericanFederationoftheConstructionIndustry, Multilateral Development Banks, amongst others. Because of the broad support it enjoys, FIDIC contracts are the foremost contracts in international construction.

 

2. FIDIC Contract Forms

Over the years FIDIC has consistently improved on its contracts. The organisation has added new forms of contract, replaced previous ones, and updated important terms in the ‘FIDIC family’ of contracts. We have previously encountered a list of all the contracts from 1999 to date – see pages 9&10 of the Topic 1 Notes. The table below identifies the pre-1999 FIDIC forms.

 

 

 

 

 

 

1 See https://fidic.org/membership/membership_associations 2 https://fidic.org/affiliates

3 Now known as the European Construction Industry Federation (FIEC): http://www.fiec.eu/

1 | P a g e

 

FIDIC Contract

Year Released

Notes

Conditions of Contract for Works of Civil Engineering Construction

 

- The (old) Red Book

Published in 1957. The 4th (final edition) was published in 1987. The 4th had a supplement added in 1996.

These contracts were aimed at the civil engineering sector as differentiated from the Mechanical/electrical engineering sector.

Conditions of Contract for Electrical and Mechanical Works

 

-The (old) Yellow Book

Published in 1967. The 3rd and last edition in 1987.

These contracts were aimed at the electromechanical construction sector.

Conditions of Contract for Design-Build and Turnkey

 

- The Orange Book

The first and only edition of this contract was released in 1995.

This was the first design and build contract released by FIDIC.

 

 

Apart from being a standard form contract and therefore sharing most of the advantages and disadvantages of such adhesion contracts, FIDIC contracts are distinct for several reasons. Some features of the contract forms are examined below.

 

3. General Features of FIDIC contracts

The FIDIC family covers a wide range of contracts. The following are some of the common features:

 

3.1. Presentation

Each of the FIDIC forms of contract consists of a group of documents namely: 1. General Conditions

2. Guidance on the preparation of the Particular Conditions 3. Forms of Tender

4. Contract Agreement

5. Dispute Adjudication Agreement

 

Our focus will be mainly on the General Conditions. FIDIC is usually presented in two parts. Part I consists of the General conditions and Part II is made of the Conditions of Particular Application. Part I contains the general terms of the contract. FIDIC intends that these terms will be common to all projects and parties. Such issues as rights and obligations of each party, procedure for payment, variation, certification, and dispute resolution are all provided for in Part I. It is hoped that the parties will use the Part II of the contract (Conditions of Particular Application) to introduce any qualifications or amendments to Part I provisions they have agreed to. They are also to use the Part II to insert terms to cater for the peculiarity of the project. Terms to be inserted by the parties in Part II include the language of the contract, choice of law, the name of the person or firm appointed to act as Engineer or Employers representative for the project among other terms.

 

 

 

2 | P a g e

 

In most FIDIC forms there is a default hierarchy for the documents forming the contract. The following are listed in the order of priority, such that, in the event of inconsistency the first on the list takes precedence:

1. The Contract Agreement

2. The Letter of Acceptance (this is the formal acceptance of the contractor’s tender and marks the formation of the contract)

3. The Letter of Tender.

4. Part II -The Conditions of particular application. 5. Part I - General conditions of contract

6. The Specification and Drawings (Red Book), the Employer’s Requirements (Yellow Book), the Schedules (Red and Yellow Books).

7. Further documents (if any), listed in the Contract Agreement or in the Letter of Acceptance.

 

The parties are allowed to rearrange the priority of documents or stipulate that no priority or order of hierarchy will apply to the contract. This can be done in Part II of the contract.

 

3.2. Dispute Resolution

FIDIC contract forms provide for a multi-tier dispute resolution process. The emphasis in recent years has been on the amicable settlement of disputes. The process usually provides as a first step, for disputes to be submitted for adjudication before an Engineer or a Dispute Board. If one (or both) of the parties is dissatisfied, a period is allowed for amicable settlement. If the parties are not able to settle the dispute during the ‘amicable settlement’ period, the final stage is to proceed to arbitration. FIDIC contracts provide as a default position that the arbitration rules of the International Chambers of Commerce should apply in the arbitration of disputes arising from the contract.

 

3.3. Bias for English Law

The first sets of FIDIC contracts were based on English law principles. This bias was so strong, that in commenting on the FIDIC Red book first edition, Ian Duncan Wallace QC put it lightly in this way:

“As a general comment, it is difficult to escape the conclusion that at least one primary object in preparing the present international contract was to depart as little as humanly possible from the English conditions.”

 

Since 1957, future FIDIC contracts have successfully incorporated the principles of other legal systems. However, the basic framework of English law principles has survived. For instance, provisions relating to liquidated damages have been maintained.

 

4. Why study (or use) the FIDIC family of contracts?

 

The FIDIC forms have a global reputation as standard forms of choice in engineering and construction fields. Anyone who has been involved with international construction projects would be familiar with at least one of the FIDIC forms, and for some, perhaps not in sufficient detail. Below are some reasons why studying the FIDIC forms is important:

 

4.1. The range of contracts.

FIDIC contracts are among the few standard forms that cover a wide range of activities and sectors relevant to international construction. Unlike some other international standard forms that are specialised and cover only specific project types, FIDIC forms are amendable to a wide range of sectors. So rather than being tied to the process industry or the power plant sectors, for instance, FIDIC covers these areas and others based either on the type of works (civil or mechanical) or on who bears the greater share of the design responsibility. The FIDIC suite provides a wide range of contracting options. These include options for Employer designed projects,Contractordesigned projectsandTurnkeyprojectswitha single pointofresponsibility. Recently, FIDIC has also made available a Design, Build and Operate contract.

 

3 | P a g e

 

4.2. Successful usage

Over the last sixty years, the FIDIC form has continuously been used for major international projects inall regionsof the world. It hasbeen endorsed and is used by mostleading Multilateral Lending institutions. It has also been interpreted into various languages including Arabic, Spanish and French to mention a few. Because of its wide usage, students currently involved in or who plan to be part of international construction projects will likely encounter the FIDIC form – in its pristine or modified form - during practice.

 

4.3. An International Benchmark

FIDIC contracts have become the benchmark for international standard forms. Other contract forms are analysed from their point of divergence from the FIDIC forms. A good understanding of FIDIC forms is therefore important in understanding other standard forms used in international construction. Additionally, at various times, FIDIC contracts formed part of or were the foundation for the public procurement and construction legislation of Oman, Saudi Arabia, Kuwait, and Romania (some of the legislations have since been changed or updated).

 

4.4. Certainty of terms

Because FIDIC is widely used, parties have relative confidence to predict the boundaries of their rights and the extent of their responsibilities. Over the years, clauses in FIDIC contracts have gained judicial notoriety in various jurisdictions, creating certainty around them. Even where this has not been the case, experience from previous projects gives each party a good understanding of the terms and reciprocal expectations created by the contracts.

 

4.5. Perception of fairness

FIDIC’s extensive consultation process ensures that its contract forms receive wide acceptance across different stakeholder groups in the industry. This reduces the incidence of protracted negotiations over accepting a FIDIC Contract as the applicable contract for a project. Also, the clauses in FIDIC contracts already go through extensive negotiations during the drafting process, therefore reducing considerably the need to renegotiate individual clauses. The forms are accepted as being fair in the most and parties are inclined to implement them with minimum resistance.

 

4.6. Flexibility

As can be deduced from the discussion above, the FIDIC forms are flexible and are created to allow for input by the parties. Given the distinct nature of construction projects, this feature of the FIDIC form has made it adaptable to different types of projects in different environments. Similarly, FIDIC’s well-defined dispute resolution process also speaks to the same idea of flexibility.

 

5. The FIDIC (old) Red Book, 4th edition

In 1987, FIDIC published the fourth and last edition of the old Red Book. This contract form or modified versions are still being used by some organisations for new projects in some parts of the world. Another important reason for the study of the old Red Book is to lay a good foundation for understanding the new suite of contracts released by FIDIC. The problems with the old Red Book are the ‘mischiefs’ that the new forms are created to correct. Each edition of new set of forms represents an improvement on the previous edition.

 

5.1. Background

The background under which the FIDIC Red Book 4th edition was published makes compelling literature. While the 3rd edition of the Red Book did revise in some significant manner the 2nd edition of the book, it left unchanged many salient points. For instance, the 3rd edition made no attempt to wean the FIDIC Red Book from its English law foundations. Despite this, the 3rd edition of the Red Book still was a particularly successful contract form. It was translated into German, French, and Spanish. Its use coincided with the World economic ‘reorganisation’ of

 

4 | P a g e

 

the 1970’s and it formed the basis of numerous successful projects in the Middle East. During the lateryears of the3rd edition ofthe RedBook, disputes between partieswere on the increase and the terms of the contract came under microscopic scrutiny. This revealed some problems with the contract form (3rd edition of the Red Book). In choosing which set of professionals to blame for this, Professor Nael Bunni noted as follows:

 

Criticism only came to surface in recent years when the number of disputes ending in arbitration grew and every clause and term in the Red book came under the scrutiny of lawyers experienced in discovering different interpretations to a set of words!”

 

While this fault placing is arguable, the fact that a review of the 3rd edition of FIDIC Red Book was due was not in dispute. In keeping with its tradition of updating its contract forms, FIDIC appointed a drafting committee in 1983.

 

A few other issues are worth noting about the period the draft was undertaken. The World Bank and other multilateral institutions had become major players in the international construction industry. As of 1987, the World Bank had grown its annual infrastructure expenditure to $25.57 billion from $8 billion a decade earlier. Much of the increased expenditure involved construction works in developing countries. The Bank had adopted the FIDIC Red Book as its preferred form for construction projects. This meant the importation of FIDIC concepts into countries with no equivalent principles. For instance, its concept of liquidated damage had no equivalent in the Islamic legal system. In reacting to this, one commentator observed:

 

“...on many occasions the intended aims of the FIDIC clauses supported by the English legal system and the UK construction industry practice may lead to a different result for the same FIDIC clause governed by Egyptian law or any other Arab country’s laws’’.4

 

5.2 Drafting of the Old Red Book

The 1983 drafting committee for the 4th edition of the Red Book had a balancing act on its hand because of the terms of reference assigned to it. The terms could be summarised as follows: (i) Change only where change was required; (ii) pay attention to specific topics that had increasingly become contentious; (iii) maintain the status of the consultant engineer; and (iv) make the language easier to understand and to administer at construction sites. The stakeholder groups consulted in the drafting process included:

 

1. FIDIC National Member Associations

2. European InternationalContractors (EIC) (representing the Confederation of International Contractors Associations (CICA). The EIC representatives were assisted by two groups from the Associated General Contractors of America (AGC)

3. Multilateral development banks

4. Gulf States represented by officials from the various Arab Funds 5. Insurers, brokers, and legal experts.

 

By the time the final draft of the contract was approved, each of the clauses had been redrafted twice, most went through more than four redrafts and one clause suffered through seventeen redrafts. The chairman of the drafting committee of the 1987 Red Book, Mr. Helge Sorensen, listed the broad achievements of that edition of the contract as follows: (i) Protecting and maintaining the FIDIC notion of the engineer; (ii) enhancing the role of the employer and getting it more involved in the project without eroding the sphere of influence of the Engineer; (iii) maintaining the balance of rights and obligations between parties to the contract without tilting the balance in favour of either party; (iv) spelling out in detail action and time oriented procedures in the light of (iii) above; (v) making efforts to synchronise the wording and

 

 

4 Hani Serie-Eldin, Operation of FIDIC Civil Engineering Conditions in Egypt and Other Arab Middle Eastern Countries, 28 INT’L LAW 951 (1994)

© Robert Gordon University: BSM 135                                                                                5 | P a g e

 

presentation of the Red book with the sister Yellow Book; and (vi) creating new provisions to deal with the reality of current international construction practice. The fourth edition of the Red Book was arranged in two parts (Part I and II), and it had 72 clauses.

 

5.3. Features, General Principles and Roles.

The following features and general principles underpin the FIDIC Red Book fourth edition:

 

5.3.1. Applicable in various legal systems

To ensure that the Red Book was applicable internationally, FIDIC inserted three important clauses relating to the law of the contract. The first is clause5.1 (b), which required the parties to choose the law to govern the contract and to insert this in Part II of the contract. The next is clause 26.1, which obliged the contractor to conform to the applicable national laws in performing his duties under the contract. This entails not only the laws of the country where the project is located but all countries where elements of the project are being constructed. The last but not the least, is clause 70, which recognised that changes in national laws do occur and provides for the contract to incorporate such changes into the cost of the project. These clauses allow the Red Book to fulfil its purpose irrespective of the laws applicable in a particular jurisdiction - civil, common or Islamic Law. It is important to note that the Red Book clauses relating to risk, liability and damages are all common law based. Therefore clauses 5, 26 and 70 are central in maintaining the international outlook of the contract.

 

5.3.2. It is a Re-measurement Contract

The FIDIC Red Book (4th Edition) was drafted originally as a re-measurement contract. In a re-measurement contract, procurement is based on quotations made by the Contractor to the bill of quantities prepared by the Employer’s agent or Engineer. Dividing the details of the design calculations, specifications and drawings into appropriate trades and activity creates a bill of quantity. The bill is further subdivided into different items with a brief description of what is required in each item. The contractor considers the items and quotes a unit price for each of the items on the bill of quantities. In doing this, the contractor is expected to add ‘mark-up’ rates and prices to cover the cost of mobilization, labour, plant, overheads, demobilization, and profit. The successful tenderer will have his payment calculated based on the bill of quantities. That is, if the payment is for laying blocks, the number of blocks laid is multiplied by the unit price quoted for laying one block. Therefore, the risk of the price of the contract lies with the Employer. This is because the quantity of materials used on the project could fluctuate. At completion, a re-measurement of the actual work done is undertaken and the final contract price is valued.

 

A 1995 supplement to the 4th edition of the Red Book created an option to proceed by way of lump sum contract. Here the contractor quotes the final price for the project in his tender. The risk of completing the job on the quoted prices (taking into consideration the changes that might occur in the quantity of materials used for the project) lies with the contractor.

 

5.3.3. Shared Risks

The FIDIC Red Book fourth edition was built on the principle of appropriately distributing the risks in the project among the parties. The risk of delay caused by the contractor, for instance, is borne by him by way of liquidated damages. The risk of a defective design by the Employer’s agent is borne by the Employer. The correction of such design defect will be termed a variation, entitling the Contractor to extension of time to complete the project and additional payment (where appropriate). In essence, the FIDIC Red Book was a balanced contract ensuring that the parties carry the responsibility and risk best suited to their rights and obligations.

 

5.3.4. Roles

There were three main entities playing key roles under the FIDIC Red Book fourth edition. These are the Employer, the Contractor, and the Engineer. The contract was between the Employer and Contractor but contained rights and responsibilities for the Engineer. It was

© Robert Gordon University: BSM 135                                                                                6 | P a g e

 

drafted originally as a re-measurement contract. The major roles under the contract mostly followed common practice but the role of the Engineer was peculiar to the form (and to the United Kingdom construction industry). Below is a brief description of the roles:

 

5.3.4.1. The Employer

This is the owner of the project and one of the parties to the Red Book contract. This may be a sovereign government department, an independent person, or a corporate entity. It is at the behest of the Employer that the work is carried out. His/its duties included appointing the Engineer, providing access to the site, paying for the work at agreed intervals among others.

 

5.3.4.2. The Contractor

The contractor is the company or organisation charged with carrying out the works. The contractor’s duty is to ensure that the work is carried out according to the instructions of the Employer.

 

5.3.4.3. The Engineer

The FIDIC Code of practice defined the consulting engineer as:

 

“...a professional engineer in private practice. He maintains his engineering office either alone or in association with other engineers. He employs the necessary staff to assist in carrying out the services which he provides. His organisation may be that of a sole proprietorship, a partnership or a company. This depends on the type and magnitude of his operations and the conditions of practice set by his national association. He must carry out his practice on a highly ethical and professional basis. The technical knowledge, experience and ability of the consultant, his associates and assistants must be fully adequate for the projects undertaken.”

 

In essence, FIDIC’s view of the consulting engineer is that it must be professional, independent, and competent. The Red Book 4th Edition required the Engineer to be impartial. The primary duty of the Engineer was to administer the construction contract on behalf of the Employer. Among other things, the Engineer was expected to conduct tests to ascertain the suitability and quality of works constructed by contractor and to issue certificates on which payments will be based. The Engineer also played a quasi-legal role. He was the first point for settling disputes between the Contractor and the Employer. Even where such disputes may have arisen from his/her action/inactions, the Engineer is expected to be impartial and to aim for a speedy resolution of the dispute(s). The Engineer was permitted to appoint representatives or assistants often referred to as the Engineer’s representatives. The duty of these assistants was to assist the Engineer to carry out the enormous responsibilities entrusted to him by the contract.

 

5.4. The Rights and Obligations of the Employer

It was the intention of the drafters of the FIDIC Red Book (4th Edition) to make the Employer more visible. Some of the responsibilities and rights of the Employer may be summarised as follows:

 

1. The Employer is to appoint the Engineer, and where appropriate provide him with the necessary approvals to carry out his work.

 

2. The Engineer is to consult with the Employer on issues specified by the contract and on any other issue that the Employer indicates in Part II that his approval is required.

 

3. The Engineer is also to consult with the Employer and contractor when deciding a dispute between the parties. In this regard, it is important that the Employer understands that the Engineer is enjoined to be impartial.

 

 

© Robert Gordon University: BSM 135                                                                                7 | P a g e

 

4. The Employer is entitled to receive copies of the decisions taken by the Engineer.

 

5. The Employer is to give possession of the site to the contractor and not to interfere with the works. The Employer is also to give instructions that are necessary for the progress of the work. This covers all areas of direct communication between the Employer and the Contractor, i.e., execution of the contract agreement, appointment of nominated sub-contractors etc.

 

6. The Employer is obliged to notify the Engineer of any decision he is dissatisfied with and to issue a notice of intention to commence arbitration.

 

7. The Employer is to make timely payments to the contractor with a corresponding right accruing to the contractor to terminate the agreement on grounds of non-payment. FIDIC 4th edition specifically created a 28-day timeline for interim payments and 56-day timeline after the final certificate has been issued for final payment.

 

8. The Employer is entitled to liquidated damages for delay caused by the contractor.

 

9. The Employer is entitled to be indemnified by the Contractor for patent rights used by the Contractor in the project and for any delict/tort caused by interference with traffic or damage to an adjoining property by the Contractor or his agents. There is also an indemnity to be provided by the Contractor in favour of the Employer, if the later fails to comply with relevant local laws.

 

 

5.5. The Obligations of the Engineer

Some of the functions of the engineer under the FIDIC Red Book fourth edition include:

 

1. The Engineer is to seek and obtained approval from the Employer before undertaking duties that such approval is a pre-requisite.

 

2. The Engineer is to consult with both parties before taking any decisions on matters where the contract so specifies. Although in consultation with the parties, the Engineer is to ensure that his/her decisions are fair and impartial.

 

3. It is also the duty of the Engineer to appoint an Engineer assistant(s) and delegate duties to her/them in writing as is appropriate.

 

4. It is the Engineer’s duty to inspect the works carried out by the contractor and determine whether the work meets the standard set by the contract. The Engineer is also to issue instructions where necessary and ensure that all defects are remedied.

 

5. It is the Engineers duty to indicate the form of programme of work to be submitted by the contractor and to accept the programme so prepared. It is also his duty to request for a revised programme (when necessary), and request for a general description of the arrangement of the works to be carried out.

 

6. The Engineer has the power to request the contractor to remove any person who is incompetent or negligent from the site.

 

7. In the event of damage or loss due to the Employers risk, it is the Engineers duty to indicate the extent of repairs required and the addition to time and contract price for such repairs after due consultation with the Employer.

 

8. It is the duty of the Engine e r to order variations to the project. No variation is to be carried

© Robert Gordon University: BSM 135                                                                                8 | P a g e

 

out except on the instructions of the Engineer.

 

9. It is the Engineer’s duty to set the tests to be carried out by the contractor to determine the suitability of materials used for the project and the suitability of the works.

 

10. It is the Engineers duty when the contractor gives notice of encountering obstructions and physical conditions which could not have been reasonably foreseen by an experienced contractor, to determine the extension in time and the addition in costs to be awarded to the contractor after due consultations with the parties and notifying the Employer.

 

11. It is the duty of the Engineer, to receive any dispute referred to him by the parties and to determine it within 84 days.

 

The Engineer is the heartbeat of the contract. The success of the relationship between the parties and the successful completion of the project is determined to a large extent on how well the Engineer performs his duties.

 

5.6. The Rights and Obligations of the Contractor

 

1. The main duty of the contractor is to complete the works with due diligence within the time contemplated by the contract.

 

2. The contractor’s main right is to receive payment for works according to the contract.

 

3. The contractor contracts to complete the works no matter the circumstance. The exceptions to this obligation are:

 

(a)     Where it is legally or physically impossible to complete. In most jurisdictions a distinction is made between situations that are merely difficult and those where it is impossible to complete.

(b)     When the work is suspended because of a default in payment by the employer and in the exercise of the contractor’s right to terminate.

(c)     Where the work is suspended by the Engineer under the various powers accorded him and where an instruction to resume is not communicated 84 days after the date of suspension.

(d)     Where any of the items listed under the employer’s risk events (e.g., wars, rebellion, natural disasters, riots etc.) disrupts the continuation of the project.

 

4. It is the duty of the contractor to source the security for performance of the contract (if required by the invitation to tender) within 28 days after the receipt of the Letter of Acceptance from the Employer.

 

5. It is the duty of the contractor to prepare and submit for the consent of the Engineer a programme for the execution of the works within a timescale to be set out in Part II of the contract.

 

6. It is the duty of the contractor to notify the Employer within 84 days of the commencement date of the contract that all insurance policies required to be taken out in accordance with the contract are in place.

 

7. The contractor’s duty of due diligence extends to the materials to be used in the construction, and it is to ensure they are of the quality appropriate for the works.

 

8. The contractor’s role also extends to carrying out the design of part of the works as specified

© Robert Gordon University: BSM 135                                                                                9 | P a g e

 

by the contract.

 

9. It is the duty of the contractor to secure a safe working area although this duty does not extend to cover the Employer and his work men.

 

10. In performing his/her/its obligations, the contractor needs to be particularly careful of section 47.1 of Part I of the FIDIC 4th edition. This section sets out a liquidated damage procedure against the contractor for delay in completing the project within the time contemplated by the contract.

 

For a complete overview of the roles and responsibilities of the stakeholders under the Red Book, fourth edition, please access the further reading section of this topic.

 

5.7. Selected Clauses

 

1. Variations

This is provided for under Clauses 51 and 52 of the FIDIC Red Book fourth edition. Clause 51 entitles the Engineer to give instructions for variations of any type relating to the form, quality, or quantity of the works. The contractor is obliged to increase or decrease the quantity of work in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer. The Contractor is also to omit any work as directed by the Engineer. The clause also provides that where an aspect of the works has been omitted on the instructions of the Engineer, it is not to be carried out by the Employer or another contractor.

 

In the FIDIC Red Book, 4th edition, variations entitle the contractor to payment at the rates determined under Clause 52. An exception to the rule that payment will be made for variations is where such variation is required because of the defects or default caused by the contractor. While the powers to order a variation seem limitless, under common law there is an implied term that one may not by variation procure a new contract for works.

 

2. Claims

Clause 53 sets out the procedure for the contractor to claim for additional payment. The contractor is to make his claims within 28 days after the event giving rise to his claim. Under the same Clause it is the duty of the contractor to keep records that are material (contemporary records) to the claim. Within 28 days or such other timeframe to be agreed to by the Engineer, the contractor is to furnish the Engineer with particulars of the claims and grounds upon which they are based. Payment for a claim certified as correct by the Engineer is to be included in the interim payments due under the contract.

 

3. Termination

The Employers right to terminate is set out in Clause 63. The Employer may terminate the contract after the expiry of a 14-day notice to the Contractor on the occurrence of any of the events listed below. The termination will not release the Contractor of his liabilities or obligations under the contract. The events are as follows:

 

(a)     The contractor goes into administration or liquidation and is unable to pay his debts.

(b)     The contractor repudiates the contract.

(c)     The contractor fails to commence work in accordance with the contract.

(d)     The contractor fails to proceed with works diligently and promptly within 28 days of receiving notice in accordance with clause 46.1.(This clause concerns the rate of progress of work and entitles the Engineer to issue a notice to the Contractor to increase the pace of work, where the contractor had been slow).

(e)     The contractor despite written warnings by the Engineer persistently refuses to

© Robert Gordon University: BSM 135                                                                             10 | P a g e

 

comply with its obligations under the contract.

(f)      The contractor subcontracts the whole of the works contrary to Clause 4.1.

 

 

The Engineer is authorised on such termination to determine the amounts due to the Contractor for work already done and/or for equipment used or partially used on the project. Payments of such amounts by the employer shall not be due until the expiration of the defects liability period and after that (where a defect has been identified) until any defects have been remedied.

 

The contractor’s right to terminate the contract is provided for in Clause 69. The clause empowers the contractor to terminate the contract for the following reasons:

 

(a)     Bankruptcy of the employer.

(b)     The failure of the Employer to pay the contractor within 28 days after the expiry of agreed timescales for payment under clause 60.10

(c)     Where the Employer gives notice to the contractor that due to unforeseen reasons including economic dislocation, he is unable to continue with the contract.

(d)     The Contractor also has a right to terminate where a suspension ordered by the Engineer has lasted longer than 84 days and the suspension is not due to one of the listed reasons in clause 40.1. In such circumstance, the Contractor is to follow the procedure set out in clause 40.3.

 

The Contractor’s termination would take effect after the expiration of a 14-day notice to terminate.

 

4. Dispute Resolution

The 4th edition of the Red Book has its dispute resolution procedure set out in Clause 67. The FIDIC Red Bookfourth edition removes the reference to the dispute being between the Engineer and the Contractor and clearly states that the dispute is between the parties. The steps set out by the clause are as follows:

 

(a)     The Engineer and the other party are to be notified in writing of a dispute requiring the Engineer’s decision.

(b)     The Engineer is to determine all disputes referred to him within 84 days after consulting with the parties. The Engineer is to communicate his decision in writing to the parties.

(c)     If the contract is current (that is, it has not been terminated or otherwise discontinued), the parties are to give effect to the Engineer’s decision until it is set aside either by mutual agreement of the parties or by a subsequent arbitral award.

(d)     Where either party is dissatisfied with the Engineers decision, a notice of intention to commence arbitrationshould be issuedwithin70daysofthe Engineersdecision.

(e)     Where the 70dayselapses,thedecisionofthe Engineerbecomesfinaland binding. This decision can be enforced by arbitration.

(f)      Where the Engineer has failed to determine the dispute after the expiration of the 84 days stipulated for him to do so, either party may within or on the 70th day after this period, serve a notice of intention to commence arbitration on the other party.

(g)     Parties are expected to use 54 days to attempt amicable resolution of the dispute. The arbitration would commence after the 54 days even though no attempt had been made by the parties at amicable resolution

 

 

© Robert Gordon University: BSM 135                                                                             11 | P a g e

 

The ICC rules of arbitration are adopted as the default arbitration rules for the contract. Parties may provide for alternative arbitration rules in Part II of the contract.

 

5.8. Changes from the third to fourth edition of the(old) Red Book.

To appreciate the trajectory of the development of the FIDIC forms, it is always useful to keep an eye on changes made at different stages of their development. The following are some of the changes introduced by the FIDIC fourth edition:

 

1. The contract introduced an important change in the power of the Employer to replace the Engineer under clause 1.1(a) (iv).

 

While earlier versions allowed the Employer wide discretion on the matter, the 4th edition provided that the Engineer appointed for the project would carry out his/her duties for the duration of the contract. The replacement of an Engineer once appointed could only be done with the consent of the Contractor. This was to ensure that the Engineer retained his independence and impartiality without the fear of being relieved of his duties. The guidance note justified this position by stating that the identity and reputation of the Engineer might have been a contributing factor in the contractor’s decision to tender for the project. This being so, the contractor was entitled to be taken into consideration before any changes is made to the position of the Engineer. Subsequent forms have made changes to this position.

 

2. Consents, approvals, certificates etc. to be given by the Employer, Engineer or Contractor or sub-contractor or Arbitrator are to be done in writing (clause 1 (1.5).

 

An instruction by the Engineer is also to be given in writing. Where instructions are given orally, the Contractor is expected to confirm such instructions in writing to the Engineer. Where this is not contradicted by the Engineer in writing within seven days, the instructions are deemed to be correct.

 

3. The requirement that the Engineer consults with the Employer before taking certain actions.

 

This is another important change. The list of actions includes instructing a variation, accepting a claim for additional costs among others. There is also provision to allow the Employer to specify additional areas that the Engineer should obtain his approval before acting. Where the Employer places such restrictions on the power of the Engineer, the contractor is not required to investigate whether such approval had been sought and granted. The contract deems that the exercise by the Engineer of a power covered by such restrictions is conclusive proof that the approval had been granted.

 

4. The introduction of an express term in Clause 2 (2.6) requiring the Engineer to act impartially.

 

This important change applies whenever the Engineer is deciding, expressing an opinion, consenting, approving, or taking any action that might affect the rights and obligations of the parties to the contract. While this was an implied term in some jurisdictions, FIDIC thought it wise to remove any doubts that may exist on the matter.

 

5. Removal of the word ‘international’ from the title

 

One important innovation in the FIDIC Red Book fourth edition is that the drafters dropped the word ‘international’ from the name of the contract. This was to emphasise that this FIDIC form was also suitable for domestic use.

 

6. Definition of cost

This was minor change. Profit was excluded from the definition of cost under the form.

© Robert Gordon University: BSM 135                                                                             12 | P a g e

 

6. Introduction to the Old Yellow Book

As stated under 5 above, the old Red Book was aimed at the civil engineering sector. Because of the differences between civil engineering and electrical/mechanical engineering (these differences will be considered below), it became necessary to create a contract form that suited electrical and mechanical engineering aspects of construction. The importance of this is further emphasised by the fact that most international projects usually combine aspects of civil engineering construction with electrical and mechanical works. The aim of FIDIC was to produce a contract form that would be compatible with the Red Book while also catering for the specific nature of E&M construction. To achieve this, FIDIC came up with the Conditions of Contract for Electrical and Mechanical Works, commonly known as the Yellow Book after the colour of its booklet. The first edition of the Yellow Book was produced in 1967, a 2nd edition in 1980 and then the 3rd and last edition in 1987. This study will concentrate on the 3rd edition of the Old Yellow Book.

 

6.1. Differences between Civil Construction                                                             and Electrical and Mechanical Construction

The philosophy of the Old Yellow book was rooted in the perceived differences between civil engineering construction works and the activities undertaken in an Electrical or Mechanical construction works. These differences include:

 

Nature of activities: Civil Engineering construction would usually require work on the site with heavy digging or some other activity related to the surface of the site being a prominent feature. In contrast, Electrical and Mechanical works begin before access to the site is sought and involves the supply and erection of specialist plant or machinery with a significant proportion of the works (design and fabrication) undertaken at the Contractor’s workshop.

 

 

Intellectual Property Risk: While this might exist on both types of works, it is a more usual and regular risk under Electrical and Mechanical construction. The component parts, the technology and other related outputs are usually all subject to patent rights.

 

Duration of the project: While the approximate minimum duration of an international civil construction project is four years with many lasting well over this minimum, the Electrical and Mechanical works have a shorter duration and may be completed before a project has been commissioned or alternatively may only be used towards the end of a project.

 

Tests: Because of the nature of Electrical and Mechanical engineering works, the Employer would require much more detailed and specific tests than is required for civil construction works.

 

Technology and changes: Equally important is the fact that some of the designs in Electrical and Mechanical works are technology driven and thus liable to change significantly at short notice.

 

The FIDIC Yellow Book 1987 was meant to address the risks and interests created due to the differences highlighted above.

 

6.2. Presentation and Clauses

In issuing the 3rd edition of the old Yellow Book, FIDIC had gathered the views of users on the performance of the 2nd edition in various projects. The preponderance of the views pointed to the need for a simpler and clearer text, adaptable to users in the different jurisdictions of the World. This is what FIDIC set to achieve in 3rd edition of the Yellow Book.

 

© Robert Gordon University: BSM 135                                                                             13 | P a g e

 

6.2.1. Presentation

The presentation of the 3rd edition of the Old Yellow Book followed the popular FIDIC two- part format namely General Conditions of Contract (Part I) and Particular Conditions of contract (Part II). Like the Red Book, Part 1 of the old Yellow Book contains the general terms of the contract that FIDIC believes should be applicable to all projects. These include such matters as duties of the parties, insurance, dispute resolution among others. However, unlike the Red Book, Part II is divided into A and B. Section A contains alternative terms to some of the clauses in Part I of the contract. Section B provides the space for the Parties to include any further specifications that they require. This should be used to provide terms to cater for the peculiarity of individual projects. The parties have the option of not completing Part II section A, in which case the clauses in Part I would apply.

 

6.2.2. Clauses and Terms

Since the aim was to achieve compatibility between the Red Book 4th Edition and the Yellow book 3rd Edition, there are similar terms in both contract forms. The areas of similarity include the presence of an Engineer under the same FIDIC concept of an independent Engineer. It also includes the requirement for the Engineer to obtain approval from the Employer and to consult with the parties for specified activities. The similarities extend to the restriction on the right of the Employer to replace the Engineer, this right being subject to the consent of the contractor and the requirement for written instructions; other similarities are the preference for the ICC arbitration rules among others. There are also many differences between the two forms, probably the most significant is that in the Yellow Book, it is expected that a significant portion of the design of the works will be undertaken by the contractor and not the Engineer. We will now examine the major clauses of the Yellow Book 1987 3rd Edition focusing on the areas of difference with the old Red Book.

 

6.2.3. Clauses

The Old Yellow Book 3rd edition dealt with the peculiar risks involved in Electrical and Mechanical construction by adopting different clauses than those used by the old Red Book. The more significant differences in the provisions include the following:

 

Clause 1- Commencement date: The commencement of works on an Electrical and Mechanical contract does not require access to the site. The definition of commencement date under the contract assumed five different options, these were:

 

(a)     the date specified in the preamble as the date for commencement of the works; or

(b)     the date when the contractor receives such payment in advance of the commencement of the works as may be specified in the terms of payment; or

(c)     the date when the contractor receives notice of the issue of any import license necessary for commencing performance of the contract; or

(d)     the date when the contractor receives notice that any legal requirements necessary for the contract to enter into force have been fulfilled; or

(e)     the date when the contractor receives notice that any necessary financial or administrative requirements specified in Part II as condition(s) precedent to commencement have been fulfilled.

 

The parties are required to choose the option that best fits the circumstance of their contract. Still under Clause 1, the definition of completion test envisaged for projects under the Old Yellow book are more comprehensive. This is explained in the context of the construction activities contemplated by the contract. The “finished construction product‟ would require sufficient test to ascertain quality and performance before being incorporated into a project. Clause 1.1.34 defines the test of completion as those tests specified in the contract. It is

 

© Robert Gordon University: BSM 135                                                                             14 | P a g e

 

expected that the parties would in Part II section B of the contract, set out the relevant tests applicable to their project.

 

Clause 2 - The replacement of the Engineer: The old Yellow book, like the Red Book, provides that the contractor’s consent would be required if the employer chooses to replace the Engineer.

 

Sub-clause 2.7 of the contract deals with claims by a contractor arising from a disagreement with the Engineer’s instruction or decision. This clause provides for the contractor to give a written notice within 28 days of the direction or decision made by the Engineer that it intends to contest. Notably, there is no similar provision for when an Employer wishes to dispute an engineer’s decision or direction. However, both parties do have the right to commence arbitration under Clause 50 (see clause 50 discussed below). On the receipt of the notice referred to above, the Engineer has a further 28 days to confirm, reverse, or vary the decision or instruction. Where the Contractor is still dissatisfied with the Engineer’s action after this further 28 days, and the matter cannot be settled amicably the procedure under clause 50 (discussed below), can then be adopted.

 

Clause 8 - Contractor’s obligation: The Old Yellow Book envisages that a significant portion of the design is undertaken by the contractor. The obligations of the contractor are divided into different headings as follows:

(a)     design

(b) manufacture (c) delivery to site

(d)     set out the works

(e)     tests and commission

(f)      timely completion as provided for in the contract.

 

 

Clause 27 (sub-clause 1 and 2): This provides an interesting alternative to the liquidated damages procedure. It provides that the Employer is entitled to reduce the contract sum at a specified percentage to be agreed by the parties for each day of delay by the contractor up to a maximum reduction stipulated in the contract. At that maximum, the employer is entitled to terminate the contract. This is qualified where it is argued that the Employer will not suffer loss because of the delay.

 

Clause 50 deals with dispute resolution: Unlike clause 2.7 discussed above, the clause refers to parties. This means that both the Employer and Contractor may commence the process of dispute resolution under this clause. In sharp contrast to the provision of the Red Book 4th edition, the Yellow Book 3rd edition does not provide for the Engineer to determine, at first instance, all disputes that may arise in the project; the parties may proceed straight to arbitration. However, for disputes arising from an Engineer’s decision or instruction, the parties are to commence arbitration within 56 days of the Engineer’s reply to the Contractor’s notice (under clause 2.7 discussed above). If the Engineer’s decision or instruction is not challenged within this timescale, it becomes final.

 

Under Clause 50 sub-clause 3, the performance of the contract continues during the pendency of the arbitral proceedings, unless the Employer suspends the works under his right to do so in the contract. In the same vein, all payments due the Contractor by the Employer are to proceed as usual during the arbitral process. Sub clause 4, also stipulates that at conclusion of the contract, if there are still disputes requiring arbitration, a formal notice of arbitration should be issued within 84 days of the issue of the final certificate of payment.

 

 

 

© Robert Gordon University: BSM 135                                                                             15 | P a g e

 

Finally, Clause 51 sets out the parties’ choice for the venue of arbitration, the applicable procedural law, and the language of arbitration etc. From the study of Arbitration Law in your first year, the importance of this clause should be apparent.

 

Officially, the Yellow Book, 3rd Edition was superseded by the Yellow Book, 1999, and now the Yellow Book 2017. Nevertheless, it is important to note the peculiarities of this form as this will help you appreciate how the Yellow Book has evolved over the years and provide better understanding of subsequent Yellow Books.

 

7. Introduction to the Orange Book First Edition.

 

7.1. Background

The Orange Book does not have the rich history of the other FIDIC books so far discussed. It has neither an old nor new version. The Orange book 1st edition (and only edition) was published in 1995 in response to market trends. Known as "Conditions of Contract for Design-Build and Turnkey‟, the Orange Book as is the tradition, derives its common name from the colour of the booklet. The foreword to the contract distinguished between Turnkey projects and design and build projects. The former refers to projects where the Contractor undertakes to design, construct, install fittings and deliver in a state that is ready for use at the turn of a key. Design and build on the other hand include a combination of the different processes required for the full design and construction of a project.

 

As indicated under Topic 1, Design and build and turnkey are procurement concepts which had gained some popularity in the 1980s. Their advent was borne out of the dissatisfaction of Employers with the traditional procurement method. In those early years however, they were adopted for very few projects, majority of which were projects that the Contractor either had a patent or some specialist skills.

 

The ‘design and build’ and ‘turnkey’ concepts appealed to Employers interested in securing certainty of price and less involvement in the design of a project. This type of construction procurement was also suited to the needs of private finance institutions. These institutions while looking for minimal direct involvement in the design and completion of a project required that it met pre-set standards. Theyalso wanted a single person or company to hold responsible on each contract (rather than responsibilities being shared by the Contractor and the Engineer-with incessant buck passing).

 

FIDIC were somewhat slow to respond to this market trend. It was apparent that FIDIC’s major forms (the Red Book 4th Edn. and the Yellow Book, 3rd Edn.) were unsuitable for this route of construction procurement. The first organisation to respond to this need was the Japanese Engineering Advancement Association (ENAA). ENAA started its process of consultation from 1986 and by 1992 had published its second volume of a standard form turnkey contract for international projects.

 

In 1992, the United Kingdom Institution of Civil Engineers published its version of a Design and Construct conditions of contract. This is a domestic form best suited for works within the United Kingdom. Also, to join the ‘fray’ was the German-based European International Contractors Association (EIC). In 1994, they published the EIC Turnkey Contract. The EIC form seems to have borrowed from the brevity of civil law contracts. It is perceived in some quarters that the EIC form was weighted in favour of the contractors since it was prepared by a contractors’ association.

 

It was in this context that FIDIC began consultations towards publishing the Orange Book. The Orange book released in 1995 announced itself as being suitable for design and build contracts and turnkey contracts. As would be expected from the underlying philosophy of the books, the Orange Book is significantly different from the Red and Yellow Books. For a start, FIDIC in the

© Robert Gordon University: BSM 135                                                                             16 | P a g e

 

OrangeBookdropped thedistinctionbetweencivilengineering and electrical/mechanicalworks and opted for a hybrid contract comprising of both types of activities.

 

7.2. FIDIC Orange Book 1st Edition- Presentation, Concepts and Clauses

 

Presentation

The Orange book follows the FIDIC format of a two-part contract with General Conditions in Part I and Conditions of Particular Application in Part II. The principle for this presentation remains the same. Part II is to be used by the parties to modify any parts of Part I and to insert any specifications peculiar to the contract.

 

Concepts

The principles underlying the Orange Book are different from the other FIDIC forms discussed so far. The Orange Book dropped the concept of the impartial Engineer and replaced him with an Employer’s Representative. The Employer’s representative has no quasi–judicial powers instead a Dispute Adjudication Board (DAB) is constituted to be the first stage of the dispute resolution process. The contract also adopts the fixed price payment option as against the re-measurement payment option used in other FIDIC forms. It places all design responsibilities on the contractor and requires him to create works to fit the Employer’s requirement. The Orange Book, however, adopts many of FIDIC’s tested concepts. It places a similar set of responsibilities on the Employer and shares the risk on the project as fairly as it is possible in a turnkey procurement.

 

Provisions

With the benefit of hindsight, the Orange Book laid the foundation for the change in philosophy and style that is evident in the 1999 suite of FIDIC contracts. Some of the provisions that set the Orange Book apart from the Old Red/Yellow Books include:

 

Clause 1: In the Orange Book, the concept of an ‘effective date of contract’ is introduced. Defined as the date the contract comes into ‘legal force and effect’. It is used as a guide in calculating various time limits including provision of performance security, appointment of members of the Dispute Adjudication Board amongst others. The guidance notes to the contract states that the date of entry into force of the contract is the date when the Employer acceptsthe Tender.Thiswould implythe date ofthe LetterofAcceptance.However,the parties are free to agree to any other date as the effective date of the contract including providing any condition precedent to be met prior to commencement.

 

The Orange Book places at the apex of the contract documents the Employers requirement document. The Employer’s requirement is defined as ‘the description of the scope, standard, design criteria (if any) and programme of work, as included in the Contract, and any alterations and modifications thereto in accordance with the Contract’. The Contractor's Tender (clause 1.6(d)), similarly occupies a prestigious position while the preliminary design included in the Contractor's Proposal (clause 1.6(h)) comes last after the Conditions of Particular Application – Part II and the General Conditions Part I.

 

Clause 2 sets out the obligations and rights of the Employer. This clause borrows the standard language of the other FIDIC forms obligating the Employer to, among other things, provide access to the Site, and pay the price of the contract. Sub-clause 1 deals with the right of access and sub clause 2 with possession of the Site, they obligate the Employer to assist the Contractor in applying for permits, licences, and approvals.

 

Importantly, under sub-clause 2.4, the Orange Book introduces the right of the Employer to terminate the contract at his convenience. The only restriction being that it may not terminate the contract to complete the works itself or employ another contractor to complete the works within a six-year period.

© Robert Gordon University: BSM 135                                                                             17 | P a g e

 

Clause 3 introduces the employer’s representative and places on him the responsibility of supervising and administering the works. It also places on the Representative (much like the Engineer in the Red/Yellow Book) the responsibility of obtaining permission from the Employer for certain matters and to transmit all copies of his instructions or decisions to the Employer. Clause 3.2 envisages a situation where the Employer’s Representative may not be a qualified construction professional and obligates him to appoint Engineers or other professionals to assist him.

 

Under Clause 3.5, which relates to adjustment of the Contract Price for Variations or claims, requires the Employer's Representative, failing an agreement by the parties, to make a fair and reasonable determination.

 

Clause 4 deals with the obligations of the Contractor. Clause4.1placesonthe Contractor the duty to meet the Employer's Requirements, including the performance of any work which is necessary, even beyond the letter and specifications of the Contract in order to allow the safe, reliable, and efficient operation of the Works. Clause 4.9 stipulates that the Contractor will be deemed to have checked and confirmed the accuracy of the site data provided by the Employer. To balance the risk on this point, the Orange Book places such acceptance of responsibility on the Contractor being reasonably permitted by time and cost to check the accuracy of the data at the Tender stage. Under Clause 4.11, the Contractor is not required to bear the risk of unforeseeable sub-surface conditions.

 

Clause 8 deals with extension of time and delay. In relation to extension of time, Clause 8.3 (e) and 8.4 stipulates that any delays caused by the Employer, or the Authorities should entitle the contractor to an extension of time. Clause 8.3 provides the procedure for the Contractor to claim for extension of time for delay caused by the Employer and requires the submission of “full supporting details”. Clause 8.5 of the Orange Book requires the Contractor to check that the rate of progress of the works matches the programme and in the event it does not, to inform the Employer's Representative of the measures he intends to take to bring the rate up to the requirements of the programme. This is to be done without prejudice to the liquidated damages for delay. Clause 8.6 deals with liquidated damages for delay which is to be calculated in accordance with the provisions of the Appendix to the Tender. Clause 8.8 providesthatcostswillbepaidtotheContractorwherethedelay hasbeencaused bya suspension of the works by the Employer.

 

Testing - Clause 9.4: Testing is an important part of the turnkey process. The Orange Book provides for a double test process,before and after completion. The first setof tests apparently corresponds to the erection and commissioning while the Tests after Completion (which are optional) are basically performance tests. Tests on Completion are provided for under clause 9.4; this clause gives the Employer the right to terminate the Contract for repeated failure to pass these tests.

 

Clause 10.2 deems that a Taking-Over Certificate has been automatically issued in the event that the Employer uses any part of the Works before all relevant tests have been carried out. The performance tests option, if chosen by the parties, is of critical importance. These tests will be used to determine if the Employer's Requirements have been met. This is particularly important in the light of the significant penalties that may be imposed for sub-standard performance under clause 11.4 (b). This clause links not passing these set of tests with liability to pay liquidated damages.

 

Clause 14 deals with the often-vexed issue of variations. Sub-clause 14.1 allows alterations to the document called Employers Requirement (defined above). By implication, the Employer’s right to request variations at any time during the Contract Period (clause 14.1) is virtually unlimited. It has been argued that this is unsuitable for this type of contract. Clause

© Robert Gordon University: BSM 135                                                                             18 | P a g e

 

14.2 allows the Contractor the use of the Variation procedure to suggest required improvements including those which improve the operation of the Works or reduce the cost of construction.

 

The Orange Book does not prescribe the means for calculation of the adjustments to the Contract Price on account of Variations. The only important direction is under Clause 14.3 which provides that it should include profit and the provision under Clause 3.5 that obligates the Employer’s Representative to be fair and reasonable when deciding issues on variation.

 

Clause 15 deals with the breach of the terms of the contract by the Employer. It follows on from previous FIDIC forms. Clause 15.1 and 2 requires that the Contractor should be notified of the breach and provided an opportunity to remedy same within a reasonable time before the sanction of termination can apply.

 

The Contractor may suspend further work under clause 16.1 where payments that are due and are not in dispute are withheld. The right to terminate for non-payment is provided for under clause 16.2. Interestingly, this is not dependent on a prior period of suspension. However, the clause requires a 14 days’ notice after payment has been delayed for 42 days. The right to terminate for breach by the Employer, where the employer consistently fails to meet his obligation under the contract is provided for under clause 16.2. In the event of termination for the default of the Employer, the Contractor is entitled to compensation for both direct loss, and loss of profit.

 

Clause 20 Dispute Resolution: Probably the most significant change of all is contained in Clause 20. By contrast to other FIDIC forms, the claims clause is included under the same title as disputes and arbitration. As noted above, the real innovation of the Orange Book is the creation of the Dispute Adjudication Board (DAB). The board is appointed for the duration of the project. The DAB is required to respond with a reasoned decision, whatever the nature of the claim, within 42 days.

 

Clause 20.4 stipulates that the members of the Board are required to act as experts and not arbitrators. Under Clause 20.4 the Board's decision will be binding unless one of the parties gives notice of its dissatisfaction within a 28-day period. Even then, it remains unless and until it is modified by amicable settlement or an arbitral award.

 

Clause 20.6 provides that the arbitrators should have full power to review and revise any decision of the Board and that both parties shall be free to rely on any new evidence or argument they choose to overturn a decision of the Board and shall not be limited by the arguments previously advanced before the Board itself. The procedure for amicable settlement prior to arbitration is provided under clause 20.5, it is not particularly exacting and failure by a party to participate will not prevent it initiating arbitration proceedings.

 

Officially, the FIDIC Orange Book has been superseded the 1999 and 2017 editions of the Yellow Book and the Silver Book. It is obvious from the discussion above (e.g., on the DABs) that understanding of this Book will enhance your knowledge and understanding of several concepts and how they have developed over a period to date. You also need to bear in mind that some of these old FIDIC forms are still in use in some regions of the world.

 

Introduction of Dispute Adjudication Boards:

In 1996, a supplement was issued for the Red Book 4th edition which provided for a Dispute Adjudication Board of either one or three persons. This was after the concept had made its way into the Orange Book in the previous year. The subject of Dispute Adjudication Boards will be considered critically both under Weeks 3 and 7.

 

6. Conclusion

© Robert Gordon University: BSM 135                                                                             19 | P a g e

 

FIDIC has over the years grown its suite of international construction contract forms and by so doing has extended its influence globally. The study of the pre-1999 FIDIC Red, Yellow and Orange Books are necessary for two reasons: Firstly, these Books provide the relevant background to the evolution of relatively recent forms. Secondly, unlike statutes/legislation, old FIDIC standard forms do not necessarily become irrelevant with the introduction of new forms; parties in different parts of the world still make use of these forms in a variety of ways. With this background, we are ready to examine the 1999 Edition of the FIDIC Contract forms in the next lecture.

 

 

 

Further Reading

 

 

1. Bunni, Nael G, The FIDIC forms of contract [electronic resource]: the fourth edition of the Red Book, 1992, the 1996 Supplement, the 1999 Red Book, the 1999 Yellow Book, the 1999 Silver Book (Blackwell 2005): Specifically, Part IV- Other Documents Related to the Red Book. (Electronic copy of this material and other relevant materials are accessiblefromtheRGU Librarythrough theASPIREliston theMoodlepageoftheModule). Please note that electronic copies of the old Yellow and Orange Books are not available in the RGU Library. However, information on the relevant clauses has been provided in sufficient detail in this lecture note and in Prof. Bunni’s book

2. Bunni, Nael G, The FIDIC forms of contract: the fourth edition of the Red Book, 1992, the 1996 Supplement, the 1999 Red Book, the 1999 Yellow Book, the 1999 Silver Book (Blackwell 2005) (Part III- The Fourth Edition in Practice.

 

3. Christopher R. Seppala, Contractor's claims under the FIDIC civil engineering contract, Fourth (1987) Edition, International Business Journal, 1997.

 

4. Fritz Nicklish, “The Role of the Engineer as Contract Administrator and Quasi-Arbitrator in International Construction and Civil Engineering Projects”, International Construction Law Review, Vol. 7, Part 3, pp. 322-338.

 

7. (Electronic copies of these materials and other relevant materials are accessible from the RGU Library through the Reading List on the Moodle.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

© Robert Gordon University: BSM 135                                                                             20 | P a g e

 

International Construction contracts                                                                                Topic 3 Part 1: The 1999 FIDIC contracts (Red and Yellow

 

 

 

Topic 3: The 1999 Red and Yellow Books (Part 1)

 

 

 

Topic Preview

 

This is the first of two topics dealing with the FIDIC 1999 suite of contracts. This topic will provide an overview of the 1999 Red and Yellow Books. It will briefly look at the underpinning concepts, examine how the provisions are presented and consider some of the key provisions of the two books.

 

Topic Content

 

1. Introduction

 

In 1994, FIDIC appointed a group within its contracts committee to update the FIDIC Red Book 4th edition and the FIDIC Yellow Book 3rd edition. The mandate of the group was later extended to include a further book that would be used for privately financed projects and for large projects employing the design and build procurement route.

 

In performing its duties, the task group among other things, commissioned Reading University in the United Kingdom to carry out a survey on the use of FIDIC contracts in projects. The survey was to identify the main areas of difficulties encountered by users of the form. The survey process involved the distribution of questionnaires to various construction stakeholders (contractors, employers, lending institutions) around the world. The group also studied other forms of contract by other organisations to determine whether corresponding FIDIC forms were lacking in some material respect.

 

The survey and studies threw up some issues of note. Prominent among them was the role of the Engineer in FIDIC contracts. The phenomenon of an Engineer who is paid by one of the partiesbut required to be impartial in disputes concerning that party continued to attract diverse opinions. Another recurrent area of concern was the need tomakethe contracts simpler to understand and easier to administer in practice. The task group drafted the 1999 forms to meet these, and many other concerns expressed by different users of the FIDIC forms. The current suite of contracts is marketed as being practical contracts, with common sense clauses incorporating the best in engineering practice.

 

 

2. The 1999 Contract Forms

 

After much deliberation, the FIDIC contracts committee opted not to update the contract forms under review (the Red Book, 4th edition and the Yellow Book, 3rd edition) but to discontinue with those forms entirely. The committee chose to release new forms of contract to replace the discontinued contract forms.

 

 

The four new contracts released by the committee were:

 

International Construction contracts                                                                                Topic 3 Part 1: The 1999 FIDIC contracts (Red and Yellow

 

(a)     The 1999 Red Book 1st edition: Conditions of Contract for Building and Engineering Works, Designed by the Employer.

(b)     The 1999 Yellow Book 1st edition: Conditions of Contract for Electrical and Mechanical Plant, and for Building and Engineering Works, Designed by the Contractor.

(c)     The Silver Book: Conditions of Contract for EPC and Turnkey Projects.

(d)     Green Book (Short Form of Contract).

 

FIDIC has, in subsequent years, released other forms modelled on the concepts underpinning the 1999 books – these were outlined in the Topic 1 Lecture notes.

 

 

3. Presentation and Concept

 

3.1.    Presentation

The 1999 forms listed above, generally maintain the two-part presentation of FIDIC contracts.

 

Part I - Conditions of General Application.

Covering matters such as the rights and the duties of the employer; the rights and duties of the contractor and the dispute resolution process amongst others.

 

Part II - Conditions of Particular Application.

This is to be used by the parties to set out qualifications to specific clauses in Part I and any other conditions of contract peculiar to the project. It is FIDIC’s recommendation that parties should use Part II to amend the contracts rather than delete or alter sections in Part I.

 

The 1999 forms are organised into clauses covering specific subjects and they each have 20 clauses. For user friendliness and uniformity, the forms have similar clauses and contain similar wordings except for where the differences in the purpose of the contracts require that different clauses/terms be used. In general, the 1999 forms are more organised and detailed than previous FIDIC forms. It is easier to locate the rights and obligations of each stakeholder in the contracts by referring to the specific section concerned with that stakeholder.

 

 

3.2. Concept

The 1999 forms are nearer to the Orange Book in concept than the pre-1999 Yellow and Red Books. In the 1999 suite, FIDIC jettisoned the distinction between civil engineering works and electrical and mechanical works and adopted the responsibility for design as the distinguishing factor.

 

 

•     The 1999 Red Book is for projects designed by the Employer •     The 1999 Yellow Book is for projects designed by the Contractor.

 

The concept of the impartial Engineer is also dropped by FIDIC in the 1999 suite. In this suite the Engineer acts on the Employer’s behalf and where the Engineer

 

International Construction contracts                                                                Topic 3 Part 1: The 1999 FIDIC contracts (Red and Yellow is required to take any decision, he/she is obliged to consult with the parties in an attempt to reach a common agreement, and in the absence of such consensus, to determine the matter fairly. In the Silver Book, the Engineer’s role completely disappears.

 

With regards to Dispute Resolution, the Dispute Adjudication Board (DAB) (introduced later in this module) becomes the preferred method of dispute settlement. Despite the wholesale changes in the concept of the 1999 forms, FIDIC successfully maintained the overriding principle of fairness in the contracts. It ensured that both parties shared the liability and risks and had commensurate benefits accruing to them.

 

 

4. The Red Book, 1999

 

4.1. Overview

The Conditions of Contract for Building and Engineering Works, designed by the Employer is commonly called the 1999 Red Book. It replaced the old Red Book 4th edition issued in 1987. It is the contract form for projects where the Employer takes responsibility for the design of the project. While this contract makes provision for the contractor to design certain aspects of the project, it is intended by the drafters that much of the design will be completed by the Employer who would usually use his professional consultants.

 

Although the 1999 Red Book is not a direct update of the Old Red Book, it adopts the main framework of the latter. Essentially, it is a Contract between the Employer and the Contractor for the construction of works under the supervision of the Engineer, who also administers the contract. Some of the provisions of the old Red Book are continued in the 1999 contract. For instance, the requirement that all instructions or directions by the Engineer are to be in writing is preserved. The rule requiring the Contractor to comply with the applicable law is also maintained.

 

The discussion on the provisions of the 1999 Red Book will focus on the major changes made by FIDIC in the contract when compared to previous editions. Some of the main clauses distinguishing the 1999 Red Book from previous FIDIC forms are set out below. Emphasis has been placed on the moresignificant terms:

 

Clause 1

 

This covers the definition of terms and related preliminary issues. Some of the important additions to this include:

 

Subclause 1.1.2.4

 

Defines the Engineer as the person appointed by the Employer as an Engineer and named in the Appendix to Tender. The Engineer is also defined as any other person appointed ‘from time to time’ by the Employer. The clause refers to Clause 3.4 which contains the new procedure for the replacement of the Engineer. This definition marks the end of the era of the ‘permanent’ engineer that was started in the Red Book 4th edition.

 

International Construction contracts                                                                                Topic 3 Part 1: The 1999 FIDIC contracts (Red and Yellow

Subclause 1.1.6.8

Defines ‘unforeseeable’ as any conditions not reasonably foreseeable by an experienced contractor by the date of the submission of the tender. What may or may not be foreseeable can be a contentious matter. See e.g., the Court of Appeal decision in Obrascon Huarte Lain SA v Attorney General for Gibraltar [2015] EWCA Civ 712.

 

Subclause 1.12

 

Obliges the Contractor to disclose to the Engineer all information required to satisfy the Engineer of the Contractor’s compliance with the contract. Such information may include confidential information.

 

Clause 2

 

This clause relates to the Employer. It enumerates the usual duties of an Employer i.e., duties to give access to the site and use ‘reasonable’ efforts to assist the Contractor in obtaining permits, licenses, or approvals according to the applicable law.

 

Under Subclause 2.1, where due to the fault of the Employer, the Contractor suffers delays and or costs in gaining possession/access to the site, the Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of time for that delay and payment for the costs incurred including reasonable profit. For the Contractor to enjoy these rights, it is required to serve notice on the Engineer in accordance with the requirements of Clause 20. The subclause also provides information on what happens after notice is served – the Engineer is required to proceed to determine the claim under Clause 3.5.

 

There are two important innovations under Clause 2. These are found in subclause 2.4 and 2.5.

 

Subclause 2.4

Requires the Employer to submit to the contractor reasonable evidence of his financial arrangements to pay the contract price. This requirement is to be completed within 28 days from the date of request for such evidence by the Contractor. It also obligates him to inform the Contractor of any material changes in his financial position that may occur from time to time. This provision has been the subject–matter of a decision by the Privy Council in the case of NH International (Caribbean) Limited v National Insurance Property Development Company Limited (Trinidad and Tobago) [2015] UKPC 37. It will certainly be useful to spend some time to digest this decision and its implications for the interpretation of this clause.

 

Subclause 2.5

This clause sets up the specific procedure to be followed by Employers when making claims against Contractors. The clause prevents the Employer from setting off any payment due the Contractor without following the Employer claims procedure. The procedure requires the Employer to give notice to the Contractor

 

International Construction contracts                                                                Topic 3 Part 1: The 1999 FIDIC contracts (Red and Yellow of his claim and to provide particulars of the claims to the Contractor as soon as practicable. The particulars are to include the basis of the claim and substantiation of the amount. Payments due for Electricity, Water and Gas consumed under Subclause4.19, for Employer’s equipment and free issue material under subclause 4.20 and other services are not subject to notice requirement under this subclause.

 

 

Following notification to the Employer, the Engineer should then proceed in accordance with subclause 3.5 to obtain an agreement from the parties or to determine:

 

(a)     The amount (if any) which the Employer is entitled to be paid by the Contractor, and/or

(b)     The extension (if any) of the Defect Notification Period in accordance with subclause 11.3.

 

The last paragraph of subclause 2.5 provides as follows:

 

This amount may be included as a deduction in the Contract Price and Payment Certificate. The Employer shall only be entitled to set off against or make any deduction from an amount certified in a payment certificate or to otherwise claim against the contractor, in accordance with thissubclause.

 

The import of this provision is that Employers cannot make deductions, set-off or withhold payments certified as due to the contractor unless same is done pursuant to the procedure set out under this subclause. In the NH International (Caribbean) Limited case, Mendoca JA, in the Court of Appeal of the Republic of Trinidad and Tobago, had argued that whilst the clause prevents the Employer from setting off any amount certified under a payment certificate, the provision did not preclude the Employer from exercising the right to set-off against amounts not certified. However, the Privy Council disagreed with this interpretation of the subclause and, as part of its discussion of the provision, set out the essence of the Subclause as a whole as follows:

 

 

More generally, it seems to the Board [the Privy Council] that the structure of clause 2.5 is such that it applies to any claims which the Employer wishes to raise. First, “any payment under any clause of these Conditions or otherwise in connection with the Contract” are words of very wide scope indeed. Secondly, the clause makes it clear that, if the Employer wishes to raise such a claim, it must do so promptly and in a particularised form: that seems to follow from the linking of the Engineer's role to the notice and particulars. Thirdly, the purpose of the final part of the clause is to emphasise that, where the Employer has failed to raise a claim as required by the earlier part of the clause, the back door of set-off or cross-claims is as firmly shut to it as the front door of an originating claim.

 

International Construction contracts                                                                Topic 3 Part 1: The 1999 FIDIC contracts (Red and Yellow Clause 3

 

This relates to the Engineer.

 

Subclause 3.1

This specifically provides that the Engineer, except where provided for in contract, shall be deemed to act for the Employer. The clause also provides that any restrictions on the power of the Engineer must clearly be specified in Part II of the contract. This would include requirements to obtain approval prior to taking some actions. The inclusion of specific limits on the power of the Engineer in Part II of the contract is to serve as sufficient notice to the Contractor, of the extent and limit of the Engineers powers. The clause also restricts the Employer from unilaterally placing any further restrictions on the power/role of the Engineer.

 

Subclause 3.4

This provides for the ‘Replacement of the Engineer’. The new provision requires the Employer to inform the Contractor 42 days before the appointment of a new Engineer. The Employer is to furnish the Contractor with the particulars of the intended replacement. The Employer is obligated not to replace the Engineer with a person who the Contractor has reasonable objections to, where such objections are supported with relevant particulars. From our earlier discussions on this subject in the forum in relation to the old FIDIC Red Book, 4th Edition, it is fairly obvious that this provision represents a modification of the position on the Employer’s ability to replace the Engineer under the old book.

 

Subclause 3.5

This clause deals with the Engineer’s power to determine certain issues that may arise during the contract. The clause requires that the Engineer should consult with the parties towards reaching an agreement on the issue for which determination is sought. Where the attempt to reach an agreement fails, the Engineer is to determine the matter fairly.                                        Such decision is to take into consideration all the circumstances of the issue which is the subject for determination and the relevant terms of the contract. It is important to note that in most jurisdictions, the requirement to determine a matter ‘fairly’ would require the Engineer to be impartial when making his decision.

 

Clause 4

 

This deals with the Contractor. The responsibilities of the Contractor follow previous forms. In summary, it is the Contractor’s duty to design any aspects of the works to the extent specified in the contract (the contractors design responsibility should be relatively less than the Employers design responsibility when using the Red Book); his primary duty is to execute and complete the works as required by the contract and in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer. The Contractor is also expected to remedy all defects in the works before handing it over to the Employer. There are, however, some important innovations in the 1999 Red Book, these are:

 

Subclause 4.1(c)

Thissubclauseprovides that where the Contractor is required todesign any section of the works, it is expected that his design shall meet the standard of being fit for

 

International Construction contracts                                                                Topic 3 Part 1: The 1999 FIDIC contracts (Red and Yellow purpose. This standard is higher than the more usual standard of applying due professional care and diligence.

 

Subclause 4.2

This requires the Contractor to provide a performance security to the Employer within 28 days from the date of receiving the letter of Acceptance. The amount and currency of the performancesecurity is to be stated in the Appendix to Tender. The security is to remain valid until all defects in the works have been remedied.

 

The subclause sets out the specific circumstances under which the Employer may make a claim under the performance security. These include the failure of the contractor to extend the validity of security to cover the periods indicated in the clause, failure by the Contractor to remedy a defect within 42 days of notice to do so, failure to pay sums due to the employer as determined under clause 20.1, or actions that entitle the Employer to terminate under subclause 15.2

 

 

Subclause 4.12

This provides for unforeseeable physical conditions. This is defined as physical or manmade obstructions, including pollutants, surface and hydrological conditions but excludes climatic change. The important factor is that the condition complained of must be one that an experienced contractor would not have anticipated at the time of tender. Under this clause, the Contractor is to inform the Engineer as soon as practicable if any such conditions have occurred. The notice to the Engineer is expected to contain sufficient informationon the condition and should also set out the reasons for the Contractor characterizing the condition as being ‘unforeseeable’.

 

The most important innovation under this clause is that in determining the issue of additional cost due to the occurrence of an unforeseeable physical condition, the Engineer is allowed to take into consideration the existenceofother favourable physical conditions in other areas of the works, which may not have been anticipated at the time of the tender.

 

Another innovation in subclause 4.21 is that it requires that the Contractor produces monthly progress reports, except otherwise stated in Part II of the contract. The report is to be submitted in six copies.

 

Please note that subclause 14.3 incorporates the submission of the monthly progress reports to the Engineer into the process of applying for interim payment by the contractor. It makes the submission of such report a condition for a successful application for interim payment by the contractor.

 

Clause 8

 

This is concerned with commencement, delays, and suspension of the works. The clause follows previous FIDIC forms; it provides that the works is to commence within 42 days after the Contractor receives the Letter of Acceptance except where otherwise agreed by the parties.

 

Subclause 8.3

 

International Construction contracts                                                                Topic 3 Part 1: The 1999 FIDIC contracts (Red and Yellow Subclause 8.3 introduces the duty of the Contractor to submit to the Engineer a detailed programme within 28 days of commencement of works. The programme is to set out the methods to be used in constructing the project, the sequence of construction activity and the timing of such activities among other technical information.

 

A revised programme is to be issued where actual works on the project is inconsistent with theprogramme or the programme becomes inconsistent with the contractor’s obligations. After 21 days of the submission of the programme to the Engineer by the Contractor, if there is no objection from the Engineer to the programme, the contractor is to commenceconstruction based on the programme.

 

Subclause 8.4

This clause deals with extension of time. It provides that where the time for completion of the works as defined under subclause 8.2 is to be delayed for any of the causes stated in the clause (these include variations, exceptionally harsh climatic conditions, any delay, impediment or prevention caused by the Employer, unforeseeable shortages in goods or manpower due to epidemic or government action) the contractor shall be entitled to extension under the procedure set out in subclause 20.1

 

Under clause 8.4 when deciding on the Contractors application for extension of time, the Engineer is obliged to consider the circumstances and to previous decisions. The Engineer is allowed to increase but not to decrease, the total extension of time already given.

 

Subclause 8.7

This deals with delay damages (liquidated damages). It states that if the Contractor fails to comply with Subclause 8(2) [Time for completion] the contractor shall subject to clause 2.5 [Employer’s claim] pay delay damages to the Employer for this default. In J Murphy and Sons Ltd v Beckton Energy Ltd [2016] EWHC 607 (TCC), where subclause 8.7 was amended to take away the requirement to comply with subclause 2.5, the court held that the call of a performance bond in respect of a claim for liquidated damages without a prior determination of damages by the Engineer was appropriate. The sum of the delay damage is to be set out in the Appendix to Tender. The contractor becomes liable to pay the delay damage upon failure to meet the time for completion of the contract as stated in subclause 8.2. It is important to bear in mind that the validity or otherwise of the liquidated damages could be a contentious subject. In such a case, the position of the governing law on the subject may apply. Under English law, valid liquidated damages must not be out of all proportions to the legitimate interest of the innocent party - See the Supreme Court decision in Cavendish Square Holding BV v El Makdessi and Parking Eye Ltd v Beavis [2015] UKSC67. See also Dunlop v New Garage and Motor Co. Ltd [1915] AC 79

 

Subclause 8.8

This deals with suspension of works. Under this clause the Engineer may instruct the Contractor to suspend progress of part or all the works. Where due to such suspension the Contractor suffers delay/cost, the Contractor will be entitled to

 

International Construction contracts                                                                Topic 3 Part 1: The 1999 FIDIC contracts (Red and Yellow reimbursement and/or extension of time. Subclause 8.11 sets out the Contractors rights where such suspension remains in force for more than 84 days.

 

Clause 11

 

This deals with defects liability. The major change here is that under subclause 11.3 the Employer is entitled (subject to subclause 2.5, Employers claims) to extend the defects liability period for up to two years. This entitlement will occur where the works or sections of it cannot be used for the purposes they were intended because of a defect or damage for which the Contractor is responsible.

 

Clause 12

 

This deals with measurement of the works and retains the basic character of the Red Book as a re-measurement contract. However, it anticipates that the measurement of the work may be undertaken using other schedules. This creates the opportunity for fixed price payment under the contract.

 

Clause 13

 

This deals with variation of the works and retains the wide powers of the Engineer to order a variation. A contractor is bound by the variation instruction except he informs the Engineer along with supporting documents that he is unable to obtain the goods needed to execute the variation. On such information, the Engineer may vary, cancel, or confirm the variation. The clause also enjoins the Contractor not to make any alterations without the instructions of the Engineer.

 

Clause 13.2

This provides for value engineering, and permits the Contractor at his cost, to prepare a written proposal setting out how the works may be accelerated, how cost of the project could be reduced or how enhanced value could be added to the project. Where such proposal is adopted, the Contractor would be entitled to a fee.

 

Clause 14

 

This deals with payment. The mechanism of payment still remains the application for interim payment certificate. One notable difference is that under the 1999 Red Book, the Employer is required to pay the amount certified in any interim payment certificate within 56 days. The Red Book 4th edition had stipulated 28 days. However, Bunni notes that the change may not be as significant as it looks at first consideration. This is so because under the Red Book 4th edition the 28 days for payment were to be preceded by another 28 days within which the Engineer was to issue an interim certificate after receiving the Contractor’s statement. As there is no extra 28-day period for the Engineer after the receipt of the Contractors statement under the 1999 Red Book, the time scales provided for payment are similar.

 

Another important innovation is under subclause 14.8; this entitles the Contractor to recover Finance charges incurred due to the failure of the Employer to make prompt payments.

 

Clause 15

 

International Construction contracts                                                                Topic 3 Part 1: The 1999 FIDIC contracts (Red and Yellow This is concerned with the right to terminate by the Employer and the Contractor. The Employer can terminate the contract for the failure of the Contractor to perform his obligations under the contract. Reasonable notice to make good such default is required and the right to terminate only occurs when such notice has not been complied with. The Employers termination takes effect 14 days after the notice of intention to terminate has been issued to the Contractor but could be immediate where the Contractor has become bankrupt or is involved in acts of bribery and corruption. Also note that under Clause 15(5), the Employer can terminate the contract without cause. The subclause places some limitations on the rights of the Employer to carry out the works itself after such termination. It will be helpful to familiarise yourself with the concept of termination generally both at common law and under the FIDIC Contractual provisions.

 

Clause 16

 

This clause entitles the Contractor to suspend and/or terminate the contract on account of the Employer defaulting on his obligations under the contract. These includes failing to provide evidence of financial arrangement to pay for the price of the contract under clause 2.4, failure to pay the contractor a duly certified amount, bankruptcy among others.

 

The termination is to be operative after a 14-day notice of intention to terminate has been served on the Employer. It may, however, be immediate in the case of bankruptcy or where a suspension of the works by the Employer has lasted for more than 84 days.When terminating under this section, the Contractor is entitled to payments for loss of profits and losses sustained as a result of the termination.

 

Clause 17

 

This deals with risks and responsibility. The parties under subclause 17.1 indemnify each other against ‘claims, damages, losses and expenses (including legal fees and expenses)’ in respect of death or injury to a person or damage to a real or personal property caused by the actions or inactions of the indemnifying party in performing his duties under the contract.

 

Subclause 17.3

This subclause sets out the Employers risks much in the same terms as the Red Book 4th edition. Bunni advocates a change in the title of the Clause so as not to give the wrong impression. The risks covered here relates to risks that may cause loss or damage to the works. Bunni advocates that this be expressly stated to prevent contentious arguments.

 

The notable innovation in this clause is that the liability of the parties is limited to the provisions of the contract. The contract specifically excludes liability:

 

‘‘for loss of use of any Works, loss of profit, loss of any contract or for any indirect or consequential loss or damage which may be suffered by the other Party in connection with the Contract, other than under Subclause 16.4 [Payment on Termination] and Subclause 17.1 [Indemnities].

 

International Construction contracts                                                                                Topic 3 Part 1: The 1999 FIDIC contracts (Red and Yellow

 

 

Clause 18

 

This clause is concerned with insurance. The wording of the clause is different from the older forms. It provides that the party taking out the insurance shall be referred to as the insuring party. Except where indicated differently in Part II, the Contractor is the insuring party. It is expected that insurance shall be in the joint names of the parties and shall cover all risks except those listed as Employer’s risk under subclause 17.3. It prohibits the parties from altering the terms of the policy without notice to and approval by the other party.

 

Clause 19

 

This is concerned with force majeure. Force majeure is defined under the 1999 Red Book as ‘an exceptional event or circumstance:

 

a. which is beyond a Party’s control

b. which such Party could not reasonably have provided against before entering into the Contract

c. which having arisen, such party could not reasonably have avoided or overcome; and

d. this is not substantially attributable to the other Party.’

 

A party is required to give notice if the occurrence of a Force Majeure event would prevent him from performing his obligations under the contract. The notice is to be given within 14 days of becoming aware of such event. Force Majeure events do not apply to prevent payments due under the contract and each party is enjoined to minimise the delay caused by such events. Where the Force Majeure event prevents progress of the works for a continuous period of 84 days or where multiple notices of Force Majeure totalling 140 days is given, then either party may terminate the contract.

 

Clause 20

 

This clause deals with contractor’s claims and dispute resolution. Where the contractor is delayed it may be entitled to an extension of time and/or costs under the provisions of clause 8 and clause 20. The calculation of such costs follows the provisions in sub clause 19.6 which makes provision for recovery of costs incurred but excludes loss of profit.

 

Subclause 20.1

Under subclause 20.1 a Contractor is to serve the Engineer with a notice within 28 days of the time he became aware or ought to have become aware of any matters giving rise to the claim:

 

20. If the Contractor considers himself to be entitled to any extension of the Time for Completion and/or any additional payment, under any Clause of these Conditions or otherwise in connection with the Contract, the Contractor shall give notice to the Engineer, describing the event or circumstance giving rise to the claim. The notice shall be given as soon as practicable, and not later than 28 days after the Contractor became aware, or should have become aware, of the event or circumstance. If the

 

International Construction contracts                                                                                Topic 3 Part 1: The 1999 FIDIC contracts (Red and Yellow

Contractor fails to give notice of a claim within such period of 28 days, the Time for Completion shall not be extended, the Contractor shall not be entitled to additional payment, and the Employer shall be discharged from all liability in connection with the claim. Otherwise, the following provisions of this Subclause shall apply.

 

The Contractor shall also submit any other notices which are required by the Contract, and supporting particulars for the claim, all as relevant to such event or circumstance.”

 

A failure to meet the claims deadline would result in losing the right to claim. Subclause 20.1 also provides for a strict time limit to furnish further particulars of the claim so made, and for the engineer to retrospectively respond to a contractor’s claim. It provides as follows:

 

 

“The Contractor shall keep such contemporary records as may be necessary to substantiate any claim, either on the Site or at another location acceptable to the Engineer. Without admitting the Employer’s liability, the Engineer may, after receiving any notice under this

 

Subclause, monitor the record -keeping and/or instruct the Contractor to keep further contemporary records. The Contractor shall permit the Engineer to inspect all these records and shall (if instructed) submit copies to the Engineer. Within 42 days after the Contractor became aware (or should have become aware) of the event or circumstance giving rise to the claim ...the Contractor shall send to the Engineer a fully detailed claim which includes full supporting particulars of the basis of the claim and of the extension of time and/or additional payment claimed…

 

Within 42 days after receiving a claim or any further particulars supporting a previous claim, or within such other period as may be proposed by the Engineer and approved by the Contractor, the Engineer shall respond with approval, or with disapproval and detailed comments. He may also request any necessary further particulars, but shall nevertheless give his response on the principles of the claim within such time...”

 

 

Subclause 20.2

This clause subjects all disputes to the Dispute Adjudication Board (DAB). The Board should consist of one or three persons who will be appointed by a date to be stated in the Appendix to Tender. It is suggested that the Board be appointed 28 days after commencement.

 

Subclause 20.3

This clause deals with the situation where the parties fail to agree on the composition of the Board either at formation or at a later stage. After the Board has been constituted, the parties may, working in conjunction, refer a matter to the DAB for its non–binding opinion. This is a particularly useful clause.

 

Subclause 20.4

 

International Construction contracts                                                                Topic 3 Part 1: The 1999 FIDIC contracts (Red and Yellow This clause allows for either party to refer any dispute arising from the contract to the DAB in writing. The reference is to be notified to the other party. Within 84 days from the date of such reference or such other time agreed to by the parties, the DAB is to make a reasoned decision. Where the DAB fails to decide within that period, a Notice of Dissatisfaction may be served by either party as a prelude to commencing arbitration.

 

The parties are obliged to give effect to a DAB decision. The decision is to be binding unless and until it is revised by an amicable settlement, or an arbitral award as provided in the contract. After 28 days the DAB decision becomes final and cannot be challenged. A party’s failure to implement such final binding decision entitles the other party to refer the failure to arbitration.

 

A party wishing to challenge a DAB decision is to serve a Notice of Dissatisfaction within 28 days of the issuance of the DAB decision. The notice is set up as a condition precedent to commencing arbitration. This provision and others under clause 20 have stirred significant controversy in recent times and have been the subject matter of judicial decisions in Singapore – see the Persero cases (full citations below).

 

Subclause 20.5

 

This clause deals with amicable settlement of the dispute and enjoins the parties within 56 days of the Notice of Dissatisfaction being served to attempt an amicable settlement of the dispute. However, arbitration is to follow whether or not an amicable settlement had been attempted.

 

Subclause 20.6

This establishes arbitration as the final means of settlement of disputes and chooses the ICC rules as FIDIC preferred rules.

 

Subclause 20.7

This subclause deals with a situation where a party fails to comply with the decision of a DAB.

 

Subclause 20.8

This subclause allows for the direct reference of a dispute to Arbitration where for any reason there was a failure to constitute the DAB. These subclause and others such as 20.4 - 20.7 has been the subject of judicial scrutiny in the Peterborough City Council case (see citation below). See also the decision in Doosan Babcock Ltd v Comercializadora de Equipos y Materiales Mabe Lda [2013] EWHC 3010 (TCC). It will be helpful to look out for arbitral Awards on this point. The ICC Dispute Bulletin is a rich source of information on Award extracts on the FIDIC contracts.

 

The 2017 Red Book (2nd Edition) has made changes to some of the key provisions above. We shall examine some of these changes under Topic 6.

 

International Construction contracts                                                                                Topic 3 Part 1: The 1999 FIDIC contracts (Red and Yellow

 

 

5. The 1999 Yellow Book

 

5.1. Overview

The 1999 Yellow Book is for use where the contractor is responsible for the design of the project. This could be in a civil, mechanical, or electrical contract. The 1999 Yellow Book 1st edition replaced the pre-1999 Yellow Book and to some extent the Orange Book (the Silver Book is also assumed by some commentators as replacing the Orange Book). The 1999 Yellow Book is widely complimented and has been referred to by a major international construction contractors association as a practical ‘starting point for a design/build contract which includesboth plant supply and construction of works’.

 

The book incorporates the presentation and concepts already discussed above under the 1999 Red Book. The Yellow Book contains many of the innovations of the 1999 forms such as subclause 2.4 which requires the Employer to make available documents indicating his capacity to finance the project and pay the contract price.

 

The numbering and wording of the clauses is uniform in most parts of the 1999 forms. This means that most of the discourse on the 1999 Red Book applies to the 1999 Yellow Book as well.

 

As said earlier, the major distinguishing factor between the Red Book and the Yellow Book is that in the latter, the responsibility for design rests solely on the Contractor, whereas in the Red Book the Employer is responsible for most of the design. The Yellow Book, like the Orange Book, is well suited for privatelyfinanced projects because they both envisage a lump sum fixed price payment and place the design and construction responsibility on the contractor.

 

 

5.2. Provisions

In the following paragraphs we will identify some of the major provisions of the 1999 Yellow Book that distinguishes it from the 1999 Red Book.

 

Clause 1

Definitions. The notable definitions include:

 

Subclause 1.1.1.5

Here the Employer’s Requirement document is defined as the document which “…specifies the purpose, scope, and/or design and/or other technical criteria, for the Works”. Bunni recommends a careful drafting of this document, as it is at the heart of the parties’ relationship and is critical to the success of the contract. The Employer’s Requirement document which should be specific and precise should include all specifications, functional standards, and tests for the projects, which will measure and verify that the Employers needs have been met by the construction. It is however expected that the Employer’s Requirement will be flexible enough to allow for the creativity of the Contractor’s design team.

 

International Construction contracts                                                                Topic 3 Part 1: The 1999 FIDIC contracts (Red and Yellow The Yellow Book incorporates both tests at completion and tests after completion (these tests are like the tests under the Orange Book). These tests are defined under sub clause 1.3.4 and 1.3.5.

 

Subclause 1.5

Sets the order of priority of documents forming the contract which are deemed to be mutually explanatory of each other. The order is as follows:

 

1. the contract agreement (if any) 2. the letter of acceptance

3. the letter of tender

4. Part II: The particular conditions

5. Part I: Conditions of general Application 6. the Employer’s Requirement

7. the schedules

8 . the contractor’s proposal (submitted by the contractor as part of its tender) andother documents forming part of the contract.

Parties are allowed to amend this order of priority of documents or to ignore it completely.

 

Subclause 1.8

Under this clause, if a party becomes aware of an error or defect of a technical nature in any of the technical documents listed above or any other document, which is prepared for use in executing the works, that party shall promptly give notice of such error to the other party.

 

Subclause 1.9

This subclause deals with the consequences of the Contractor suffering delay and or costs because of errors in the document(s) referred to as the Employer’s Requirement. The clause provides that in such cases, the Contractor should give notice to the Engineer and should be entitled to an extension of time under subclause 8.4 of the Yellow Book (this clause is identical to the one discussed under the Red Book above).

The clause also provides that where such delay will result in the contractor incurring costs, subject to procedure under subclause 20.1 of the Yellow Book (identical to same clause under the Red Book), the contractor will be entitled to recover costs and profit. As in all circumstances where the Engineer is required to make a determination, the Engineer is to proceed in accordance with subclause 3.5 (this clause is like the same clause in the 1999 Red Book).

 

 

Clause 3

This deals with the role of the Engineer. The content of the Yellow Book and Red Book are similar here and the major difference is found in subclause 3.

 

Subclause 3.3 - ‘Instructions of the Engineer’

The instruction must be in writing, whereas the Red Book has introduced a mechanism for confirming oral instructions.

 

Clause 4

 

International Construction contracts                                                                Topic 3 Part 1: The 1999 FIDIC contracts (Red and Yellow This deals with contractor’s obligations. Again, while the wording is similar to what is found in the Red Book, under subclause 4.1 of 1999 Yellow Book, the Contractor is expected to complete the works so that it is fit for the purpose that the Employer intended for them. In the Red Book, this ‘fit for purpose’ requirement is limited to the section relating to the design of segment of the works by Contractor.

 

Clause 5

This is about design. There is no similar provision in the Red Book. This clause recognises the unique ‘contractor design’ focus of the Yellow Book. Subclause 5.1 obliges the Contractor to ‘carry out and be responsible for the design of the works’. The provision also enjoins the employment of qualified designers and sub– designers. The appointment of the design staff requires the approval of the Engineer.

 

 

 

Clause 8

This is about commencement, delays, and suspension. The programme of works which is to be prepared and submitted under the 1999 Yellow Book is similar to programme discussed above for the Red Book, however it includes more details relating to the design, inspection, tests, commissioning, and trial operations. The framework for submitting a revised programme where the current programme is no longer applicable in terms of actual work on the project or compliance with the contract is also identical.

 

Clauses 9 and 12

 

Both deal with the Contractor’s obligations for tests on completion and test after completion respectively. The tests under the Yellow Book are more detailed and comprehensive when compared to tests under the Red Book; also, under the Red Book clause 12 deals with a different subject (measurement and evaluation).

 

Clause 13

 

This deals with variations.

 

Subclause 13.1

The clause provides that the Contractor is bound to execute a variation order of the Engineer, except he/she qualifies it (seeks an amendment) by informing the Engineer that the goods needed to execute the variation cannot be readily obtained. Under the Yellow Book, the Contractor has additional grounds to qualify a variation. The Contractor may inform the Engineer that the order of variation will reduce the safety and/or suitability of the works or have adverse effect on achieving the schedule of guarantees provided for the project. The outcome however remains the same. The Engineer on receiving such notice choose to cancel, vary, or confirm his variation order.

 

Clause 14

 

This clause contains a major difference between the 1999 Red Book and 1999 Yellow Book. The Yellow Book provides that the price of the contract shall be a

 

International Construction contracts                                                                Topic 3 Part 1: The 1999 FIDIC contracts (Red and Yellow lump sum. The amount is to be agreed by the parties by the close of tender. The parties are however free to vary this provision using Part II of the contract.

 

Clauses 15 & 16

These clauses deal with the issue of termination by the Employer and suspension and termination by the Contractor respectively. Provisions under these clauses and others such as Clauses 1.1.6.8 (definition of unforeseeable), 4.10 (Site Data), 4.12 (unforeseeable physical condition) and 5.1 (general design obligation) have been the subject-matter of litigation in the UK courts. See Obrascon Huarte Lain SA v Attorney General for Gibraltar [2015] EWCA Civ 712. In this case, the Court of Appeal in confirming an earlier decision of the High Court, held that a contractor who had suspended work due to its own failure to foresee an unfavourable ground condition hadits contract validly terminated under clause15.

 

Clause 20

 

This contains the last major difference between the 1999 Yellow Book and the 1999 Red Book.While both contracts envisage a Dispute Adjudication Board (DAB) as the dispute resolution mechanism for the contract, the DAB of the Yellow Book is to be constituted 28 days after a party gives notice to the other party of its intention to refer a dispute to the DAB. The DAB under the Yellow Book is called an ad-hoc DAB as it does not come into existence until when the need arises and for a specific dispute.

 

The recently published 2nd Edition of the Yellow Book of FIDIC has made some significant changes to the 1999 Yellow Book. These will be addressed under Topic 6.

 

 

6. Conclusion

A critique of the Red and Yellow Books and an analysis of some of the issues raised under this topic will be undertaken under the topic on Topical Issues. The 1999 Red and Yellow Books were issued along with the Silver Book. Whilst sharing similar presentation and identical clauseswith the Red and Yellow Books, the Silver Book is substantially different from these two books. The Silver Book will be considered next week.

 

The further reading section points to resources and materials providing a clause-by-clause analysis of the two books studied under this topic. You are required to read these resources to gain knowledge of the other clauses not discussed in this note.

 

 

Some Relevant Cases

 

1. Obrascon Huarte Lain SA v Attorney General for Gibraltar [2015] EWCA Civ 712

 

2. NH International (Caribbean) Limited v National Insurance Property Development Company Limited (Trinidad and Tobago) [2015] UKPC 37.

 

3. PT Perusahaan Gas Negara (Persero) TBK v CRW Joint Operation [2010]

 

International Construction contracts                                                     Topic 3 Part 1: The 1999 FIDIC contracts (Red and Yellow SGHC 202; 137 Con. L.R. 69

 

4. PT Perusahaan Gas Negara (Persero) TBK v CRW Joint Operation [2014] SGHC 146; [2015] B.L.R. 119 (Singapore High Court decision)

 

5. PT Perusahaan Gas Negara (Persero) TBK v CRW Joint Operation [2015] SGCA 30; [2015] B.L.R. 595 (Singapore Court of Appeal decision) [to fully appreciate the issues in case no 3,4&5, you are encouraged to read them in the order in which they appear on this list]

 

6. Peterborough City Council v Enterprise Managed Services Ltd. [2014] EWHC 3193 (TCC)

 

7. Cavendish Square Holding BV v El Makdessi and Parking Eye Ltd v Beavis [2015] UKSC67.

 

8. Dunlop v New Garage and Motor Co. Ltd [1915]AC79

 

9. J Murphy and Sons Ltd v Beckton Energy Ltd [2016] EWHC 607 (TCC)

 

 

 

 

 

Further Reading

 

1. Conditions of Contract for Construction (First Edition, 1999) -Red Book.

 

2. Conditions of Contract for Plant and Design-Build (First Edition, 1999)-Yellow Book

 

3. For clause-by-clause analysis, see Bunni, Nael G, The FIDIC forms of contract [electronic resource]: the fourth edition of the Red Book, 1992, the 1996 Supplement, the 1999 Red Book, the 1999 Yellow Book, the 1999 Silver Book(Blackwell 2005) Part V- Chapters 23, 24, 25.

 

4. Jamal Al-Dine Nassar, Claims, disputes and arbitration under the Red Book and the 1999 Red Book (Part 1), Construction Law Journal 2009.

 

5. Christopher Seppala, How Not to interpret the FIDIC Dispute Clause: The Singapore Court of Appeal judgment in Persero [2012] ICLR 4

 

6. Gerlando Butera, Untangling the Enforcement of DAB Decisions [2014] ICLR 36-61

 

(Electronic copies of the above and many other relevant materials are accessible from the RGU Library through the Reading List on Moodle. The cases are accessible from Westlaw).

 

Topic 3: FIDIC Silver Book, 1999 (Part 2)

 

 

 

Topic Preview

 

Under this topic, we will consider the 1999 FIDIC Silver Book. The 1st edition of the Silver Book has been created for use in major projects using the turnkey procurement method.

 

 

 

Topic Content

 

1. Introduction to the 1999 FIDIC Silver Book

The 1995 FIDIC Orange Book was the first contract form issued by FIDIC for Turnkey projects. The Silver Book is the second turnkey contracts form by FIDIC. Under this procurement arrangement, the Contractor is responsible for the design, construction, and delivery of the project to the Employer to such an extent that all that is required of the Employer is to ‘turn the key’ or commission the completed works for use. The Silver Book replaces the Orange Book as the contract of choice by FIDIC for these types of projects.

 

The 1999 Silver Book has 20 clauses and incorporates many of the innovations that appear in the 1999 suite of FIDIC contracts. It shares similar clause numbering and content with the other 1999 forms discussed in the last topic. The Silver Book also shares the FIDIC two Part contract presentation format and therefore is comprised of:

 

•     Part I: conditions of general application

•     Part II: conditions of particular application.

 

The Silver Book, being a turnkey contract form is based on the Contractor being responsible for the design of the project. To that extent, it is more closely related to the 1999 Yellow book than the 1999 Red Book which is an ‘employer design’ contract. Despite the many similarities between the Silver Book and the other 1999 forms especially the Yellow Book, it is a totally different form of contract.

 

 

2. FIDIC Silver Book, 1999 (1st edition) - Concept and Provisions

 

2.1. Concept

Significantly the Silver Book discards the role of the Engineer. The Employer’s

Representative in other FIDIC contracts is optional under the Silver Book. Where appointed by the Employer, the Representative takes on the responsibility delegated to him by the Employer and may be changed at the will of the Employer or have his duties varied at the Employer’s convenience.

 

Where disagreements occur, these are to be referred directly to the Employer who

 

decides after attempting a settlement with the Contractor. The Silver Book also reduces areas of project risks that a contractor may rely on in an application for extension of time and/or extra costs. In theSilver Book, except as otherwise provided in the contract, the contractor is assumed to have accepted responsibility for all unforeseen difficulties and to have provided for them in the contract price. The Contractor is also required to verify the correctness of all information provided by the Employer, except as otherwise provided for in the contract.

 

The principle of the Silver Book is that an experienced contractor for a higher price agrees to carry most of the risks of a project and sees the project to completion on time and within budget. It is a lump sum contract, with the Contractor responsible for the design and construction of the project and charged with the responsibility of delivering a project fit for purpose as defined by the contract.

 

Drafters of the 1999 Silver Book have justified its concept by arguing that it mirrors the actual practice of the industry in turnkey projects. They point to the fact that funding for projects is sourced based on a set completion date and well-defined construction budget. The Silver Book therefore provides a contract to satisfy these demands. FIDIC, however, recognises that the use of the Silver Book on all types of projects will produce unfavourable consequences. The foreword to the Silver Book advises that the Book will be unsuitable in the following instances:

 

If there is insufficient time or information for tenderers to scrutinise and check the Employer’s Requirements or to carry out the necessary designs, risk assessment studies and estimating (taking particular account of Sub-Clauses 4.12 [Unforeseeable Difficulties] and 5.1 [General Design Obligations])…

If [the] construction will involve substantial work underground or work in other areas which tenderers cannot inspect [or] if the

Employer intends to supervise closely or control the Contractor’s work or to review most of the construction drawings [or] if the amount of each interim payment is to be determined by an official or other intermediary.’

 

2.2. Provisions

The more important innovations of the 1999 forms that are continued in the Silver Book include:

 

Sub-clause 2.4

This requires the Employer to provide reasonable evidence of his financial capacity to finance the project and pay the Contractor for his work. The Employer is expected to provide such evidence within 28 days of a request being submitted by the Contractor. This is enforced through the right of the Contractor to reduce the pace of work and to eventually terminate where such evidence is not provided.

 

Sub-clause 2.5

This provides a procedure to be followed by the Employer if he wishes to make a Claim against the Contractor. The procedure obligates the Employer to inform the contractor about the claim, as soon as possible and to provide sufficient particulars of such claim. Unlike the position under the Red and Yellow Books, 1999, the process of determination under Clause 3.5 does not involve an

 

Engineer. The Employer, after notifying the contractor of claims it deemed itself entitled to (with supporting particulars under clause 2.5), is required to agree with the contractor on what it is entitled or proceed to determine the amount.

 

Clause 8

This obliges the contractor to prepare a programme for the works, to keep the programme current and to inform the Employer of any events that may occur in the future, which may impact on the completion of the project.

 

Clause 20

This provides for the Contractor’s claim procedure and creates the Dispute Adjudication Board (DAB) for resolution of disputes. The Contractor is required to make his claim within 28 days of becoming aware (or is deemed to have become aware) of the events giving rise to the claim. Failure to keep to this timescale will result in the right to claim being lost. The DAB is to be made up of one to three members, and like the Yellow Book, the DAB in the Silver Book, is to be set up 28 days after a party indicates interest (serves notice) to refer a matter to the DAB.

 

Other clauses which appear in the Silver Book, which are common to the 1999 forms include the provisions relating to Force Majeure, Variations (like the Yellow Book) amongst others. A clause-by-clause analysis of provisions common to all the 1999 forms is provided for in the resources listed under the further reading section of this material.

 

2.3. Changes

Changes made to the terms of the Silver Book, when compared to the Orange Book and other previous FIDIC forms, are substantial. These include the following:

 

Clause 1

Under clause 1, unlike the other 1999 forms, the Contractor shall not be required to provide any information that he had indicated in the tender to be confidential.

 

Clause 3.

The first important differenceis set out by Clause 3,which deals with theEmployer’s administration of the contract. Sub-clause 3.1 provides the Employer with the option of appointing an Employer’s Representative. Where the Employer so wishes to appoint a Representative, he may appoint any person, however, he is obliged to inform the Contractor of the person so appointed, his address, and duties delegated to him. Unless otherwise indicated, the contract provides the Employer’s Representative with authority to exercise all the powers of the Employer except the power to terminate the contract.

 

The Employer is also obligated to give the Contractor 14 days’ notice before replacing the Employer’s Representative. The Contractor has no right of objection to the removal or replacement of the Employer’s Representative. It is important to note that, sub-clause 3.4 provides that all instructions issued by the Employer or any of his personnel must be in writing.

 

The next important change is contained in sub-clause 3.5. Under this clause where there is a dispute, the Employer is to approach the Contractor with the aim of reaching a common settlement. If the attempt at settlement fails, the Employer decides on the dispute. The determination is to be binding on the parties unless the Contractor issues a notice of dissatisfaction within 14 days of receiving the

 

determination by the Employer. Clauses 2.5.and 3.5 throw up the eerie spectacle of the Employer determining its own claims. It is foreseeable in this circumstance that in the absence of an agreement between the parties, the contractor is likely to give notice of its dissatisfaction with the determination and proceed to refer the issue to a DAB.

 

Clause 4

Clause 4 contains the major terms that set out the concept of the Silver Book. Clause 4 is concerned with the general obligations of the Contractor. Sub-clause 4.1 contains the usual turnkey contract provision obligating the Contractor to ensure that the completed works is fit for the purposes intended as defined in contract. Sub-clause 4.10 obliges the Employer to make available to the contractor before and after commencement, all data available to the Employer on sub-surface and hydrological conditions at the site including environmental aspects thereof. This clause however places on the Contractor the responsibility for verifying and interpreting such data.

 

As a follow on to this responsibility, the clause provides that, ’the Employer shall have no responsibility for the accuracy, sufficiency or completeness of such data…’ except in matters indicated under clause 5.1 for which the Employer retains responsibility. Clause 4.11 deals with the sufficiency of the contract price, underscoring the lump sum nature of Silver Book transactions. The parties can agree some exceptions under the contract.

 

Clause 4.12 arguably one of the controversial clauses in the Silver Book, provides as follows:

 

Except as otherwise stated in the contract:

(a)    the contractor shall be deemed to have obtained all necessary information as to risks, contingencies and other circumstances which may influence or affect the works;

(b)    by signing the contract, the contractor accepts total responsibility for having foreseen all difficulties and costs of successfully completing the works; and

(c)     the Contract price shall not be adjusted to take account of any unforeseen difficulties or costs.

 

The import of the above is that the Contractor is deemed to have obtained all the necessary information of the risks, contingencies and other circumstances that may affect the project, unless otherwise provided in the contract. By signing the contract, theContractor is also deemed to have accepted responsibility for all foreseen and unforeseen difficulties and the contract price will not be adjusted to take account of any unforeseen difficulties and costs.

 

Clause 5

This clause is of utmost importance in understanding the limits of the liabilities placed on the Contractor in the preceding clause. Sub-clause 5.1 deals with the general design obligations and it obligates the Contractor to verify all information and data provided by the Employer and absolves the Employer from responsibility for any error, inaccuracy, or omission of any kind in the Employer’s Requirement (documents defining the Employer’s needs and requirements for the project), as originally included in the contract or of any other data provided by Employer except as provided under this sub-clause. The exceptions include the following:

 

•    Sub-clause 5.1(a) states that, “portions, data and information which are stated in the Contract as being immutable “are the responsibility of the Employer. This indicates terms which are stated to be incontrovertible by the Employer; these are usually the fundamental aspects of the Employers Requirement. The liability for the accuracy or otherwise of these terms lies with the Employer.

 

•    Sub-clause 5.1(b), the Employer is responsible for the correctness of the definition of the intended purpose of the project. This is logical since it is the Employer that requires the project; it is in the best position to state what is required and to bear the liability for errors in misstating the requirement.

 

• Sub- clause5.1(c) places on the Employer the responsibility and liability for stating the criteria for testing. Tests are used to determine whether the project meets the needs of the Employer.

 

•    Sub- Clause 5.1(d) makes the Employer responsible for those portions, data and information which cannot be verified by the Contractor, except as otherwise stated in the Contract. This is information that is either impossible or impractical to verify at the time of commencement of the project.

 

Except for the above-stated circumstances (5.1(a)-(d)), the Contractor is responsible for all information or data used in the project and is deemed to have foreseen all project risks and priced for the unforeseen difficulties.

 

Sub-clause 8.4

This is concerned with the conditions upon which the Contractor may be entitled to an extension of time or uplift in costs. As would be expected the 1999 Silver Book contains less avenues than the other forms, for the Contractor to be eligible to submit a claim for an extension of time and even lesser avenues for where the Contractor may be entitled to extra costs. The following list compiled by the European International Contractors Association (EIC) gives a comprehensive overview of the provisions of the Silver Book on these matters:

 

•    A right to an extension of time exists where a delay is occasioned by a variation order made by the Employer or the Employers personnel or necessitated by the Employers contractors.

 

•    Sub-clause 2.1 provides for cost plus reasonable profit in favour of the Contractor for failure by the Employer to give access to and possession of the Site to the Contractor as provided for in the contract.

 

•    Sub-clause 4.24 deals with the costs being recovered (but not profit) for delays in the discovery and handling of fossils at the site.

 

•    Sub-clause 7.4 deals with delays in proceeding with tests provided for by the contract, due to factors attributable to the Employer. Generally, in such eventuality the Contractor may recover cost expended because of the delay plus reasonable profit.

 

•    Sub-clause 8.5 deals with delays caused by Authorities and entitles the Contractor to an extension of time only.

 

•    Sub-clause 8.9 deals with Suspension of the works initiated by Employer. The Contractor is entitled to recover Cost but not profit.

 

• Sub-clause 13.7 deals with costs arising from changes in legislation that affect the project. Where such changes incur cost, the Contractor is entitled to recover cost but not profit.

 

• Sub-clause 16. 1 deal with suspension initiated by the Contractor because of the Employer failing in his obligations under the contract, the Contractor will be entitled to recover cost plus reasonable profit.

 

3. Summary

 

The 1999 Silver Book presents another alternative to the parties and allows an Employer to pass on significant project risks and responsibilities to an experienced Contractor. The contractor, on the other hand, earns (or is expected to earn) substantially higher amount for accepting the risks under the contract.

 

Do not be deceived by the simplicity of the presentation here and the striking similarities between the Silver Book on one hand and the Red and Yellow Books on the other. These forms are designed to address practical issues peculiar (and at times, common) to the different types of projects which the forms are used for. The Silver Book has come under as much severe criticism as it has enjoyed stout defence of its purpose and provisions. Its introduction in 1999 led to serious controversies around whether FIDIC was abandoning its traditional, balanced, and fair approach to contract drafting. Contractors were unhappy with what appeared to be a one-sided imposition of risks on them under the Contract forms. FIDIC had a robust response which pointed to the peculiar nature of projects which the Silver Book will be suited and the fact that Employers had to pay premium for services of contractors executing projects under the Book. The further reading resources provide insight into the various arguments for and against the Silver Book. I expect you to explore this important debate/argument(s) further through your engagement with the readings. The relevance of the debate does not stop with the discussion of the Silver Book; it goes to the root of discussions about risks – allocation and management - who is in the best position to manage what risks under a contract and at what cost?

 

 

The next topic will examine the last books of the pre-2017 FIDIC forms namely, the Pink Book and the Gold Book.

 

 

Further Reading

This week, we have a comparatively short lecture note. You are required to do a bit more independent reading. See references below.

 

References

 

Bunni, Nael G, The FIDIC forms of contract [electronic resource]: the fourth edition of the Red Book, 1992, the 1996 Supplement, the 1999 Red Book, the 1999 Yellow Book, the 1999 Silver Book (Blackwell 2005) Part V: Chapters 25.

 

Miller, R, FIDIC Orange and Silver Book a clash of colours. Construction

 

Law 2001.

 

Le Goff, P, A new Standard for International Turnkey Projects: FIDIC Silver Book. 2000 Int'l Bus. L.J. 2000.

 

Kennedy, F.M editor, EIC Contractor’s guide to the FIDIC conditions of contract for EPC turnkey projects (the Silver Book); The International Construction Law Review 2000.

 

Wade, C, the Silver Book - the reality. 2001 International Construction Law Review.

 

(Electronic copies of the above and many other relevant materials are accessible from the RGU Library through the Reading List on Moodle and a few others directly under Topic 4).

 

Topic 3: FIDIC Pink and Gold Books (Part 3)

 

Topic Preview

 

This topic will consider the following:

•             Introduction to FIDIC Pink Book

•             Concept and Provisions of FIDIC Pink Book •             Introduction to FIDIC Gold Book

•             Concept and Provisions of FIDIC Gold Book

 

Topic Content

 

1. Introduction to FIDIC Pink Book

The FIDIC Pink Book is also known as the Multilateral Development Banks (MDBs) Harmonised Edition of the 1999 Red Book. The Pink Book was issued at the behest of the MDBs to achieve better efficiency in their construction procurement process. It was first issued in May 2005, after some criticisms, notably from the European International Contractors Association (EIC), it was reissued with some amendments in March 2006. The second edition was published in May 2010.

 

2. Multilateral Development Bank and FIDIC contracts

Multilateral Development Banks (MDBs) are international financial institutions created by different countries for the purpose of enhancing economic and social development. They achieve their objective through financing projects, supporting investments, and generating capital. MDBs use long-term loans that are issued below market rates to encourage development, they also provide guarantees for foreign direct investments; provide grants for beneficial activities among other things. They are owned by developed countries but draw their membership from a wider pool of countries including developing countries. Each MDB is independent and has been set up to achieve a specified objective(s). However, because of the nature of development work, the objectives of the MDBs oftentimes overlap; therefore, to derive maximum efficiency different MDBs regularly corporate on matters of common interest. There are arguably sub-sets within these types of international financial institutions. Some of the identified categories include regional MDB s (such as the Asian and African Development Banks) and sector specific MDBs (such as International Fund for Agricultural Development).

 

2.1. MDBs Harmonisation Process

Prior to 2005, major MDBs used different construction contractsfor the projects they were involved in around the world. For instance, the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development (the World Bank) and some of the other leading institutions (Asian Development Bank etc.) adopted the FIDIC Red Book 4th edition. Aiming to achieve similar objectives in terms of anti-corruption, better labour practices etc., the MDBs introduced additional clauses amending the construction contracts that they had chosen to adopt. With dissimilar clauses being used often within the same jurisdiction, by different MDBs, development construction became highly ineffective in achieving some of its intended social objectives and cumbersome for international contractors. To redress these issues, the Heads of Procurement of various leading MDBs started meeting on harmonising their procurement practices.

 

One such movement was to choose a contract that would be used for most construction work that the MDBs are involved. For this purpose, the 1999 FIDIC Red Book 1st edition was chosen with the intention to incorporate amendments in areas of common interest to the MDBs but not adequately provided for in the contract.

FIDIC was supportive of this process as it recognised the benefits that would accrue

 

Edition of the 1999 Red Book; it has a pink cover, and in accordance with the tradition, is now commonly known as the Pink Book. The Pink Book is for contracts financed bythe MDBs where much of the design responsibility lieswith the Employer. FIDIC retains the copyright and the responsibility for managing the Pink Book. The agreement between the participating banks is that they will adopt the Pink Book on all construction projects financed by them where it is suitable to use this contract (i.e., where majority of the design responsibility rests with the Employer).

 

The MDBs which are part of this contract Harmonisation agreement are: •               African Development Bank

•             Asian Development

• Black Sea Trade and Development Bank • Caribbean Development Bank

•   European Bank for Reconstruction and Development •          Inter-American Development Bank

•             International Bank for Reconstruction and Development (The World Bank) •             Nordic Development Fund

 

The Islamic development Bank has accepted in principle to join the licensing regime. In 2007, it was agreed that national development agencies should be allowed the license to use the Pink Book. Thus far, the agencies of Korea, Japan, France, and Australia have been licensed to use the Pink Book.

 

3. FIDIC Pink Book

The Pink Book does not replace the 1999 Red Book. It is recommended for use on projects where the design responsibility rests with the Employer.                                It is also specifically for projects sponsored by the participating banks. There are certain provisions in it that FIDIC suggests may lead to disputes if applied generally and some which are for purely developmental purposes. The 2005 version of the Pink Bookis superseded by the 2006 version. The major change between the two versions relates to the definition of unforeseen ground conditions, which in the 2006 version had reverted to the original 1999 Red Book wording. The 2010 version supersedes the 2006 version.

 

3.1. Concept

The Pink Book maintains the 1999 Red Book concept; thus, it is a contract between an Employer, who owns the works, and a Contractor who undertakes to construct the works with the Engineer as the Employer’s agent administering the construction project. Much of the design responsibility lies with the Employer. The Engineer is saddled with the responsibility of deciding specific issues in consultation with the parties (i.e., extension of time, Employers claims etc.), if the parties fail to reach an agreement; the Engineer is to decide such matters fairly.

 

The major differences in concept between the Pink and Red Book are as follows: • The financing institution is given access to audit the Contractors record

•     The Employer has more control over the Engineer

•     There are provisions relating to non-commercial matters such AIDSawareness.

 

 

3.2 Presentation

The Pink Book follows the common FIDIC presentation format of a two-part contract. It is therefore divided into:

•             Part I: conditions of general application and •             Part II: conditions of particular application.

 

•     Part A contains the information supplied by the Employer for the Contract Data.

•     Part B includes the Particular Conditions, which are a concise version of those contained in the 1999 Red Book.

 

 

3.3. Provisions

In reading the following commentary on the clauses of the Pink Book, it would be useful to cast your mind back to the earlier discussions on the 1999 Red Book under Topic 3. Accompanying this commentary is a table comparing the provisions of the 1999 Red Book and the Pink Book, highlighting the changes introduced by the latter.

 

The Pink Book continues with all the innovations of the FIDIC 1999 forms. These include:

•             the provision for value engineering,

• provision for a programme and progress reports, •        the Employers claim procedure,

•             the dispute resolution procedure.

 

The important changes in provisions of the Pink Book that differentiates it from the Red Book are contained in the following clauses:

 

Clause 1

This deals with definitions and other related issues.

 

Sub-clause 1.2

In this clause profit is defined as 5 per cent of cost unless otherwise indicated.

 

Sub-clause 1.15.

This provides that the contractor must permit the bank to inspect the site, his accounts and records and allow them to be audited if required by the bank.

 

Clause 2

This clause is concerned with the Employer:

 

Sub-clause 2.4

This deals with the Employer's Financial Arrangements. The Pink Book requires that the Employer provides evidence of his financial capacity before the Commencement Date and within 28 days of the Contractor's request. In addition, it is required under the Pink Book that the evidence shows that the Employer can pay the Contract price promptly.

 

Sub-clause 2.5

This deals with Employer's Claims. The Pink Book maintains the provisions of the 1999 FIDIC Red Book. However, it also provides that notice of an Employer’s claim against the contractor, must be given within 28 days of the Employer becoming aware, or should have become aware, of the circumstances giving rise to the claim. This mirrors the requirements for the contractor’s claim against the Employer, although it has been argued that the wording in this clause falls short of creating a condition precedent.

 

Clause 3

This clause is concerned with the Engineer. This is one of the most important changes under the Pink Book.

 

Sub-clause 3.1

 

Allows the Employer to change the authority of the Engineer without the agreement of the Contractor. In contrast, under the 1999 FIDIC Red Book, the Employer has an obligation not to impose "further constraints on the Engineer's Authority except as agreed with the Contractor." The sub-clause also requires the Engineer to obtain the Employer's approval before acting under sub-clauses 4.12 (unforeseeable physical conditions), 13.1, 13.3 and 13.4 (Variations).

 

Sub-clause 3.4

Provides that the contractor can object to an intended replacement of the Engineer and the Employer is enjoined to consider this objection. Under the 1999 FIDIC Red Book the Employer could not replace the Engineer with a person that the contractor has made reasonable objection against. In the Pink Book the Employer’s right to appoint a replacement Engineer is unfettered.

 

Sub-clause 3.5

Under this clause, which deals with the decisions by the Engineer, the Engineer is required to give the Contractor and the Employer notice of his decision on any matter not agreed between the parties. The Pink Book provides for communication of such decisions within 28 days from the receipt of the corresponding claim or request.

 

Clause 4

This clause is concerned with the obligations and rights of the Contractor. Under sub-clause 4.2 of the 1999 FIDIC Red Book, the employer could only make a claim on the Contractor’s performance security in the event of specified circumstances. In the Pink Book there are no restrictions to the circumstances that the Employer may make a claim on the Contractors performance security. However,the employer must still indemnify the contractor against claims he was not entitled to make.

 

Clauses 6

This clause deals with staff and labour. Sub-clauses 6.7-6.22 require that the Employer ensures the provision of sufficient supplies for the staff and to respect the relevant countries' festivals or days of rest.

 

Clause 12

This clause deals with measurement.

 

Sub-clause 12.1

Provides that where the contractor is dissatisfied with the Engineers record of measurement, the Engineer must still certify the parts of the measurement that are not under dispute, for payment.

 

Sub-clause 12.3

Provides that new rates or prices are appropriate for items of work if the measured quantity of the item changes by more than 25 per cent, as opposed to 10 per cent that is provided under the 1999 FIDIC Red Book. It also provides that any item of work included in the Bill of Quantities for which no rate applies or is specified, is included in other rates and prices in the Bill of Quantities and is not to be paid for separately.

 

Clause 13.1

Under clause 13.1 of the Pink Book, where the Contractor contends that a variation triggers a substantial change in the sequence or the progress of the works, he is to notify the engineer who will either confirm or vary the instruction. Under the 1999 FIDIC Red Book, the Contractor was only entitled to notify the Engineer where he could not readily obtain goods required to execute the variation.

 

Clause 15

This deals with termination by Employer.

 

Sub-clause 15.5

This adds a restriction to the Employer’s right to terminate for convenience. It provides that the Employer is not permitted to terminate the contract to avoid determination of the contract by the Contractor. This is important because while termination by the Employer entitles the Contractor to recover for loss of profit, termination for convenience by the Employer entitles the Contractor to costs only.

 

Sub-clause 15.6

This adds a new provision with regards to Corrupt or Fraudulent Practices. The sub-clause allows the Employer to terminate the Contract if he determines that the Contractor has engaged in fraudulent practice. The definition given to "fraudulent practice" under the contract is quite broad and includes misrepresentation or omission of facts to influence a procurement process or the execution of a contract. The definition also varies between MDBs.

 

Clause 16

This deals with Suspension and termination by Contractor.

 

Sub-clause 16.1

This allows the Contractortosuspend or reducethe rateofworkatanytime theBank suspends payment of the funds (the contractor having received notice from theBank). This right is also dependent on the Employer not providing evidence of alternative funds.

 

Sub-clause 16.2

This deals with termination by the Contractor. The Pink Book provides that the Employer's defaults entitling the Contractor to terminate must materially and adversely affect the economic balance of the Contract and/or the ability of the Contractor to perform the Contract. This is a more onerous requirement than the equivalent position under the 1999 Red Book

 

The Pink Book also includes two new grounds for termination:

•           If the Bank suspends the loan or credit from which the Contractor is paid and the Contractor has still not received the sums due to it, 14 days after the Contractor has followed the payment mechanism under sub-clause 14.7, the Contractor can suspend work, reduce its rate of work, or terminate the Contract.

 

•           Ifthe Contractordoesnotreceive the Engineer's instructionto commence work 108 days after the Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor may terminate the Contract.

 

Under Clause 19.2 and 19.4the contractor is only entitled to claim for an extension of time and/or extra costs for force majeure events where he is prevented from performing his substantial obligations. The 1999 FIDIC Red Book had required a lesser standard i.e., interference with the performance of his obligation. By adding 'Substantial', the Pink Book places higher hurdle for the Contractor to scale to be entitled to claim under this clause.

 

3.4. The 2010 Pink Book

The 2010 version of the MDB Harmonised version contains both major and minor

changes. In this section we will examine the major changes in the 2010 edition:

 

The first of such changes is that ‘Notice of Dissatisfaction’ is now a defined term. This has been done to reduce the disputes that arise from the form, content, and mode of the notice. The notice is defined as “...notice given by either party to the other under sub-clause 20.4 (obtaining the Dispute Board’s Decision) indicating dissatisfaction and intention to commence arbitration.”

 

There are also changes to clause 4.2 whichdeals with performance security, the new clause provides for the security to be in the currency of the contract or in a freely convertible currency acceptable to the Engineer. The second paragraph allows the Contractor to choose the “reputable bank‟ from where to source the performance security; however, the bank must be acceptable to the Employer.

 

There are changes to clause 6.20 dealing with forced labour. The prohibition against the contractor employing forced labour is now extended to include any kind of involuntary or compulsory labour including indentured (contract committing an apprentice or servant toserve a master for a specified period) labour, bonded labour, and similar classes of forced labour. Another important change is in the prohibition on child labour. The new clause although prohibiting exploitative child labour, allows the contractor to follow the rules of the country where the project is situated, where there is legislation on employment of children. However, irrespective of such regulations, there is a blanket prohibition on employing children under 18 for dangerous work.

 

A new sub-clause is added in 6.23 and it relates to workers’ organisations. The import of the clause is that the Contractor is to encourage workers to form and join such organisations. Where the local laws prohibit such organisations, the contract obligates the Contractor to create other means by which employees can be meeting to discuss their conditions of service and be represented. Where the local laws are silent on this, the Contractor is to actively encourage the formation of such organisations. A related addition is clause 6.24 that provides for non-discrimination and equal opportunity and prohibits discrimination in terms of “personal characteristics unrelated to the inherent job requirements.” The contractor is enjoined to base his employment policies on the principle of equal opportunity and fair treatment. Where there is a local law on this issue it is to be followed by the employer. Where there is no local law, the contractor is to give effect to this clause.

 

The most important changes have to do with the dispute resolution clause – clause 20. The new Clause 20.5 provides that the party who serves the notice of dissatisfaction should proceed to commence arbitration after the 56th day. Paragraph 20.6 sets out the new procedure for arbitration; the clause provides that where the contractors are domestic contractors, arbitration shall be commenced according to the local law of Arbitration. Where the contractors are foreign, international arbitration is to be pursued and three options are provided with an alternative procedure for the Asian Development Bank. These options are:

 

1. International arbitration in accordance with the stipulation of the arbitral institution indicated in the contract data using the rules of such institution.

 

2. In the absence of option 1, where the contract data states so, international arbitration in accordance with UNCITRAL rules.

 

 

3. Where neither an institutional arbitration nor UNCITRAL arbitration has been chosen in the contract data, the international arbitration is to commence according to the International Chamber of Commerce Rules of

arbitration (ICC rules).

 

The Asian Development Bank (ADB) adopts a similar clause except that option 1 and 2 are merged with option 2 being an alternative to option 1. Option 3 becomes option 2 under the ADB’s version and the ICC is replaced by the Singapore International Arbitration Centre (SIAC).

 

Anotherofthemajorchangesinthissectionisthechangetotheprovisionrequiring the place of arbitration to be at the city where the headquarters ofthe bank is situated; inthe2010edition,arbitrationistobeataneutrallocationspecifiedin the contract data.

 

The table below prepared by Frederic Gillion and Emmanuel Nino of Shadbolt LLP, contains a comprehensive analysis of the changes included in the Pink Book.

 

Clause 1: General Provisions                                                                        

Sub-clause     

Amendments                                                      

1:1: Definitions

The Pink Book changes some definitions from those used in the 1999 Red Book. For example, Appendix to Tender" becomes "Contract Data" and "Dispute Adjudication Board" becomes “Dispute Board", to reflect the wording favoured by the World Bank.

 

The definition of "Tests after Completion" in the Pink Book requires test specified in the Contract to be carried out in accordance with “the Specification” rather than “the provisions of the Particular Conditions” referred to in the 199 Red Book.

 

The definition of "Defects Notification Period" in the Pink Book, for notifying defects in "the Works or a Section", now "extends over 365 days except if otherwise stated in the Contract Data". The 1999 Red Book refers to the period "as stated in the Appendix to Tender".

 

The definition of "Plant" in the 1999 Red Book has been extended from "apparatus, machinery and vehicles intended to form or forming part of the Permanent Works" to include "vehicles purchased for the Employer and relating to the construction or operation of the Works" in the Pink Book.

 

The definition of "Site" in the 1999 Red Book has been extended so that "the places where the Permanent Works are to be executed include “storage and working areas” under the Red Book.

1.1.4.3 and 1.2: Cost and Profit

In the Pink Book, the definition of "Cost" in sub- clause 1.1.4.3 no longer refers to the "reasonable profit” referred to in the 1999 Red Book: it only refers to “profit”. This is because sub-clause 1.2 provides that “profit” is fixed at 5% unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Data. Although contractors might consider this profit to be low, the change is certainly welcomed by employers and banks as it provides some clarity.

 

 

ti

1.1.6.10: Notice of dissatisfac

The Pink Book introduces a definition of "Notice of Dissatisfaction” which requires the Party to indicate its “intention to commence arbitration.”

1.6: Contract Agreement

The Pink Book only allows deviation from the requirement to enter in the Contract Agreement within 28 days if the “particular Conditions establish otherwise”.

1.8: Care and Supply of Documents

This sub-clause determines the rights and obligations of the Employer and Contractor in relation to the custody and care of the Contract, Specifications, Drawings and Variations. In the final paragraph of the sub-clause in the 1999 Red Book, either Party is required to give notice to the other Party if it becomes aware of a defect of a technical nature" to one of the documents. Under the Pink Book, this requirement is widened to require the Parties to give notice of any defect in the documents.

1.9 Delayed Drawing or Instructions

The 1999 Red Book requires the Contractor to give the Engineer notice whenever the Works are to be disrupted due to a failure to issue drawings or instructions within a particular time. The Pink Book deletes the requirement to provide "the details" of the nature or amount of the delay likely to be suffered.

1.13: Compliance with Laws

Sub-paragraph (a) of the 1999 Red Book requires the Employer to obtain planning, zoning and other permissions for the Permanent Works and indemnify the Contractor for its failure to do so. In the Pink Book "building permit" has been added to the list of permissions that have to be obtained by the Employer.

Sub-paragraph (b) of the 1999 Red Book requires the Contractor to take all actions required for compliance with applicable Laws and to indemnify the Employer for his failure to do so. In the Pink Book the indemnity is qualified by the following wording "unless the Contractor is impeded to accomplish these actions and shows evidence of its diligence."

1.15: Inspections & Audit by the Bank

The insertion of this new sub-clause in the Pink Book allows representatives of the Bank to inspect the Site and/or to inspect and audit the Contractor's accounts and records relating to the Contract.

Clause 2: The Employer

2.1: Right of Access to the Site

The Pink Book amends the 1999 Red Book to require the Employer to grant access to and possession of the Site to the Contractor so that the Programme can proceed "without disruption".

2.2: Permits, Licenses or Approvals

The Pink Book deletes "where he is in a position to do so" from the Employer's obligation, under the 1999 Red Book, to provide reasonable assistance in obtaining permits and licences for the project. This removes a ground for the Employer to refuse to assist in this regard. Changes to sub-paragraphs (a) and (b) reflect this amendment.

     

 

 

 

2.4: Employer’s Financial Arrangements

 

Under the 1999 Red Book, the Employer is required to submit reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made and are being maintained to enable the Employer to pay the Contract Price, within 28 days of the Contractor's request to do so.

 

The Pink Book requires the Employer to submit the reasonable evidence "before the Commencement Date as well as within 28 days of the Contractor's request. In addition, the evidence that the Employer provides must demonstrate that it is able to pay the Contract price "punctually".

2.5: Employer’s Claims

The amendment to the 1999 Red Book concerns the service of the Employer's notice of claim. Under the Pink Book, the Employer must still give notice as soon as practicable, but (in any event) the notice must be given within 28 days of the Employer becoming aware, or when it "should have become aware", of the circumstances giving rise to the notice. This appears to be a more onerous provision for the Employer. However, the words "should have become aware" makes it difficult to operate as a condition precedent.

Clause 3: The Eng

ineer

3.1: The Engineer’s duties and Authority

 

Under the Pink Book, the Employer is allowed to change the authority of the Engineer without the agreement of the Contractor. In contrast, under the 1999 Red Book, the Employer has an obligation not to impose “further constraints on the Engineer's Authority except as agreed with the Contractor." This change may be seen as potentially affecting the balance of risk.

 

The second amendment under sub-clause 3.1 requires the Engineer to obtain the Employer's approval before acting under sub-clauses 4.12, 13.1, 13.3 and 13.4.

3.5: Determinations

In both the 1999 Red Book and the Pink Book, the Engineer is required to give the Contractor and the Employer notice of its determination of any matter not agreed between the parties. However, the Pink Book is more onerous for the Engineer as it now fixes a time limit for the determination (28 days from receipt of the corresponding claim or request).

Clause 4: The Con

tractor

4.1: General Contractor’s Obligations

The Pink Book adds to the 1999 Red Book by requiring the contractor to source all equipment, material, and services for use on the Works from an eligible source country (as defined by the Bank). For more information, see IBRD Guidelines of Procurement under IBRD Loans and IDA Credit.

 

4.2: Performance Security

The Pink Book requires the Performance Security to be issued by "a reputable bank or financial institution" selected by the Contractor. Unlike the Red Book there is no requirement for the Employer to approve the entity and country (or other jurisdiction) from which it is issued.

 

Sub-paragraphs (a) to (d) of the 1999 Red Book contain a list of circumstances under which the Employer is entitled to make a call under the Performance Security provisions. The Pink Book removes this list.

 

The Employer is now able to make a call-in respect of amounts to which it is entitled under the Contract. This may be seen as an extension of the Employer's rights. However, the recommended text for the performance (which stipulates that the ICC Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees, Rule 458, shall govern the guarantee) should provide sufficient protection as this lists the events giving rise to a call as well as the reasons for such a call.

 

The Pink Book adds a new paragraph to the end of the sub-clause, allowing the Engineer to request a prompt increase or decrease of the Performance Security, where a Variation or determination results in a reduction of the Contract Price by more than 25% of the portion of the Contract Price payable in a specific currency.

 

The adjustment to the Performance Security will be the equivalent of the percentage change to the Contract Price.

4.3: Contractor’s Representative

The second paragraph in this sub-clause requires the Contractor to submit the name and particulars of the person who it proposes to be the Contractor's Representative (if not named in the Contract). This process must be repeated where the Engineer withholds or revokes consent for the Contractor's appointee, or where the appointee fails to act as the Contractor's Representative. The Pink Book reiterates that the Engineer's withholding or revocation of consent for the Contractor's Representative must be based on the grounds in sub-clause 6.9.

4.4: Sub-contractor

The Pink Book expands confidentiality requirements to cover this clause. Encourages the use of sub-contractors from the country in which the project is being constructed.

4.15: Access Route

The Pink Book now includes the words "Base Date", to provide certainty on when the Contractor should have been deemed satisfied as to the suitability of the Access Route.

Clause 5: Nominated Subcontractors

 

5.2: Objection to Nomination

The Pink Book has a number of additional grounds upon which the Contractor can object to a Nominated Sub Contractor.

 

 

Clause 6: Staff and Labour

 

6.1: Engagement of Staff and Labour

The Pink Book amends the 1999 Red Book to try to encourage Contractors to employ staff and labour from the country where the Works are carried out. This is not an obligation but reflects the MDB's desire to encourage local enterprise.

6.2: Rates of Wages and Conditions of Labour

The Pink Book obliges the Contractor to inform all Contractor Personnel about their liability to pay personal income taxes in the Country.

6.7: Health and Safety

The Pink Book includes a specific provision whereby the World Bank tries to reduce the transfer of AIDS through HIV-AIDS awareness campaigns.

6.12 to 6.22: Particular Locality sub-clauses

These sub-clauses, which used to be found in the 1999 Red Book's Particular Conditions to take account of local labour and health and safety regulations, are no longer optional under the Pink Book. They cover issues such as:

 

•     Foreign personnel.

•     Supply of foodstuffs. •     Supply of water.

•     Measures against insect and pest nuisance.

•     Alcoholic liquor or drugs. Arms and munitions. •            Religious customs.

 

The impact of these sub-clauses is to increase the Contractor's administrative costs, in particular sub-clause 6.22 (which deals with employment records of workers and requires “complete and accurate records of the employment of labour").

6.23: Workers’ Organisations

The Pink Book introduces a provision that recognises the workers' rights to form and to join workers' organisations of their choice, and to bargain collectively, without interference by the Contractor.

6.24: Non-Discrimination and Equal Opportunity

The Pink Book introduces a provision requiring The Contractor to base the employment relationship on principles of "equal opportunity and fair treatment".

Clause 7: Plant, materials, and workmanship

7.7: Ownership of Plant and Materials

Under the Pink Book, and Plant or Materials become the property of the Employer either when they are incorporated into the Works or when the Contractor is paid for them.

Clause 8: Commencements, Delays and Suspension

8.1: Commencement of Works

The first paragraph of the 1999 Red Book has been replaced in the Pink Book: The Project cannot commence unless the Contract Agreement has been signed by both parties, the Contractor has reasonable proof that the Employer can fund the Project and the Contractor has received any advance payment to which it is entitled. However, it is less clear when the actual commencement date is, as the maximum 42-day limit has been removed.

     
 

8.4: Extension of Time for Completion

Under the Pink Book, the Contractor is now entitled to an extension of time for delays caused by the Employer's other contractors anywhere (not just restricted to the Site).

 

8.6: Rate of Progress

The Contractor is entitled to payment for the Costs of acceleration. However, in the Pink Book, the sub-clause states that the Contractor is not entitled to " any other additional benefit". It is not clear if this means profit.

8.12: Resumption of Work

Under the Pink Book, following suspension, the Contractor should only make good any deterioration or defect in or loss to the Works, Plant or Materials after having received an instruction from the Engineer.

Clause 11: Defect liability

11.3 Extension of Defect, Notification Period

Due to an amendment in the Pink Book (compared to the 1999 Red Book), it would appear that the Employer can only claim for an extension to the Defects Notification Period, if the damage can be attributed to the Contractor.

Clause 12: Measurement and evaluation

 

12.1: Works to be Measured

The Pink Book requires the Contractor to show, in each application for payment (both interim and/or final), quantities or particulars detailing the amounts which the Contractor considers itself to be entitled to.

12.3: Evaluation

The thresholds for the rates that can trigger the use of rates other than those specified in the Contract have been increased in the Pink Book, compared to the 1999 Red Book. Furthermore, any item that was not priced in the Bill of Quantities is to be included in other rates and prices in the Bill of Quantities and will not be paid for separately. This could mean that the Contractor is responsible for additional costs accruing from any omission.

Clause 13: Variations and adjustments

13.1: Right to Vary

Under the Pink Book, the Contractor is not bound to execute a variation if it would "trigger a substantial change in the sequence or progress of the Works." The Contractor has the obligation to demonstrate the substantial change.

13.7: Adjustments for Changes in

Legislation            

Under the Pink Book, the Contractor is not entitled to an extension of time and/or costs under this sub-clause, if they have already been considered elsewhere.

Clause 14: Contract price and payment

 

14.1: The Contract Price

Under the Pink Book, Construction Equipment is now exempt from import duties when imported.

       
 

14.2: Advance Payment

The Pink Book requires the guarantee to be issued by "a reputable bank or financial institution" selected by the Contractor. Unlike the Red Book, there is no requirement for the Employer to approve the entity and country (or other jurisdiction) from which it is issued. In the event of a termination of the contract by the Employer for convenience, the Contractor is not required (unlike under the Red Book) to repay the balance of the advance payment.

14.7: Payment

The Pink Book amends the 1999 Red Book, to take account of the event where a Bank loan or credit is suspended.

14.9: Payment and Retention Money

Under the Pink Book, a bank guarantee can be provided in lieu of retention.

Clause 15: Termination by Employer

15.5: Employers Entitlement to Termination for Convenience

The Pink Book imposes limits on the Employer's right to terminate at his own convenience: The Employer cannot terminate the Contract just because he wants to pre-empt the Contractor's termination.

15.6: Corrupt or Fraudulent Practices

A new clause dealing with corrupt or fraudulent practices has been inserted into the Pink Book. The amendment is consistent with the global trend to seek to prevent fraud and corruption. The contractual sanction is that the Employer may terminate the Contract if it determines "based on reasonable evidence" that the Contractor has engaged in a fraudulent practice. The definition of "fraudulent practice" is very broad. A misrepresentation or omission of facts in order to influence a procurement process or the execution of a contract") and may have far-reaching implications for the Contractor in the administration of the Contract.

Clause 16: Suspension and termination by Contractor

16.1: Contractor’s Entitlement to Suspend Work

 

                                 

If the Bank suspends payment of the funds from which the Contractor is paid, and no alternative funds are available, the Contractor can suspend or reduce the rate of work it performs at any time (having received a notice from the

Bank).                                                                   

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

16.2: Termination by Contractors

The grounds on which the Contractor can terminate the Contract have been amended in the Pink Book. It is not enough for the Employer to fail to perform its obligations under the Contract. The Employer's breaches must "materially and adversely affect the economic balance of the Contract and/or the ability of the Contractor to perform the Contract." The Pink Book includes two new grounds for termination:

 

•     If the Bank suspends the loan or credit from which the Contractor is paid and 14 days after the Contractor has followed the payment mechanism under sub-clause 14.7, it has still not received the sums due to it, the Contractor can suspend work, reduce its rate of work, or terminate the Contract.

 

 

•     If the Contractor does not receive the Engineer's instruction to commence work 180 days after the Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor may terminate the Contract.

Clause 17: Risk and Responsibility

 

17.1: Indemnities

The Pink Book's indemnity from the Contractor is enlarged (compared to the 1999 Red Book) from that caused by the Contractor to cover all damage or loss however arising, except that only attributable to the Employer.

17.3: Employer’s Risks

The Employer's risks under the Pink Book have been amended slightly from the 1999 Red Book and are less onerousfor the Employer.

17.6: Limitation of Liability

The limitation of liability under the Pink Book clarifies the liabilities that are not covered. The cap contained in the 1999 Red Book is replacedby a multiplier.

 

Clause 18: Insurance

18.1: General Requirements for Insurance

Under the Pink Book, the Contractor must approve any insurance taken out by the Employer. When the Contractor is the Insuring Party under clause 18, it is entitled to take out insurance with insurers from any eligible country.

Clause 19: Force Majeure

19.1: Definition of Force Majeure

The Pink Book expands "Force Majeure" to include sabotage by any person other than the Contractor's Personnel.

19.2: Notice of Force Majeure

In order to claim Force Majeure, the claiming party must have been prevented from performing "its substantial obligations."

19.4: Consequences of Force Majeure

The Contractor's entitlement, if Force Majeure is demonstrated, has been expanded under the MDB

     

 

Harmonised Edition.
 

19.6: Optional Termination, Payment and Release

The Pink Book has been amended so that the Contractor can only claim amounts reasonably and necessarily incurred by it.

Clause 20: Claims, Disputes and Arbitration                                          

20.2: Appointment of the Dispute Board

The Pink Book does not significantly amend the Dispute Resolution Procedure under clause 20. The main amendments relate to the Dispute Adjudication Board, now described as Dispute Board (DB). One of these amendments is that the DB members need to be fluent in the language of communication of the Contract and be professionals experienced in the work of the Contract

20.4: Obtaining Dispute Board’s Decision

Under the Pink Book, if any party issues a Notice of Dissatisfaction, the notice should state that, if an amicable settlement is not reached, the Party has the

"Intention to commence arbitration".

20.6: Arbitration

Under the Pink Book, if the Contract is with a foreign contractor, the rules applicable to the arbitration will depend on the entity providing the financing. For contracts financed by all participating Banks (except the Asian Development Bank) the arbitration is to be administered:

 

(1)     by the institution specified in the Contract Data, under the rules of that institution, or

(2)     if specified in the Contract Data, arbitration in accordance with UNCITRAL rules, or

(3)     if neither are specified in the Contract Data, proceedings are to be administered by the ICC under ICC rules

For contracts financed by the Asian Development Bank, the arbitration is to be administered:

 

(1)     by the institution specified in the Contract Data, under the rules of that institution, unless it is specified that the arbitration is to be conducted in accordance with UNCITRAL rules, or

(4)     if an arbitration institution is not specified in the Contract Data, proceedings are to be administered by the Singapore International Arbitration Centre (SIAC) under SIAC rules.

 

4. Introduction to FIDIC Gold Book

Over the years there have been an increasing number of projects that are procured on a Design, Build and Operate (DBO) basis. In recognition of the growing sophistication of the market and the preference of some Employers for projects procured on that basis, FIDIC issued a DBO contract form in 2008. The Contract addresses the risks and responsibilities associated with such long-term projects. The contract is known as the FIDIC Design, Build and Operate Contract 1st edition; it has a gold cover and is known commonly as the Gold Book. Work on the contract had begun in 2004, and as is common to all FIDIC contracts, the task force drafting the Gold Book was engaged in wide consultations prior to its launch in 2008.

 

The Gold Book combines design, construction, and long-term operation (and maintenance) of a facility into one single contract awarded to a single contractor (this could be a joint venture or a consortium).

 

A Design, Build and Operate (DBO) arrangement can be based on either a “green field‟ scenario or on a “brown field‟ scenario (Operate-Design-Build). Both formats are common and require slightly different contractual requirements and procedures. The FIDIC Gold Book is produced as a DBO green field scenario, with guidelines on the changes that would be required to make it suitable for a brown field arrangement. The FIDIC Gold Book envisages a 20-year operation period but also contains guidelines for instances that a shorter period is required.

 

4.1 Advantages of the Gold Book

The proponents of the Gold Book point to the following advantages of the contract:

 

•     Time: By providing for a single point of responsibility, the projects will gain time efficiency from the usual overlap of design and build activities. It should be possible on account of this to minimize delays and optimize the smooth flow of construction activities.

•     Finance: With cost restraints and commitments and other risks being carried by the Contractor, there is less risk of price over-runs.

•     Quality: With the Contractor responsible for 20 years operation of the project, the Contractor has an interest to design and build a quality plant with low operation and maintenance costs. Thus, not only will the works meet the fit for purpose requirement, but it will also last.

 

 

4.2 Concept of the FIDIC Gold Book

The Gold Book follows the format and layout of the 1999 FIDIC forms. It has 20 clauses, and where appropriate, uses the same terminology and definitions which are found in the 1999 forms. The Contract is divided into two parts:

 

Part I General Conditions and

Part II Particular Conditions, including flow charts and sample forms.

 

In the Gold Book, Part II- Conditions of Particular Application is further divided into Part A and Part B:

Part A provides the information supplied by the Employer - the Contract Data. Part B includes the special Conditions for the project to be filled where necessary. The Order of Precedence for these documents is provided as:

1. Particular Conditions Part A: Contract Data

2. Particular Conditions Part B: Special Provisions 3. General Conditions

 

A complete and validGold Book Contract can be based on the General Conditions and the Contract Data. However, most contracts will employ the Special Provisions section to insert provisions peculiar to the specific project. In terms of concept, the Gold Book is similar to the 1999 FIDIC Yellow Book. The Design and Build section of the Yellow Book forms the foundation of the Gold Book. The Gold Book has three principal parties, to wit: the Employer, the Contractor and the Employer’s Representative. Other non- principal Parties include the Dispute Adjudication Board and the independent audit body.

 

In the Gold Book, the Contractor assumes responsibility for the design and construction of the works and for the operation and maintenance of the works before it is finally handed over to the Employer. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to design and build the project and ensure that it is fit for the purpose intended as defined by the Contract. The Contractor is also to operate the completed facility in accordance with the operational plans agreed to by the parties.

 

Like the Yellow Book, the Gold Book processes centres around testing and certification. Thus, the works is completed and accepted once the Employer’s Representative has issued the Commissioning Certificate. Performance of the contractor’s obligations in respect of the contract will be considered to have been completed once the Employer’s Representative has issued the Contract Completion Certificate.

 

4.3. Provisions

TheGold Bookadoptsmost of the innovationsof the FIDIC 1999 forms.Theimportant changes in the provisions of the Gold Book that sets it apart from the other FIDIC forms can be found in the following clauses:

 

Clause 1

This deals with general provisions. In the most, it maintains the same definitions as the 1999 FIDIC forms. However, a few new terms are added to the definitions section. These include the following:

 

1.1.1.3 Operating Licence 1.1.1.10 Contract Data

1.1.1.11 Operation Management System 1.1.2.11 Auditing Body

1.1.3.3. Contract Period

1.1.3.4/5 Design-Build/Operation Service Period 1.1.3.8 Commissioning Certificate

1.1.3.11 Contract Completion Certificate 1.1.3.14 Retention Period

1.1.3.15 Cut Off Date 1.1.4.5 Cost plus Profit

1.1.4.17MaintenanceRetentionFundMaintenance Retention Guarantee 1.1.4.18 Asset Replacement Fund

1.1.5.9/10 Design-Build/Operation Service 1.1.6.4 Exceptional Risk

1.1.6.10 Operation and Maintenance Plan

 

Some of the definitions given to the new terms include:

•     Cut-off Date - The Contractors failure to complete the Design and Build segment prior to this date entitles the Employer to either terminate the contract or set another date

•     Financial Memorandum - this is a document that sets out the Employers

financial arrangements for the project.

 

•     The Commissioning Certificate indicates that the Works have been fully designed and erected, and that the Works have passed the Tests on Completion of Design-Build.

•     The Commissioning Period means that period when commissioning tests are being carried out on Completion of Design-Build stage.

 

 

Clause 2

This is concerned with the Employer. Under sub-clause2.4, [Employer’s Financial Arrangements] of the Gold Book, the Employer must provide details of his financial arrangements from the outset in a Financial Memorandum to be submitted at tender stage. Also, under the sub-clause 2.4, where the Employer intends to make any material changes to the financial arrangements or must do so because of changes in his financial or economic situation, the Employer shall give Notice to the Contractor, with detailed particulars.

 

Clause 4

This clause deals with the Contractor. Under sub-clause 4.2 [Performance Security] the Gold Book implies that the Performance Security (albeit reduced) shall be valid also for the duration of the Operation Service Period. This would be for a 20-year period.

 

Clause 9

This deals with the Design and Build Period of the project. The provisions here are very similar to those of the 1999 Yellow Book. The main difference is that in the Gold Book, unlike the Yellow Book, the completion of the Design and Build stage of the project is vital to the commencement of the operation stage.

 

Sub-clause 9.12

This gives the criteria necessary for completion to be achieved, and for the Commissioning Certificate to be issued. The Commissioning Certificate is the equivalent of the Taking Over Certificate found in the other FIDIC forms, but in the Gold Book it certifies that the design and build stage is complete and signals the commencement of the operation service stage.

 

Sub-clause 9.13

This provides for the Contractor’s failure to complete. It provides that if the Contractor fails to complete by the Cut-Off Date, the Employer is entitled to terminate. The contract allows for an immediate start of the Operation Service Period and the Contractor is entitled to assume this will be the case. If the Employer delays the start, then the Contractor will be entitled to financial compensation.

 

Clause 10

This deals with the Operation Service Period.

 

Subclause10.1

This requires the Contractor to follow the agreed methods of operation given in the Operation Management System, and to generally look after the facility in accordance with the Maintenance Plan. The Operation Management System is prepared by the Employer and the Operation and Maintenance Plan is prepared by the Contractor.

 

Sub-clause10.2

This deals with the Commencement of Operation Service. Inconjunction with Clause 9.12, commencement is on the issuance of the Commissioning Certificate.

 

Sub-clause 10.3

 

This deals with the Licence Agreement between the Employer and the Contractor. This is the agreement where the Employer gives the Contractor the powers allowing him to operate the works on his behalf. The procedure is that a licence is agreed and signed and becomes binding within 28 days after the Letter of Acceptance. However, it does not come into effect until the Commissioning Certificate is issued, signifying the commencement of the Operation Service Period of the contract. The licence remains in force until the Contract Completion Certificate is issued at the end of the Operation Service Period.

 

Sub-clauses 10.3 and 10.4

These deal with another innovation of the Gold Book, the Independent Compliance Audit. During the 20-year Operation Service Period, FIDIC creates an independent ‘auditing body’, whose job is to monitor the performance of both parties to see that each is performing its duty as set out in the operation management system and maintenance plan. Both parties are enjoined to cooperate with the auditing body. The auditing shall not ‘instruct’ or ‘decide’ on any issue. It is there to monitor and advice. The body is appointed jointly by the parties prior to the commencement of the Operation Service stage and paid from a Provisional Sum in the Contract.

 

Sub-clause 10.5

This deals with delivery of Raw Materials and places this responsibility on the Employer.

 

Sub-clause 10.6 deals with the training of the Employer’s staff.

 

Sub-clause 10.7 deals with delays and interruptions in the Operation Service stage – this addresses delays caused by (a) the Contractor; (b) the Employer; and (c) suspension ordered by the Employer. In any of the above cases, compensation is purely financial. There is no provision to extend the Operation Service period.

 

Sub-clause 10.8

Is concerned with the failure to Reach Production Outputs - compensation here is financial, although prolonged failure can lead to termination.

 

Sub-clause 10.9

This is concerned with the Completion of Operation Service.

 

Clause 11

This clause deals with Testing. All testing requirements, both on completion of the Design and Build stage and prior to completion of the Contract are now covered in this Clause.

 

Sub-clause 11.8

This provides for Joint Inspection Prior to Contract Completion. The Contractor is to submit a report identifying maintenance works, replacements andother works required to be carried out to satisfy the requirements of the Operation and Maintenance Plan two years prior to the expiry date of the Operation Service Period. The Contractor is also to carry out all or part of the works identified.

 

Sub-clause 11.9

This is concerned with tests prior to completion. The tests are to becarried out towards the endoftheOperation ServicePeriod. TheContractoris tonotifythe Employer, that the Works are complete and ready for final inspection.

 

Clause 12

This clause is concerned with defects. Although there is an obligation on the Contractor

 

to repair and make good defects, there is no ‘defects liability period’. The reason for this is that the Contractor is responsible for operating the plant, so he is expected to make good any defects that occur during that period.

 

 

Clause 13

Deals with Variations. In the Gold Book sub-clause 13.1 the Employers right to ordera variation is restricted during the Operation Service Period. Where the employer wishes to instruct a variation during the Operation Service Period, the contractor shall not be obliged to proceed with the variation unless both parties have agreedon the price. The Gold Book maintains the Employer’s right to initiate variations at any time prior to issuing the Contract Completion Certificate for the works. As also provided in the other FIDIC forms, the contractor has only limited grounds to qualify such variation instruction, these are:

 

1. the Contractor cannot readily obtain the Goods required for the Variation,

2. it will reduce the safety or suitability of the Works for the purposes for which they were intended under the Contract,

3. it will have an adverse impact on the achievement of the Schedule of guarantees, or

4. it will have an adverse effect on the provision of the Operation Service under the Contract.

 

Notwithstanding any objections raised by the contractor, the Employer’s Representative may still confirm his instruction, and then the only remedy open to the contractor is to refer the matter to the Dispute Adjudication Board.

 

Clause 14

This clause deals with Payment. These provisions are essentiallydividedinto payment for the design and build work, and payment for the operation service stage. The Design and Buildprovisions aresimilar in principle tothose found in the1999 Yellow Book with the Contractor entitled to submit his final statement for the Design and Build on the completion of the Design-Build Period.

 

The final statement for the Operation Service is submitted at the end of the Operation Service Period.

 

Two interesting Innovations in Gold Book are:

 

A. The creation of an Asset Replacement Fund under Clause 14.14. This is to provide funds for essential replacements during the Operation Service. The Contractoristoprepareascheduleofitemsthatwill requirereplacementduring the Operation Service Period to ensure the efficient functioning of the facility. TheFundistocoverreplacementsthatdonotfall undertheresponsibilityofthe Contractor during the Operation Service (the Contractor will be responsible for such replacement as regular maintenance, replacement of spares which are the Contractors duty). The remaining money in the Asset Replacement Fund at the completion of the Contract shall be shared equally between the Parties. The Contractor shall be entitled to include his share in his Application for Final Payment Certificate Operation Service.

 

B. The provision of a Maintenance Retention Fund in sub-clause 14.19. This is simply money withheld from the Contractor to ensure that he carries out essential maintenance required under the Contract.

 

The argument here is that this would act as an incentive to ensure that the Works are in proper condition. It shall be created by deducting five percent from payments within the Operation Service Period. All remaining funds shall be paid with the final payment. It may be replaced by the Contractor providing a Maintenance Retention Guarantee bond.

 

Clause 15

This clause deals with the Employer’s right to terminate. The content of this clause in the Gold Book is like the other 1999 FIDIC forms. However, under the Gold Book there is an important change. While the right of the Employer to terminate for convenience is maintained and can still be exercised at any time on 28 days’ written notice; unlike the 1999 FIDIC forms where the Contractor could not recover loss of profit in the event oftermination for the Employer’s convenience, under sub-clauses 15.5 and 15.7 of the Gold Book the Contractor may recover for loss of profit following such termination. It is important to note that under the FIDIC forms an employer may not terminate under this sub-clause for the purpose of undertaking or operating the works directly or arranging for the works to be completed or operated by another contractor.

 

Clauses 17, 18 and 19

These clauses deal with risks and insurance, the Gold Book addresses these matters in a logical sequence- thus: Clause 17 deals with General Risks, Clause 18 with Exceptional Risks and having defined and allocated these risks, Clause 19 deals with Insurance.

 

TheGold Bookdifferentiates between risks that occur duringthe Design-Build Period and those arising during the Operation Service Period. The Gold Book also clearly differentiates between risks which result in physical loss or damage, and risks which result in financial or time loss. The Gold Book drops the term Force Majeure (which has several differing legal interpretations in different jurisdictions) and reverts to exceptional risks.

 

Under the Gold Book, the Contractor bears the risks that occur during design. Because design-build contracts are typically lump-sum contracts, the Contractor also assumes the risk for overrun and under-run of anticipated material quantities.

 

During the operational and maintenance segment of the contract the Contractor is also responsible for all risks that occur during operation because he maintains and operates the plant.

 

The Employer’s risks have been listed in a different way for the Design-Build Period and for the Operation Service Period. In addition, the Gold Book has taken into consideration risks that are beyond the control of the parties, especially those arising from political factors and exceptional weather conditions. Those risks are often called force majeure risks. Even though the Gold Book refers to it as “Exceptional Risks” the substance of the provision is the same with the force majeure risks of the other FIDIC forms.

 

Clause 20

This deals with Contractor claims and dispute resolution. The wording of this clause is similar to previous forms. However, the Gold Book provides some interesting changes.

 

Sub-clause 20.1

At sub-paragraph (a) provides that circumstances may exist that justify the late

 

submission of a notice and provides explicit powers to the Dispute Adjudication Board (DAB) to rule on the validity of a notice submitted later than 28 days of an event. In addition to the first 28-day notice period, the contractor is, according to subparagraph (c), subject to a 42-day period by which he must send a fully detailed claim with full supporting particulars to the Employer’s Representative. Sub-paragraph (c) provides thus:” the Notice given under paragraph (a) above shall be deemed to have lapsed and shall no longer be considered as a valid Notice,” if the contractor fails to establish the principles of the claim within the said 42 days or other time allowed or approve‟.

 

Sub-clause 20.3

This jettisons the ad-hoc DAB created by the 1999 Yellow Book and the Silver Book. Under the provisions of the Gold Book, the DAB is a standing body as envisaged by the FIDIC 1999 Red Book. Under theGold Book, Disputesarising during the Design-Build Period shall be adjudicated by one person or three persons jointly appointed by the date stated in the Contract Data. Disputes arising during the Operation Service Period shall be settled by a one-person Operation Service DAB. This DAB is to be jointly agreed and appointed at the time of issuing the Commissioning Certificate.Appointment is for a termof fiveyears, and re-appointment ispermitted. Sub-clause 20.9 corrects the apparent errors found in the FIDIC 1999 Books by expanding the language to include, “binding or final and binding” in place of only “final and binding”. The effect of this is that a decision of the DAB would be binding but not final where a party serves a notice of dissatisfaction. A literal interpretation of sub-clause 20.9 in the 1999 forms, made a DAB decision non-binding where one of the parties serves a notice of dissatisfaction.

 

TheGold Bookprovides for a single point ofresponsibility in a project. This arguably significantly reduces the demands on the Employer’s resources. It also reduces interface challenges. The objective of the Gold Book is to encourage the use of reliable and efficient technology in construction.It encourages theuse of innovative, cost-saving approaches with provisions like the Asset Replacement Fund encouraging the Contractor to be prudent.

 

Summary

The study of the Pink Book and the Gold Book completes our study of the pre- 2017 FIDIC suites. The next topic examines some of the changes that the recently launched FIDIC Books have made to the 1999 Editions.

 

References

 

1. FIDIC Conditions of Contract for Construction for building and engineering works designed by the employer (Multilateral Development Bank Harmonised Edition March 2006

 

2. Khalid Ramzan, FIDIC goes Gold. Construction Law 2009.

 

3. Gabriel Swinney, The Dubious upgrade of international development contracts (2006-2007) International Law and Management Review 145

 

4. Broman, H., Kehlenbach, F, ‘EIC Contractor’s Guide to the FIDIC Conditions of Contract for Design, Build and Operate Projects (Gold Book) [2010] ICLR 77

 

5. Jaeger, Axel-Volkmar, Hok, Gotz-Sebastien, ‘FIDIC Conditions of Contract for Design, Build and Operate Projects, First Edition – A new Approach [2010] ICLR 36-76

 

6. Christopher, Wade C, ‘FIDIC introduces the New DBO Form of Contract- The New Gold Book for Design, Build and Operate Projects’ [2008] ICLR14

 

7. Landsberry, S., ‘FIDIC Design Build Operate – Glitter or Gold? [2008] ICLR156

 

(Electronic copies of the above and many other relevant materials are accessible from the RGU Library through the Reading list on the Moodle page of the Module).

 

Topic 4: The 2017 FIDIC Red, Yellow and Silver Books

 

 

Topic Preview

 

This topic reviews the FIDIC 2017 suite of contracts. It examines the concepts, structure/presentation, and key themes of the of the new Red, Yellow and Silver Books together and consider some of the key changes to the contents of the three books. Some provisions of the new forms will be highlighted. In doing so, priority will be given to new provisions.

 

Topic Content

 

1. Introduction

 

For nearly two decades, FIDIC’s flagship of Conditions of Contract have been the forms known as Red, Yellow and Silver Books. These forms marked a significant departure from the pre-1999 FIDIC Conditions in terms of style, structure, and content. Since 1999, FIDIC has continued to develop/update several other forms – see table below – but that process excluded the 1999 Editions. As has been the practice of FIDIC, changes are often ‘piloted’ in one new update or the other before a massive roll-out is carried out.

 

Post 1999 FIDIC Forms

The White Book

Client/Consultant Model Services Agreement (4th Edn, 2006)

The Gold Book

Conditions of Contract for Design, Build and Operate Projects (1st Edn, 2008)

The Blue-Green Book

Form of Contract for Dredging and Reclamation Works (Dredgers Contract; First & Second Editions, 2006 and 2016 respectively)

The Pink Book

Conditions of Contract for Construction (Multilateral Development Bank Harmonised Edn. Version 3: June 2010

 

Sometime between 2009 and 2010, FIDIC’s Contract Committee together with an initial Update Task Group started a review and update of the 1999 FIDIC 1999 suite of contracts. The Group’s terms of reference included taking further the harmonisation process of the Red, Yellow and Silver Books which had started with the first edition. The FIDIC Contracts Committee was also mandated to consider and adopt, where appropriate, innovations introduced in the Gold Book (2008) and Pink Book (2010). Other issues which the Contract Committee and the Initial and Second Stage Update Task Groups were to consider were

 

 

1 | Page

 

international best practice and feedback from users. After working quietly behind the scenes for years, the Contract Committee started testing proposed changes to the 1999 forms at various FIDIC Users’ Conferences. For instance, at the 2016 FIDIC Users’ Conference held in London, the Contract Committee discussed proposed changes to the Yellow Book under ‘friendly review’ among other current developments on the contract front. A draft of the Yellow Book in hard copy was made available to participants and discussed in some detail. The preview of the new Yellow Book led some contractor groups to raise concerns with the drafts, which FIDIC promised to consider prior to release of the new forms. Finally, in December 2017 the new Red, Yellow and Silver Books (hereafter referred to as ‘RB2’, ‘YB2’ and ‘SB2’ respectively) were launched at the 2017 FIDIC Users’ conference in London.

 

It is fair to state that the changes introduced by FIDIC are not revolutionary but certainly give insight into FIDIC’ s efforts to maintain its core principle of balanced risk sharing and at the same time pay attention to current trends in the industry in areas such as working collaboratively and dispute avoidance. According to FIDIC, the main goal of the amendments was to increase clarity and certainty. There was also the aim to reduce likely misunderstandings on interpretations. Consequently, the forms have been made more prescriptive, with a clear outline of step-by-step project management and procedural mechanisms setting out the requirements on the employer, contractor, and the engineer. It is hoped that this approach will reduce dispute occurrence. FIDIC also argues that it has endeavoured to use simple language because users are often secondary users of the English language. The use of simple language is also to facilitate translation into other languages. On the simple language point, there is a disagreement as some commentators think that the increased verbiage is not that helpful. The foreword to the forms identifies four areas where significant changes have been made; it is said that the new forms provide: -

a. greater detail and clarity on the requirements for notices and other communications

b. provisions to address Employers’ and Contractors’ claims treated equally and separated from disputes

c. mechanisms for dispute avoidance, and

d. detailed provisions for quality management, and verification of Contractor’s contractual compliance.

 

In addition to the above, the new contract forms also provide some enhancements to the project management system under the 1999 forms. These include the following:

a. A new provision on management meetings (See sub-clause 3.8 of the Red and Yellow Books and 3.8 of the Silver Book).

 

 

 

2 | Page

 

b. Detailed requirements in relation to contractors’ programme of work.

c. New provisions on the setting up and implementation of a Quality management system. There are also verification systems in place in relation to compliance with works, materials, plant, and workmanship requirements under the contract.

d. Requirement for a Health and Safety Manual in relation to the specific Works and Site to be provided by the Contractor.

e. Advance warning provision under Sub-clause 8(4) of the contract. f. Guidance for the Preparation of Particular Conditions which provides parties option in terms of what milestones are to be

agreed.

 

Please note that FIDIC has published a correction (Erratum) to each of the contracts published in December 2017. Copies of these Errata are available on Moodle. You will have to read the main texts of each contract form with these corrections in mind.

 

 

The new developments translate into significant changes in several themes covered by the first editions of the forms. A brief thematic review of some of the significant changes will follow a discussion of some of the subclauses in the new forms. It is worth noting that most of the changes made to the 2017 Edition of the FIDIC suite cut across the Red, Yellow and Silver Books. Consequently, the approach of discussing each contract form separately is abandoned for a harmonised examination of all three forms. As has been the approach across this module, understanding the new forms will necessarily require prior engagement with the 1999 editions of the forms. Please take steps to explore both the 1999 and 2017 contract forms as much as possible. In doing so, please pay attention to the changes which have been made to the 1999 edition in the 2017 version.

 

2. The 2017 FIDIC Conditions Selected changes to the 1st Editions

There have been several changes made to the 1st edition of the FIDIC

Conditions, some significant, others minor. Among the significant changes are the following:

1. Change to contract structure 2. Definitions

3. Risk allocation

4. The new role of the Engineer

5. Extensive prescriptive contract administration procedures – e.g. new provisions on notices, early warning, and programme

6. Greater parity between parties

7. New provisions on quality management

8. Stronger emphasis on, and procedures for dispute avoidance 9. Separation of claim procedure from dispute resolution

 

3 | Page

 

10. Changes to the dispute resolution process – introduction of the Dispute Avoidance /Adjudication Board (DAAB) & changes to the period for Amicable settlement

 

Some of these changes are discussed in detail below. Others, not so much. It will be useful to spend some of your research hours examining the detailed changes in the new forms and how these will translate into changes in practice.

 

3. Contract Structure and Concepts

The Second edition of the FIDIC Red, Yellow and Silver Books retain the common FIDIC presentation format of a two-part contract. The new

forms are divided into Part I (General Conditions) and Part II (Particular Conditions). They adopt the arrangement in the Pink Book and divide the Particular Conditions (PartII) into PartA andPart B. Part A (Contract Data) contains the information supplied by the Employer for the Contract Data pursuant to differentsub-clauses across the GeneralConditions-see clauses listed on pages 3-7 of the Guidance for the Preparation of Particular Conditions in the new Red Book (RB2). These are project-specific information previously contained in the Appendix to Tender. Part B (Special Provisions) contains provisions which amend or supplement the General Conditions. These provisions take precedence over the counterpart provisions in the General Conditions. Other documents in the new forms include the General Conditions of Dispute Avoidance and Adjudication, the Dispute Avoidance and Adjudication Board (DAAB) Procedural Rules, the Agreement, Guidance for the preparation of the Particular Conditions and samples of various forms.

 

Compared to previous editions, the new forms are significantly lengthier, with each form containing nearly twice as much as the word count in the previous edition. The Red Book 2 is made up of 225 pages from the previous 128. The Yellow Book 2 has 231 pages instead of the previous 130 pages, and the Silver Book now has 223 pages as compared to the previous 122 pages. FIDIC attributes the additional length of the forms to the drive for clarity and transparency which has resulted in more prescriptive forms. The more words in the new forms may also be because the General Conditions have an extra clause. The former Clause 20 dealing with both claims and disputes has been split into separate clause for claims (Clause 20) and disputes (Clause 21). Some clauses have been expanded to set out specific procedures more clearly. There are also more detailed guidance notes for preparation of the forms. The forms also contain guidance notes on the use of Building information Modelling (BIM).

 

In the past, some parties using the FIDIC forms had altered the original standard contracts drastically thereby tampering with the fair and balanced risk sharing approach of FIDIC. To counteract this practice, FIDIC has set

 

4 | Page

 

out five ‘Golden Principles’ which must be considered by parties amending the General Conditions through the Special Provision. FIDIC reproduces the five Golden principles in the Guidance for Preparation:

 

FIDIC strongly recommends that the Employer, the Contractor and all drafters of the Special Provisions take all due regard of the five FIDIC Golden Principles:

GP1: The duties, rights, obligations, roles and responsibilities of all the Contract Participants must be generally as implied in the General Conditions, and appropriate to the requirements of the project.

 

GP2: The Particular Conditions must be drafted clearly and unambiguously.

 

GP3: The Particular Conditions must not change the balance of risk/reward allocation provided for in the General Conditions.

 

GP4: All time periods specified in the Contract for Contract Participants to perform their obligations must be of reasonable duration.

 

GP5: All formal disputes must be referred to a Dispute Avoidance/Adjudication Board (or a Dispute Adjudication Board, if applicable) for a provisionally binding decision as a condition precedent to arbitration.

For any FIDIC Condition to retain its form as a FIDIC Contract, parties and drafters are encouraged to adhere to the Golden Principles. This will ensure that alterations:

(a)     are limited to those necessary for the particular features of the Site and the project, and necessary to comply with the applicable law,

(b)     do notchange the essentialfairand balanced character of a FIDIC contract; and

(c)     the Contract remains recognisable as a FIDIC contract.

 

 

4. Clauses

The rest of the notes will examine some specific provisions of the new contract forms. Towards the end of this examination, other subclauses will be reviewed thematically.

 

Sub-clause 1.1 sets out definitions of defined terms. There have been significant additions to the definition section in the new forms. In addition to the 58 defined terms in the Red Book 1st Edition (RB1), there are 30 new defined terms bringing the total number to 88. From 58 defined terms in the Yellow Book 1, the YB2 now has 90 defined terms.

 

5 | Page

 

This implies that significant number of terms have now been defined in the new forms. The implication of this practice is unclear. Similar changes in the Gold Book did not attract any known negative comments or implications. This may be because the Gold Book is not in common use and perhaps, might have been scrutinised and or tested by smaller number of users than the much more popular Red and Yellow Books. One possible implication of the new definitions is the limits that this will place on the interpretation of the terms. Courts/Arbitral tribunals now have statements conveying the meanings parties attach to these terms. Will this make the exercise of contract interpretation easier? In a sense, the expressed definition of terms has the potential to mitigate previous practice of relying on case law to define common terms in use in the FIDIC forms. However, an examination of some of the new terms indicate that this may not always be the case. Clause 1.1.29 of the Red Book 2, for instance, defines dispute in the following terms:

Dispute” means any situation where:

(a)     one Party makes a claim against the other Party (which may be a Claim, as defined in these Conditions, or a matter to be determined by the Engineer under these Conditions, or otherwise),

(b)     The other Party (or the Engineer under Sub-Clause 3.7.2 [Engineer’s Determination]) rejects the claim in whole or in part, and

(c)     the first Party does not acquiesce (by giving a NOD under Sub-Clause               3.7.5 [Dissatisfaction                 with       Engineer’s determination] or otherwise),

provided however that a failure by the other Party (or the Engineer) to oppose or respond to the claim, in whole or in part, may constitute a rejection if, in the circumstances, the DAAB or the arbitrator(s), as the case may be, deem it reasonable for it to do so.

To explain what the word ‘otherwise’ means in the above definition, tribunals/courts may ultimately have to rely on case law.

 

The definition of ‘dispute’ above expands the explanation of the term provided in the Gold Book 2008. Defined terms under the new forms have been re-ordered alphabetically making it more user-friendly. The 1999 editions had an alphabetical index of terms, this has now been done away with. Definitions are in an alphabetical order and include some new terms. ‘Claim’, ‘Date of Completion’, ’Delay Damages’, ‘Dispute’, ‘Joint Venture’, ‘Notice’, ‘Notice of Dissatisfaction’ and ‘Programme’ are now defined terms. Similarly, ‘Extension of Time’, ‘Key Personnel’, ‘No-objection’, ‘may’, ‘shall’ and ‘consent’ have also been outlined. The ‘Appendix to Tender’ document under the 1999 FIDIC contracts, is now called ‘Contract Data’.

 

6 | Page

 

Sub-clause 1.3 Notices and Other Communications

The new forms have new and strengthened provisions on notices. This is part of the move towards more prescriptive forms. Be aware that as it pertains to Notices, there is a new provision for electronic communication. Parties are provided the option of either using a paper original signed by the sender or an electronic communication system stated in the contract Data. Sub-clause 1.3 (of RB2, YB2 and SB2) requires electronic communications to be transmitted from the addresses set out in the Contract Data and assigned to authorised representatives of the parties. This aims at removing the uncertainty caused by communications being sent from personal email addresses. Electronic transmissions are deemed to have been received the day after they were sent.

 

Sub-clause 1.5 - Priority of Documents

The language of this sub-clause on priority of documents is self-explanatory. The documents forming the Contract are to be taken as mutually explanatory of one another. In other words, the documents are not to be explained in isolation; such interpretation must consider the content of the other documents. If there is any conflict, ambiguity or discrepancy, the priority of the documents shall be in accordance with the following sequence:

 

(a) the Contract Agreement. (b) the Letter of Acceptance. (c) the Letter of Tender.

(d) the Particular Conditions Part A – Contract Data.

(e) the Particular Conditions Part B – Special Provisions. (f)         these General Conditions.

(g) the Specification. (h) the Drawings.

(i)     the Schedules.

(j)      the JV Undertaking (if the Contractor is a JV); and (k)     any other documents forming part of the Contract.

 

Under the new forms, if a Party finds an ambiguity or discrepancy in the documents, that Party shall promptly give a Notice to the Engineer, describing the ambiguity or discrepancy. After receiving such Notice, or if the Engineer finds an ambiguity or discrepancy in the documents, the Engineer shall issue the necessary clarification or instruction.

 

Sub-clause 1.12 - Confidentiality

To take the concept of balanced risk sharing to the next level, FIDIC has had to ensure that certain provisions which previously applied to one

 

7 | Page

 

party now applies to both Employer and Contractors. The sub-clause on Confidentiality is one such provision. Under the new sub-clause 1.12, the Employer and the Engineer are required to “treat all information provided by the Contractor and marked “confidential”, as confidential. The Employer shall not disclose or permit to be disclosed any such information to third parties, except as may be necessary when exercising the Employer’s rights under Sub-Clause 15.2 [Termination for Contractor’s Default]”. The implication here is that, like the Contractor, the Employer also now bear some responsibilities to maintain confidentiality. Exceptions to this requirement are also set out under the sub-clause.

 

Sub-clause 1.13 is another example of sub-clauses which illustrate FIDIC’s drive to ensure balance risk sharing. The parties’ respective roles in securing and or assisting the other to obtain the necessary permits/permissions/licences/approvals for the Works have been set out clearly with clear indication of what happens if they fail to play their respective roles.

 

Sub-clause 1.15- Limitation of Liability

Under the 1st edition of the contracts, limitation of liability was covered under sub-clause 17.6. This is no longer the case. Sub-clause 1.15 is significant in several ways and will require some further examination beyond whatever we are able to cover in this note.

Firstly, it excludes or exempts the employer and the contractor from certain liabilities namely

a. loss of use of any Works b. loss of profits

c. loss of any contract

d. loss for any indirect or consequential loss which may be suffered by the other party in connection with the Contract.

The exemptions here are not absolute. The words “other than under” means parties will not be exempted from the above liabilities in the specified situations. Under the 1999 edition of the contracts, there were two circumstances - namely Payment on Termination under Sub-clauses 16.4 and Indemnities under Sub-clause 17.1 - under which parties were not exempted from the listed liabilities. This list has been expanded under the 2017 forms to include the following:

a) Sub-Clause 8.8 [Delay Damages]

b) sub-paragraph(c)                            of                        Sub-Clause                     13.3.1                [Variation                           by Instruction]

c) Sub-Clause 15.7 [Payment after Termination for Employer’s Convenience]

d) Sub-Clause 16.4 [Payment after Termination by Contractor] e) Sub-Clause 17.3 [Intellectual and Industrial Property Rights]

 

8 | Page

 

f) the first paragraph of Sub-Clause 17.4 [Indemnities by Contractor]; and

g) Sub-Clause 17.5 [Indemnities by Employer].

 

Parties will be able to claim any loss of use of works, loss of profits, loss of any contract or any indirect or consequential loss which may be suffered by the other party in connection with the Contract as a result of the situations under (a)–(g) above.

 

Secondly, the provision limits the liability of the Contractor to the Employer under the contract. It states that the total liability of the Contractor to the Employer under or in connection with the Contract shall not exceed the sum stated in the Contract Data or (if a sum is not so stated) the Accepted Contract Amount. Again, there are some clauses excepted from this limitation. This is signified by the words “other than”. In other words, the limit on liability does not apply if the liability arises in relation to the following clauses:

a) under Sub-Clause 2.6 [Employer-Supplied Materials and Employer’s Equipment],

b) under Sub-Clause 4.19 [Temporary Utilities],

c) under Sub-Clause 17.3 [Intellectual and Industrial Property Rights], and

d) under the first paragraph of Sub-Clause 17.4 [Indemnities by Contractor],

 

Finally, the provision lists several circumstances under which the limitation of liability will not apply at all. These include

(a) any case of fraud (b) gross negligence

(c)     deliberate default or reckless misconduct by the defaulting Party.

 

In the new forms, gross negligence has been added. What constitute gross negligence defers from jurisdiction to jurisdiction. Consequently, parties need to take steps at the onset to ensure that this and other terms are clearly defined. This maybe the case in some jurisdiction. In English law, for instance, gross negligence may be recognised if it is a contractual requirement. However, how that differs from ordinary negligence is not easy to define. In Armitage v Nurse,1 the Court of Appeal described the English law attitude towards the difference between negligence and gross negligence as one of a degree. Lord Denman CJ, in Goodman v Harvey observed that “the doctrine of the common law is that: "Gross negligence may be evidence of mala fides

 

 

1 [1997] EWCA Civ 1279

 

9 | Page

 

but is not the same thing”.2 Whilst the common law draws a clear distinction between negligence (or gross negligence) on one hand and fraud, bad faith and wilful misconduct on the other, the civil law approach is different. The applicable doctrine in civil law is culpa lata dolo aequiparatur (gross negligence is equal to fraud). Consequently, gross negligence may be construed differently from fraud in the common law context. This may not be the case in a civil law jurisdiction. The Guidance accompanying the Conditions of Contract underscores this point. It suggests the following definition:

Gross Negligence” means any act or omission of a party which is contrary to the most elementary rules of diligence which a conscientious employer or contractor would have observed in similar circumstances, and/or which show serious reckless disregard for the consequences of such an act or omission. It involves materially more want of care than mere inadvertence or simple negligence.

 

From the preceding, it is apparent that the interpretation of sub-clause 1.15 will depend on and may differ depending on whether the jurisdiction involved is common law or civil law.

 

Sub-clause 1.16 Contract Termination

A new sub-clause introduces a qualification to termination of contract. It states that termination of the Contract under any Sub-Clause of the Conditions shall require no action of whatsoever kind by either Party other than as stated in the Sub-Clause. This provision is made subject to any mandatory requirements under the governing law of the Contract.

 

Clause 2.4 The Employers Financial Arrangement

Before looking at sub-clause 2.4 which constitutes the main change under Clause 2, it is worth noting that the sub-clause which dealt with the Employer’s claim process under this clause in the 1999 Contracts has now been moved to Clause 20. The replacement sub-clauses (2.5 and 2.6) address Site Data and Items of reference and Employer-supplied materials and Equipment.

 

Sub-clause 2.4 on the Employer’s Financial arrangement has been modified. Now, the Employer is required to set out his financial arrangement in the contract data. If the Employer seeks to make any material changes to this arrangement, he will be required to notify the contractor of these changes with detailed supporting materials. The Contractor’s right to request evidence of ability to pay appear to have been limited to situations where (i) there is a material change to the

 

 

2 Ibid para 254

 

10 | Page

 

previous arrangement; (ii) non-payment; (iii) variations in excess of 30%; or single variation over 10%. Since the fundamental concept of sub-clause 2.4 remains the same, it will be useful to keep your eyes on the jurisprudence which was developing under the 1999 editions. It is also worth reflecting on how the courts would approach the issues in a case like NH International (Caribbean) Limited v National Insurance Property Development Company Limited (Trinidad and Tobago)3 if it were to be heard post 2017 under the new forms.

 

 

 

Clause 3 - The Enhanced role of the Engineer

As seen from previous forms, the role of the Engineer in FIDIC Contracts has undergone various revisions at different times in the 60 years of existence of the FIDIC forms. It appears to be one of the key issues, which has attracted the attention of every FIDIC contract revision task group since the 1980s. This update is no exception. Under the new FIDIC forms (the Yellow and Red Books), FIDIC appears to have strengthened the position of the Engineer, essentially building upon the edifice under the 1999 editions of the form. The roles of the Engineer including procedural details regarding how the roles are to be carried out have been set out even more clearly. Under sub-clause 3.1 of the Red and Yellow Books 2017, new specific provision has been made for the Engineer to be appointed either as a natural person or as a legal entity. The wording “if the Engineer is a legal entity” negates any perception that a natural person cannot be appointed as an Engineer. Again, this position is affirmed by the third paragraph of the sub-clause which provides that “If the Engineer is a legal entity, a natural person employed by the Engineer shall be appointed and authorised to act on behalf of the Engineer under the Contract”. Rather controversially, there is a provision that the Engineer or if the Engineer is a legal entity, the natural person appointed to act for it, shall be an Engineering Professional fluent in the language of the contract. It appears this expressly protects the FIDIC forms as a preserve of Engineering professionals. In practice it is often the case that the Engineer is represented on site by a certain individual, and this is now reflected in a new sub-clause [Engineer’s Representative].

 

You will recall from our study of the 1999 editions of the FIDIC forms that the Red Book did not only set out the diverse roles of the Engineer but was also categorical on how the Engineer plays these roles. Subclause 3.2 of the Red Book 1 provides that the Engineer, except where provided for in contract, shall be deemed to act for the Employer. The new forms retain this provision with a slight adjustment. The Engineer, under Red Book 2 ‘shall act as a skilled professional and shall be deemed to act for the

 

 

3 [2015] UKPC 37

 

11 | Page

 

Employer’. RB 1 also provides that any restrictions on the power of the Engineer must clearly be specified in Part II of the contract. The inclusion of specific limits on the power of the Engineer in Part II of the contract was to serve as sufficient notice to the Contractor, of the extent and limit of the Engineers powers. This position remains the same under the new forms. If the Engineer is required to obtain the consent of the Employer before exercising a specified authority, the requirements shall be as stated in the Particular Conditions (see Sub-clause 3.2 of Red Book 2). Like Sub-clause 3.1 of Red Book 1, the new Red Book also restricts the Employer from unilaterally placing any further restrictions on the power/role of the Engineer.

 

Red Book 2 also sets out clear rules on the replacement of the Engineer under Sub-clause 3.6. Here, the new forms make some important additions. The Employer shall give a Notice to the Contractor of its intention to replace the Engineer and the Notice must have certain details – name, address, and relevant experience of the intended replacement. The Notice must be served within 42 days before the intended date of replacement. The Contractor must respond to such Notice within 14 days of receipt stating its objection(s) with reason(s), or it shall be deemed to have accepted the intended replacement. There is also a requirement that the Employer shall not replace the Engineer with a person against whom a reasoned objection has been raised by Notice by the Contractor. There is no longer a requirement to support such objection with ‘supporting particulars’ as was the case under Clause 3.4 of RB1.

 

Further, where an Engineer is being replaced because of illness, disability, resignation, or unwillingness to perform its duty other than because of a cause attributable to the Employer, the Employer has a right to appoint a replacement immediately by Notice to the Contractor. Here the clause does not merely refer to the right of the Contractor to object to the nominated replacement, but it also grants the Contractor power to ‘accept’ and by extension‘reject’the personappointed.Thisraisesaquestionas towhether the role of the contractor in the replacement process is different for the particular situations described under the last paragraph of the new Sub-clause 3.6.Are thereinstanceswhere therole islimited to raisingobjections and others where it involves signaling acceptance or rejection?

 

More significant changes to the roles of the Engineer are in the areas of instructions of the Engineer (Sub-clause 3.5) and the revised, and more prescriptive, role in making determinations (Sub-clause 3.7). You will recall that Sub-clause 3.5 of the Red and Yellow Books 1st edition addressed the Engineer’s determination role. Please note that this is no longer the case. However, it remains the case under the new Silver Book – although as was the case previously, that exercise is not to be carried out by the

 

12 | Page

 

‘Engineer’ but the ‘Employer’s Representative’. For the new Red and Yellow Books, the Engineer’s determination role is now addressed under Clause 3.7.

 

Sub-clause 3.5 under RB2 and YB2 sets out the provisions on instructions by the Engineer. This is the equivalent of sub-clause 3.3 under RB1 and YB1.

Under sub-clause 3.3 of RB1 and YB1, the Engineer had power to issue to the Contractoratanytimeinstructionsand additionalormodifying drawings necessary for the execution of the Works, and the remedying of any defects under the contract. Under the new Sub-clause 3.5 of RB2, the aspect of this power dealing with ‘remedying of defects’ (highlighted above) has been deleted. It is unclear why this change. However, the deletion of this section does not in any way diminish the power of the Engineer to issue instructions to the Contractor.

 

Again, it was a requirement under the earlier editions of the Red and Yellow Books that the Contractor is mandated to comply with the instructions giving by the Engineer even if the Engineer does not follow the procedure for instructing variation under the old Clause 13. The new Sub-clause 3.5 has modified this requirement significantly. Under RB2 and YB2, the requirement that the Contractor complies with the instructions of the Engineer, or its duly authorized representative remains, but it is made subject to two additional paragraphs (the third paragraph and fourth paragraph) under the same clause:

Sub-clause 3.5 (Third Paragraph)

If an instruction states that it constitutes a Variation, Sub-Clause 13.3.1 [Variation by Instruction] shall apply. In other words, instructions which the Engineer states constitutes variation, will be subject to the procedure on variation by instruction under clause 13.3.1. This is straightforward.

 

Sub-clause 3.5 (Fourth Paragraph)

Where the Engineer fails to indicate that the instructions constitute a variation and the Contractor considers the instructions as constituting a new variation or part of an existing variation, or the Contractor considers the instructions as

(i)              being contrary to applicable laws, (ii)              reducing the safety of the Works, or (iii)              being technically impossible,

 

‘the Contractor shall immediately, and before commencing any work related to the instruction, give a Notice to the Engineer with reasons. If the Engineer does not respond within 7 days after receiving this Notice, by giving a Notice confirming, reversing, or varying the instruction, the Engineer shall be deemed to have

 

 

13 | Page

 

revoked the instruction. Otherwise, the Contractor shall comply with and be bound by the terms of the Engineer’s response’.

 

The import of the fourth paragraph of Sub-clause 3.5 is that the obligation of the Contractor to simply comply with the instructions of the Engineer, regardless of the nature and implications of such instruction is no longer absolute. The Contractor, under the new Sub-clause 3.5 now has power to raise concerns with the Engineer’s instructions by Notice immediately it comes to its attention and prior to complying with the said instructions. The Engineer, in such a situation, is under obligation to respond, within seven days, to the Notice by the Contractor. The Engineer may confirm the instructions, reverse it, or vary it. If the Engineer fails to respond in seven days to the Contractor’s notice, the Engineer’s response shall be deemed to have been revoked.

 

This change introduced by Sub-clause 3.5 may have several implications. Firstly, it balances the power of the Engineer to issue instructions by giving the Contractor some latitude to challenge/ raise objections to such instructions. Secondly, it places an extra administrative burden on the Engineer to act swiftly in response to any Notice served by the Contractor. Failure to do so will trigger the deeming provision – i.e., revocation of the instructions. There is a sense in which one can see this change as preempting future misunderstanding between parties by allowing concerns to be raised prior to carrying out the instructions issued. But this change also has the potential to become the hotbed of disputes.

 

The Engineers’ power to agree and make determinations is now addressed under sub-clause 3.7 (sub-clause 3.5 in the Silver Book). Again, this is another of the significant changes introduced by RB2 and YB2. This power, which existed under both RB1 and RB2, has been expanded significantly and is not to be delegated. Under RB1 and YB1, the Engineer was under obligation to determine matters ‘fairly’. Such decisions were to take into consideration all the circumstances of the issues which were the subject for determination and the relevant terms of the contracts involved. Under Sub-clause 3.7 of RB2 and YB2, the Engineer in the performance of his duty of determination, is required to ‘act neutrally between the Parties and shall not be deemed to act for the Employer’. The Guidance Notes by FIDIC states that this responsibility implies that ‘although the Engineer is appointed by the Employer and acts for the Employer in most other respects under the Contract, when acting under this Sub-Clause the Engineer treats both Parties even-handedly, in a fair-minded and unbiased manner.’

 

The new requirement to act neutrally is likely to reignite old debates about the position of the Engineer under the FIDIC Contracts for a few

 

14 | Page

 

reasons. Firstly, the Engineer under the new forms remains principally an employee of the Employer. Sub-clause 3.2 of RB2 provides that the Engineer in the performance of its duties ‘shall act as a skilled professional and shall be deemed to act for the Employer’. The Engineer shall not be under obligation to obtain the consent of the Employer in the exercise of its role under the new Sub-clause 3.7. However, the fact remains that for most parts, the Engineer will be acting on behalf of the Employer, indeed making decisions on its behalf. Some of the issues which will fall for determination by the Engineer may originate from it. Secondly, unlike the Engineer under RB1 and YB1 whose main responsibility is to make ‘fair determinations’, the Engineer under the new forms has responsibilities which extend beyond the nature of the determination. The obligation to act ‘neutrally’ extends to the Engineer’s actions and the general procedure adopted leading to the determination. FIDIC’s guidance indicates that in the performance of this duty, the Engineer is to be fair-minded and unbiased. It appears this new wording opens the door for the Contractor to challenge the Engineer’s actions pertaining to determination based on bias. Can you think of any other reasons why this change in relation to how the Engineer exercises his power of determination may be retrogressive? Alternatively, it may be argued that the prescriptive and detailed procedures on the Engineer’s power to agree and or make determinations as set down under Sub-Clause 3.7 will make it easier for the Engineer to be even-handed in the process.

 

Please study the Engineer’s roles on securing an agreement and or making determinations under Sub-clause 3.7, especially the general procedure which has been laid out in detail in both RB2 and YB2. Also note that in addition to the prohibition not to delegate its duty under Sub-Clause 3.7 on agreement and determination, the Engineer is also prohibited from delegating its duty to issue a ‘Notice to correct’ under Clause 15.1. Please note that the Engineer’s role as described here is carried out by the Employer’s Representative under the Silver Book.

 

The powers under sub-clause 3.7 (RB2 and YB2) and sub-clause 3.5 under the Silver Book is no longer limited to claims. It extends to the following situations:

 

(i)          Measurement of the Works if the Contractor does not agree with the Engineer’s measurement – under Sub-Clause 12.1 [Works to be Measured] in the Red Book 2017

(ii)         Fixing a new rate/price if the Contractor and the Engineer cannot agree the new rate/price - under Sub-Clause 12.3 [Valuation of the Works] of the Red Book 2017

 

 

 

15 | Page

 

(iii)         Variations under the Red Book 2017 - the Contractor’s entitlement to extension of time and/or adjustments of the Contract Price/Schedule of Payments, under Sub-Clause 13.3 [Variation Procedure]

(iv)        Disagreement in relation to Daywork resources under Sub-Clause 13.4 [Daywork]

(v)         Disagreement re payment arising from differences between actual progress and planned progress thereby obfuscating a Schedule of Payments, under Sub-Clause 14.4 [Schedule of Payments]

(vi)        Payments to the contractor regarding the Plants and Materials intended for the Works when shipped or delivered to site, under Sub-Clause 14.5 [Plant and Materials intended for the Works]

(vii)        Certification - where the Engineer does not certify an amount that the Contractor considers should have been certified in a previous interim payment certificate, under Sub-Clause 14.6 [Issue of IPC]

(viii)       where the cause of a defect is in question, under Sub-Clause 11.2 [Cost of Remedying Defects].

 

Beyond the specific roles of the Engineer described above, it is worth mentioning that as the central figure in the management of the FIDIC contracts, most of the project management changes FIDIC has introduced through the new forms affect the Engineer’s roles.

 

Sub-clause 3.8 now introduces management meetings. It states in part that the Engineer or the Contractor’s Representative may require the other to attend a management meeting to discuss arrangements for future work and/ or other matters in connection with execution of the Works. Other individuals could be invited to be part of the meeting if necessary. Whilst a laudable introduction, the wording of the sub-clause suggests that it is optional and depends on the discretion of the key individuals named – the Engineer and the Contractor’s representative. There are no timelines and no specific triggers for this meeting. Not much is said about the output of such meetings other than being recorded by the Engineer and copies being made available to the attendees and the Employer. Responsibilities for actions to be taken are to be recorded. Compared to the meetings sanctioned under the NEC forms, these meetings may be a good first step but fall short as veritable tool to facilitate efficient project management. In the spirit of the prescriptive nature of the form, some details regarding timelines and the effect of outcomes of the meeting would probably be more useful.

 

Sub-clause 4.1 Contractor’s General Obligations

 

16 | Page

 

Liability for fitness for purpose as stated under the 1st editions of the Yellow and Silver Books has been greatly narrowed under the new Clause 4.1 dealing with Contractor’s general obligations. The ‘purposes for which the Works are intended’ are as defined in the Employer’s Requirements in the 2017 contracts (Clause 4.1) in the Yellow and the Silver Books. Thus, the fit for purpose liability is to be measured against the ‘purposes for which the works are intended as defined in the Employer’s Requirement rather than the purposes ‘for which the works are intended as defined in the Contract’ as was the case in the 1999 editions. In effect, unless there are conflicting purposes or standards in the Employer’s requirement, the situation which occurred in MT HØjgaard A/S v E.ON Climate & Renewables UK Robin Rigg East Ltd and another is unlikely to happen under the new FIDIC forms. You are encouraged to read this decision of the Supreme Court on situations where there are conflicting standards of liability in the same contract.

 

Sub-Clause 4.2 Performance Security

Sub-clause 4.2 addresses the contractor’s obligation in relation to performance security, claims under the performance security and return of the performance security. Under Sub-Clause 4.2, the provisions relating to the Performance Security have been re-structured, and there is now a new provision allowing for an increase or decrease of the amount of the security in the event that Variations result in an increase or decrease of the Contract Price above a stated threshold (see sub-clause 4.2.1). There is also new wording stating that any amount that the Employer receives by claiming under the Performance Security is to be considered in the final payment. The Guidance provides sample forms and advises that Performance Security form should be included in the tender document.

 

Sub-Clause 4.4 & 5.1 - Sub-contractors

Sub-contracting is addressed under Sub-clause 4.4 of the Yellow and Silver Books 2017 and under Sub-Clause 5.1 of the Red Book 2017. FIDIC notes that revision of this sub-clause under the new Conditions was greatly influenced by feedback from users of the 1st edition of the Conditions of contract. There is a new provision which attempts to limit the value of subcontracted work for a particular contract by providing for this in the Contract Data. Where no such limit is provided in the Contract Data, the default maximum limit will be “the whole of the Works”). Similarly, in response to feedback from users, the provisions on nominated sub-contractors under the previous Conditions have been restructured in the new forms (See Sub-clause 4.5 of the Yellow and Silver Books and 5.2 under the Red Book 2017). Some additional details relating to the Contractor’s right to object and payment have been added.

 

17 | Page

 

Sub-Clause 4.12 Unforeseeable Physical Conditions

In the Red and Yellow Books 2017, the provisions under Sub-Clause 4.12 have been restructured. What constitutes “physical conditions” is defined as

natural physical conditions and physical obstructions (natural or man-made) and pollutants, which the Contractor encounters at the Site during execution of the Works, including sub-surface and hydrological conditions but excluding climatic conditions at the Site and the effects of those climatic conditions.

 

Where unforeseen physical condition is encountered, the sub-clause set out clearly in a step-by-step format what is expected, and when it is expected, of the Contractor and the Engineer. In summary, the following sequence is to be followed:

(i)          notice by the Contractor and the requirements – when it should be given (as soon as practicable), description of the unforeseen        condition,                 why             it/they                  are       considered unforeseen and adverse effect on progress and cost,

(ii) inspection and investigation by the Engineer, (iii) instruction by the Engineer,

(iv)         the Contractor’s right to claim for any delay and cost, and (v) agreement/determination of the claimed delay and cost.

 

Do you think that the work of the court in the Obrascon Huarte Lain SA v Attorney General for Gibraltar4 would have been made any easier if the aspect of the dispute which related to unforeseen ground condition arose from a transaction based on the Yellow Book 2017?

Please note the slight difference between the definition of “unforeseeable” under the 1999 edition and the 2017 edition. It means not reasonably foreseeable by an experienced contractor by the Base Date instead of “at the date for submission of the Tender” under the 1999 edition. “Base date” is defined under the 2017 edition as “the date 28 days before the latest date for submission of the Tender”.

 

 

 

Sub-Clause 5.2 - Contractors Documents

Similarly, in the Yellow and Silver Books 2017 the provisions concerning submission and review of the Contractor’s design under Sub-Clause 5.2 have been restructured and further detail added in a step-by-step format, again making it very clear what is expected, and when it is expected, of the Contractor and the Engineer (under the Yellow Book 2017) or the Employer (under the Silver Book 2017) during the design review process. Sub-Clause 4.4 of the Red Book 2017 now provides for

 

 

4 [2015] EWCA Civ 712

 

18 | Page

 

the situation where an element of the Works is to be designed by the Contractor and so this sub-clause sets out provisions concerning submission and review of the Contractor’s design (and, where required under the Specification, as-built records and/or operation and maintenance manuals).

 

Apart from the fact that the previous provisions have been enhanced by the introduction of definitions and some more prescriptive steps, it appears a more obvious change to this sub-clause is in relation to the Engineer’s response to the review process. Under the 1999 edition, the Engineer essentially had 3 options when it came to signalling its approval – rejection, approval (with comments) or approval without comments. Under the new Conditions, the Engineer “shall, within the Review Period, give a Notice to the Contractor:

(a) ofNo-objection(whichmayinclude commentsconcerning minor matters which will not substantially affect the Works) or

(b) that the Contractor’s Document fails (to the extent stated) to comply with the Employer’s Requirements and/or the Contract, with reasons.

Where the Engineer fails to respond within the review period (defined as the period not exceeding 21 days, or as otherwise stated in the Employer’s Requirements, calculated from the date on which the Engineer receives a Contractor’s Document and a Contractor’s Notice), there is a deeming provision which kicks in with the result that the document in question shall be deemed to have been approved. Please note the new terminology – “no objection” and the document “fails”.

 

Sub-clause 5.8 on design error essentially offers the contractor another opportunity to correct and re-submit documents which have failed a review process. The last paragraph of the sub-clause states that all corrections and resubmissions under this Sub-Clause shall be at the Contractor’s risk and cost. Provisions like this could be found in Sub-clause 4.1 of the Red Book 2017.

 

Clause 8 Commencements, Delays and Suspensions

There have been several changes to clause 8, some more significant than others. Among the significant changes are those in sub-clauses 8(3) on programme, Sub-clause 8.4 on advance warning, Sub-clause 8.5 on extension of time for completion and the new sub-clause 8.8 on delay damages.

 

Sub-clause 8.3 - Programme

FIDIC has also made some changes to the content and format requirements of the initial and revised programme under Sub-clause 8.3 of the 1999 editions. Under Sub-clause 8.3 of RB2 and YB2, the Engineer

 

19 | Page

 

now has an express responsibility to ‘review the initial programme and each revised programme submitted by the contractorand may give a Notice to the Contractor stating the extent to which it does not comply with the Contract or ceases to reflect actual progress or is otherwise inconsistent with the Contractor’s obligations. This provision represents an improvement over the provision in RB1 and YB1, which simply required the Engineer after receiving a programme to give notice to the Contractor stating the extent to which it does not comply with the contract. The new sub-clause also provides clear timelines for the Engineer’s response not only to the main programme but also the revised programme and includes a deeming provision. Collectively, the new forms contain significant project management related provisions which were absent from the 1st editions.

 

Sub-clause 8.4 Advance Warning

Under Clause 8.3 of the 1999 editions of the FIDIC forms, the Contractor had a duty to promptly notify the Engineer of ‘specific probable future events or circumstances which may adversely affect the work, increase the contract Price or delay the execution of the Works.’ Upon receipt of such notice the Engineer may decide to ‘require the Contractor to submit an estimate of the anticipated effect of the future event or circumstances, and/or a proposal under Sub-Clause 13.3…’ This process was the closest FIDIC got to the early warning system under the NEC Conditions. The weakness of this well-intended clause is that the obligation to provide early warning and make provision for same was placed solely on the Contractor. Clause 8.4 of the new forms introduces an advance warning procedure. Under the new arrangement, the obligation to give advance warning has been extended to both the Employer and the Engineer. Again, the conditions which may trigger such early warning has also been expanded to include ‘circumstances which may adversely affect the work of the Contractor’s personnel’. Clause 8.4 of RB2, albeit a welcome addition to FIDIC from a dispute avoidance and collaboration perspective, still falls short of the elaborate procedures set out in the NEC Conditions.

 

Sub-clause 8.5 Extension of time for completion

A key change under this provision is that contractors making a claim for extension of time for completion do not need to bring such application or request under sub-clause 20.2 of the 1999 Conditions. The provision now states expressly that the claim procedure now under sub-clause 20.2 (as was the case under the 1999 editions) is no longer required where the Contractor is entitled to extension of time for variations. It appears all the remaining possible causes of delay listed are subject to a sub-clause 20.2 procedure. These include:

 

20 | Page

 

(i)          exceptionally adverse climatic conditions5

(ii)         unforeseeable shortages in the availability of personnel or Goods (or Employer-Supplied Materials, if any) caused by epidemic or governmental actions

(iii)         any delay, impediment or prevention caused by or attributable to the Employer, the Employer’s Personnel, or the Employer’s other contractors on the Site

(iv)        if the measured quantity of any item of work in accordance with Clause 12 [Measurement and Valuation] is greater than the estimated quantity of this item in the Bill of Quantities or other Schedule by more than ten per cent (10%) and such increase in quantities causes a delay to completion for the purposes of Sub-Clause 10.1 [Taking Over the Works and Sections].

 

Sub-clause 8.5 Concurrent delay

The last paragraph of this sub-clause attempts to address the controversial issue of concurrent delay but not directly. The paragraph provides as follows:

If a delay caused by a matter which is the Employer’s responsibility is concurrent with a delay caused by a matter which is the Contractor’s responsibility, the Contractor’s entitlement to EOT shall be assessed in accordance with the rules and procedures stated in the Special Provisions (if not stated, as appropriate taking due regard of all relevant circumstances)

 

FIDIC does not select/choose any particular approach or mechanism for assessing the extension of time in such circumstances. Parties can agree such a mechanism, and, in that case, provision is made for them to incorporate that into the Special Provisions. The guidance on how this is to be done suggests the adoption of the Society of Construction Law protocol on the subject by the parties. This appears to contradict the approach recommended under Sub-clause 17.2 which appears to hint at the adoption of an apportionment approach in that instance.

 

Sub-clause 8.8- Delay Damages

Under this sub-clause, entitlement to delay damages is capped – as stated in the Contract Data. The limits on liability will not apply where there is fraud, gross negligence, deliberate default, or reckless misconduct by the Contractor.

 

 

 

5 Now defined as “adverse climatic conditions at the Site which are Unforeseeable having regard to climatic data made available by the Employer under Sub-Clause 2.5 [Site Data and Items of Reference] and/or climatic data published in the Country for the geographical location of the Site

 

21 | Page

 

Sub-Clause 13.1 Right to Vary

Variation is defined by subclause 1.1.86 as any change to the Works, which is instructed as a variation under Clause 13. On this definition, it is worth

noting that the omission of work to be carried out by others was specifically excluded in the 1999 FIDIC contracts. Under the 2017 contracts, the exclusion remains but is qualified by the parties’ agreement. Also note the new provision under the new Sub-Clause 13.3.1(c) which states in part that if the Parties have agreed to the omission of any work which is to be carried out by others, the Contractor’s proposal may also include the amount of any loss of profit and other losses and damages suffered (or to be suffered) by the Contractor because of the omission. The implication here is that the Contractor in such circumstance will be entitled to recover loss of profit and other losses/damages.

 

Please give clause 13 your attention. A lot has changed there and not all the changes can be captured in these lecture notes. A few of the key changes are highlighted here.

 

Under all three contract forms, Sub-clause 13.1 has been amended to include other grounds for the Contractor to exercise his right to object. The sub-clause states that the contractor shall be bound by variation instructed under Subclause 13.3.1 (variation by instructions) and shall execute the variation with due expedition and without delay unless the Contractor exercises its right to object. Now, the contractor may object by promptly giving a notice to the Engineer stating the ground of the objection. In addition to the ground that the contractor cannot readily obtain the Goods required for the variation, it may also object on the ground that:

 

(a)     the varied work was Unforeseeable having regard to the scope and nature of the Works described in the Specification; or

(b)     it will adversely affect the Contractor’s ability to comply with

Sub-Clause 4.8 [Health and Safety Obligations] and/or Sub-Clause 4.18 [Protection of the Environment].

 

In the Yellow and the Silver Books, the Contractor may also object on the ground that that the varied work may adversely affect the Contractor’s fitness-for-purpose obligation in respect of the completed Works. Whilst the additions will bring joy to many contractors, the one which, perhaps will bring much excitementisthe objectionunder (a). Though the contractforms define what is unforeseeable, it is still true that the definition is quite subjective. What may not be reasonably foreseeable by an experience contractor (YB, subclause 1.1.87) is not exactly well defined. In addition to that, many variations are by their very nature afterthoughts and may well fall outside the scope of what an experience contractor might reasonably foresee. This ground, therefore, provide the contractor an opportunity to raise objection to a proposed variation which may be perfectly reasonable in terms of saving cost, and time.

 

Sub-clause13.2isaboutvalueengineering.Itisalsoreferredtoasvariation by request for proposal. The first name reveals the essence of the provision. The second name connotes another mode of variation. In other words, there is variation by instruction (by the Engineer) and a proposal to vary which

 

22 | Page

 

comes from the contractor followed by instructions from the Engineer. The proposal, when adopted, must:

 

(a) accelerate completion

(b) reduce the cost to the Employer of executing, maintaining or Operating the Works

(c) improve the efficiency or value to the Employer of the completed Works; or

(d) otherwise, be of benefit to the Employer

 

If a request has been made to the Contractor to provide a proposal for a Variation, but the Variation is not then instructed, there is a new right for the contractor to claim the cost of preparing the proposal.

 

Sub-clause 13.3 Variation Procedure

This is an especially important provision under the new Forms and should be considered carefully. The opening session of the subclause states: “Subject to Sub-Clause 13.1 [Right to Vary], Variations shall be initiated by the Engineer in accordance with either of the following procedures…” The procedures to be followed in cases of variation by instructions and variation by request for proposal are then outlined in detail. FIDIC notes that the procedures under Subclause 13.3 are to be followed in several other instances throughout the forms. These include:

(i)          Sub-Clause 1.9 [Errors in the Employer’s Requirements] of the Yellow Book 2017, for the measures to be taken by the Contractor to correct an error in the Employer’s Requirements.

(ii)          Sub-Clause 4.7.3 [Agreement or Determination of rectification measures, delay and/or Cost] of the Red and Yellow Books 2017, for the measures to be taken by the Contractor to correct an error in the items of reference provided by the Employer.

(iii)         Sub-Clause 8.7 [Rate of Progress] of all three of FIDIC’s contract updates 2017, in respect of any Engineer’s instruction to revise the method of working or accelerate progress to reduce delays caused by matters for which the Contractor would be entitled to an extension of time.

(iv)         Sub-Clause 13.6 [Adjustments for Changes in Laws] of all three of FIDIC’s contract updates 2017, in respect of any necessary changes to the Works arising from changes in Laws.

 

Also note that clauses 14(contract price and payment); 15 (termination by Employer) and 16 (suspension and termination by contractor) have also been restructured to allow for easy understanding of the steps involved in the respective processes. Do not interpret lack of detailed treatment of

 

23 | Page

 

these clauses here as indication that they are not significant. Indeed, in many instances, these clauses are the most engaged. It is obvious that they are worth your attention. Please make time to examine them.

 

So far, we have examined some important sub-clauses individually. Whilst this approach is useful in terms of microscopic analysis of the meaning and implications of each sub-clause, this kind of analysis can also lose sight of the big picture. In some instances, a thematic examination is warranted. The rest of the notes follow a thematic approach demonstrating how the 2017 forms alter the first edition.

 

Risks and Liability clauses 17,18, and 19

The new contracts have re-ordered clauses 17 (risks and responsibilities), 18 (insurance) and 19 (force majeure) under the 1st edition of the Rainbow Suite. Clause 17 of RB2 now deals with what is referred to as ‘Care of the works and indemnities’. The sub-themes under this clause include responsibility of care of the work, liability for care of the work, intellectual and industrial property rights, and indemnities (by the Employer, by the Contractor and shared indemnity). Clause 18, now referred to as ‘the exceptional event’ clause, avoids the term ‘force majeure’ which is treated differently indifferentjurisdictionsalthough the contentof the new provision is the same as that of the previous force majeure clause. Clause 19 now deals with insurance.

 

Structurally, the changes to the above clauses in the new forms respond to a longstanding call for a re-ordering of the clauses by Bunni.6 The renowned commentator on FIDIC contracts had previously argued that the ordering of Clauses 17-19 in the 1999 editions is illogical as it did not follow the natural sequence of events. It commenced with ‘indemnities’, follow by clauses on ‘responsibility’,thenaddresses ‘risks’ and finally ‘liability’.Prof.Bunni argues that under normal course of events in construction, risks are identified first. The allocation of the risks will give rise to responsibilities. Failure to carry out the responsibilities at all or correctly leads to liabilities. Indemnities may logically follow liabilities. Similarly, insurance follows indemnities. In effect, risks lead to responsibilities, which leads to liabilities, which then leads to indemnities and insurance in that order. Clause 17 under the 1999 edition of the FIDIC forms missed this logical order.

 

The sequence of clauses as set out under the new clause 17 restores this order. Clause 17 also does away with the confusion introduced by the previous Clause 17.3 on Employer’s risk. This was sometimes interpreted to imply that the only risks under the contract which the Employer carried were those listed under Clause 17.3 of the first edition. Properly interpreted, and

 

 

6 Bunni, 531

 

24 | Page

 

as suggested by Bunni, that clause referred only to ‘the Employer’s risk of loss and damage’ not the entire spectrum of risks allocated under the contract. This confusion is cleared by the new arrangement. The new forms set out the indemnities of the parties under three categories; those of the Contractor, indemnities of the Employer and shared indemnities (which takes account of contribution either party made leading to the liability to indemnify). The new Clause 17.4 is on indemnity by contractor. One aspect of this new sub-clause has been controversial from the onset. It requires the Contractor to give a new ‘fitness for purpose’ indemnity under the Yellow and Silver Books (and under Red Book 2 to the extent the Contractor has design responsibility). The new indemnity, in an earlier draft of the Yellow Book reviewed by users, was unlimited and immediately attracted comments/criticism from contractor organisations. The primary argument of contractors against this new aspect of Contractor’s indemnity was that claims under such indemnity will not be insurable. Under the 2017 forms, the sub-clause reads as follows:

To the extent, if any, that the Contractor is responsible for the design of part of the Permanent Works under Sub-Clause 4.1 [Contractor’s General Obligations], and/or any other design under the Contract, the Contractor shall also indemnify and hold harmless the Employer against all acts, errors or omissions by the Contractor in carrying out the Contractor’s designobligationsthatresultintheWorks(orSection or Part or major item of Plant, if any), when completed, not being fit for the purpose(s) for which they are intended under Sub-Clause 4.1 [Contractor’s General Obligations].

 

In response to the argument regarding the Contractor’s assumption of unlimited liability for fitness for purpose, FIDIC argues that the liability in issue is now subject to the limitation of liability clause (now sub-clause 1.15). It is unlikely that the argument regarding the exposure to the contractor by virtue of the new Clause 17.4 will subside with the launch of the new forms. It is a matter to watch in the future.

 

 

 

Extensive prescriptive contract administration procedures Traditionally, the FIDIC forms have been less prescriptive. In many instances, risks are allocated, responsibilities are given, liabilities are set but the procedures for making the processes work were quite relaxed as compared to the practice under some other forms such as the NEC Conditions. The effect of this is that management of projects suffered, and this had cost and time implications. FIDIC decided as a key theme under the new forms to streamline the project management processes and increase clarity and certainty of some of the processes. The contracts are much more prescriptive than they were before, ensuring

 

 

 

25 | Page

 

natural flow of processes even when a party fails to carry out its duties or on time.

 

There are now step-by-step procedures for many processes. The implication is that at each stage of the process, parties will be clear in their minds as to the next steps and what is expected of them. Questions such as what happens when the Engineer issues an instruction but fails to determine if the instruction amounts to a variation are now addressed. FIDIC has also introduced more notice provisions, time limits and deeming provisions to ensure that there are no gridlocks or gaps in the processes. As a natural consequence of the detailed prescriptive processes, parties to FIDIC Conditions, like those under the NEC, will now have to shoulder more administrative responsibilities. The new FIDIC forms essentially mark the gradual demise of the era when a contract is signed and tugged away in the drawer never to be seen by parties again until disputes arise. Both the Contractor and the Engineer must be alive to the requirements each step of the process. Where this is not the case, it is likely that the Engineer will suffer embarrassing situations such as deeming provisions and time bars ‘springing into action’ to deprive the Employer of certain entitlements, for instance, under the time bar clause of the new Clause 20 (on claims). Similarly, a tardy Contractor is likely to miss out on entitlements as a result of its failure to keep abreast with notices and time limits under the new forms (see Sub-Clause 11.9 under Silver Book 2).

 

Processes such as agreement and determination by the Engineer (Employer under the Silver Book), giving of notices, setting out, discovery of errors in the Employer’s requirements and health and safety obligations are set out in more details under the new forms. Remember to look at the details of these processes in the new forms.

 

 

 

Greater parity between parties

Fair and balanced risk sharing has been the bedrock of all FIDIC forms. Keeping the balance across all provisions of the forms has not always been achieved. Certain aspects of the 1st editions of the forms have been criticised for lack of parity between the Contractor and the Employer. Under RB1 and YB1, the clauses dealing with instructions by the Engineer (Clause 3.3), the claim procedures for the Employer (Clause 2.5 and 3.5) and the Contractor (Clause 20), and termination for convenience by the Employer (Clause 15) were examples of instances where the parties to the contract were treated differently.

 

RB2 and YB2 have made significant changes aim at achieving greater parity between parties. Regarding the instructions of the Engineer, the

 

26 | Page

 

new forms have made provisions for the Contractor to raise concerns/objections on certain grounds (discussed earlier – see Clause 3.5). In the area of providing advance warning, the new forms have extended the duty to give advance warning notice to both the Engineer and the Employer (Clause 8.4). Under RB1 and YB1, the Employer’s claims procedure had no time bar clause (clause 2.5), but the Contractor’s claim procedure required notice of claim to be given within 28 days of becoming aware of the incident giving rise to the claim. This disparity in the claim process has changed under the new forms. Now, both the Employer and the Contractor are subject to the same claim procedures and time limitations (Clause 20). Under RB1 and YB1, the Contractor was not entitled to loss of profit when the Employer terminates the contract for convenience. The Employer was, however, barred from terminating the contract in order to execute the Works itself or arrange for another contractor to do so. Under the new Clause 15, the Contractor is entitled to payments including loss of profit when the Employer terminates the contract for convenience. The Employer can only execute the works itself or employ another contractor to do so if it settles amounts due under Clause 15.6.

 

Although there may still be some areas of contention and disparity between the parties under the new forms, the above and other changes represent significant move towards parity between the parties.

 

 

 

Stronger emphasis on dispute avoidance and new procedures FIDIC has always had some dispute avoidance measures in place. This was augmented by the introduction of the Dispute Adjudication Board procedure which combined both dispute avoidance and management roles. The Engineer’s duty to seek/ facilitate agreement between parties prior to its determination of relevant issues also provided opportunities for dispute avoidance. That said, all the measures highlighted were located at the back end of the contract administration processes. The project management measures under RB1 and YB1 were unclear in terms of their focus as dispute avoidance strategies.

 

The new forms state expressly that dispute avoidance is one of the improvements to the FIDIC Suite. The detailed prescriptive project management processes dealing with issuing of notices, time bar, advance warning, and the deeming provisions appear to have, as a corollary, a role in dispute avoidance. Further, the revised claim clause (Clause 20), with its step-by-step procedures, constitutes improvement over the previous approach and are likely to contribute significantly to the dispute avoidance strategy of FIDIC.

 

 

 

27 | Page

 

Beyond the above-noted measures in the new forms, FIDIC has also emphasised the role of the DAB as a dispute avoidance mechanism. To make a statement in this regard, the name of the DAB under the new forms has been altered to include ‘Avoidance’ thereby amplifying the role of the entity as a dispute avoidance body. The emphasis on avoidance is reflected not only in the amended title of the dispute board, now called the Dispute Avoidance/Adjudication Board (DAAB), but in several other changes, the most significant of which is the introduction of a new sub-clause on dispute avoidance. Clause 21.3 introduces a consensual process which enables either party or the DAAB itself to initiate the process.

 

Further, unlike the variations under the 1st edition where some of the DABs were ad hoc (under the YB1 and the SB1) whilst others were ‘standing’ boards (as was the case under RB1), the new arrangements make all the DAABs ‘standing’ boards, meaning they are to be set up at the inception of the contract and run with them.

 

Separation of claim procedure from dispute resolution

One of the significant changes made under the new forms is the separation of the claim process from the dispute resolution process. The new claim process is under Clause 20, whilst a new Clause 21 addresses the dispute resolution mechanisms. As much as this is a break from a long-standing tradition, it is an appropriate step for a good reason. The previous treatment of the claim procedure with the dispute resolution processes created an unintended impression that claims must necessarily be linked to disputes. This is not always the case. Indeed, the claim process is better conceptualised as a pre-agreed dispute avoidance strategy which helps the parties to adjust their positions (rights, obligations, and liabilities) under the contract without resorting to third parties other than those internally named for the purpose of allowing the process to run. The FIDIC Guidance, when eventually published may have other reasons for the separation.

 

Note that the new forms define what constitutes a Claim under Sub-clause 20.1 (a)-(c). The provision regarding when claims arise is broad enough to cover situations involving any kind of alleged breach of contract. Under the new forms, a Claim may arise:

(a)     if the Employer considers that the Employer is entitled to any additional payment from the Contractor (or reduction in the Contract Price) and/or to an extension of the DNP.

(b)     if the Contractor considers that the Contractor is entitled to any additional payment from the Employer and/or to EOT; or

(c)     if either Party considers that he/she is entitled to another

 

28 | Page

 

Entitlement or relief against the other Party. Such other entitlement or relief may be of any kind whatsoever (including in connection with any certificate, determination, instruction,

Notice, opinion or valuation of the Engineer) except to the extent that it involves any entitlement referred to in sub-paragraphs (a) and/or (b) above.

 

The procedure for addressing claims under Sub-Clause 20.1(a) and (b) are as outlined under Sub-Clause 20.2 and are different from the procedure for addressing claims under Sub-Clause 20.1(c) (which is outlined under Sub-Clause 20.1) as follows:

In the case of a Claim under sub-paragraph (c) above, where the other Party or the Engineer has disagreed with the requested entitlement or relief (or is deemed to have disagreed if he/she does not respond within a reasonable time), a Dispute shall not be deemed to have arisen but the claiming Party may, by giving a Notice refer the Claim to the Engineer and Sub-Clause 3.7 [Agreement or Determination] shall apply. This Notice shall be given as soon as practicable after the claiming Party becomes aware of the disagreement (or deemed disagreement) and include details of the claiming Party’s case and the other Party’s or the Engineer’s disagreement (or deemed disagreement).

It is significant that disagreements on contract interpretation, for example, cannot be regarded as a Dispute under the new forms until it goes through the process outline.

 

Even as the new clause 20.2 retains the 28-day time bar for issuing of Notice of Claim under the first edition of the forms, it introduces several changes to the old procedure. Firstly, the time bar now applies equally to the Employer’s claim. Secondly, there is a new procedure which allows the claimant to ‘appeal’ the time bar at the second stage when it submits its full claim for justifiable reasons. Unlike the situation under the Gold Book, the power to waive the time bar is vested in the Engineer instead of the DAAB. Thirdly, the time for the submission of the fully detailed claim is doubled – an increased from 42 days under the previous edition to 84 days. The notice of claim is deemed to have lapsed if the element of the fully detailed claim comprising the ‘contractual and/or other legal basis of the claim’ is not given within 84 days and the Engineer, acting within 14 days of the time limit, gives the claimant notice to that effect. In other words, after 84 days, the notice of claim does not automatically lapse until the Engineer gives the claimant Notice, which then makes the whole claim time barred.

 

 

 

 

29 | Page

 

The implication here is that where the Engineer fails to issue the time bar notice within 14 days of the 84th day, the notice of claim will be deemed to be a valid notice. The professionalism of the Engineer notwithstanding, the vast discretion given it here is likely to be susceptible to abuse. All that it takes is for the Engineer, for whatever reason, to refuse and or fail to issue the timed bar notice within 14 days after the 84 days, the deeming provision will then spring into effect, given the notice of claim life again. What constitutes ‘fully detailed Claim’ is also defined under Sub-clause 20.2.4.

 

Further, Clause 20 has a new sub-clause on keeping contemporary records (clause 20.2.3). This sub-clause defines ‘contemporary records’ as ‘records that are prepared or generated at the same time, or immediately after, the event or circumstance giving rise to the Claim.’ There is an express requirement for parties to keep contemporary records needed to substantiate their claims. Much of what is left of the sub-clause is the same as what pertained under the 1st edition.

 

Once a fully detailed Claim is received, the Engineer is to determine the Claim under Sub-Clause 3.7. The starting point of this process is that the Engineer must facilitate an agreement between the parties. Failing that, it must determine the Claim. At this stage, the Engineer is also empowered to determine whether to waive a time bar pursuant to an ‘appeal’ by an affected Claimant or not. Sub-Clause 20.2.5 provides the procedure for the ‘appeal’ against the time bar under Sub-clause 20.2.1 and sets out the factors to be considered in the making of such determination by the Engineer. There are other minor changes made to the new prescriptive and detailed claim procedure that you may want to study on your own.

 

Changes to the dispute resolution process

There are several new developments in dispute resolution under the new form worth noting. As discussed under section 2.2 above, the term ‘dispute’ is now clearly defined in the new FIDIC forms following the approach under the Gold Book, 2008 with some modifications. With the definition of disputes as set out under Clause 1.1.29 of RB 2 and YB2 in mind, please note that the mere fact that there is a disagreement over an entitlement/relief under Sub-clause 20.1(c) does not mean a dispute has arisen (see – Clause 20.1). The number of dispute mechanisms under the new forms remain the same as was the case under the 1st edition. The starting point remains the new DAAB, after the Engineer’s agreement/determination. Then there is amicable settlement and international arbitration. However, each of the processes listed has received some form of update in one aspect or the other. Some of the changes are as follows:

 

30 | Page

 

i.       As per the opening paragraph of Sub-Clause 21.1, it is apparent that FIDIC does not consider the Engineer’s determination as a dispute resolution mechanism and understandably so. The logic here is that disputes emerge mainly after the Engineer’s determination has been made and rejected by one party, who then files a Notice of Dissatisfaction (see Sub-Clause 1.1.29)

 

ii.       The Dispute Avoidance/Adjudication Board (DAAB) is the first point of call for disputes. The DAAB replaces the Dispute Adjudication Board; the change of name signals specific emphasis on dispute avoidance. There are also more prescriptive rules on appointment, the expiration of the term of the DAAB (clause 21.1(a), (b), (i) and (ii)), dispute         avoidance               and              enforcement              of decisions (Clause21.1-4) (see below for more on DAAB)

 

iii.      Amicable settlement (Clause21.5) - Please note the reduction in the length of time previously allocated for settlement from 56 to 28 days. FIDIC explains that this is not an indication of lack of importance of this process but rather an attempt to cut down the time it takes to get to Arbitration

 

iv.      Arbitration – please note the new provision which allows Arbitrators to take account of the extent to which a party failed to co-operate in the appointment of the DAAB in the award of cost (Clause21.6). Where an award requires that a party pays a sum of money, the said amount becomes immediately due and payable without any further certification or Notice.

 

Here are few extra points to note about the DAAB. The reference procedure is now more prescriptive. Where a Notice of Dissatisfaction (NoD) is served after an Engineer’s determination, the dissatisfied party must refer the dispute to the DAAB within 42 days, failing which the NoD will be deemed to have lapsed. The reference shall state that it is given under ‘Sub-clause 21.4.1’ and must set out the referring party’s case in writing and served on at least the Chairperson (or in the case of a sole member DAAB, on that member), the Engineer and the other party.

 

Sub-Clause 21.4.1 also describes the effect of a referral to a DAAB on the limitation or prescriptive period. It states that ‘the reference of a Dispute to the DAAB under this Sub-Clause shall, unless prohibited by

 

31 | Page

 

law, be deemed to interrupt the running of any applicable statute of limitation or prescription period’. This implies that FIDIC intend the period when a dispute is referred to a DAAB to be excluded in the calculation of any limitation or prescription period affecting the relevant dispute.

 

The new forms address several defects associated with the DABs under the 1st editions of the forms. These include situations resulting in stalemate in the appointment process and the effect of a DAB decision where a party which has filed a notice of Dissatisfaction decides not to comply with the binding but interim decision pending arbitration. As you will recall from earlier topics, the second situation above, has been one of the controversial issues under the 1st editions of the FIDIC forms resulting in the Persero Cases and several academic pieces expressing divergent views. These gaps are plugged in the new forms. For instance, in relation to the effect of non-compliance with DAAB decisions, Clause 21.7 now provides as follows:

 

In the event that a Party fails to comply with any decision of the DAAB, whether binding or final and binding, then the other Party may, without prejudice to any other rights it may have, refer the failure itself directly to arbitration under Sub-Clause 21.6 [Arbitration] in which case Sub-Clause 21.4 [Obtaining DAAB’s Decision] and Sub-Clause 21.5 [Amicable Settlement] shall not apply to this reference. The arbitral tribunal (constituted under Sub-Clause 21.6 [Arbitration]) shall have the power, by way of summary or other expedited procedure, to order, whether by an interim or provisional measure or an award (as may be appropriate under applicable law or otherwise), the enforcement of that decision. In the case of a binding but not final decision of the DAAB, such interim or provisional measure or award shall be subject to the express reservation that the rights of the Parties as to the merits of the Dispute are reserved until they are resolved by an award.

Any interim or provisional measure or award enforcing a decision of the DAAB which has not been complied with, whether such decision is binding or final and binding, may also include an order or award of damages or other relief.

 

If a Dispute arises and there is no DAAB in place Sub-Clause 21.8 states that the clauses on obtaining DAB decision (Sub-Clause 21.4) and amicable settlement (Sub-clause 21.5) will not apply; the matter shall be referred to arbitration, without prejudice to any other rights the Parties may have.

 

 

 

32 | Page

 

5. Summary

The above notes represent an attempt to examine some of the clauses and sub-clauses under the 2017 FIDIC forms and to capture some of the significant changes introduced by these forms - the Red, Yellow and Silver Books. The changes are substantive and varied. These notes do not in any way capture all of them. Further reading is required. Also note that FIDIC has made some minor amendments to the contracts since the original launch. Copies of the amendments are available on Moodle. The implication is that the Conditions of contract must be read with the amendments.

 

 

 

4. References

 

1.      Frederic Gillion and Michael Cottrell, ‘New FIDIC Yellow Book (2017): A case of when more (words) mean Less (Clarity)?’ (2017) ICLR 349

2.      Conditions of Contract for Construction (Second Edition, 2017) – Red Book2

3.      Conditions of Contract for Plant and Design-Build (Second Edition, 2017) - Yellow Book 2.

4.      Conditions of Contract for EPC/Turnkey Projects (Second Edition, 2017) - Silver Book2

5.      Conditions of Contract for Construction (First Edition, 1999) - Red Book.

6.      Conditions of Contract for Plant and Design-Build (First Edition, 1999) - Yellow Book.

7.      Conditions of Contract for EPC/Turnkey Projects (First Edition, 1999) - Silver Book

8.      Conditions of Contract for Design Build and Operate Projects, 2008 - the Gold Book.

9.      Conditions of Contract for Construction, MDB Harmonised Edition, 2010 - the Pink Book

10.    Materials from Lexis PSL

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

33 | Page

 

Topic5:TopicalIssuesonFIDICcontracts

 

TopicPreview

 

 

In this topic, we will conclude our study of the FIDIC Forms. We will outline some of the topical issues relating to the FIDIC contracts under the following themes:

 

 

1. Choosing between FIDIC forms

 

2. Critique of some the Provisions of the 1999 and 2017 Books

 

3. Analysis of the FIDIC Silver Book and ENAA Model Form for Process Plant Construction 4. Applicable Law and FIDIC Contracts

5. Arbitral decisions on some FIDIC clauses

 

6. The FIDIC Engineer, Dispute Adjudication Board and the Dispute Avoidance and Adjudication Board

7. FIDIC in practice -what gets amended

 

8. New FIDIC Suite of Contract forms - update

 

 

 

 

TopicContent

 

 

Introduction

 

The previous six topics have examined different forms developed by FIDIC. The FIDIC forms have been in existence for the past sixty years. During this period, FIDIC has developed and updated its forms periodically, considering and remedying ‘mischiefs’, filling gaps and addressing concerns with previous editions. This practice notwithstanding, there remains at any given time issues with the FIDIC forms which attract more attention for right or wrong reasons. These issues may relate to one edition of the forms or may cut across all forms. In relation specifically to previous editions of the forms, please note that FIDIC acknowledges that even when new editions of its contract forms are released, many users continue to use the older editions in different parts of the world. Consequently, FIDIC has stressed that older editions of its forms remain in use in spite of the launch of the 2017 versions of the Red, Yellow and Silver Book.

 

 

Also note that the lecture notes are meant to highlight the topical issues outlined above; we do not have sufficient space to discuss all the issues and in detail. It is the responsibility of each student to dig deeper into the themes of interest.

 

1. Choosing between FIDIC forms:

 

When a decision is taken to use a FIDIC contract for an international construction project, the next step is to decide which of the FIDIC forms to use. A non-exhaustive list of issues that should be considered in making such a decision includes:

 

a) Price of the contract and size of the project

 

b) Nature of the site conditions and the time allocated for the tender process including time for the Contractors to inspect the site(s)

c) Level of control the Employer intends to retain. For instance, does it want to design the project? This should be determined by the level of resources available to the Employer.

d) The source of financing i.e., Multilateral Development Banks (MDBs)

 

e) The risks inherent in the project and the Employer’s risk allocation strategy

 

f) The market conditions vis-à-vis the willingness to pay extra to place more risks on the contractor.

Generally, where design responsibility is the single most important issue determining choice of contract, the FIDIC forms provide a straightforward choice. Thus, while the Red Book and the Pink Book are for contracts where the design responsibility rests with the Employer, the Yellow Book, Silver Book, and Gold Book are for projects where the Contractor is responsible for the design function as well as other risks.

 

 

Within the Employer design sub-group (Red Book and Pink Book), FIDIC makes provision for the Contractor to be involved in some of the design as is considered necessary for the project. However, the choice in this sub-group is determined by the source of funding. Where the project is being financed by relevant MDBs, the Pink Book would be the book of choice, while financing from other sources will point to the 1999 Red Book as the contract of choice. Please note that with the second edition of the Red Book now published, the MDBs intend to use the Red Book 2 for all future projects instead of the MDB Harmonised edition (the Pink Book). Also note that the MDBs are in the process of developing their own set of Particular Conditions for the new Red Book.

 

 

Within the Contractor design sub-group (Yellow Book, Silver Book, and Gold Book), the choice

 

is determined by the level of risks and responsibilities that are placed on the contractor along with the design and construction risks.

 

 

Depending on market conditions, this should also be reflected in the price of the contract, that is to say, the willingness to pay more for the extra risks being carried by the Contractor. So,

where the Contractor is expected to only design and build the project, hand it over on

 

Book, the Employer retains greater control over the Contractor; the Employer also accepts

 

liability for errors made by him or his personnel and interfaces more regularly. On the other hand, where the Employer intends to saddle the Contractor with risks of unforeseen difficulties as well as the design responsibility, and also opts for relatively less interface with the Contractor, the contract of choice should be the Silver Book. This is especially so where the project is a turnkey project with private financing.

 

 

The Gold Book goes further and places on the Contractor the responsibility of running the completed facility for a specified period of time before handing it over to the Employer. The Gold Book is therefore suitable where an Employer seeks a contractor that will design, build, operate, and then transfer the facility to him later.

 

 

Let us look at a few useful illustrations here. A project with relatively low price (in the region of US$ 500,000), and with a short time for completion (i.e., 6 months or thereabout) especially where the activity for the works involves simple and repetitive processes, would require a less complicated contract than the major works contract discussed above. For these types of projects, FIDIC recommends the FIDIC Short Form of Contract – also known as the Green Book.

 

 

For organisations that have well-developed capability in the traditional procurement method (this is where the design and construction functions are separated and the Contractor is brought in to build based on design prepared by the Employer’s Architect), it is recommended that they consider the suitability of the Conditions of Contract for Construction for Building and Engineering Works Designed by the Employer (also known as the Red Book). This could be the 1987 Red Book 4th edition, the 1999 Red Book (which superseded the 1987 version) or the Red Book 2 (2017).

 

 

Another example involving another set of considerations could be the design and build of a gas turbine by a Contractor at his workshop, which is to be mounted at the Employer’s site only on

 

completion.

 

best suited.

 

For this sort of project, the Plant and Design-Build Contract (the Yellow Book) is

 

This is because most of the design in the Yellow Book (i.e., the detailed design of

 

 

the turbine), is undertaken by the Contractor or supplier to meet the outline or performance

 

specification prepared by the Employer. The Employer specifies different tests to confirm that the facility is fit for purpose. The contract enjoins the Employer to describe his requirements clearly to the Contractor and places on the Contractor the responsibility to interpret those requirements, and then design and build a project fit for the purpose it was intended. Another scenario could be where an Employer is more comfortable with a straightforward two-party contract. In such contracts, the only other principal party is the Contractor. In this scenario,

the Employer may use one of his more technical employees to represent him at the project site;

 

the duty of this employee would be to liaise with the Contractor on his behalf and convey his

 

directions where necessary. This employee may be replaced from time to time as the needs of the Employer dictate. For such an Employer, it will be useful to consider procuring such projects under the Conditions of Contract for Engineering Procurement Contract (EPC) or Turnkey Projects (the Silver Book 1 or 2), especially, if the project in question is turnkey.

 

 

In deciding which FIDIC contract to use on a project, parties are presented with a variety of choices by FIDIC. The main distinguishing factor is the responsibility for the design function. However, there are many other requirements that a party may have that are accommodated under the different FIDIC forms. The starting point is to recognise those requirements and match them to the contracts issued by FIDIC.

 

 

2. Critique of some the Provisions of the FIDIC Books

 

 

In this section we will consider some of the clauses/themes in the FIDIC suite with a view to highlight some areas of weakness and strength. In general, the FIDIC suite provides for a balanced contract, risks are distributed appropriately between the Employer and the Contractor. Considering that this topic comes after an examination of the new FIDIC Books and some of the issues which may arise with its use, I do not intend to repeat those analysis here unless they are necessary or would enhance our understanding of the issue under discussion.

However, some clauses in the FIDIC suite have generated more controversy than others. We shall examine a few of these clauses.

 

a. Termination

 

 

i)       Employer Termination

 

 

Clause 15 of the 1999 suite deals with the termination rights of the Employer. It provides that the Employer may terminate the contract on the grounds that the contractor has defaulted in performing his obligations under the contract. Such default could include sub-contracting the whole of the works, insolvency of the Contractor, failure of the Contractor to remedy a defect that he has been notified of among other grounds. One of the most significant additions to this section is the termination for convenience clause (first used by FIDIC in the Orange Book). In sub-clause 15.5 the Employer is entitled to terminate the contract at will after serving the Contractor a 28-day notice of his intention to do so. Under this arrangement, the contractor may be entitled to cost but not profit (read sub-clause 15.5). The clause obligates the Employer not to terminate for purposes of completing the works itself nor procure another contractor to

complete the works. Unlike the clause in the Orange Book, where there isa six-year moratorium

 

not to re-commence the works after termination under this clause, there is no time limit

 

prescribed for this obligation under the 1999 FIDIC forms. Sub-clause 15.5 of the 1999 FIDIC forms may create some difficulties in international construction contracting. It is common practice in some regions of the World for abrupt socio-economic changes to occur on account of a change in government or political personnel. For instance, the appointment of a new government, a new Minister or head of a government agency could result in cancellation of projects and contracts. This clause allows contracts under the 1999 FIDIC suite to be terminated at the will of a new helmsman without providing adequate protection for the international contractor.

 

 

On the part of the Employer, who is genuinely forced to terminate an important project on

 

account of financial challenges, the fact that there is no direction in the clause on when he might restart such project without incurring a liability is one of the weaknesses of the clause. Also, the restriction on the Employer not to restart the project may be difficult to enforce in practice. The Gold Book issued in 2008 seems to provide a solution to this problem, by affording the Employer the right to terminate the contract at convenience but also entitling the Contractor to recover profit in the event of such termination. The position in the Gold Book is now reflected in the 2017 Suite of Contract forms (see the new Clause 15).

 

 

ii)      Contractor Termination

 

 

Clause 16 of the 1999 Forms provide for the Contractor to terminate, suspend, or reduce the

 

rate of work on account of the Employers default of his duties under the contract. Two very important clauses were introduced in the 1999 Form:

(1) the Contractor can activate his rights under this clause where the Engineer fails to certify a payment certificate when he should do so; and

(2) Contractor may activate his rights where the Employer fails to provide reasonable evidence of the financial arrangements to pay the Contract as provided under Sub-Clauses 2.4.

You are familiar with the decision by the Privy Council in the case of NH International (Caribbean) Limited v National Insurance Property Development Company Limited (Trinidad and Tobago) [2015] UKPC 37 on this clause and other related clauses. Bearing developments in that case in mind, it is significant that many a contractor will be reluctant to enforce this provision in haste unless there is reasonable evidence that the Employer will not be able to pay for the project when payment is due. Perhaps, an important lesson to be learnt from the NH International (Caribbean) Limited case is that what may constitute ‘reasonable evidence’ under Clause 2.4 may vary and will largely depend on the facts of

individual cases. Please note the changes that have been made to the above subclauses under

 

the 2017 Forms. Do these changes necessarily improve the position under the 1999 edition or

 

are they retrogressive?

 

 

b. Risk and Insurance

 

Clause 17 of the 1999 Red Book and the Yellow Book deal with the distribution of risks and liability between the parties. The Contractor is responsible for the works from commencement until the issue of a takeover certificate by the Engineer or the takeover of part of the works by the Employer. Within this period the Contractor will repair any damage that occurs to the works at his own costs. This responsibility of the contractor does not extend to designs made by the Employer and damages caused by the Employer’s personnel. It does not extend to matters covered under the Employer’s risk clause. Also excluded are matters covered under the force majeure provisions.

 

 

Where damage or delay is caused by matters falling under the Employer’s risk or force majeure,

 

the Contractor is obligated to repair the works to the extent instructed by the Engineer. In most instances where the Employer’s risks eventuate, the Contractor is only entitled to the costs of repairs and to extension of time where time has been lost. However, where the damage is caused by the design provided by the Employer or due to occupation of parts of the works by the Employer, the contractor will be entitled to also recover profit. The Employer bears the costs of occurrence of the risks covered under the Employer’s risk, and to some extent, the Force Majeure clauses. Clause 19 of the 1999 FIDIC Contracts provide for Force Majeure situations. It defines Force Majeure as: “an exceptional event or circumstance:

1. which is beyond a party’s control,

 

2. which such party could not reasonably have provided against before entering into the Contract,

3. which, having arisen, such party could not reasonably have avoided or overcome, 4. which is not substantially attributable to the other party”?

 

Clause 19 defines the concept of “Force majeure” quite widely and includes any exceptional event beyond the parties’ control, which cannot be substantially attributed to one of the parties. Items listed under the force majeure clause include wars, natural disasters (e.g., tsunamis, hurricanes, tornadoes etc.) landmines, terrorism, strikes and disorder, but excludes strikes by the Contractor personnel. An important poser for students to reflect on, is whether a natural disaster such as a typhoon, that has occurred consistently over two decades during particular months of the year could qualify as a Force Majeure event, to afford a contractor on a bridge project in that area the right to claim under this clause?

It has been suggested that the wording of this clause, which allows anything beyond the parties’

 

control that could not have been envisaged or reasonably planned at the commencement of the

 

contract to be termed ‘force majeure’ is overly extensive for some jurisdictions. This would

 

result in the clause either being inoperative or subject to some limitations in those jurisdictions.

 

 

The Force Majeure clause provides that each party should notify the other when a force majeure event is about to occur; the party affected must give notice within 14 days after becoming aware of the event or circumstance. Please note that the new formshave made some significant changes to Clauses 17, 18 and 19.

 

 

Force Majeure is known under the 2017 FIDIC forms as ‘Exceptional events’ clause and is addressed under Clause 18 rather than 19. Clause 18 ofthe 1999editionprovides for the parties to obtain insurance to cover different aspects of the project. It provides for the ‘insuring party’ to ensure there is insurance cover in the joint names of the parties. Clause 17, 18 and 19 of the 1999 forms have been criticised by Dr. Bunni and others for not being clearly drafted. There was clearly some attempt to remedy this under the 2017 forms. For more on this see Topic 6 notes.

 

 

c. Dispute Resolution

 

Clause 20 of the 1999 FIDIC forms deals with Dispute Resolution, it introduces the Dispute Adjudication Board (DAB). The drafting of sub-clauses 20.4 and 20.7 has created an unintended weakness. The clauses seem to suggest that where a party has served a notice of dissatisfaction against the determination of the DAB, the parties are not bound to implement that decision. The controversy created by this drafting problem has generated substantial literature and judicial decisions on the subject.1                                                         In April 2013, the FIDIC Contracts Committee issued a Guidance Memorandum which aimed to address this issue. The error is rectified in the Gold Book, where it is made explicit that where a notice of dissatisfaction has been served, the decision of the DAB remains binding and should be implemented pending its reversal either at arbitration or on the parties reaching an agreement. Even further clarity is provided under Clause 21 of the second editions (2017) of the Contract suite.

 

d. Unexpected Events

 

 

 

 

1 PT Perusahaan Gas Negara (Persero) TBK v CRW Joint Operation [2010] SGHC 202; 137 Con. L.R. 69; PT Perusahaan Gas Negara (Persero) TBK v CRW Joint Operation[2014] SGHC 146; [2015] B.L.R. 119 (Singapore High Court decision); PT Perusahaan Gas Negara (Persero) TBK v CRW Joint Operation [2015] SGCA 30; [2015] B.L.R. 595 (Singapore Court of Appeal decision) [to fully appreciate the issues in case no 3,4&5, you are encouraged to read them in the order in which they appear on this list]; Peterborough City Council v Enterprise Managed Services Ltd. [2014] EWHC 3193 (TCC).

 

Following FIDIC’s balanced risk sharing concept, the following risk sharing pattern emerges:

 

All risks, whether expected or unexpected, associated with the planning and execution of the construction work (e.g., provision of labour, materials, and constructional plant) and all risks that may arise therefrom (e.g., quality of materials and workmanship, safety of site operations and so on) shall be borne by the Contractor. All risks arising from the design is borne by the party responsible for the design (in the Red Book this is the Employer, in the Yellow Book, the Contractor).

 

 

The Employer is responsible for all financing risks. The Employer also takes responsibility for the risks of providing access to the site and ensuring that it is available for the Contractor to carry out his work, and usually all risks arising from information he has collected about the site and other information contained in the tender dossier. It is important to note that in the 1999 Red Book and Yellow Book, the risks of unforeseen physical conditions are borne by the Employer (sub-clause 4.12). In the Silver Book, most of the risks associated with unforeseen physical conditions are passed on to the Contractor in exchange for a premium/ enhanced contract price to be paid by the Employer.

 

 

The 1999 FIDIC Red and Yellow Books define ‘Unforeseeable’, as “not reasonably foreseeable by an experienced contractor by the date for submission of the Tender.” Thus, the criterion is that of a figurative experienced contractor, who has done similar work several times before. The TCC and the Court of Appeal have had the opportunity to examine and apply this definition recently in Obrascon Huarte Lain SA v Attorney General for Gibraltar [2015] EWCA Civ 712. In the Red and Yellow Books, if the Contractor encounters adverse physical conditions at the Site, which are ‘unforeseeable’, it will be entitled to claim the extra cost and time lost. There is no corresponding allowance under the Silver Book.

Although released in 2017, more time is required to know which clauses and subclauses are creating difficulties among users. Some authors have flagged issues relating to the variation clause, the authority of the Engineer, the provisions on design and liability and the prescriptive nature of the forms as possible areas of conflict. Time will tell if these predictions materialise.

 

 

3. The FIDIC Silver Book and ENAA Model Form for Process Plant

 

Construction.

 

The Engineering Advancement Association of Japan (ENAA) published the first edition of the ENAA Model Form for International Contracts for Process Plant Construction, in 1986 with a revised edition in 1992. In 1996, with a few amendments, the World Bank in its Standard Bid Documents for supply and installation of Plant and Equipment adopted the form. ENAA

in 1996 issued the ENAA Model Form International Contract for Power Plant Construction,

 

which it states, is suitable for use in a “full turnkey power plant construction project”. This

 

section will compare briefly this 1996 Model form by ENAA with the 1999 Silver Book issued by FIDIC. Both institutions are interested in producing internationally acceptable model contracts for turnkey projects. The analysis that follows compares these forms on two important areas in turnkey projects i.e., responsibility for errors in the Employers information and interference by the Employer. It draws from an earlier work by Agnes Sandberg published in 1998. Always bear in mind that FIDIC Silver Book is in its 2nd Edition and some changes have been made.

 

 

a. Responsibility for errors in Employer’s information

 

The 1999 Silver Book provides in Sub-Clause 4.10 that the Employer shall make available to the Contractor all relevant information on the conditions of the site. In sub-clause 4.12, the Contractor is stated as having accepted to bear the consequences of the incorrectness of the information provided by the Employer and the Contractor is deemed to have obtained all necessary information and to have foreseen all difficulties. Under sub-clause 5.1 save for the exception listed in this clause (refer to topic 5), the Employer is deemed not to be responsible for errors in the information provided by the Employer.

 

 

On the other hand, the ENAA form in the General Clause (GC) 9.2 provides that the Contractor has entered into the Contract on basis of having undertaken reasonable examination of the data relating to the Works and obtained necessary information from an inspection of the site and shall not be relieved from responsibility on account of his lack of diligence on these matters. GC 10.1 provides that the Employer is responsible for the information to be provided by him before and during the course of the Contract. GC 20.1.1 provides that the Contractor shall be liable for all errors in specifications and drawings prepared by it, despite such specification or drawing having been approved from the Employer. The limit to this liability is where the error is caused by information provided by the Employer in writing to the Contractor. Compared to the clauses in the Silver Book, it appears that the ENAA forms take a relatively middle ground on the issue of responsibility for design and unforeseen ground conditions. The position of the Silver Book may be viewed by many a contractor, as we have previously discussed, as austere.

 

 

b. Interference by the Employer

 

The Silver Book provides that the Employer may order variations and give various other instructions for the works to be constructed. Where disagreements arise on account of these instructions, sub-clause 3.5 provides for the Employer to determine any dispute between the parties fairly, it also provides a corresponding right for the Contractor to serve a notice of

dissatisfaction within 14 days, where it disagrees with such determination by the Employer.

 

Sub-clause 5.2 provides a detailed review and approval process of the Contractor’s

 

documents by the Employer and sub-clauses 7.3 and 7.5 provides the Employer with various rights of inspection and rejection of materials.

 

 

In contrast, there is no provision in the ENAA Model Form indicating a general right for the Employer to determine disputes that arise between the parties. ENAA GC20.3 provides that the documents to be prepared by the Contactor shall be specified in the contract, the specified documents are to be submitted to the Employer either for approval or review. Works related to these documents are not to commence until after approval by the Employer has been obtained. The Employer has 14 days to communicate his approval or disapproval, after which the documents are deemed to be approved. If there is a disagreement, the parties can refer the matter to the Expert (adjudicator) appointed by the Parties. The Employer will give instructions on how the project should proceed pending the determination of the dispute by the expert.

 

 

Both Contract forms provide similar approaches to turnkey construction. The Contractor seems to carry more risk under the Silver Book than under the ENAA form. In the Silver Book, errors made in the information provided by the Employer is borne by the Contractor except for a few specified exceptions while in ENAA each party takes responsibility for the information they provide. The Silver Book provides for more control over the Contractor by the Employer and puts the Employer in the position to determine at first instance, the disputes between the parties. The ENAA form provides for the determination of disagreements at first instance by an independent third party.

 

4. Applicable Law and FIDIC Contracts

 

FIDIC contracts usually make provision for the application of the law of each jurisdiction where it is used. Subclause 1.4 of the Yellow Book 2017 state that “the Contract shall be governed by the law of the country (or other jurisdiction) stated in the Contract Data (if not stated, the law of the Country), excluding any conflict of law rules.” While this allows FIDIC contracts to remain flexible and applicable worldwide, it also means that the interpretation of the terms of FIDIC contracts may vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction. This is because the legal systems across the world differ substantially. For instance, within Europe, in some jurisdictions, an Employer may not terminate a contract based on a contractor’s insolvency without seeking directions from the court, despite contrary terms in an agreement, while in other countries,insolvencyisan immediate ground for terminationofa construction contract, in line with the provisions of the contract.

It is important to note that there is no provision in the FIDIC contracts that bar parties from

 

making claims under the applicable law as against using the procedures provided by the

 

contracts. This distinction between claims under the contract and those under the applicable

 

law is known technically as the difference between contractual claims and legal claims. Contractual claims flow from the distribution of rights and obligations set out in a contract and are made following the procedure set out in the contract. These include claims for:

 

•     additional works.

 

•     extension of time.

 

•     delay.

 

•     disruption; and

 

•     acceleration arising in the course of execution of the project.

 

 

The 1999 and 2017 FIDIC Contracts offer similar procedures to deal with Contractual claims across the suite. The procedure for Contractor claims can be found under Clause 20 of the 1999 forms and the Employer claims under Clause 2. Please note that under the 2017 forms, both Employer and Contractor claims are under Clause (20).

 

 

Legal claims are claims made against a party to a construction project based on rights arising out of the law applicable in the jurisdiction. An example of legal claim includes suing an Employer under Tort/Delict for misrepresentation under the applicable law.

 

a. Sub-clause20.1(1999 Forms) andtheApplicableLaw

 

One provision of the FIDIC 1999 forms that has been subject of controversy is sub-clause 20.1. The clause operates to bar a contractor’s claim if it is not made within 28 days of the event giving rise to the claims. The effect of the applicable law on this clause has been a subject of considerable debate. Generally, in England and Wales, it was established in the case of Bremer Handelgesellschaft mbH v Vanden Avenne Izegem nv [1978] 2 Lloyd's Rep. 109, by the House of Lords that a notice provision should be construed as a condition precedent, if:

•     it states the precise time within which the notice is to be served, and

 

•     it makes plain by express language that unless the notice is served within that time the party making the claim will lose its rights under the clause.

 

Sub-clause 20.1 fulfils both these conditions. Therefore, sub-clause 20.1 in English Law is a condition precedent. However, there is always a possibility that, depending on the particular circumstances of the matter before it and the impact of the applicable law, the courts in other jurisdictions may hold a different view. Consider, for instance, the following decisions: the Australian case of Gaymark Investments Pty Ltd v Walter Construction Group Ltd; the

 

Scottish case of City Inns Ltd v Shepherd’s Construction and the English case of

 

Multiplex Construction v Honeywell Control Systems.

 

Also, many jurisdictions are governed by civil codes. These Civil Law jurisdictions recognise contract autonomy and allow the parties to determine the terms and conditions of their contract; however, they ensure that these conditions do not contravene any mandatory provision of the law or public policy. One example of mandatory provision/public policy is the concept of good faith. Many civil codes provide that a contract must be performed in accordance with its contents, and in a manner consistent with the requirements of good faith. The concept of good faith is difficult to define and may vary slightly in different jurisdictions. Generally, it connotes the equitable application of the terms of a contract without allowing one of the parties to gain an unequal advantage on the other party. The broader lesson here is that the standard forms used in international construction such as the FIDIC suite do not operate in a vacuum. It is important that parties, especially, the contractor, pay attention to the applicable law and its likely impact on the transaction.2 It is important that before concluding any contract, most especially an international construction contract using the FIDIC forms, each party conducts a thorough due diligence, not only of the provisions of the contract, but also of all rules or laws that may affect the distribution of the rights and liabilities under the contract.

 

5. Arbitral Decisions and Court cases

 

 

a. ArbitralAwards

 

Disputes in international construction contracts are mostly resolved by negotiation and arbitration and are rarely reported. This leaves a vacuum in the knowledge process as valuable lessons that could be learnt from mistakes of others is lost. In recent years, the International Chambers of Commerce has published decisions made by some of its arbitral panels after removing the names of the parties. Please note that these decisions are not binding on third parties. At best, they are of persuasive value in the sense that it may be argued that a similar situation has been determined in a particular manner by another tribunal and urge your particular tribunal to accept/reject a similar outcome. This section will briefly analyse a few of such cases that have been based on FIDIC contracts.

 

 

(i)        ICC Case No. 11039 decided in 2002 was a dispute based on FIDIC White Book 2nd Edition (although this contract form has not been studied in this module, the case relates to time bar clauses, which are common throughout the FIDIC family). In this case, the contract included a clause requiring that all claims must be brought within the

 

 

2 For a typical illustration, see J. Mante and I. Ndekugri, ‘Interplay between Contract and Public law in Ghana: Implications for

 

relevant period as stated in Part 11. The relevant period stated in Part 11 was one year.

 

A claim brought by the German construction company against the Danish Engineering firm after this period was held to be invalid as it was time barred under the contract. (ICC Bulletin Vol 19/No 2 2008 (2009), at 95 to 97).

(ii) ICCCase10892was a dispute based on the FIDIC Red Book 4th edition. It concerned the Employer’s rights under clause 63. Clause 63 provides that the Employer may on giving a 14-day notice, enter the site and terminate the employment of the contractor. In this case, the Respondent after giving the required 14-day notice, also obtained an injunction against the contractor and immediately moved into the site (before the expiration of the notice) and ejected the contractor and sized the contractor’s equipment and records. The tribunal on a review of the circumstance of the case, coupled with the fact that the termination had not been recommended by the Engineer, held that the Employer was in breach of the contract and that the termination was improper. ICC Bulletin Vol 19/No 2 2008 (2009), at 91 to 95).

(iii) ICC Case 10619 also revolved around the FIDIC Red Book 4th Edition (1987), specifically article 67.1 that deals with the time an Engineer is given to determine a dispute referred to him. The contract provides that an Engineer has 84 days to determine a claim referred to him. The Engineer in this case, had delayed his decision because the parties were in negotiations. After the negotiations were unsuccessful, the Engineer then made his decision and communicated it to the parties, although 84 days had passed from the date the claim was referred. It was held by the tribunal that the decision was invalid. In the absence of an agreement between the parties, the Engineer did not have the right to extend the time provided by the contract (ICC Bulletin Vol. 19/No 2 2008 (2009), at 85 to 91). FIDIC arbitral decisions may be sourced from individual arbitration institutions, depending on the rules of those institutions, and the ICC Bulletins.3

(iv) ICC Case 14431 related to the FIDIC Red Book 1999 (clauses 3.4; 20; 20.2; 20.4; 20.6; 20.8.) on the replacement of the Engineer and the Claims and dispute resolution provisions. The Arbitral Tribunal considered, among other things, two questions relating to DABs. Firstly, whether reference to DAB was mandatory and secondly, whether a draft of a formal letter is sufficient to indicate an intent to refer a matter to DAB. To the first question, the tribunal ruled that reference to DAB is mandatory under the relevant FIDIC form. This decision does not apply in all situations and is likely to be more useful where the parties adopted the relevant FIDIC for unamended. The tribunal also held that a draft unsigned formal letter will only be sufficient to invoke the DAB if it was later confirmed to be the final version. The tribunal stayed proceedings to allow parties to

 

refer their dispute to adjudication. See also ICC Cases 18505 and 19581 (reported in

 

ICC Dispute Resolution Bulletin 2015 Issue 1).5

 

(v) For more insights into Arbitral Awards dealing with DABs, please read the article by Christopher Seppalaonthe subject published inthe international constructionlawreview (2016) - available through the reading list.

 

 

b. Courtdecisions

 

As previously noted, most disputes arising from the FIDIC contract will usually be resolved by the Engineer (under the older editions of the contract), the DAB (under the post 1999 suites of contract) and or the arbitral tribunal. On few occasions, these cases will make their way to the courts. With the passage of time, the number of judicial decisions on the FIDIC suites are increasing steadily. We have already encountered a number of these cases under Topic 3 (see the list of cases under Topic 3). In addition to this list, I wish to draw attention to a table of FIDIC-related cases compiled and updated by Corbett and Co.,6 which contains interesting summaries of cases dealing with aspects of the FIDIC conditions together with live links, some of which could be accessed without charge. It will be useful to spend some time on these cases (Court and arbitral decisions); they provide insight into how the courts and arbitral tribunals have interpreted and applied some of the FIDIC provisions. Another important source for FIDIC-related cases is Lexis PSL.

 

 

5. The FIDIC Engineer, Dispute Adjudication Board Pre-2017

 

 

a. TheEngineer under FIDIC

 

The Engineer has been a central figure in FIDIC contracts since the first publication in 1957. The Engineer’srole peaked inthe FIDICRed Book 4th editionand the YellowBook 3rd edition. In these two contracts, the Engineer was ‘permanent’ personnel who could not be replaced without the agreement of the Contractor.

 

 

In the 1999 Red and Yellow Books, the Engineer is no longer of that status; rather, the Employer may replace the Engineer by following certain set procedures. In the Silver Book, the role of the Engineer is performed by the Employer’s representative, the Gold Book also followed this format. The Pink Book retains the position of the Engineer but places it under the firm control of the Employer.

 

 

 

 

 

4 Summary of this award obtained from the Corbett & Co.’s FIDIC Case Law Table

5 Briefs available from the latest Corbett & Co. FIDIC Case Law Table available on Moodle.

 

Despite all the changes and arguments concerning the role, the Engineer is still a prominent

 

part of the FIDIC forms; he still retains some of his much-criticised role as an adjudicator of disputes between the parties. Among the many ways the role remains important is that in the guidance to Part II - Conditions of Particular Application of the 1999 forms, the Engineer is provided as an alternative to the Dispute Adjudication Board (DAB). The FIDIC Engineer is a distinctively English common law creature. The Engineer traditionally has three roles:

 

 

1. The agent of the Employer, where he designs the project, makes available the design, helps in the preparation of tender documents, supervises the project and issues payment certificates,

2. As an independent professional using his skills in the service of the parties, when wearing this hat, he values variations (changes to the work after commencement), and measures work done for payment amongst other things; and

3. The Engineer plays the quasi-judicial role of an adjudicator of the parties’ disputes (see for example Sutcliffe v. Thackrah;7 Costain Ltd and Others v. Bechtel Ltd and Others8 for the different roles of the Engineer).

Inperforming hisdutiesasthe agent ofthe Employer,a default bythe Engineer isdeemed as a default from the Employer, entitling the Contractor to a contractual claim against the Employer, an illustration here is where the Engineer delays the release of designs. This will entitle the Contractor to extension of time and compensation (cost plus profit).

 

 

Where the Engineer performs his duties as an independent professional in error, the Contractor does not have a right to an action against the Employer or the Engineer. The option open to the Contractor, in this case, is to commence action under the provisions of the contract dealing with Contractor’s claim (clause 20). However, where the Engineer fails completely / refuses to perform his duties, the Contractor may have a claim against the Employer directly for failing to perform one of his duties under the Contract which is to appoint a functioning Engineer (See Man Enterprise SAL v Al-Waddan Hotel Ltd9). Failure or error by the Engineer in performing his quasi-judicial role entitles the parties to a right to settle the matter amicably or proceed to arbitration.

 

 

The Engineer is not and has never been a party to the contract. The Engineer cannot change the terms of the contract agreed to by the parties (Employer and Contractor) and is usually employed under a different contract with the Employer (i.e., white book). He is, however, a central figure to the successful administration of the project and has the

 

 

7 [1974] AC 727 at p.737

8 [2005] EWHC 1018

 

power to instruct variations to the works among other things. The roles of the Engineer,

 

especially as regards adjudication of disputes, have been a worry for civil law lawyers. This is because there is no equivalent professional under this system of law. The technical professional in a construction project in most civil law countries, was simply an agent of the Employer and did not carry the extra responsibilities of the FIDIC Engineer.

 

 

The criticisms have been that an Engineer being paid by the Employer could not be impartial in matters concerning the Employer. It has also been argued that most disputes arise from actions or inactions of the Engineer and to cloth him with the power to adjudicate impartially on problems he created, was pushing the boundaries of reality. In the same vein, international Employers in developing countries complained that the Engineers, who most frequently were from developed countries, were eager to side with contractors also from developed countries. Even in the United Kingdom where the concept of the ‘venerable’ Engineer originated, some doubts have been expressed on the suitability of the roles assigned to the Engineer in the modern construction industry. The popular Latham Report of 1994 at page 36 expressed the opinion that the traditional English position of a multitasked (the three Engineer roles described above) Architect / Engineer was no longer suited to the realities of modern-day construction.

 

 

Against criticism of the Engineer’s role, others have averred, that the whole FIDIC concept

 

of fairness and equitable distribution of risks rests on the role of the consultant Engineer. This school of thought argues with hindsight, that the heavy criticisms that followed the Silver Book’s replacement of the Engineer with the Employer’s representative and the Pink Book’s ‘shackling’ of the Engineering function, points to the importance of the Engineer’s role in the FIDIC structure.

 

 

In retrospect, the 1999 Suite presented FIDIC with the opportunity to rest the arguments surrounding the role of the Engineer. It seems that a very fine middle ground has been followed by FIDIC. The removal of the Engineer, unlike the 1987 4th Red Book, is now a less cumbersome process: Inform the Contractor 42 days before the replacement of the Engineer.

 

 

To give adequate credentials of the proposed replacement to the Contractor and to not to appoint any person as replacement of whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. The powers of the Engineer to give certain orders especially with regards to variations and costs are now to be made in consultation with the Employer. The Employer is also allowed to reduce the power of the Engineer further, but to specify this in Part II

of the contract - Conditions of Particular Application. The Employer is obligated by the

 

contract not to place any further restrains on the powers of the Engineer, other than those

 

specified in the contract, without the agreement of the Contractor. Further, the contractor is to assume that the exercise of any powers under the ‘restrained’ lists by the Engineer indicates that the Engineer has obtained the approval to exercise such powers.

 

 

Interestingly, by placing on the Employer a duty not to further restrict the powers of the

 

Engineer (except as already stated in Part II) without the consent of the Contractor, it allows the party before the commencement of the Contract to have a full picture of the powers of the Engineer. It also allows any Contractor uncomfortable with such restraint of powers, to either provide for these under the pricing of the contract or to decline from entering the contract.

 

 

The Pink Book totally takes away this careful positioning. The Contractor’s objections are only to be considered under the Pink Book and no matter how reasonable, would not block the appointment of any person as a replacement Engineer. The time for informing the Contractor of a replacement is also reduced to 21 days from 42 days. It is hoped that the MDB’s, on whose behest, this contract was issued will ensure that the right of the Employer over the Engineer is managed judiciously.

 

 

The last duty that the FIDIC 1999 Suite sought to redefine was the power of the Engineer

 

to act as an adjudicator. Under the 1999 FIDIC suite a Dispute Adjudication Board (DAB) is created, as a replacement for the Engineer. However, one issue remains:

•     The Engineer under sub-clause 3.5 of the 1999 suite (this has the same wordings in the Red Book and the Yellow Book whereas the Silver Book has no Engineer) is still to make determinations when issues arise in the contract. It is his duty to try to reach an amicable compromise between the parties and failing that to make a fair determination.

•     It is argued that although the Engineer has been replaced as the penultimate tribunal for disputes under the FIDIC form, he retains a significant proportion of his quasi-legal function by the operation of sub-clause 3.5. The Engineer, it seems is still the tribunal of first instance for disputes.

 

 

In practice, it has been reported that some Employers usually amend the 1999 FIDIC terms to allow them complete discretion on the appointment and replacement of the Engineer. As stated earlier, the Pink book endorses and incorporates such practice. It is advised that such practices lead to higher bids, as Contractors usually price in the costs and effect of possible mid-project changes into the contract price. There is also the

practice of removing the Engineer appointed at the beginning of the project without

 

providing an independent replacement and instead, replacing him with the Employer.

 

While it would be a breach of the Employers contractual duty under the FIDIC form not to appoint an Engineer (entitling the Contractor to suspend and or terminate the contract), what is the position where the Employer appoints himself as the replacement Engineer?

 

 

A mid-project change of this nature came up for determination in the case of Scheldebouw BV v. St James Homes (Grosvenor Dock) Ltd [2006] EWHC 89. In this case, the Employer had sought to replace a firm of Engineers appointed as Construction Managers for a project. The Construction Managers performed most of the duties reserved for the Engineer under sub-clause 3.5. It was held by the court that on the preliminary issue, of whether the Employer was entitled upon ending the contract of the ‘Construction Manager’ to appoint itself (Employer) as a replacement, that there was no such entitlement. As a corollary, it is argued that where the original Engineer under the Red Book is a named person or an independent engineering consultancy firm, the employer would have no power to appoint itself directly as a replacement.

 

 

Another issue that has become frequent in practice is the appointment of different level of technical staffs and consultants of various nomenclatures to manage aspects of the FIDIC contract-such roles include the supervisor, site manager etc. A FIDIC policy on the issue, released in November 2009, decried this practice, and pointed to the single point Engineering function created under the FIDIC forms. It pointed out that the appointment of assistants to the Engineer is flexible enough to allow the incorporation of different competencies, where required. FIDIC recommends that an Engineer should be appointed for a project and the other roles, if required, be incorporated under the Engineer assistant function. The practical difficulties created by this non–FIDIC innovations, is that it distorts the framework of the FIDIC contracts, as the Engineer in FIDIC contracts is assigned specific and significant duties.

 

 

Please note that the new 2017 FIDIC forms have strengthened the hand of the Engineer and clarified its roles by setting out in detail how the various roles are to be performed. It is safe to conclude that the Engineer will continue to play an important role in FIDIC contracts. The duties and responsibilities assigned to the Engineer will continue to evolve in light of the dynamic nature of the construction industry.

 

 

b. Dispute Adjudication Board–Pre-2017

 

Using non-arbitral panels to settle disputes in the construction industry was first used in

 

the United States in 1980’s. These panels were known as Dispute Resolution Boards

 

(DRB) and offered non- binding opinions to parties in dispute. Where the parties

 

disagreed with the opinion, they would have recourse first to amicable settlement and then to arbitration. The Boundary Dam in Washington was the first construction project to include the Dispute Resolution Board in its contract. The boards have been a huge success in the United States (US). Statistics from the US from 1988 to 2004 show that the Board have been used in over 1000 projects with a combine project value of $75 billion, it is also estimated that the different Dispute Resolution Boards across the US have heard and resolved over 1000 disputes.

 

 

The success of Dispute Resolution Boards in the US was to serve as springboard for its internationalisation. In 1980 El Cajon Hydro Project in Honduras became the first international project to use a Dispute Resolution Board. By mid-1990 the World Bank had started the process of incorporating Dispute Resolution Boards into its construction contracts. By 1995 the World Bank tender documents formally replaced the Engineer with the Dispute Resolution Board as the penultimate tribunal for disputes between the parties.

 

 

Later the same year, FIDIC issued the Orange Book (refer to topic 3) and with it introduced the FIDIC version of the Dispute Resolution Board to replace the Engineer. The FIDIC board was called the Dispute Adjudication Board (DAB). The main difference with the Dispute Resolution Boards was that the DAB made binding decisions on the dispute between the parties. The decisions were to be binding and to be obeyed by the parties pending arbitration and could only be varied or overruled by arbitration or by amicable agreement by the parties before arbitration. DABs were to become the preferred form of dispute resolution in the 1999 forms and the Pink and Gold Books. Also note that the 2017 editions of the FIDIC forms amend the name of the DAB to include ‘Avoidance’ (Dispute Avoidance/Adjudication- “DAAB”) emphasizing the body’s dispute avoidance role.

 

 

i. The FIDICDAB

 

The DAB is appointed under Clause 20 of the current FIDIC forms. Also important to the functioning of the FIDIC principle of DAB, is the DAB procedure rules provided for in the appendix to Part I of the Pink Book, and now, the Red, Yellow and Silver Books 2. The combination of both Clause 20 and the procedural rules provide the following guiding principles for the FIDIC DAB:

 

1. Both parties jointly appoint the Board and are responsible for financing the Board.

 

The DAB is to be appointed shortly after commencement of the contract. The DAB

 

2. The DAB may also be an ad-hoc board appointed after a party refers a dispute to it

 

(this has changed under the new [2017] forms)

 

3. Where the Board is standing board (not ad-hoc), the board is expected to visit the site regularly at intervals of not more than 140 days and not less than 70 days between each visit. The visit is to be planned by the Employer in cooperation with the Contractor, and both parties should be present at the visit. During each visit, the DAB is to prepare a report and distribute it to the parties before leaving the site. These visits enable the board to keep abreast with developments at the site.

4. The Board is to be provided with all documentation it requests and to be kept informed of important events at the site.

5. The role of the DAB is to prevent disagreements from becoming disputes and to settle disputes when they arise.

6. Both parties could and are encouraged to jointly refer disagreements to DAB for their opinion. The facility to refer a matter to DAB for their opinion can only be activated by both parties working together. At the stage of referring a matter for opinion, the DAB is only to suggest a solution as distinguished from a binding decision.

7. Where dispute arises and is referred to the DAB, the DAB is to provide a reasoned determination in writing within 84 days. This decision is binding, and parties are to implement it. Twenty-eight (28) days after the decision by the DAB, the decision becomes final and binding if a notice of dissatisfaction has not been served (the option of challenging the decision by arbitration is lost).

8. Where a party refuses to implement a DAB decision, the other party is entitled to seek the enforcement of the decision by arbitration.

 

Many issues arise from these provisions; the three different choices created by it is of importance to our study.

 

 

The first is the choice between a sole member DAB and a three-person DAB. It is

 

suggested that the nature of the project vis–a-vis the competency required determine the preferred option. The more varied and complicated a project, the more the case to appoint a three-person DAB. As a guide, the World Bank has recommended that projects above $25 million should have a three-person Board.

 

 

The next point is the choice between an ad-hoc panel appointed after a dispute has arisen and a standing panel appointed immediately after a contract commences. The first point of note is that an ad-hoc panel robs the parties of the opportunity to enjoy one of the main services of the DAB- preventing disputes. Also appointing a DAB after a dispute has

arisen and giving the DAB the same 84 days deadline to reach a reasoned decision seems

 

onerous when contrasted with a standing DAB that has gained full knowledge of the

 

project during the time of visiting the site. An ad-hoc DAB is recommended in most of FIDIC design and build contract forms. The Gold Book (the design and build contract by FIDIC) and the 2017 forms all adopt a standing DAB. The proponents of ad-hoc boards in design and build contracts point to the possible lack of disputes since most of the design and build is done at the contractor’s workshop. They also argue that the multiplicity of what may be termed site in a design and build contract will create practical difficulties and a substantial increase cost.

 

 

The last choice is between appointing a DAB or appointing the Engineer as DAB. Ultimately the choice here depends on the parties’ perception of the concept of the consulting Engineer and DAB. It is also predicated on the quality of the persons available for such appointment. It has been reported, in practice, that some Employers are keen to avoid appointing DABs to avoid the extra costs. Dr. Bunni rightly points out that such an argument seems flawed when viewed against the cost of international arbitration that follows unsettled international construction disputes.

 

 

It is worth noting that some interpretational issues have erupted in relation to the DAB provisions in the FIDIC forms in Singapore (see the Persero Cases – full citations under the further reading section) and England (see Peterborough City Council v Enterprise Managed Services Ltd). These issues have exposed gaps in the provisions on DAB (Sub-clauses 20.4-7), particularly those relating to the status of a DAB decision after a Notice of Dissatisfaction has been served. The new forms address this concern.

 

 

6.FIDIC in practice: -what gets amended

 

One peculiar feature of international construction contracts is that information on contract amendments; disputes and related issues rarely become public knowledge. While this makes sound commercial sense and protects the privacy of the parties, it affects negatively necessary exchange of knowledge needed to improve the process.                                   In recognition of this, the Engineering and Physical Sciences Research Council (EPSRC) of the United Kingdom funded a network of experts on construction contracts to carry out a study into legal issues in construction with specific concentration on the new FIDIC forms. The first workshop was held in the University of Reading on 4 February 2005, this section builds on the briefs and analysis from that workshop. The participants identified the following areas as the common clauses that are amended by parties:

1. The role of the Engineer under the contract, 2. Differing site conditions,

3. Time limits for specific actions under the contract,

4. Force Majeure,

 

5. Dispute Adjudication Board, 6. Corruption.

 

 

The participants also pointed to the fact that issues concerning contract negotiations including amendments are usually decided at the highest political levels and technical and legal experts are usually required to work their way around those decisions and create a workable framework of contracts. Especially for contracts with a government agency as one of the parties, it was noted that construction and operation timetables were dictated more by political expediency than the best engineering contracting practice.

 

a. Frequently Amended Clauses –Pre-2017

 

 

i.       Control of the Engineer

 

The Engineer of the 1999 forms (the Red Book and the Yellow Book) may only be replaced following the procedure set out in Clause 3; this entitles the Contractor to sufficient notice and the power to prevent the appointment of a replacement that the Contractor has reasonable grounds to object to. The workshop participants reported that one of the most common amendments to the new Red Book is to give the Employer absolute power to replace the incumbent Engineer, i.e., the Contractor’s right under Sub-Clause 3 to raise reasonable objections to the replacement is usually deleted. It was noted that such free reign by the Employer would impact directly on sub-clause 3.5, which requires that the Engineer determine disagreements between the parties fairly. It was reported, as common practice, the addition of a clause usually in Part II giving the Employer the unilateral right to change the duties and powers of the Engineer.

 

 

ii.       Differing Site Conditions

 

Sub-Clause 4.12 provides that the Contractor is entitled to extension of time for delay and recovery of costs incurred as a consequence of encountering unforeseeable physical conditions. Subclause 1.1 .6.8 states that physical conditions are “unforeseeable” if they are “not reasonably foreseeable by an experienced contractor by the date for submission of the Tender”. Participants reported that some Employers delete Clause 4.12, particularly Employers in the Middle East. This would effectively transfer the risk of unforeseen adverse ground conditions to the Contractor. While the participants with involvement in the Middle East reported that competitionisso fierce that suchdeletionhas virtuallyno impact ontender prices.

 

 

Construction lawyers were of the view that the Employer almost always pays in one way or

 

another for tinkering with risk allocation on unforeseeable differing site conditions. They

 

also pointed to the fact that claims on adverse site conditions could be founded on the

 

applicable law i.e., misrepresentation by Employer by providing erroneous data on the site

 

 

conditions.

 

iii.

 

Otherwise, the wide force majeure clause could be invoked to avoid liability.

 

Changes to Time Limits Under the Contract

 

 

The 1999 forms provide for different time limits for actions to be taken by parties. Clause

 

20 goes to the extent of creating a time bar on contractor claims if there are not made within 28days. Participants reported amendments on this time limit in favour of even shorter time limits for Contractor’s claims. The purpose for further reducing the time limit for a Contractor to make claims seems to be to reduce the number of claims from contractors. Participants agreed that the consequences are the same as denying the Contractor the right to extension of time and additional payment on account of Unforeseeable adverse site conditions. Such claims usually end up in arbitration with the unnecessary extra costs on the parties. Under Sub-Clause 14.7 the Employer is expected to make interim payment of the amount due within 56 days. Tasks that must be completed within the 56 days include the Engineer checking the accuracy of the statement and also other administrative procedures to enable payment to occur. Participants reported that some Employers extend this period to improve their cash flow. Participants agreed that contractors normally price for such amendments by appropriate increases to their tender prices.

 

iv.      Force Majeure

 

This clause was introduced by the FIDIC 1999 forms to replace the exceptional risks clause in the earlier FIDIC forms. It is contained in Clause 19 and defined in clause 19.1 (refer to your notes). FIDIC advises that in the Particular Conditions, the Employer should verify that the wording of Clause 19 is compatible with the applicable law of the contract before inviting

 

tenders. advice.

 

 

v.

 

Participants reported that amendments are often made in accordance with this

 

 

 

 

Dispute Adjudication Board (DAB)

 

 

The DAB is one of the significant innovations of the 1999 FIDIC form. It provides an

 

independent adjudication of disputes between parties and where properly managed, can reduce the incidence of disagreements that become disputes. Participants at the workshop reported that Employers had little enthusiasm for the DAB concept and tended to delete the provisions requiring a DAB to be set up. The European Bank for Reconstruction and Development (EBRD) has a policy of not permitting DAB provisions to be deleted where a FIDIC standard contract requiring a DAB is used. The Bank does not, however impose the use of any particular standard contract on its funded projects.

 

It was reported that some employers avoid using a DAB by using the old Red Book in EBRD

 

sponsored projects.Evenwhere DABs are allowed in the contract provisions,some employers failed to operate the DAB provisions properly, e.g., demanding to have greater control over the membership of the board than allowed under the contract, refusing to take steps necessary for the setting up of the DAB or, where one was set up, failing to make use of it as required by the contract.

 

vi.      Corruption

 

One of the grounds entitling the Employer to terminate the contract is the Contractor being involved in corruption. Participants agreed with the view expressed in Construction Business Formbook, that such clauses have had the opposite effect. Some agents and representatives exploit it to extort bribes from contractors with threats of falsely accusing them of offering bribes.

 

 

b. Advise from FIDIC on Amendments

 

The practice of amending the original conditions to accommodate parties and project-specific changes has continued with the newer 2017 FIDIC contracts. FIDIC has consistently advised against fundamental changes to the balanced allocation of risks and responsibilities under its suites of contract. It cautions that experience shows that heavily amended conditions tend to encounter problems. High tender prices, delays, cost overruns, disputes and termination are but a few of the consequences of offsetting the balance in the FIDIC contracts. FIDIC provide guidance on modifying its contracts, especially the Particular Conditions to projects. The problems associated with amending the standard forms are more pronounced when the non-project specific clauses are amended. In a bid to drive home the message, FIDIC has provided some guidance on clauses under its general conditions that should not be modified. The guidance is reproduced in FIDIC’s own language below:

 

 

1. The role and authority of the Engineer (where applicable, otherwise the Employer’s

 

Representative):

 

i. Oversight and/or inspection of the Works ii. Issues of Certificates

iii. Valuation of Variations

 

iv. Assessment, response to and determination of time/money claims

 

v. Monitoring of the Contractor’s programme (If the Engineer is unduly constrained so that he cannot exercise independent professional judgement, then problems with successful contract management, dispute avoidance and timely completion can be confidently anticipated)

2. Liability for errors in the Drawings/Technical Specifications or Employer’s Requirements

 

3. Liability for proving access to and on the Site.

 

4. Liability for obtaining permits and approvals. 5. Liability for unforeseeable physical conditions. 6. Labour conditions.

7. Delays caused by authorities.

 

8. Defects liability, including latent defects.

 

9. Procedures for dispute settlement/resolution.10

 

 

Notwithstanding the above advice, the final word on which conditions or clauses are made part of a contract is entirely a matter for the parties and their advisers, so are the consequences of the choices they make. A wrong choice may be costly compared to the benefit to be derived from an amendment.

 

 

7. The 2017 FIDIC Suite of Contract Forms

 

As discussed under Topic 4, the most recent FIDIC Suite of contract forms were released in December 2017. The Topic 4 notes highlighted some of the key changes introduced by FIDIC. The discussions there are equally relevant here as they emphasised some of the topical issues likely to continue after the release of the 2017 Forms - e.g., design liability, the role of the Engineer, the role of the DAAB, risk allocation etc. Since both old and the new FIDIC forms will be in use concurrently, students need to be aware of the features of the different editions of the form. For instance, a discussion of the 2017 forms should refer to the body which is the first point of call for dispute resolution under the new forms as Dispute Avoidance/Adjudication Board (DAAB) and not DAB. In the same vein, the body’s name in a discussion of the 1999 edition of the form should be DAB not DAAB.

 

 

Summary

 

This topic completes the study of the FIDIC forms. The next topic introduces the NEC Contract forms.

 

 

 

Cases

 

 

1. Obrascon Huarte Lain SA v Attorney General for Gibraltar [2015] EWCA Civ 712

 

2. NH International (Caribbean) Limited v National Insurance Property Development Company Limited (Trinidad and Tobago) [2015] UKPC 37.

 

3. PT Perusahaan Gas Negara (Persero) TBK v CRW Joint Operation [2010] SGHC 202; 137 Con. L.R. 69

 

4. PT Perusahaan Gas Negara (Persero) TBK v CRW Joint Operation[2014] SGHC 146; [2015] B.L.R. 119 (Singapore High Court decision)

 

5. PT Perusahaan Gas Negara (Persero) TBK v CRW Joint Operation [2015] SGCA 30; [2015] B.L.R. 595 (Singapore Court of Appeal decision) [to fully appreciate the issues in case no 3,4&5, you are encouraged to read them in the order in which they appear on this list]

 

6. Peterborough City Council v Enterprise Managed Services Ltd. [2014] EWHC 3193 (TCC)

 

7. Scheldebouw BV v. St James Homes (Grosvenor Dock) Ltd [2006] EWHC 89

 

8. Bremer Handelgesellschaft mbH v Vanden Avenne Izegem nv [1978] 2 Lloyd's Rep. 109

 

9. Multiplex Constructions (UK) Ltd v Honeywell Control Systems Ltd [2007] EWHC 447 (TCC);[2007] Bus. L.R. D109

 

 

10.      City Inn Ltd v Shepherd Construction Ltd 2003 S.L.T. 885

 

11.      Gaymark Investments Pty Ltd v Walter Construction Group Ltd (if this does not open on a click, please copy the link into a browser)

 

 

12.      Sutcliffe v. Thackrah [1974] AC 727

 

13.     Costain Ltd and Others v. Bechtel Ltd and Others [2005] EWHC 1018(also relevant to NEC)

 

14.     Man Enterprise SAL v Al-Waddan Hotel Ltd [2013] EWHC 2356 (TCC); [2014] 1 Lloyd's Rep. 217

 

15.     TSG Building Services PLC v South Anglia Housing Ltd. [2013] EWHC 1151 (TCC)

 

 

[Cases available on Westlaw]

 

 

 

 

Further Reading

 

 

1. Glover, J. FIDIC: an overview. Seminar at Queens College Cambridge Sept. 2007 [Not available on the reading list]

2.    Sendberg, A. A comparison between FIDIC Conditions of Contract for EPC Turnkey Projects (the test edition of the Silver Book) and the ENAA model form Power Plant Construction,IBAconference 1998. [Not available on the reading list]

3.     Nicklish, F. “The Role of the Engineer as Contract Administrator and Quasi-Arbitrator in International Construction and Civil Engineering Projects”, International Construction Law

Review, Vol. 7, Part 3,pp.322-338.

 

4.    Christopher Seppala, ‘Commentary on Recent ICC Arbitral Awards dealing with Dispute Adjudication Boards under FIDIC Contracts’ [2016] ICLR185

 

 

 

[

The Reading list has several relevant materials on the different issues discussed in this topic].
 

Topic6: Introductionto theNEC Contracts Background, Structure, Concepts and Roles

 

 

 

Topic Preview

 

This topic will considerthe following:

 

Ø Introductionto the NEC Form Ø Background and History

Ø Presentationand Conceptof the NEC NEC3 ECC. Ø Overview of the Roles in the NEC3 ECC

Ø Detail examination of key roles -o The role of the Employer

o The role of the Contractor o The role of the Supervisor

 

Topic Content

 

1. Introduction to the NEC Forms

The NEC suite of forms (formerly known as the New Engineering Contracts) is an interlocking family of contracts published by the Institution of Civil Engineers (ICE). It is original in style and ambitious in its stated objective. The contract uses short sentences, plain English language and consciously avoids legal terms and some well-known words in the construction industry such as variations and claims. The objectives of the NEC form are to encourage collaborative working between the parties, provide a stimulus for good project management and bring certainty to a project in terms of time, cost, and quality.

 

The consultative edition of the New Engineering Contract was first published in March 1991. The first edition was published in 1993; a second edition was published in June 1995. The third edition, which is commonly known as NEC3, was published in 2005 and has been endorsed by the United Kingdom Office of Government Commerce. It is also the contract of choice for the construction of the 2012 London Olympic Games infrastructure. The fourth edition was published in 2017.

 

 

The NEC3 family (still in use) comprisesof the following contracts:

 

      NEC3 Engineeringand ConstructionContract(NEC3 ECC).

 

      NEC3 Engineeringand ConstructionSubcontract(ECS).

 

      NEC3 ProfessionalServicesContract(PSC).

 

      NEC3 Engineeringand ConstructionShortContract(ECSC).

 

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 1 of 30

 

      NEC3 EngineeringandConstructionShortSubcontract (ECSS).

 

      NEC3 Adjudicator’s Contract (AC).

 

 

      NEC3 Term ServiceContract(TSC).

 

 

      NEC3 Term ServiceShortContract(TSSC).

 

      NEC3 FrameworkContract(FC).

 

 

      NEC3 Supply Contract(SC).

 

 

      NEC3 SupplyShortContract(SSC).

 

The NEC4 Suite of contracts has added a few more forms – e.g., the new Design, Build and Operate (DBO) Contract, the Alliance Contract, and the Dispute Resolution Service Contract. We will have more on these contracts under Topic 10.

 

2. Background and History

In the 1980’s there was growing perception that the domestic construction industry in the United Kingdom had become consistently clogged down by disputes and low performance. The period also witnessed a proliferation of both standard contract forms and bespoke contracts. Although research has always pointed to the fundamental role the construction contract plays in the success of a project, it seemed then, that the continuous update of the standard contract forms available at that time only resulted in lengthier books without achieving significant efficiencies. It was against this backdrop that in September 1985, the newly formed legal affairs committee of Institution of Civil Engineers set out to review the contracts in use in the industry with the objective of identifying the procedure for good practice that would reduce the incidence of disputes. The committee was guided by three objectives:

 

1. That construction contracts should be more flexible, more reflective of actual procurement practice and less concentrated on specific disciplines. The division between Joint Contract Tribunal (JCT) contract forms and the ICE (Institute of Civil Engineers) forms represents a good example of this problem. The JCT family had been positioned as the major form for building contracts, while the ICE forms are angled for engineering contracts. This seems inappropriate in an industry where most projects were multidisciplinary, combining both aspects.

 

2. That construction contracts should be a tool to spur good management of projects. The construction industry at the time seemed just another sub-sector of the bigger claims industry. Industry observers regularly advised companies to have good claims department, and so much time and money was wasted on disputes.

 

3. That construction contracts should be simple and clear. The parties should have

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 2 of 30

 

greater certainty that their projects will be on time, at the budgeted cost and be fit for purpose.

 

Particularly instructive in the international construction industry was the perception that the representatives of the parties at the construction sites could not understand international construction contracts. Dr. Bunni referred to this in his book on the FIDIC Red Book. He states that during the review of the FIDIC (old) Yellow Book 3rd edition, the responses from the parties were that the update should make the Yellow Book clearer and easier to understand. The statistics put forward was that 86% of the clauses in the old Yellow Book could only be understood by 4% of the population.

 

In 1986, after an extensive review, the committee decided that the industry required a new contract. This new contract was not to be an update of any previous contract in the industry, but a new form directed at the specific problems the industry was facing, the decision to proceed with a new form was predicated on many arguments, two of which are:

 

•     The old contract forms were developed when best practices on project management had not become known. For instance, the FIDIC contracts were built on ICE conditions, which historically had foundations in the 1870 conditions of contract used to construct the embankments of the Thames and the London sewers. Some of the terms from the 1870 forms have survived to this day.

 

•     It has been argued that the update of these old forms usually drew participants from different legal systems and disciplines, which pushed specific objectives during the update process. These objectives were aligned to the base they were representing. For instance, the FIDIC reviews have seemed to concentrate on making FIDIC contracts more user friendly for Civil Law jurisdictions. While such an objective is an important aim, it proceeds from the basis that the basic framework of the contracts is appropriate, and few questions are asked about the overall structure of the contract and the adopted risk sharing strategy.

 

In 1991 the NEC committee issued a new contract form - the New Engineering Contract. This was put forward as solving the problems discussed above. The contract issued in consultative form was tried out by British Airways Authority, Eskom- the South African Energy Company and the Overseas Development Authority. In March 1993, the 1st edition of the NEC was issued. It was presented as being suitable for both international and domestic projects, for multidisciplinary procurement and for either Employer or Contractor design. It received both high praise and stinging criticisms. What all who reviewed the contract accepted was that it was indeed new and, in some ways, revolutionary.

 

The next critical point in the evolution of the New Engineering Contract (as it was called then) was the ringing endorsement it received from the influential Sir Michael Latham report titled ‘Constructing the team’ published in July 1994. This was followed in 1995 by the publication of the 2nd edition, which incorporated the changes advised by the Latham report including changing the title of the forms from ‘New Engineering Contract’ to the Engineering and Construction contract’; this was to remove any misconceptions of it being suited for

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 3 of 30

 

engineering projects only. The second edition also considered some of the legislative changes expected in United Kingdom industry. The third edition was published in 2005. In 2013, the NEC Suite of contract was updated and enlarged to 39 documents (made up of contract forms - including the suite the NEC Professional Service Short contract - and guides). The once ‘revolutionary’ NEC form is now a mature contract form in use in over 20 countries across the world. In 2017, twelve years after the third edition was published, the NEC launched the fourth Edition, which essentially continued the evolution of the NEC forms.

 

3. NEC3 Contract– Presentation, Style,and Concepts

 

The NEC3 ECC is the major works construction contract of the NEC family of documents. The other construction contracts in the family include the Short Construction Contract that is created for smaller projects and the Sub-contracting Contract which is to be used when sub-contracting sections of the works. This topic concentrates on the NEC3 ECC.

 

Presentation

The NEC3 ECC is structured as a ‘pick and mix’ contract. It has nine core clauses, which are common to all its contract options, these are:

1. General

2. The Contractorsmain responsibilities 3. Time

4. Quality 5. Payment

6. CompensationEvents 7. Title

8. Risks and Insurance 9. Termination

 

It then has main options lettered A-F, which the parties are to choose from to determine the method of payment and risk sharing between the parties, these are:

 

• Option A: Priced contractwith activity schedule. • Option B: Priced contractwith bill of quantities. • Option C: Target contractwith activity schedule. • Option D: Targetcontractwith bill of quantities. • Option E: Cost reimbursablecontract.

•     Option F: Managementcontract.

•     Option W1: Dispute resolution (usediftheHousingGrants,Constructions and Regeneration Act 1996(Construction Act 1996) does not apply.

• OptionW2:dispute resolution(usedif the ConstructionAct 1996 applies) (Please note that NEC4 has added another option W3 (Dispute Avoidance Board).

 

Finally, it has a host of secondary options that the parties may choose to add to the contract.These include:

•     Option X1: price adjustmentfor inflation.

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 4 of 30

 

•     Option X2: changesin the law. •     Option X3: multiple currencies.

•     Option X4: parentcompanyguarantee (name has changed under NEC4) •       Option X5: sectionalcompletion.

• Option X6: bonus for early completion. • Option X7: delay damages.

• Option X8: collateralwarrantyagreements. • Option X9: transferof rights.

•     Option X10: employer'sagent.

• Option X11: terminationby the employer. • Option X12: partnering.

•     Option X13: performancebond.

•     Option X14: advancedpaymentto the contractor.

• OptionX15: limitationof the contractor’sliability for its design to reasonableskill and care.

•     Option X16: retention.

•     Option X17: low performance damages/low service damages. •       Option X18: limitation of liability.

•     Option X19: task order.

•     Option X20: key performanceindicators.

•     Option Y (UK) 2: The Housing Grants, Construction and Regeneration Act 1996 (dealing with payment and supervision).

• OptionY (UK) 3: TheContracts(Rights ofThirdParties) Act 1999.

•     OptionZ: additional conditionsof contract(this clauseallows parties to tailor the contract to fit their requirements).

 

Please note that NEC4 has introduced a number of new secondary Options. The latest is the X29 Secondary Option on Climate change. This is scheduled to be published early 2022. The aim of this Option, among other things is to assist clients and suppliers in the drive towards net-zero greenhouse gas emissions and sustainability.

 

How to Create a NEC3 ECC contract

To create an NEC3 ECC contract, the parties will have to choose one of the main options-the one that best suits the payment method they prefer. That is the choice between options A-F. Then add this to the core clauses numbered 1-9; this is common to all the main options. This forms a complete NEC3 ECC contract. The secondary options are add-ons that the parties may include in their contracts if they so desire. For instance, if the Employer would like to be able to claim delay damages, he may add-on Option X7. In practice parties usually include several items listed in the secondary option. The ability to choose and mix between these options aids the flexibility of the NEC3 ECC form.

 

Style

1. The NEC3 ECC is written in plain English, avoiding jargon. It is written in the present tense. This present tense is to be read in conjunction with Clause 10.1 which contains the word ‘shall’ and which is said to extend to all the clauses in the Contract. There are no cross references between clauses, as each clause stands alone. The Contract

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 5 of 30

 

endeavours to use consistent numbering and language throughout, because of this, each of the main options has a different numbering, so that a clause number is only used once.

2. The first clause number is clause 10 in the Core Clauses; these may be strange to new users who are used to traditional contracts where the numbering starts with 1. The idea behind this is to allow for easy navigation. Each clause within the first Core Clause (general) starts with number 1. Each clause under Core Clause 2 (Employers main responsibility) starts with 2 and so on. So, for instance, if one speaks of Clause 52.1 that would refer to the fifth Core Clause - the payment clause. The digit 2 (in 52.1) refers to the order in which the clause appears under Core Clause 5- it is therefore the third clause under that Core Clause- the first being nought – 50.1 and the second being one - 51.1. The digit after the decimal point 52.1 refers to the paragraph the point appears. Thus, in Clause 52.1 would mean that it is the first paragraph under clause 52.

3. In the NEC3 ECC the defined terms and phrases begin with an initial capital letter (i.e., the Site) while identified terms appear in italics (i.e., Project Manager). The Data to replace these italicized terms are to be found in the Contract Data (this is a part of the tender documents, Part 1 is filled by the Employer, it includes such things like Name and address of the person nominated to act as the Project Manager etc.; Part 2 is completed by the Contractor and includes such things as the name and address of the Contractor, design proposals etc. and forms part of the tender document.

4. The NEC3 ECC refuses to use certain well-known construction terminologies; these include but are not limited to the following:

•     Variations- any changes to the contract in NEC3 ECC is termed as a compensation event

•     Claims This, it seems, is to avoid the emotive response associated with the word. ‘Claim’ is not used in the NEC ECC. The NEC3 ECC does not provide for extension of time per se – it deals with these issues under the Compensation Event procedure

•     Loss and expense- These are all managed under the compensation event procedure •       Subjective measurements– The NEC3 ECC avoids as much as possible use of

words/phrases like ‘reasonable’, ‘in the opinion of the Engineer’, ‘to the satisfaction of the architect’ etc. The reason for this is that it attempts to ensure that there is an objective measure for all procedureswith specific time limits.

•     Traditionalroles- There is no provision for the traditional roles, thus in the NEC3 ECC the roles of the Engineer, Architect, Employer’s representative, designer, and the quantity surveyor are dispensed with.

 

The above represents an overview of general conventions that govern the style and presentation of the NEC3 ECC.

 

 

 

Concepts

The NEC ECC has been described as an amalgamation of project management procedures. These concepts while now familiar to the regular users of this form may still strike those who are new to the NEC3 ECC form as revolutionary or unworkable at best. It is important to remember that the form has been around for more than two decades now and has been used

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 6 of 30

 

for many successful projects. The defining concepts of the NEC3 ECC include the following:

 

•     Mutual Trust and Cooperation: The parties and key stakeholders in the NEC3 ECC are obligated by the first clause in the contract to act in a spirit of mutual trust and cooperation. It has been opined that in England, the courts will give effect to this obligation. The contract is written in a manner to motivate the Contractor, the Employer, the Project Manager, and the Supervisor to work together for the benefit of the project.

 

• Early Warning: The principle behind this concept is that change is inevitable in a construction project. Therefore, either the Project Manager or the Contractor should notify the other as soon as any event which could affect the time, quality or cost of the project comes to their notice. This early warning procedure is to ensure that the parties have the time to plan and consider mitigation procedures that could reduce, diffuse, or solve the problem that might occur. It is important to note that the issue so notified being a future occurrence may not eventuate.

 

o The early warning procedure obligation is contained in Clause 16 of the NEC3 ECC. Where the Contractor fails to use the Early Warning Procedure, when such warning would have resulted in savings, the Project Manager is allowed to consider this when assessing the amounts due the Contractor under the Compensation events procedure. If the Project Manager fails to notify under this clause it may result in the Employer incurring greater costs, time, or reduced quality. The Early Warning procedure is also used to ensure Key Dates are met or problems with meeting them are known early. A key date is a date set out by the Employer in the Contract data by which a specified activity or condition should have been completed. It allows for greater control of time in the contract.

 

o Once an Early Warning has been issued, the Project Manager includes it in the Risk Register (now referred to in NEC4 as Early Warning Register). The Project Manager may then call a Risk Reduction Meeting, where proposals will be considered on how to mitigate the risk. At the meeting, the parties may also decide on which risks (at the commencement of the project – the parties create a list of risks for the project that are contained in the Contract Data) can be removed from the register – the procedure is provided for under Clause 16.4 of the NEC3 ECC. The Project Manager has a very comprehensive role to play in dealing with these matters. These will be considered in detail in the topics that follow.

 

•     Compensation Events: Compensation Events are those events for which a Contractor becomes entitled to an assessment for time and money. In the NEC3 ECC, it is important to remember that this may not result in any extra money or time. Under the NEC3 ECC, the financial effect of such event is not to be calculated at the original tendered rates but at the actual cost (NEC2 ECC) or forecast defined cost (NEC3 ECC), the premise being that the Contractor should not be worse off or better

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 7 of 30

 

off on account of the change occurring. Further, the Contractor is to notify a compensation event within 8 weeks of becoming aware of it; if he fails to do this, he loses his right to any extra money or time except it is a matter the Project Manager should have notified the contractor. The NEC3 ECC3 provides thus:

 

The Contractor notifies the Project Manager of an event which has happened or which he expects to happen as a compensation event if The Contractor believesthattheeventisacompensation eventand The Project Manager has not notified the event to the Contractor. If the Contractor does not notify of a compensation event within eight weeks of becoming aware of the event, he is not entitled to a change in the Prices, the Completion DateoraKeyDateunless the Project Manager should have notified the event to the Contractor but did not.”

 

The parties will rely on observation and the extensive documentation process of the NEC3 ECC to determine when the Contractor became aware or should have become aware of the Event.

 

•     Acceleration: The NEC3 ECC was among the first contracts to incorporate value engineering, although this post-dated the FIDIC value engineering clause in the FIDIC 1999 forms. In the NEC3 ECC, acceleration does not refer to speeding up the work – rather it refers to bringing forward the completion date. The Project Manager does not give instructions for acceleration rather he instructs that the Contractor submits a quotation for acceleration. The Contractor may then submit a quotation or give reasons why he is not submitting one. This provision has been altered under NEC4.

 

•     Adjudication: The NEC3 ECC encourages settlement of disputes during the currency of a contract. Adjudication is the first point of dispute resolution and the NEC3 ECC provides clear guidelines on the timescales for the process. The NEC3 ECC first championed adjudication before it was adopted as a statutory requirement in the UK under the Housing Grants, Construction and Regeneration Act (1996). Under NEC 4, two new entities have been introduced, namely the Senior representatives of parties and the Dispute Avoidance Board.

 

•     Accepted Programme: In the NEC3 ECC, the programme for the project is of great importance. The Contract provides that penalties be applied for failure by the Contractor to submit or maintain a programme. Where the Contractor fails to submit his first programme to the Project Manager, the PM is entitled to withhold a quarter of the price for work done until the Contractor complies. A Contractor that fails to submit regular updated programme, run the risks of the Project Manager making his own assessments of any compensation event independent of the programme.

 

•     Design: The Design responsibility is set out in the Works Information (now called Scope under NEC4) of the NEC3 ECC. This is defined as information which either specifies the works or states any constraints on how the contractor is to provide the works. The Works Information identifies the parts of the works to be designed by the

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 8 of 30

 

Employer and the part to be designed by the Contractor. The parties can determine either to give all the design responsibility to one party or to share it in some defined proportion.

 

•     Communications: The NEC3 ECC provides that all communication should be separate. This is to ensure that parties avoid using lengthy communications to hide important facts. The NEC3 ECC has also set deadlines for replies to communications to ensure that no party gains advantage by stalling the communication process.

 

4. Overview of Roles in the NEC3 ECC

 

The NEC3 ECC is created with the objective of promoting good project management practice. One of the ways it strives to meet this objective is by setting out clearly the responsibility of each stakeholder under the contract and providing specific timescales for meeting assigned responsibilities. This creates an easily identifiable line of accountability for each contractual responsibility. The NEC3 ECC recognizes the existence of the following roles:

 

1. The Employer (the Client under NEC4) - this is the owner of the project at whose behest the construction is taking place. It is a party to the NEC3 ECC and plays a minimal but significant role in the project.

 

2. The Contractor - This is the other party to the contract. The Contractor is the person or corporate body charged with performing all the responsibilities assigned to the Contractor under the contract. He is responsible for providing the works in accordance with the Works Information.

 

3. The Project Manager - This stakeholder carries out the role of the contract administrator on behalf of the Employer. The Project Manager is at the heart of the NEC3 ECC and he/she is assigned very specific and, in some ways, onerous responsibilities. The Project Manager is an agent of the Employer and is not expected to determine disputes between the parties.

 

4. The Supervisor - This stakeholder is required to ensure that the works are provided to the standard and performance required by the Works Information. He is in some ways the quality controller and the health and safety manager of the NEC3 ECC. The role of the Supervisor entails responsibility for conducting different tests and inspection required by the contract.

 

5. The Sub-contractor – it is defined rather widely by the NEC3 ECC and may include suppliers. The Contractor is expected to submit the particulars of his proposed sub-contractors to the Project Manager for approval.

 

6. The AdjudicatorUnder NEC3, the adjudicator is the first level of dispute resolution in the contract. The Parties are to attempt to resolve their differences amicably - this usually is between the Project Manager (representing the Employer) and the

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 9 of 30

 

Contractor. Disputes are to be referred to the Adjudicator when the attempt at amicable settlement fails.

 

7. The Tribunal -The tribunal is the ultimate level of dispute resolution in the project. Matters are referred to the tribunal when one of the parties is dissatisfied with the determination made by the Adjudicator. The Tribunal is an identified term under the NEC3 ECC. The parties are allowed to specify their choice of tribunal in the Contract Data. For instance, the parties may choose an arbitral panel using the arbitration procedure under International Chambers of Commerce rules as the tribunal.

 

8. Delegates - Delegates are different categories of people that the stakeholders may from time to time assign their duties. It is expected that the stakeholders delegating the duty will ensure that the person being used as a delegate can perform the assigned task. The responsibility for failure to fulfil a duty lies with the NEC3 ECC stakeholder that assigned the role. The NEC3 ECC provides that where it is the Project Manager or Supervisor delegating, the Contractor is to be kept informed of the extent and duration of such delegation.

 

9. Others This is defined asother people and/or Organisation that do not have a direct role in the Contract but are incidental to the successful completion of the project. This could include the suppliers of gas, electricity and telephone companies and government agencies etc.

 

Also note that under NEC4, Senior representatives of the parties and the new Dispute Avoidance Board also have significant dispute resolution roles under the new forms. These are the significant roles under the NEC3 ECC. The NEC3 ECC places considerable emphasis on the importance of working collaboratively. The Key roles are expected to actively cooperate for the success of the project. Clause 10.1 of the NEC3 ECC 3 enjoins major stakeholders to act in a spirit of 'mutual trust and cooperation'. This phrase, it has been argued, goes beyond simply requiring the parties to act reasonably and seems to import an obligation to act in 'good faith'; 'fair dealing', looking out for each other’s mutual interest and such related principles.1

 

5. Detail Examination of the Key Roles under NEC3 ECC

The key roles that impact directly on any project procured under the NEC3 ECC are the Employer, Contractor, Project Manager and Supervisor. We will examine these roles one after the other. In doing so, we will need to look closely at the various clauses dealing with each of the roles. As an incidental benefit, we will essentially be familiarizing ourselves with substantial portions of the NEC3 ECC Core and Option clauses.

 

5.1. The Employer

The Employer is not directly involved in the day to-day management of the project. He

 

 

1 For more on Cl. 10 and the import of the phrase in the spirit of mutual trust and cooperation, please read J. Mante, ‘Mutual trust and co-operation under NEC 3&4: a fresh perspective’ Const. L.J. 2018, 34(4), 231-252

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 10 of 30

 

entrusts the daily management of the project to the Project Manager. The Project Manager is the agent of the Employer, and the influence of the Employer over the Project Manager cannot be overstated. The Employer may replace the Project Manager at any time on giving notice to the Contractor. It is the duty of the Employer to provide the Contractor with access to the site and to pay the contract price. Below is a clause-by- clause summary of the Employer’s duties:

 

Clause 14.4 - The Employer is to give notice to the contractor before replacing the Project Manager. He is not required to reach an agreement with the Contractor, but to notify the Contractor of his intention to change a member of his team. The Employer appoints the Project Manager and names him in the Contract Data.

 

Clause 33.1- The Employer is to give possession/access to the site or parts of it, on or before the dates stated in the Accepted Programme. This is the programme identified in the Contract Data or it is the latest programme accepted by the Project Manager. The programme usually contains such things as method statements and resources for each operation.

 

Under Clauses 35.1 and 2 the Employer is to take over the works not later than two weeks after completion or take takeover any part of the works put into use except for the stated exceptions.

 

Clause 40.2- The Employer is to provide the necessary materials for the tests and inspections specified in the Works Information.

 

Clause 43.4 -The Employer is to give access to the Contractor for the purposes of remedying any defect after takeover.

 

Clause 51 - The Employer is to pay the amounts due to the Contractor within three weeks of the assessment date and to pay interest on all late payments. The Employer is also to pay interest on amounts that were assessed wrongly by the Project Manager and have since been corrected.

 

Clause 83.1 - The Employer is to indemnify the Contractor against claims arising from risk stipulated by the contract as Employer's Risks (these includes war, riots, loss, or damage due to Employer's fault etc.).

 

Under Clause 84.1, the Employer is obliged to provide insurance as stated in the Contract Data. Clause 8 5. 3 requires the Employer to keep to the terms of the insurance policies entered into by the Parties. Clause 86.1 allows the Employer to insure against a risk, which the Contractor should have insured, but which the Contractor has not provided a required policy or certificate of insurance.

 

Clause 87.1 provides that the Employer shall provide copies of the certificates and policies of the Insurance to the Project Manager. Clause 87.3 creates, in favour of the Contractor, the responsibility on the Employer to pay the costs of insurance that should have been

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 11 of 30

 

covered by the Employer, but which is being covered by the Contractor. The important thing to note about insurance in the NEC3 ECC is that the party to insure for specific risks is provided for in the Contract data.

 

Clause 90.1- states that the Employer should provide detailed reasons to the Project Manager, for terminating the contract before termination is initiated. Clause 90.2 requires the Employer to follow the procedure in the termination table when terminating either for reasons given or at will. Clause 90.4 provides that on termination, the Employer should pay the certified amount within three weeks of the Project Manager’s certificate.

 

Clauses 92.1 and 92.2 - Allows the Employer to complete the works himself and use any equipment and materials he has title to; the Employer may also direct the Contractor to leave the site and remove any equipment, plant, and materials.

 

The dispute and secondary Option Clauses also place some additional responsibilities on the Employer. These include:

 

Option W1 - Under Clause W1.2 (1), the Parties are to appoint the Adjudicator using the NEC Adjudicator contract.

 

Clause W1.2 (3) this requires the Employer to appoint the Adjudicator by naming him in the Contract Data, jointly with the Contractor. In the alternative, the Employer may (this incorporates the acceptance by the Contractor) nominate an Adjudicator nominating body to appoint an adjudicator.

 

Under Clause W1.3 (1), the Employer may refer any other matter including a dispute about the value of a compensation event to the Adjudicator. Clauses W1.3 (9) and 1.4(1) provide that the Employer should proceed with the project as if the dispute that has been referred to the Adjudicator had not occurred and not to refer any dispute to the Tribunal unless it has been referred to the Adjudicator first.

 

Option W1 is applicable to all contracts except for contracts covered in the UK by the Housing Grants, Construction and Regeneration Act 1996 (the HGCR Act). Option W2 is the option for UK contracts covered by the HGCR Act. The two dispute resolution options (Options W1 and W2) create similar responsibilities on the Employer except for Clause W2.3 (1) under Option W2. Under this clause, the Employer is to give notice of the adjudication to the Contractor before referring the dispute to the Adjudicator.

 

Where chosen by the parties, Option X14 (advanced payment) creates the following responsibility for the Employer:

 

Clause X14.1 - The Employer is to make payment of the advanced payment sum as stated in the Contract data.

 

Clause X.14.2 requires the Employer to make such payment within four weeks of the contract date or provide the receipt of the advanced payment bond.

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 12 of 30

 

Secondary Option X7 (Delay damages) also provides under Clause X.7.2 that the Employer is to repay any overpayment of amounts slated as delay damages with interests.

 

Secondary Option X20.5 provides that the Employer may add a Key Performance Indicator and associated payment as the incentive schedule but may not delete nor reduce payment stated in the payment Incentive Schedule.

 

Secondary Option Y (UK) 2 at Clause Y2.3 provides that the Employer is to notify the Contractor, if withholding payment is intended and to state the amount to be withheld and the reasons for it. Generally, it has been observed that Employers who choose to contract under the NEC form are more careful and keener to cooperate and avoid unnecessary disputes. This attitude is probably the culture change that the NEC form sought to bring. Although many had predicted that with the NEC3 ECC enjoying a wider usage more disputes will occur. This prediction has not yet materialized.

 

5.2. The Contractor

The Contractor is the other party to the Contract. It is the more visible party at the project site. The main difference between the Contractor under the NEC3 ECC and the Contractor in other International Contract forms, is that the NEC3 ECC Contractor is more risk conscious. He notifies the Employer at the earliest opportunity of anything that may delay or increase the cost of the project (Early Warning), even where these things are in the far future and may not eventuate. Another difference could be the level of communication required. Notifications under the NEC3 ECC are to be separate, and all communications are to be in a form that can be read, copied, and recorded.

 

Most of the responsibilities of the Contractor are to be found at Section 2 of the main clauses, aptly titled the Contractor’s Main Responsibilities. Like the provisions of traditional Contracts, under theNEC3 ECC, it is the duty of the Contractor to provide the works required by the Employer. However, in the NEC3 ECC, the extent and quality of the works is to be determined by the Works Information document(s).

 

The limit of the Contractor's liability and the level of his responsibility in terms of design undertaken by him are dependent on which secondary option of the NEC3 ECC is chosen by the parties. The default position is that the design should be fit for the purpose as defined under the Works Information, but this may be limited by choosing the appropriate Secondary Option.

 

Experience suggests that the Contractor should allocate adequate time for training and preparation of his team prior to commencing work on a contract procured under the NEC form. This is in line with the NEC philosophy that requires that the parties think and work through their responsibilities to ensure better projects. Among the many areas, that the Contractor is required to pay careful attention is the Works Information and the Site Information documents. Adequate knowledge of these documents puts him in good stead to fulfil his Early Warning obligation (this is a procedure by which the Project Manager and the Contractor notify each other of any matter which may increase Price, delay Completion,

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 13 of 30

 

affect a Key date or impair the performance of the works- Clause 16).

 

His responsibility under this procedure includes Clause 17 where he is to notify the project Manager of any ambiguities in the Contract documents; also, under Clause 18 he is to identify and notify the Employer of illegal and impossible requirements in the Contract documents. Also important is the Contractor’s role in the preparation of the Programme for the project. The Programme is the major time management document for the contract and there are negative consequences for the Contractor where he fails to provide an Accepted Programme.

 

Another important practical aspect is that the Contractor should ensure that all sub-contractors are under terms compatible withthe NEC3 ECC; this is regulated by the contract requiring the Project Managers prior approval of the terms of contract to be used for Sub-Contracting. This is important, as it allows the Contractor to perform his duties effectively for instance, an event, which may have been recognised by the sub-contractor as likely to delay him from completing his section of the works, may be unknown to the Contractor. Where there are complimentary contracts, the sub-contractor will notify contractor of this event, the Contractor in turn notifies the Project Manager thus meeting his responsibility under the contract to forewarn of likely delays.

 

The following is a synopsis of the responsibilities assigned to the Contractor under the NEC3 ECC:

 

Clause 10.1 – the Contractor is to act stated in the Contract and in a spirit of mutual trust and cooperation

 

Clause 13.1 - the Contractor is to communicate with the Project Manager and Employer in a form that can be read, copied, and recorded.

 

Clause 13.3, the Contractor is to reply to a communication within the time specified in the Contract; this allows the parties to avoid the project being stalled by a refusal of one or more parties to respond. Clause 13.4 requires the Contractor to resubmit a communication not accepted within the specified advised period for reply.

 

Clause 13.5 allows the Contractor to agree or disagree (with the Project Manager) to an extension of the period for reply. Clause 13.7 also provides that the Contractor is to communicate notifications separately.

 

Clause 15.1 entitles the Contractor to submit a proposal to the Project Manager requesting the addition of more Working Areas (this includes the site and any additional areas identified by the Contractor which are needed to provide the works)

 

Clause 16.1 provides that the Contractor is to give early warning to the Project Manager about any matters with delay, costs, or performance implications for the project.

 

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 14 of 30

 

Clause 16.2 provides that the Contractor may give instruction to the Project Manager to attenda Risk Reduction Meeting, this is a meeting calledon the notification of a compensation event, to consider how to deal with notified events and to consider other Outstanding risks and may also instruct others to attend if the others agree.

 

Clause 16.3 the Contractor is required to cooperate with the Project Manager during the early warning/risk reduction meetings.

 

Clause 17.1 the Contractor is enjoined to give notice of ambiguities or inconsistencies in the contract documents to the Project Manager Clause 27.4 provides that the Contractor is to act in accordance with health and safety regulations.

 

Clause 18.1 enjoins the Contractor to give notice of any illegality or impossibility in the works information. Clause 20.1 requires that the Contractor provides the Works in accordance with the Works Information document.

 

Clause 21.1 provides that the Contractor will design such parts of the works as stated in the Works Information.

 

Clause 21.2 provides that the Contractor shall submit particulars of his design for acceptance as required by the Works Information document.

 

Clause 23.1 provides that the Contractor, when instructed will provide particulars of design of items of equipment.

 

Clause 24.1 is to the effect that the Contractor is to employ Key Persons (persons identified as such in the contract) as statedin the Contract Data or acceptable replacements. The Contractor is to submit the name, qualifications, and experience of proposed Key Persons to the Project Manager. Clause 24.2 obligates the Contractor to remove any employee on the Project Managers instructions.

 

Clause 25.1 provides that the Contractor will cooperate with Others in obtaining and providing information. It also provides that the Contractor will share the Working Areas with Others as stated in the Works Information.

 

Clause 25.2 provides that the Contractor shall provide services and other things and shall pay the costs assessed for not providing these facilities and services.

 

Clause 25.3 provides that the Contractor shall pay the Employers costs incurred as stated in the contract if the Works does not meet the set condition on a key date.

 

Clauses26.2 and26.3provides that the Contractor shall submit the names of proposed sub-contractors to the Project Manager for acceptance and will only appoint a sub-contractor after such acceptance. The Contractor is also to provide the Project Manager with the proposed conditions of contract for each sub-contractor and to use only the conditions of contract approved by the Project Manager.

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 15 of 30

 

Clause 27.1 provides that the Contractor shall obtain approval for his design from others where it is necessary. Clause 27.2 enjoins the Contractor to provide access to the works to the Project Manager, Supervisor and Others. Clause 27.3 provides that the Contractor is to obey the instructions given by the Project Manager or Supervisor in accordance with the Contract.

 

Clause 30 provides that the Contractor is to start work on site, on/after the first possession date and to complete the work on or before the Completion Date (this the date by which the Contractor must achieve completion).

 

Clause 31 provides that the Contractor is to provide a programme within the period stated in the Contract data and to show the details in each programme as listed in the contract. Clauses 32.2 extend this obligation to revised programmes.

 

Clause 36.2 states that the Contractor is to submit quotations for acceleration when instructed by the Project Manager or to provide reasons for not doing so.

 

Clause 40 deals with tests and inspections. It provides that the Contractor is to provide samples as stated in the Works Information, the Contractor is also to provide facilities and materials for sample testing as provided in the Works Information. The Contractor is to notify the Supervisor before the tests and provide the Supervisor with results of the tests. The Contractor is also to notify the Supervisor of any matter that may obstruct the test or inspection. The Contractor is also to rectify defects revealed by the tests and inspections and to pay to the Employers the assessed costs of repeating the tests or inspections.

 

Clause 41.1 provides that the Contractor is not to bring into the Working Area any materials or plants that the Works Information states should be tested or inspected before delivery until the Supervisor notifies that the necessary tests and inspection have been completed successfully.

 

Clause 42.1the Contractor is to carry out searches as instructed by the Supervisor. Clause 42.2 provides that the Contractor is to notify the Supervisor, of defects found because of such searches before the defects date.

 

Clause 43 provides for the Contractor to correct the defects identified before the defect correction date. Clause 44 provides that the Contractor may propose to the Project Manager changes to the Work Information that would avoid a defect.

 

Clause 44.2 provides that the Contractor may submit a quotation for reduced prices or earlier completion date or both. Clause 45.1 provides that the Contractor will pay the costs of notified defects not corrected by the Contractor but corrected by others, within the Defects Correction period where access had been provided to the Contractor to correct the defect.

 

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 16 of 30

 

Clause 45.2 provides that the Contractor shall similarly pay the costs assessed for correcting a defect where access was not given. Clause 50.4 provides that the Contractor may apply for payment on or before the assessment date.

 

Clause 51.1 provides that the Contractor will pay the Employer if an interim assessment reduces the amount already paid.

 

Clause 61 deals with change events. The Contractor is required to give effect to instructions given by the Project Manager. The Contractor is expected to give notice of Compensation events, the Contractor may also notify the Project Manager, if the Project Manager does not notify his decision to the Contractor within one week of being notified of a compensation event by the Contractor.

 

Clause 62.1 provides that the Contractor is to discuss with the Project Manager different ways of dealing with the compensation event that are practicable and to submit alternative quotations for compensation events where instructed to do so and to submit other methods of dealing with the compensation events. Clause 62.2 requires the Contractor to submit details of his assessment with each quotation and to include alterations to the Accepted Programme. Clause 62.3 obligates the Contractor to submit Quotations for compensation events within 3 weeks of being directed to do so.

 

Clause 62.4 creates a similar time obligation for revised quotations. Clause 62.6 entitles the Contractor to notify the Project Manager if he (the Contractor) does not receive a reply to quotation within the assigned time to receive such replies. The Contractor is to state which quotation he will be treating as having been accepted after the lapse of the time for the Project Manager to respond.

 

Clause 63.5 provides that the contractor should assess the event as if he (the Contractor) had given an early warning if the Project Manager notifies him of his decision under Clause 61.5 (under this clause, the Project Manager determines whether the Contractor had provided an early warning of a compensation event).

 

Clause 63.9 provides that the Contractor is to take the correction to the description for a Key Event necessitated by a change in the Works Information into account when accessing a compensation event on account of changes to the Works Information.

 

Clause 64.4 provides that the Contractor may notify the Project Manager, if he has not notified the Contractor of his assessment of a compensation event within the time allowed.

 

Clause 72.1 obligates the Contractor to remove all equipment from the site when it is no longer needed. Clause 73.1 enjoins the Contractor to notify the Project Manager on finding any object of value or historical importance and not to move such objects until instructed to do so.

 

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 17 of 30

 

Clause 81.1 places on the Contractor the responsibility from the starting date until the defects certificate is issued of all risks that are not listed as the Employer risk in the Contract.

 

Clause 82.1 enjoins the Contractor to replace and repair any loss or damage to the works, plant and materials until the Defects Certificate is issued.

 

Clause 83.1 provides that the Contractoris to indemnify the Employeragainst claims due to the Contractor risks.

 

Clause 84.1 provides that the Contractor is obligated to provide insurance as stated in the Contract Data.

 

Clause 85.3 obligates the Contractor to keep to the terms of the insurance policies entered to by the Parties. Clause 86.1 allows the Contractor to pay the costs incurred by the Employer in covering insurances that has been allocated to the Contractor.

 

Clause 87.1 provides that the Contractor shall accept insurance certificates and policies provided by the Employer if they comply with the Contract.

 

Clause 87.3 creates the responsibility on the Contractor, to provide insurance that should have been covered by the Employer, but which is not.

 

Clause 90.1- states that the Contractor should provide detailed reasons to the Project Manager and the Employer, for terminating the contract before termination is initiated. Clause 90.5 provides that on termination, the Contractor should provide no further works after the termination certificate have been issued.

 

Clauses 92.2 - the Contractor is to leave the Working Area(s) and remove equipment on termination. The Contractor is also enjoined to remove equipment promptly from the site when the Project Manager notifies that the Employer no longer requires them.

 

The main option clauses places further responsibilities on the Contractor, to wit:

 

i)       Under Option A: Clause 31.4 provides the Contractor is to provide information which shows each activity on the current Activity Schedule that relates to the operations on each programme submitted for acceptance. Clause 54.2 provides that where a Contractor changes a planned method of working at his discretion, he is to submit revisions to the activity schedule, so that it is compatible with the Accepted Programme. Clause 63.14 provides that the Contractor is to assess a compensation event using rates or lump sums instead of Defined Costs if the Project Manager agrees. Clause 65.4 provides that the Contractor is to include changes to the Prices, the Completion Date and Key Dates when notifying the implementation of a compensation event.

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 18 of 30

 

ii)      Under Option B, Clause 63.13 provides that the Contractor is to assess a compensation event using rates or lump sums instead of Defined Costs if the Project Manager agrees. Option B also includes clause 65.4 above.

 

iii)      Option C, Option D and Option E place identical responsibilities on the Contractor. These include:

 

•     Clause 20.3 provides that the Contractor is to advise the Project Manager on practical implications of the design of the works and on sub-contracting arrangements.

 

•     Clause 20.4 obligates the Contractor to prepare forecasts of the total Defined Cost for the whole of the works and submit them to the Project Manager.

 

•     Clause 26.4 states that the Contractor is to submit the proposed Contract Data for each subcontractor to the Project Manager for approval.

 

•     Clause 31.4 provides that the Contractor is to show how each activity on the Current Activity schedule relates to the operations on each programme submitted for acceptance.

 

•     Clause52.2enjoins the Contractor to keep the described records of costs and payments and Clause 53.3 provides that the Contractor is to allow the Project Manager to inspect the accounts and records.

 

•     Clause 63.15 provides that the Contractor may use the Shorter Schedule of Costs Components to assess a compensation event if the Project Manager agrees.

 

•     Clause 65.3 obligates the Contractor to include the forecast of the amount of prices, the Completion Date and the Key Dates in the notification implementing a compensation event.

 

iv)      Option F of the main options provide the following additional responsibilities (Option F has identical clauses 20.3,20.4, 52.2,52.3       and 65.3 with the

ones discussed above for Main Options C, D, and:

 

•     Clause 20.2 provides the Contractor is to manage the contractor's design (Option F is the management contract), the provision of the site services and the construction and installation of the works. It also provides that the Contractor is to subcontract the Contractor’s design, the provision of Site services and the Construction and installation of the works except for the works the Contract Data provides that he shall undertake himself.

•     Clause 26.4 provides that the Contractor shall submit the proposed Contract Data for each sub-contract to the Project Manager for acceptance.

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 19 of 30

 

v) Option W1 and W2 (these impose identical responsibilities)

•     Clause W1.2 provides that the Contractor is to appoint the Adjudicator under the NEC Adjudicator’s contract before starting date

•     Clause W1.2 (3) enjoins the Contractor to choose the adjudicator jointly with the Employer or to ask an Adjudicator nominating body to choose an Adjudicator if the one identified cannot act.

•     Clause W1.3 (1) and (4), the Contractor may refer any other matter including a dispute about an action of the Project Manager or Supervisor to the Adjudicator and may also refer a sub-contract dispute.

•     Clauses W1.3 (9) and 1.4(1) Provides that the Contractor should proceed with the project as if the dispute that has been referred to the Adjudicator had not occurred and not to refer any dispute to the Tribunal unless it has been referred to the Adjudicator.

 

Option W1 is to apply except in the UK when the Housing Grants, construction and Regeneration Act 1996 applies, in which case Option W2 will apply. The two (Option W1 and W2) create identical responsibilities on the Contractor except for Clause W2.3 (1) under Option W2. Under this clause, the Contractor gives notice of the adjudication to the Employer before referring the dispute to the Adjudicator.

 

The following Secondary Option Clauses where chosen, require specific actions from the Contractor. These include:

 

o Secondary Option X13 (Performance Bond) under Clause X13.1 provides that the Contractor is to give the Employer a performance Bond for the amount stated in the Contract data and in the form set out in the Works Information.

o Secondary Option X4 at Clause X4.1 provides that the Contractor is to give the Employer a parent company guarantee in a form set out in the Works Information. Secondary Option X14at Clause X14.3 provides that the Contractor will repay advanced payments to the Employer in instalments as stated in the Contract Data.

o Secondary Option X7.1 provides that the Contractor will pay delay damages as stated in the Contract data from the Completion Date until Completion or take over.

o Secondary Option X17.1 provides that the Contractor shall pay low performancedamages as stated in the Contract Data for Defects included in the Defects Certificate showing low performance.

o Secondary option X18 (Limitation of liability) provides that the Contractor is not liable to the Employer for any matter to do with the Contract which is notified to the Contractor after the end of liability date.

o Secondary Option X20.2 provides that the Contractor is to report to the Project Manager from the starting date until the Defects certificate has

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 20 of 30

 

been issued his performance against each key Performance Indicator at the intervals provided by the Contract Data.

o Clause X20.3 provides that the Contractor is to submit to the Project Manager his proposals for improving the performance forecast. This is to be done where his forecast for final measurement against a key Performance Indicator will not achieve the target stated in the Incentive S chedule.

 

The Contractor is an active stakeholder with a range of duties. The brevity of the NEC3 ECC sometimes obscures the extent of the Contractors duty. For instance, Clause 27.1 provides that the Contractor is to obtain the approval of his design from Others where necessary. This implies that Contractor has the responsibility to obtain all approvals for his design whether imposed by statute or otherwise. Generally, the specifics of the duty of the Contractor are provided for in the Works Information- where the parties set out how the Contractor is to carry out his work or any constraints thereto.

 

The NEC3 ECC provides specific timescales and ensures that the Contractor is an active decision maker. It places on the Contractor the responsibility to notify the Project Manager when there is a delay in response from the Project Manager for compensation events. The Contractor has the power to choose between the quoted alternatives where the Project Manager does not notify his decision within the set time. A complete understanding of the Contractor’s role is achieved by looking at the corresponding responsibilities of the Project Manager. The next section examines the responsibilities of a Project Manager under the NEC3 ECC.

 

5.3. The Project Manager

The Project Manager administers the Contract. He is to be kept informed of activities at the site to enable him to make the decisions required by the Contract. The Project Manager is not the equivalent of the Engineer or Architect in traditional contracts, in fact there is no requirement that the Project Manager should have any technical skills. The Project Manager is firmly established as the Employers representative, and he has no powers to determine disputes between the parties. While primarily protecting the interest of the Employer, the actions of the Project Manager must be guided by the obligations provided in Clause 10.1 of the NEC3 ECC. This clause requires mutual cooperation and trust, which entails fairness to both parties.

 

The obligation for the Project Manager to be fair to both parties received judicial approval in the case of Costain Ltd & Ors- v - Bechtel Ltd & anor. [2005] EWHC 1018 (TCC), where the court held that in issuing certificates and making decisions the Project Manager is required to be impartial. The Project Manager must be competent and alive to his responsibilities otherwise the Employer will incur avoidable costs. The centrepiece of the NEC3 ECC is the Contractor and the Project Manager working together to see the project to completion. The duties and responsibilities of the Project Manager mirror those of the Contractor. A comprehensive overview of the responsibilities placed on the Project Manager in the NEC3 ECC is set out below:

 

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 21 of 30

 

Clause 10.1 - The Project Manager is to act as stated in the Contract and in a spirit of mutual trust and cooperation.

 

Clause13.1 - The Project Manager is to communicate in a form that can be read, copied, and recorded. Clause 13.3, the Project Manager is to reply to a communication within the time specified in the Contract. Clause 13.4 obligates the Project Manager to reply to resubmitted communication within the specified period for reply and where the communication is not accepted to state the reasons for not accepting it.

 

Clause 13.5 allows the Project Manager to notify the Contractor of an extension of the period for reply to communication.

 

Clause 13.6 empowers the Project Manager to issue certificates to the Contractor and to the Employer.

 

Clause 13.7 also provides that the Project Manager is to communicate notifications separately. Clause 13.8 provides that the Project Manager may withhold acceptance of a submission by the Contractor.

 

Clause 14.2 provides that the Project Manager is to notify the Contractor before delegating any actions or cancelling any delegation.

 

Clause 14.3 accords the Project Manager the power of giving instructions that changes the Works Information or a Key date.

 

Clause 15.1 entitles the Project Manager to reply to a proposal by the Contractor requesting the addition of more Working Areas either by accepting it or giving reasons for not accepting.

 

Clause 16.1 provides that the Project Manager is give Early Warning to the Contractor about any matters with delay, costs or performance implications including the delay in the meeting of a Key Date. The Project Manager is also to enter Early Warning matters in the Risk reduction register.

 

Clause 16.2 provides that the Project Manager may give instruction to the Contractor to attend a Risk Reduction Meeting and may also instruct others to attend if the others agree.

 

Clause 16.3 The Project Manager is required to cooperate during the Early Warning/ Risk Reduction meetings.

 

Clause 16.4 provides that the Project Manager is to record decisions made by revising the Risk register. The Project Manager is also to instruct changes to the Works Information, if required at the time of issuing the Revised Register of Risks

 

Clause 17.1 The Project Manager is enjoined to give notice of ambiguities or

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 22 of 30

 

inconsistencies in the contract documents and to give instructions resolving such ambiguities and inconsistencies.

 

Clause 18.1 enjoins the Project Manager to give instructions changing the Works Information in the event of any illegality or impossibility in the works information.

 

Clause 19.1 gives the Project Manager the power to give instructions dealing with an event described as preventing the works.

 

Clause 21.2 provides that the Project Manager shall accept the Contractors design or give reasons for not accepting it.

 

Clause 23.1 provides that the Project Manager, shall accept the Contractors particulars of design of items of equipment or give reasons for non-acceptance

 

Clause 24.1 provides that the Project Manager is to accept replacement persons proposed by the Contractor or give reasons for non-acceptance.

 

Clause 24.2 the Project Manager may instruct the Contractor to remove any employee having stated his reasons.

 

Clause 25.2 provides that the Project Manager is to assess costs incurred if the Contractor does not provide services and other things.

 

Clause 25.3 provides that the Project Manager shall assess the Employers additional costs for the Contractor not meeting a set condition on a key date.

 

Clause 26.2 requires the Project Manager to accept proposed sub-contractors or give reasons for non-acceptance.

 

Clause 30.2 provides that the Project Manager is to decide the date of Completion and to certify Completion within one week of completion.

 

Clause 31.3 provides that the Project Manager is to accept the Contractor's programme within two weeks of submission or give reasons for non-acceptance.

 

Clause 32.2 extends this obligation to revised programmes.

 

Clause 34.1 empowers the Project Manager to instruct the Contractor to stop not to start any work and later to restart or start it.

 

Clause 35.3 states that the Project Manager is to certify within one week of the date when the Employer takes over any part of the works, such area taken over.

 

Clause 36.1 the Project Manager may instruct the Contractor to submit a quotation for acceleration and to state changes to the Key dates to be included in the quotation.

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 23 of 30

 

Clause 40.6 states that the Project Manager is to assess the Employers costs for repeating the tests or inspections after a defect has been found. Clause 43.4 provides for the Project Manager to arrange for the Employer to give access and use to the Contractor of any parts of the Works needed for Correction of defectsaftertaking over.

 

Clause 44.1 The contractor and the Project manager may each propose to the other that the Works Information should be changed so that a defect does not have to be corrected.

 

Clause 44.2 If the Contractor and the Project Manager are prepared to consider the change, the contractor submits a quotation for reduced Prices or an earlier Completion Date or both to the Project Manager for acceptance. If the Project Manager accepts the quotation, he gives an instruction to change the Works Information, the Prices and Completion date accordingly.

 

Clause 45.1 provides that the Project Manager will assess the costs of having notified defects corrected byothers ifthe Contractor fails to rectify the defects within the Defects Correction period.

 

Clause 45.2 provides that the Project Manager shall assess the costs of correcting a defect where the Contractor is not given access.

 

Clause 50.1 provides that the Project Manager is to assess the amount due for payment at each assessment date.

 

Clause 50.3 empowers the Project Manager to retain one quarter of the price of the Work done to date until the Contractor has submitted a first Programme showing the information required by the contract.

 

Clause 50.4 provides that the Project Manager is to consider any application from the Contractor when assessing the amounts due for payment and to give the Contractor details of how amounts due has been assessed.

 

Clause 50.5 provides that the Project Manager is to correct any wrongly assessed amount due in a later payment certificate.

 

Clause 51.1 provides that the Project Manager will certify payment within one week of each assessment date.

 

Clause 51.3 empowers the Contractor to assess interest to be paid on such corrected amounts.

 

Clause 61.1 deals with change events. Under this clause the Project Manager is obligated to give notice of Compensation events to the Contractor which arises from the giving of instructions or changing of earlier decisions.

 

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 24 of 30

 

The Project Manager is also empowered to instruct the Contractor to submit quotations for such events. Clause 61.2 empowers the Project Manager to request quotations for proposed instructions or changed decisions.

 

Clause 61.4 states that the Project Manager is to decide within one week of notification whether the prices, Key Dates or Completion Date should be changed when the Contractor notifies a compensation event.

 

Clause 61.5 states that the Project Manager is to decide whether the Contractor gave an Early Warning of a compensation event and to notify the Contractor of his decision.

 

Clause 61.6states that the Project Manager is to state the assumptions for the assessment of a compensation event if the effect of the event is too uncertain to be forecasted reasonably and to notify the Contractor of any assumptions that is later found to be wrong.

 

Clause 62.1 provides that the Project Manager is to discuss with the Contractor different ways of dealing with the compensation event that are practicable and may instruct the Contractor to submit alternative quotations for compensation events.

 

Clause 62.3 obligates the Project Manager to reply to quotations for compensation events within two weeks of the submission of such quotations.

 

Clause 62.4 provides that the Project Manager is give reasons when instructing the Contractor to submit a revised quotation. Clause 62.5 entitles theProject Manager to extend the time allowed for the submission of the quotations and replies if the Contractor agrees and to notify the Contractor of agreed extensions for the submission of quotations or replies.

 

Clause 63.5 states that the Project Manager is to assess the compensation event as if an early warning event has been notified under Clause 16 (this is where his decision is that an Early warning had been given.

 

Clause 63.9 provides that the Project Manager is to correct the description of a Key Date if a change to the Works Information makes the description incorrect and to take this correction into account in assessing the compensation event for the change to the Works Information.

 

Clause 64.1 enjoinsthe Project Manager to assess a compensation event:

 

•     If the contractor has not submitted a quotation and details within the allowed time. •           If he decides that the Contractor has not assessed the compensation event.

correctly.

•     If he has not accepted the Contractors latest programme.

 

 

Clause 64.2 allows the Project Manager to assess a compensation event using its own assessment of the programme:

 

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 25 of 30

 

•     If there is no Accepted Programme

•     If the Contractor has not submitted a revised or altered programme for acceptance as required.

 

Clause 64.3 states that theProject Manager is to notifythe Contractor ofanyassessments made of a compensation event within the period allowed for the contractor quotation.

 

Clause 65.1 obligates the Project Manager to implement compensation events notifying the Contractor of accepted quotations or his own assessments; or the Contractors quotations treated as having been accepted by the Project Manager.

 

Clause 73.1 requires the Project Manager to instruct the Contractor on how to deal with objects of value or historical importance.

 

Clause 85.1 obligates the Project Manager to accept policies and certificates of insurance submitted by the Contractor or to give reasons for non-acceptance.

 

Clause 87.1 provides that the Project Manager shall submit to the Contractor policies, and certificate insurance certificates provided by the Employer as required by the contract.

 

Clause 90.1- provides that the Project Manager should issue a termination certificate promptly when either party gives notice of termination of the contract for reasons complying with the Contract.

 

Clause 90.4 provides that the Project Manager should certify final payment within thirteen weeks of termination.

 

Clauses 92.2 - provides that the Project Manager is to notify the Contractor that the Employer no longer needs equipment to which the Contractor has title.

 

Under Option A: Clause 36.3 provides that the Project Manager is to change the Completion date, the Prices and Key Dates when a quotation for acceleration is accepted and to accept the revised programme. Clause54.2 provides that theProject Manager is toaccept revisions to the activity schedule or give reasons for not accepting it.

 

Clause 65.4 states that the Project Manager is to include changes to the price, Completion date and Key Date when notifying the implementation of a compensation event.

 

Clause 63.14 provides that the Project Manager is to assess a compensation event using rates or lump sums instead of Defined Costs if he so decides and the Contractor agree.

 

Clause 65.4 provides that the Project Manager is to include changes to the Prices, the Completion Date and Key Dates when notifying the implementation of a compensation event.

 

Option B also has identical clauses to Option A, the additional clause is Clause 63.13, which provides that the Project Manager is to assess a compensation event using rates or lump

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 26 of 30

 

sums instead of Defined Costs if the Contractor agrees. Option B also includes Clause 65.4 above.

 

Option C, D and E place identical responsibilities on the Project Manager. These include:

 

Clause 20.4 the Project Manager is to consult with the Contractor in the preparation of the forecasts of the Total Defined Costs. Clause 26.4 states that the Project Manager is to accept the proposed Contract Data for each sub-Contractor or give reasons for no acceptance.

 

Clause 36.3 provides that the Project Manager is to change the Completion Date, the Prices, and the Key Dates when a quotation for acceleration is accepted and to accept the Revised Programme. Clause 40.7 enjoins the Project Manager not to include amounts due the Contractor for the cost of carrying out repeat tests or inspection.

 

Clause 53.1 provides that the Project Manager should assess the Contractor's share of the difference between the total Price of the Works and Prices of work done to date.

 

Clause 53.3 empowers the Project Manager to make a preliminary assessment of the Contractors share at completion.

 

Clause 53.4 provides that the Project Manager is to assess the Contractors share in the Final amount due using the Final Price for work done to date and the Final Total prices.

 

Clause 54.2 enjoins the Project Manager to accept a revision to the activity schedule or give reasons for non-acceptance.

 

Clause 63.15 provides that the Project Manager may make his own assessment using the Shorter Schedule of Cost Components. Clause 65.4 provides that the Project Manager should include changes to the Prices, the Completion date and Key Dates when notifying a Compensation Event.

 

Clause 93.4 empowers the Project Manager to assess the Contractor's share after certifying termination.

 

Option D contains the following specific clauses:

 

Clause 60.6 the Project Manager is to correct mistakes in the bill of quantities, which are departures from the rules in the method of measurement or due to ambiguities or inconsistencies.

 

Option F contains identical Clauses 20.4,26.4, above. Additionally, it contains the following: Clause 20.5 the Project Manager is to agree to a change to the price for work and change to the Key Dates and Completion dates if the work the Contractor is doing himself is affected by a compensation event. Clause 36.4 empowers the Project Manager to change the Completion Date, the key date, and the forecast of the total defined Cost of the whole works

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 27 of 30

 

when a quotation for acceleration is accepted and to accept the revised programme.

 

Clause 65.3 provides that the Project Manager should include changes to the forecast amount of the Prices, the Completion date and Key Dates when notifying a Compensation Event.

 

The following Secondary Clauses where chosen, require specific actions from the Project Manager. These include:

 

Option W1 and W2 (these impose identical responsibilities)

 

Clause W1.3 (2) the Project Manager is to extend the times for notifying and referring a dispute. Clause W1.3 (9) provides that the Project Manager should proceed with the project as if the dispute that has been referred to the Adjudicator had not occurred. Option W2 at W2.3 (9) provides that the Project Manager should proceed with the project as if the dispute that has been referred to the Adjudicator had not occurred.

 

Secondary Option X13 (Performance Bond) under Clause X13.1 provides that the Project Manager is to accept the Contractors performance Bond or to give reasons for non-acceptance.

 

Secondary Option X14 at Clause X14.2 provides that the Project Manager should accept the advanced payment bonds or to give reasons for non-acceptance. Secondary Option X16 (Retention) provides that the Project Manager is to halve the amount retained in assessment made at completion of the whole works or in the next assessment made after the Employer has taken over the works if this is before completion of the whole works. The clause also provides the Project Manager is to retain nothing after the Defects Certificate is issued.

 

5.4The Supervisor

The Supervisor is to ensure that the works are provided to the standards set out in the Works Information. The Supervisor witnesses or carries out tests or inspections. It is not within the powers of the Supervisor to either accept a defect or order a change to the Works info ration nor give site instructions. In large projects,it is best to keep the roles of the Project Manager and the Supervisor separate. Nearly all the Supervisor actions are provided for under Core Clauses 4 and 7 of the NEC3 ECC.

 

The Supervisor and his team should be knowledgeable of the Works Information document(s) and be good record keepers. It is important also that the Project Manager is kept aware of the actions of the Supervisor. A comprehensive overview of the responsibilities of the Supervisor is set out below:

 

Clause 10.1 - the Supervisor is to act as stated in the Contract and in a spirit of mutual trust and cooperation.

 

Clause 13.1 the Supervisor is to communicate in a form that can be read, copied, and recorded Clause 13.3, the Supervisor is to reply to a communication within the time specified

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 28 of 30

 

in the Contract. Clause 13.6 empowers the Supervisor to issue certificates to the Contractor and to the Project Manager.

 

Clause 14.2 provides that the Supervisor is to notify the Contractor before delegating any actions or cancelling any delegation.

 

Clause 40.3 the Supervisor is to notify the Contractor of his tests and inspections before they start and afterwards it is to notify the results.

 

Clause 40.5 the Supervisor is enjoined to conduct the tests and inspections without causing unnecessary delay to the works or payment for the works.

 

Clause 41.1 the Supervisor is to notify the Contractor of the results of the test or inspection on Plant and Materials required by the Works Information to be tested before delivery.

 

Clause 42.1 the Supervisor may instruct the Contractor to search for a Defect and gives reasons for searches, which are instructed.

 

Clause 43.3 the Supervisor is to issue the Defects Certificate at the later of the defects date and the last date for defect correction. Clause 71.1, the supervisor is to mark Equipment, Plant and Materials outside the working areas for payment purposes if the contract identifies them for payment.

 

5. Conclusion

This topic has introduced the NEC Contract. It has examined the history, structure/presentation, style, and concepts underpinning the forms. The various key roles undertheNEC3 ECC have also been examined. Therelevant provisionsof the formrelating to the various roles have been allowed to tell the story of what is expected of each of the role holders. The approach is also meant to underscore the need for students to study the content of the forms closely. The success of projects using the NEC3 ECC depends greatly on the ability of the key role holders to play their respective roles efficiently. Please note that this topic has focused mainly on NEC3 ECC and not NEC4, which we will study under Topic 10. The next topic examines the various options (Main and Secondary) under the NEC3 ECC.

 

 

 

References

 

 

1. Eggleston, B., The NEC 3 engineering and construction contract: A commentary 3rd Edition (Wiley- Blackwell, 2006) [Available as eBook through theReadinglist]

2. Mitchell B, et al, Introduction to the Engineering and Construction Contract – Managing Reality – Book One, Thomas Telford publishing, 2005 [Not available]

3. Broome J, The NEC Engineering and Construction Contract-A user’s guide, Thomas Telford publishing, 2005. [Not available]

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 29 of 30

 

4. Michael Rowlinson, A practical guide to the NEC3 engineering and construction contract (2015) [Available as eBook through thereadinglist]

5. David Thomas QC, Keating on NEC3 (Sweet and Maxwell, 2012). [Not available through RGU Library]

6. The NEC3 Forms - Available on Moodle

 

7. J. Mante, ‘Mutual trust and co-operation under NEC 3&4: a fresh perspective’ Const. L.J. 2018, 34(4), 231-252 (on Westlaw)

8. J. Mante, Good faith, Mutual trust and cooperation: recent judicial insights. Construction law journal, 2022 (on Westlaw)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

©Robert Gordon University                                                                         Page 30 of 30

 

Topic 7: NEC3 ECC - Main and Secondary options

 

 

Topic Preview

 

This topic will consider the following: • Contract strategy

•     Details of the main options.

•     Details of the Secondary Options in NEC3 ECC.

 

 

Topic Content

 

1. The Main Options and Contract Strategy

The NEC3 ECC structure allows a complete contract to be formed by choosing a Main Option and adding it to the nine core clauses. There are six main options in the NEC3 ECC, these are:

 

Option A- priced contract with activity schedule • Option B- priced contract with bill of quantities • Option C- target contract with activity schedule • Option D- target contract with bill of quantities • Option E- cost reimbursable contract

Option F- Managementcontract

 

The Main Options serve multiple purposes; they are primarily the vehicle for determining the payment method for the contract. They are also useful in determining contract strategy including price risk, allocation of design responsibility and could indicate the Employer's intentions regarding early mobilization to site. This section will discuss briefly how the choice of a main option interacts with the contract strategy for a project, and then the next section will examine each of the options in detail.

 

Contract Strategy refers to a range of issues that aids the Employer to choose an appropriate contract to achieve his objective for each project. The issues include:

•     Which party is responsible for design?

•     Which is the higher priority, certainty of price or time of completion?

•     How definite and sufficient is the Employer’s requirements for the project and what level of flexibility is expected?

•     Is the Employer keen on a single point responsibility the Employer keen on a single point responsibility contract?

The effects of the choice of the NEC3 ECC main options on some of the above issues are covered below.

 

1.1. Risk in price

It is a testament to the flexibility of the NEC3 ECC form that a wide spectrum of choices is provided in the main options for the management and distribution of the risk in price. These range from fixed price contracts to a management contract. In between, we have target price contracts and cost reimbursable contracts. In the absence of price increases caused by changes to the WorksInformation document, Option A (priced contract with activity schedule) provides the maximum level of certainty of price for the Employer while Option F

1 | P a g e

 

Option A is a priced contract, where a lump sum is tendered for each activity on the Activity Schedule (an activity schedule is a list of activities expected to be undertaking by the contractor in constructing the works). The contractor tenders a firm price for the works based on each activity in the schedule and an ascertainable total contract sum is easily established.

 

Option B is a priced contract based on a bill of quantities (a bill of quantities contains a list of work items and quantities with the unit of measurement and a method of measurement). The Contractor tenders rates and prices for the items on the bill of quantities. Option B provides lesser certainty of price when compared to Option A. This is because the quantities stated may change thus affecting the price; this is often the case. The Contractor is paid for work done based on the actual quantities used. Usually, the risk of changes to the quantities stated in the bill of quantities is borne by the Employer who traditionally prepares the document. The Contractor bears the risk of the adequacy of the tendered rates and prices.

 

Option C is a target contract based on an Activity Schedule. Option C is next to option A with regards to certainty of price. Option C provides for a maximum price - that is the target price. Above this price the Contractor is liable to pay the Employer back at agreed percentages. Option D is a target contract based on a bill of quantities. Because it is based on a bill of quantity, it offers lesser certainty of price than Options A and C, as changes to the quantities contained in the bill of quantity will significantly affect the price of the contract.

 

Options E and F offer the least certainty on price. Under Option E, the Employer pays for all allowable costs incurred in constructing the works. The Contractor quotes his fee for carrying out the works and this is paid along with all other legitimate costs incurred by the Contractor in constructing the works. As there is no assurance as to the value of the costs and no incentive to keep the costs down, there is even lesser certainty with regards to the price of contract than previous options.

 

Option F is a management contract, apart from the works that the Contractor is expected to complete, his main duty is to manage works let out to various sub-contractors. It is the Employer that bears the risk of the costs of the various sub-contracts.

 

1.2. Employer's Requirement

The Employer's requirement (note that this is now called the ‘Scope’ under NEC4) sets out the specifications and description of the works required by the Employer. Depending on circumstance of a project, the Employer's requirement may be finalised or may be developing and subject to changes as the project proceeds. The main Options provide the Employer with a mechanism to manage this risk.

 

Options A and B being priced contracts are most suitable for projects where the Employers requirements are finalised and subject to few changes as the work progresses. Options C and D provide more flexibility than the priced contracts. However, to allow realistic target prices to be set, a reasonable level of definition of the Employer's requirement is required. An Employer that is keen on having maximum flexibility in developing or changing his requirements for a project while the construction work proceeds is best advised to use either Options E or F. These are costs reimbursable contracts and can accommodate the Employer

 

2 | P a g e

 

1.3. Design

In the Works Information documents, the parties provide for the division of design responsibilities in the NEC3 ECC. The parties are at liberty to assign this responsibility to either the Contractor or the Employer. They are also at liberty to assign the design responsibility to both the Contractor and the Employer, specifying the aspects of the project to be designed by each party. The main options support this choice. However, some main options are more suited to certain devolution of design responsibility than others.

 

Option A is flexible on design. While it is suitable for the Contractor’s design of the project, it is ideally suitable for an Employer's design. The essential element in Option A is that the design is complete at commencement (preferably at the tender stage). Option B relies on a bill of quantity prepared by Employer and so is more suited to the Employer's design of the project. Option C is like Option A. However, since there is a target price and therefore an incentive to complete the works for less than the target price, the Contractor has greater flexibility and motivation to develop a cost effective and appropriate design. Option D shares the same fate with Option B and is more suited for the Employer's design.

 

Option E permits maximum design flexibility. It is suited for design by either party and allows the development of the design as the works proceed. Option F is not very suitable for Contractor’s design. Itis particularly suitable for sub-contractor design and relieson specialist sub-contractors who undertake their own designs.

 

1.4. Early Start

In some projects the predominant priority is timely completion. One of the variables that may determine this is an early mobilization to site for the construction to commence. The main options provide a mechanism to manage this. If it is the desire of the Employer to have early mobilisation, the least favourable options are Options A and B. Being fixed priced contracts they require the complete finalisation of many aspects before commencement and therefore have the longest lead times.The intermediate choice is Option C and D, being target contracts they require a reasonable level of finalisation but lesser than the priced contracts and therefore have a shorter lead-time than Options A and B.

 

Options E and F provide the ideal choice for early mobilisation and start.As costs reimbursable contracts, work may commence with a lesser amount of definition and therefore the shortest lead-time.

 

1.5. Allocation of Risks and Compensation events

It is often asked: how the main options relate to the allocation of risks under the NEC3 ECC and the compensation events that may arise from these risks? The main options, apart from the price risk discussed above and the introduction of some specific compensation events to cater for certain main options (i.e., compensation events for bill of quantities), have no effect on the risk distribution of the NEC3 ECC and compensation events. The NEC3 ECC deliberately pursues a policy of common allocation of risks throughout the main options. This is to ensure consistency in the application of the core clauses and compensation events.

 

In conclusion, the appropriate choice of a Main Option by the Employer reduces the probability

 

3 | P a g e

 

more depth the working of the main options.

 

2. Examination of the Main Options

The Main Options labelled A - F may be categorised into three classes, to wit: •         Priced Contract

•     Target Contracts

•     Cost reimbursable contracts

 

We will examine these classes in the above order.

 

2.1. Priced Contracts

Priced contracts require the Contractor to tender a firm price at the tender stage. There are two priced contract options to wit: Option A priced contract with an Activity Schedule; and Option B priced Contract with bill of quantities.

 

Option A

In option A, the Employer pays the Contractor for activity completed. The activity schedule sets out a list of activities that the Contractor will need to provide the works required by the Employer. For instance, in a construction activity taking place in an area of forest growth -clearing the area will form an activity item. For each item on the schedule, the Contractor provides a lump sum quotation. The contract price is the sum of the lump sums of all the activities listed.

 

The Contractor is paid for activities that are completed by each assessment date. The amount to be paid is the amount entered in the tender against that activity. Because of these, it is important that the description of the activities is not lengthy to allow for regular cash flow to the Contactor. Theoretically, fewer compensation events should occur in Option A contracts since there is a well-defined and finalised works information supported by an appropriate lump sum amount. However, this is not always the case. Where there is compensation event, the assessment of any compensation event that is implemented will be added to the lump sum price of the relevant activity. The assessment of the Compensation events is priced using the schedule of costs components- and under NEC3 ECC, only the shorter schedule of costs components is used. The Schedule of Costs Components is a complete identification of the components of cost for which the Contractor will be reimbursed. It includes such headings such as People, Plant,Machinery, and Equipment. The Shorter Schedule of Costs Components is a simpler and less itemised version of Schedule of Costs Components.

 

Option B

Option B is a priced contract with bill of quantities. A bill of quantities is a list of work items and quantities that includes the unit of measurement and a method of measurement. The method of measurement describes the items to be included in the list and how the quantities are to be calculated. The Employer, who bears the risk of the changes in quantities contained therein, usually prepares the bill. Option B requires that the Contractor at the time of making the tender should provide rates and prices against each item included in the bill of quantities. The Contractor is paid for the actual quantity of work completed as identified on the bill of quantities. The amount is determined by the prices that were tendered against the items on the bill of quantities. The rates and prices are multiplied to the measured quantity of the work

 

4 | P a g e

 

Unlike Option A, this Option does not require any activity or work to be completed before payment. Where a compensation event occurs, the parties are to use the Schedule of Cost Components, except the Contractor and the Project Manager agree to use the bill of quantities. Option B also contains three additional compensation events (B60.4, B60.5 and B60.6) that reflect the inaccuracy that may arise in the bill of quantities and such related issues.

 

 

 

2.2. Target Contracts

In target contracts, the Contractor submits a bid that accounts for his assessed costs for doing the works, his overhead costs, profit, and any other tender issue. The amount on the bid when accepted by the Employer becomes the target price. During the construction, the Contractor is paid at Assessment dates his defined costs (costs that he has already expended) plus the fee. When the works are completed, the Employer would then assess the final Price on Work Done to Date (PWDD) and the target price. Where the PWDD is above the target price, the Contractor will be expected to pay the Employer back some of the money paid to him at a pre-agreed percentage. Where thePWDD is less than the target price, the Contractor is entitled to further payments based on a pre-agreed formula. In a target contract, the parties share the pain or the gain.

 

Central to target contracts in the NEC3 ECC,is the concept ofdisallowed costs. This ensures that the Employer does not pay for the inefficiency of the Contractor. Disallowed costs are items that will not be considered when assessing payments due under the target contracts; they are also used in the cost reimbursable contracts. They include such items as costs of correcting faulty work by the Contractor, costs of correcting defects caused by the Contractor, not complying with Works Information, costs of Plants and Materials not used to provide the works among other items.

 

There are two target contracts in the NEC3 ECC that is Option C (target contracts with an activity schedule) and Option D (target Contract with a bill of quantities).

 

Option C

Option C requires the Contractor to tender alump sum price to an activity listed in the activity schedule. The sum of all the prices constitutes the target price. The Contractor is paid at assessment dates in accordance with the activity schedule. Payment at such dates covers the Contractor’s defined costs i.e. - amounts due sub-contractors, plus amount due according to the Schedule of Cost Components, plus profit and overhead costs less disallowed costs. Changes to prices quoted by the Contractor for implemented compensation events are used to change the prices in the activity schedule. This allows the target price to be realistic and follow the changes in the works.

 

On completion, PWDD (final Price on Work Done to Date) is compared to the target price. The Contractor and the Employer in a predetermined fashion share the difference between the two amounts. Where the PWDD is greater than the target price, then the Contractor pays his share of the difference. If on the other hand the PWDD is less than the target price, the Contractor receives his share of the difference.

 

5 | P a g e

 

Option D

 

Option D follows the discourse on Option C above except that in Option D, a bill of quantities is used and the risk of the accuracy of the quantities lies with the Employer.

 

2.3. Cost reimbursable Contracts

In cost reimbursable contracts the Contractor is reimbursed all expenditures less any disallowed costs. He is also paid his quoted fee. The cost reimbursable contract can be well-managed using forecasts and audits. There are two cost reimbursable contracts in the NEC3 ECC; these are the Option E and Option F.

 

Option E

In option E the Contractor is required to tender his fee for undertaking the contract. During the construction, the Contractor is paid his defined costs (expenditure on constructing the works less any disallowed costs) plus fee. In terms of costs, compensation events assume less prominence under this option. A more costs conscious regime would require the Contractor to provide forecasts of defined costs regularly.

 

Option F

Option F is a management contract. The Contractor contracts directlywith the sub-contractors and manages them on behalf of the Employer. The Contractor is paid a fee for his work and the Employer bears the price risk of the value of the sub-contracts. The Contractor is also at liberty to indicate in the contract data that he intends to undertake some of the construction himself. The discourse above covers the critical issues relating to the Main Options under the NEC3 ECC. The resources section provides an article which considers Option C further.

 

3. Secondary Options in the NEC3 ECC

There are eighteen different secondary options in the NEC3 ECC. Although combining one of the main options to the core clauses completes a NEC 3 ECC contract, rarely in practice does a NEC3 ECC contract fail to include a selection of some of the secondary options. The reason the NEC3 ECC adopts the pick and mix approach is that some of the secondary options may result in extra costs or may not be suited to the relationship between the parties. While the traditional contracts include these options irrespective of the conditions, the NEC3 ECC offers the parties a choice. For instance, retention or performance bond will incur costs for the Contractor, which will be reflected in the bid. An Employer not requiring this option in a relationship with the Contractor could save it some costs by not choosing it. The list of secondary options includes the following:

 

 

 

• Option Xl: price adjustment for inflation • Option X2: changes in the law.

•     Option X3: multiple currencies.

• Option X4: parent company guarantee. • Option X5: sectional completion

• Option X6: bonus for early completion. • Option X7: delay damages.

•     Option X12: partnering.

 

6 | P a g e

 

•     Option X14: advanced payment to the contractor.

•     Option X15: limitation of the contractor’s liability for its design to reasonable skill and care.

•     Option X16: retention.

•     Option X17: low performance damages/low service damages. •     Option X18: limitation of liability.

•     Option X19: task order.

•     Option X20: key performance indicators.

•     Option X29: climate change (to be published in consultative

•     Option Y(UK) 2: The Housing Grants, Construction and Regeneration Act 1996 (dealing with payment and supervision).

•     Option Y (UK) 3: The Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999

 

The final secondary Option Z: is additional Conditions of contract. Most of the options are self-explanatory, below is an analysis of some of the secondary options:

 

Options X13 (performance bond) and Option X 4 (parent company guarantee):

These are alternatives and should not be used together. The NEC3 ECC provides the Works Information is to specify the form of the bond. This gives the parties maximum flexibility in structuring the requirement of the bond to meet the specific needs of the project.

 

Option X14 (advanced payment):

This option is usuallyused where the Contractor is to undertake a financially intensive activity at the start of the construction. It allows the Employer to lend money to the Contractor and be repaid at the later stages. Information on the advanced payment is to be provided in the contract Data. It includes the amount of the advanced payment, the period that the Contractor will be required to commence repayment instalments, the amount of the instalments and, if required, an advance payment bond.

 

Option X3 (multiple currencies):

This could be especially important in an international contract. It allows payment to proceed in different currencies. In the Contract data the parties are to specify the currency of the contract, the exchange rate and a list of items and activities that will be paid in a currency other than the currency of the contract.

 

Option X5 (sectional completion):

This option allows the Employer takeover sections of the work that has been completed. Where used, this option sets out separate completion dates for sections of the works.

 

Option X15 (design liability limitation):

As the name implies, places limits on the Contractor's design liability. Where Option X 15 is not part of the contract, the Contractors design must be fit for the purpose; this option reduces this liability to the limit of the application of reasonable skill and care.

 

Option X1 (price adjustment for inflation to be used with main options A - D): Option E and F are cost reimbursable and do not require adjustment for inflation. This option is used to link prices of parts of the contract to the inflation rate.

 

7 | P a g e

 

Option X16 (retention):

This allows the Employer to retain some money due to the Contractor until after the defects correction period.

 

Option X6 (bonus for early completion):

This option allows the Employer to provide incentives for the Contractor and encourage him to complete the contract early. The amount per day is to be stated in Contract Data.

 

Option X7 (delay damages):

This is a form of liquidated damages imposed on the Contractor for not meeting the completion date. The amount of delay damages is to be stated in the Contract Data. It is important that in common law jurisdictions, the damages are realistic estimates because penalties will be unenforceable.

 

The New Option X29 (Climate Change)

The NEC published the secondary Option X29 in July 2022 after a consultative version of a new secondary option on climate change was released in April same year. The aim of this option, according to the NEC, is to ‘incentivise the NEC supply chain to meet the client’s emissions and sustainability targets, and to link these into core processes of the contracts, such as early warnings, the programme and compensation events. In addition, contractors will be encouraged to propose changes to the scope that will reduce the climate-change impact of both the construction and operation of the client’s asset.’1 As NEC points out, emission reduction and sustainability are technical issues which, ideally should be taken care of within the scope of the project. Option X29 has been developed to work with the diverse types of NEC forms. So, there is a specific Option29 tailored to requirements of the ECC form. Copies of the new Optionx29 documents and the Guidance are available on Moodle.

 

Option Z:

This option is to be used where the parties intend to introduce additional conditions of contract to the NEC3 ECC. It is therefore one of the most important options as it allows the parties amend theNEC3 ECCto fit their purpose. This completesour studyof the main and secondary options provided for in the NEC3 ECC. The next topic provides an overview of the changes introduced by the NEC4 ECC.

 

 

 

4.Dispute Resolution options

 

The NEC 3 ECC provides two options for dispute resolution. These are described as Options W1 and W2. Whilst Option W1 can be used in all situations, Option W2 is designed for use on UK contracts to which the Housing Grants, Construction and Regeneration Act 1996 applies. Also note that under the NEC4 ECC, a third Option W3 has been introduced. We will say more on that next week. The parties are to indicate in the Contract Data Part I, which of the options has been chosen for the project. As we will see below, the two options have many identical clauses, the differences between the two options are that while option W1 sets out specific timescales for notifications of disputes, and category of disputes to be notified by either party, W2 allows the reference of any dispute by either party at any time. A summary of the

 

1 https://www.neccontract.com/About-NEC/News-and-Media/New-NEC-secondary-option-will-incentivise-net-zero-emissions

8 | P a g e

 

Option W1

 

1. Clause W 1.2 (1) provides that the parties are to appoint the adjudicator jointly at the commencement of the contract.

 

2. Clause W 1.2 (2) states that the Adjudicator is to act impartially and decide disputes as an independent Adjudicator and not as an Arbitrator. Without the second arm of this clause, some jurisdictions would treat the adjudication proceedings as arbitration.

 

3. Clause 1.3 (1) sets out the schedule for adjudication specifying which disputes could be referred to adjudication by the Employer and the Contractor. Generally, the Employer may not refer to adjudication an action of the Project Manager or the Supervisor, except where a Compensation Event                      quotation is deemed accepted because the Project Manager failed to respond within the timescales set out in the contract.

 

4. Clause 1.4 (5) provides that where the tribunal selected is arbitration. The details of the seat of arbitration, the law of arbitration on other related concepts are to be set out in Contract Data part I.

 

5. Clause 1.4 (6) provides that the adjudicator may not be called as a witness. Clause 1.3 (11) entitles the adjudicator to correct clerical and ambiguities within two weeks of making the decision.

 

6. Clause 1.4 (3) allowseither party to proceed to the tribunal stagewhere the adjudicator fails to notify his decision within the stipulated time. The party intending to proceed to the tribunal stage must notify the other party within four weeks after the date that the adjudicator should have made his decision known.

 

Clause 1.4 (4) stipulates that the tribunal settles the dispute referred to it and may review any decision of the adjudicator and any actions taken by the Project Manager or Supervisor. It also states that parties are not limited to the information and evidence provided during the adjudication during the arbitration proceedings.

 

Option W2

 

1. Clause W 2.1 (1) provides that the parties may refer to adjudication any dispute arising from or is in connection with the contract to adjudication at any time. This is the major difference between the two options.

 

2. Clause W 2.2 (1) and (2) has the same clause content as clauses W1 1.2 (1) and (2) discussed above (clauses relate to joint appointment of the adjudicator and impartiality of the adjudicator).

 

3. Clause W 2.3 (1) deals with notification of adjudication. It provides that party referring a dispute to adjudication is to serve a notice of adjudication. The notice is to set out a

 

9 | P a g e

 

other party and the adjudicator named in the Contract Data. The adjudicator is to inform the parties whether he will be able to decide the dispute or not within 3 days of receiving the notification. If he does not do so, either party may act as if he has resigned.

 

4. Clause W 2.3 (7) deals with assessment of costs or time and is identical to W 1.3 (7) discussed above.

 

5. Clause W 2.3 (8) specifies that the adjudicator's decision is to be notified within twenty-eight days from the referral of the dispute. It allows for a further fourteen days on the agreement of the referring party. It also allows the parties to agree to further extensions.

 

6. Clause W 2.3 (9) deals with the effect of notification of the dispute to the adjudicator and is identical to clause 1.3 (9) above.

 

 

 

7. Clause W 2.3 (11) is identical to clause 1.3(10) discussed above. Clause W 2.3 (12) is identical to 1.3 (11) discussed above. Clause 2.4 (2) has identical provisions to Clause 1.4 (2) mentioned above. Clause 2.4 (3) is identical to Clause 1.4 (4) on powers of the tribunal discussed above. Clause 2.4 (4) is identical to Clause 1.4 (5) above, which discusses arbitration, and finally Clauses 2.4 (5) and 1.4 (6) are identical in their provisions that an adjudicator may not be called as a witness at the tribunal.

 

 

 

 

References

 

1. Mitchell B, et al, Introduction to the Engineering and Construction Contract - Managing Reality - Book one, Thomas Telford publishing, 2005.

2. Broome J, The NEC Engineering and Construction Contract- A user's guide, Thomas Telford publishing, 2005.

3. Eggleston B, The NEC 3 Engineering and Construction Contract- A commentary. Blackwell Publishing Company 2006.

4. Michael Rowlinson, A practical guide to the NEC3 engineering and construction contract (2015) [Available as eBook in the RGU Library through the Reading List]

5. Copies of the NEC3 ECC contract forms (Core Clauses, Main and Secondary options are available in a folder on Moodle.

6. The NEC3 ECC Guidance Notes are also available on Moodle via the NEC3 Folder.

7. J. Mante, ‘Mutual trust and co-operation under NEC 3&4: a fresh perspective’ Const. L.J. 2018, 34(4), 231-252 (on Westlaw)

8. J. Mante, Good faith, Mutual trust, and cooperation: recent judicial insights. Construction law journal, 2022 (on Westlaw)

 

 

 

See also

9. Fraserburgh Harbour Commissioners v McLaughlin & Harvey Ltd, 2021 S.L.T. 1487 (2021)

10 | P a g e

 

CSOH 115

11.Van Oord UK Ltd v Dragados UK Ltd, 2021 WL 04533227 (2021)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

11 | P a g e

 
 
 

Fraserburgh Harbour Commissioners v McLaughlin & Harvey Ltd

Court of Session (Inner House, First Division) | October 6, 2021 | 2021 S.L.T. 1487

 

 

 

Search Details Search Query:

 

 

Delivery Details Date:

Delivered By: Client ID:

Status Icons:

 

 

advanced: (TI(Fraserburgh Harbour Commissioners v. McLaughlin))

 

 

 

10 March 2022 at 4:07 pm Joseph Mante

NOCLIENTID

 

For educational use only

*1487 Fraserburgh Harbour Commissioners v McLaughlin & Harvey Ltd

 

 

Positive/Neutral Judicial Consideration

 

 

Court

Court of Session (Inner House, First Division)

 

Judgment Date 6 October 2021

 

Report Citation [2021] CSIH 58 2021 S.L.T. 1487

Court of Session (Inner House, First Division)

 

The Lord President ( Carloway ), Lords Pentland and Doherty

 

6 October 2021

 

Contract—Construction contract—Action of damages raised by employer under contract—Contractor’s preliminary plea of contractual bar—Correct construction of clause providing for alternative dispute resolution—Whether contractual terms depriving pursuers of right to raise court action—Whether appropriate to sist the cause pending outcome of ADR procedure.

 

 

An action of damages raised by an employer under a construction contract came to debate on the defenders’ preliminary plea of contractual bar. A second, alternative, plea was to sist the cause pending arbitration. Clause W2.4(1) of the contract provided: “A Party does not refer any dispute under or in connection with this contract to the tribunal unless it has first been decided by the Adjudicator in accordance with this contract”. The parties had stipulated that the “tribunal” would be arbitration. The defenders submitted that the action should be dismissed because, in terms of cl.W2.4, a mandatory step prior to the referral of any dispute to a tribunal, whether that was a court or an arbitration, was first to refer the matter to adjudication, and the pursuer had failed to do so. The pursuers submitted that cl.W2.4(1) did not exclude the ability of the court to entertain the suit, even if the merits of the dispute were to be decided by a private decision making process, and moved for the action to be sisted. The Lord Ordinary sustained the defenders’ plea and dismissed the action. The pursuers reclaimed to the Inner House. An adjudication hearing subsequently took place and an award made in favour of the pursuers; both parties served notices of dissatisfaction in terms of the contract, and the next step in the contractual dispute resolution scheme was arbitration. The pursuers submitted the settled approach was for any

 

court action to be sisted pending resolution of the dispute by way of the alternative dispute resolution (ADR) process, which was applicable not only to arbitration but to other alternative tribunals, the common law had been incorporated into s.10 of the Arbitration (Scotland) Act 2010 , which provided there had to be a sist if there was a binding requirement for arbitration, even if other procedures had to be exhausted first, and the right to resort to the court could only be excluded by clear wording.

 

Held, (1) that the right of access to the courts was the most basic of principles and a contract would not be interpreted as excluding the court’s jurisdiction unless by clear words or necessary implication (paras 13–14); (2) that the contractual terms in the present case went no further than stating that adjudication, and a notice of dissatisfaction, was necessary before proceeding to arbitration, the terms did not seek to attempt to deprive the pursuers of their right to raise court proceedings, they did not refer to the court at all; raising a court action did not per se breach the terms, a party relying on an ADR provision was entitled to tender the appropriate plea and, if sustained, the court would not entertain the merits unless the agreed method failed to resolve the dispute, and whether the arbitration which was in prospect in the present case would fail or not, the procedure to be followed was to sist the cause meantime (paras 15–16); (3) that s.10 of the 2010 Act *1488 provided that, on an application by a party to legal proceedings concerning any matter under dispute, the court “must” sist them, if there was an arbitration agreement covering that matter, unless the applicant had indicated a desire to have the dispute resolved by the legal proceedings; the pursuers were content for the dispute to proceed to arbitration, having raised the action regarding fears about the application of prescription, thus the application of s.10 was better resolved by having regard to the defenders’ second plea in law which sought a reference to arbitration if the raising of the action was not contractually barred and since the court had rejected the latter argument, it became the defenders who were seeing a sist in terms of that plea, and that being so, the court had to sist the action in terms of s.10 (para.17); and reclaiming motion allowed and action sisted .

 

Hamlyn & Co v Talisker Distillery (1894) 21 R. (H.L.) 21; (1894) 2 S.L.T. 12 , Brodie v Ker, 1952 S.C. 216; 1952 S.L.T. 226 , and Gilbert-Ash v Modern Engineering (Bristol) Ltd [1974] A.C. 689; [1973] 3 W.L.R. 421; [1973] 3 All E.R. 195 , applied .

 

 

 

Action of damages

 

(Reported 2021 S.L.T. 1009 )

 

Fraserburgh Harbour Commissioners raised an action of damages against McLaughlin & Harvey Ltd in respect of alleged breaches of contract.

 

The case called before the Lord Ordinary (Lady Wolffe) for a debate on the defender’s preliminary plea of contractual bar.

 

On 26 January 2021 the Lord Ordinary put the case out by order (reported 2021 S.L.T. 1009 ). By interlocutor dated 3 February 2021 the defenders’ plea of contractual bar was sustained and the action dismissed.

 

The pursuers reclaimed.

 

 

 

 

 

Cases referred to

 

 

Anglian Water Services Ltd v Laing O’Rourke Utilities Ltd [2010] EWHC 1529 (TCC); [2011] 1 All E.R. (Comm) 1143; 131 Con. L.R. 94 .

Brodie v Ker, 1952 S.C. 216; 1952 S.L.T. 226 .

Caledonian Insurance Co v Gilmour [1893] A.C. 85; (1892) 20 R. (H.L.) 13 . Channel Tunnel Group Ltd v Balfour Beatty Construction Ltd [1993] A.C. 334; [1993] 2 W.L.R. 262; [1993] 1 All E.R. 664 .

Dawnus Construction Holdings v Amey LG Ltd, QB, 26 January 2017, unreported . DGT Steel and Cladding Ltd v Cubitt Building and Interiors Ltd [2007] EWHC 1584 (TCC); [2008] Bus. L.R. 132; [2007] B.L.R. 371 .

Gilbert-Ash (Northern) Ltd v Modern Engineering (Bristol) Ltd [1974] A.C. 689; [1973] 3 W.L.R. 421; [1973] 3 All E.R. 195 .

Hamlyn & Co v The Talisker Distillery (1894) 21 R. (H.L.) 21; (1894) 2 S.L.T. 12 . North British Railway Co v Newburgh and North Fife Railway Co, 1911 S.C. 710; 1911 1 S.L.T. 266 .

 

Textbook referred to

 

 

Keating on NEC3 , para.11-098.

 

 

 

Reclaiming motion

 

The reclaiming motion came before the First Division.

 

On 6 October 2021 the court allowed the reclaiming motion and sisted the action.

 

The following opinion of the court was delivered by the Lord President (Carloway):

 

OPINION OF THE COURT.—

 

 

Introduction and procedure

 

[1]. In 2010 the pursuers decided to deepen their North Harbour to accommodate increasing vessel sizes and to allow greater efficiency in the port. In November 2012 the pursuers accepted the defenders’ tender to carry out the works. The pursuers claim to have identified defects in the works. They have raised the present proceedings for damages of £8.85 million.

 

 

 

[2]. The defenders have tendered a plea in law that the pursuers are “contractually barred” from raising the action because the dispute has not first been referred to adjudication as required by the parties’ contract. A second, alternative, plea is to sist the cause pending arbitration.

 

 

 

[3]. There was no motion to sist the case pending adjudication or arbitration when the defences were lodged. Rather, on 20 October 2020, the cause was remitted to the commercial court. Parties were permitted to adjust and to lodge written notes of argument prior to a diet of debate on 25 November. By interlocutor dated 3 February 2021 the commercial judge sustained the defenders’ plea of contractual bar and dismissed the action. The pursuers reclaim. *1489

 

 

 

[4]. An adjudication hearing took place on 22 February 2021. An award was made in favour of the pursuers. Both parties have served notices of dissatisfaction in terms of the contract. The next step in the contractual dispute resolution scheme is arbitration.

 

 

 

The contract

 

[5]. Clause W2 of the NEC3 engineering and construction contract, which was adopted by the parties, provides:

 

 

 

 

“Dispute resolution W2

 

W2.1 (1) A dispute arising under or in connection with this contract is referred to and decided by the Adjudicator. A Party may refer a dispute to the Adjudicator at any time. …

 

Review by the tribunal W2.4

 

W2.4 (1) A Party does not refer any dispute under or in connection with this contract to the tribunal unless it has first been decided by the Adjudicator in accordance with this contract.

 

(2) If, after the Adjudicator notifies his decision a Party is dissatisfied, that Party may notify the other Party of the matter which he disputes and state that he intends to refer it to the tribunal . The dispute may not be referred to the tribunal unless this notification is given within four weeks of the notification of the Adjudicator ’s decision.

 

(3) The tribunal settles the dispute referred to it … .”

 

 

 

 

In the contract data the “tribunal” is defined as “arbitration”.

 

 

 

 

The commercial judge

 

[6]. The commercial judge considered that the general principles governing the procedure of the court when a party founds upon an arbitration clause were of no assistance. The pursuers had accepted that the court could not determine the merits of the action, if the defenders insisted on their primary plea. This had a significant impact on the “utility” or “purpose” of the cause. Although the court may have jurisdiction for certain purposes ancillary to the action, such as the grant of a commission and diligence or to give effect to any arbitral award, none of these was sought. The pursuers had produced no authority to the effect that an action could be raised, in breach of a contractual provision, to interrupt the operation of prescription. On this basis the pursuers’ motion to sist the cause fell to be refused as the action could serve no purpose.

 

 

 

[7].     Clause W2.4(1) required there to be an adjudication and a notice of dissatisfaction before resort could be had to the tribunal of choice (arbitration). Given

 

that the parties had agreed that the relevant tribunal was to be arbitration, the merits of any dispute fell to be determined by that means. On the pursuers’ approach, the defenders would be denied the advantages and speed of that contractually agreed mode of dispute resolution. The natural reading of cl.W2.4(1) was that it prescribed a sequence for (cascade of) the different modes of resolution.

 

 

 

Submissions

 

Pursuers

 

[8]. The settled approach, when a dispute required to be referred to an ADR process was for any court action to be sisted pending resolution of the dispute by that process ( Hamlyn & Co v The Talisker Distillery at (1894) 21 R. (H.L.), p.25 ; (1894) 2 S.L.T., p.14 ). That applied not only to arbitration but to other alternative tribunals ( Brodie v Kerat 1952 S.C., p.223; 1952 S.L.T., p.230). The common law had been incorporated into s.10 of the Arbitration (Scotland) Act 2010 . This provided that there must be a sist if there is a binding requirement for arbitration, even if other procedures had to be exhausted first. This had considerable practical benefit. It allowed a court action to be raised for purposes such as diligence on the dependence, interim orders, or to interrupt prescription.

 

[9]. The right to resort to the court could only be excluded by clear wording ( Brodie v Ker at p.224 (p.231)). Clause W2.4(1) was limited to requiring a dispute to be adjudicated before it was arbitrated. There were no words which excluded the right to raise an action and to have it sisted to await determination under the contractual dispute resolution procedure. The commercial judge failed to follow well established procedure and to give effect to the provisions of s.10 of the 2010 Act . She erred in concluding that the terms of the clause meant that the rule in Hamlyn did not apply. Two English decisions founded on by the defenders, viz : Anglian Water Services Ltd v Laing O’Rourke Utilities Ltd and Dawnus Construction Holdings v Amey LG Ltd , *1490 were not in point. Channel Tunnel Group Ltd v Balfour Beatty Construction Ltd (at [1993] A.C., pp.353–355, 362) supported the principle in Hamlyn as did DGT Steel and Cladding Ltd v Cubitt Building and Interiors Ltd at [2008] Bus. L.R., pp.134, 136–137, 143 paras 5, 12 and 38, although the power to stay was discretionary in England. That was not the case in Scotland ( North British Railway Co v Newburgh and North Fife Railway Coat 1911 S.C., pp.719 and 721; 1911 1 S.L.T., pp.271–273).

 

Defenders

 

[10]. The commercial judge was correct to hold that the pursuers were contractually barred from bringing the present action and that, accordingly, it fell to be dismissed. The pursuers conceded that they could not litigate without having first adjudicated. The pursuers had not complied with that requirement and were now barred from

 

bringing (or insisting upon) this action. The English authorities ( Anglianand Dawnus ) were consistent with the commentary on cl.W2.4(1) in Keating on NEC3 (at para.11–098) that: “This does mean that if a party wishes to raise disputes at the end of the project then the matter will have to be referred to adjudication initially.” The pursuers were contractually required to adjudicate before bringing any dispute before a more formal tribunal. This was consistent with Caledonian Insurance Co v Gilmour . Hamlyn & Co v The Talisker Distillery did not have the cascade of ADR provisions which existed in this case. The sisting of an action pending the outcome of an arbitration, when the parties had engaged in a court action, was addressed in Hamlyn in which it was said (at p.28) that in accordance with ordinary practice, procedure should be stayed to allow the arbitration to be proceeded as provided by the contract.

 

[11]. The mandatory step of arbitration was required regardless of any concern that a party may have about prescription. The parties had not agreed that any such concern would avoid the need for adjudication as a mandatory first step. Whether the pursuers were contractually barred was not an issue on which the parties had agreed to go to arbitration. As such, s.10 of the 2010 Act was not engaged and the commercial judge was not obliged to sist the action. Channel Tunnel Group v Balfour Beatty Construction turned on the specific terms of the clause and English procedure, which enabled an action to continue notwithstanding an arbitration clause. That was not the position in Scotland ( North British Railway Co v Newburgh and North Fife Railway Co at p.719 (p.271)).

 

[12]. The commercial judge correctly held that cl.W2.4(1) operated as a contractual bar. She was correct that a sist was not appropriate and that dismissal was appropriate, as had been granted in North British Railway Co v Newburgh and North Fife Railway Co. There was no purpose to the action continuing. Prescription had been interrupted. If there were an arbitral award, it could be registered for execution ( 2010 Act s.12(5) ). However, the defenders’ case rested on contractual bar and not any lack of utility. The pursuers were driving a coach and horses through the contractual provisions.

 

Decision

 

[13]. This reclaiming motion is conclusively determined on the basis of the well known and established principles relative to clauses which provide for alternative dispute resolution, whether that is by adjudication or arbitration or both. These are set out clearly and succinctly in the locus classicus : Hamlyn & Co v The Talisker Distillery . There, in relation to the arbitration clause in a contract, it was said (Lord Watson, at p.25 (p.14)) that: “The jurisdiction of the Court is not wholly ousted by such a contract. It deprives the Court of jurisdiction to inquire into and decide the merits of the case, while it leaves the Court free to entertain the suit, and to pronounce a decree in conformity with the award of the arbiter. Should the arbitration from any cause prove abortive, the full jurisdiction of the Court will revive, to the effect of

 

enabling it to hear and determine the action upon its merits. When a binding reference is pleaded in limine , the proper course to take is either to refer the question in dispute to the arbiter named or to stay procedure until it has been settled by arbitration.”

 

 

 

The reason for this rule is not too difficult to understand. The right of access to the courts is the most basic of principles.

 

 

 

[14]. A contract will not be interpreted as excluding the court’s jurisdiction unless by clear words or necessary implication; Brodie v Ker consulted judges (LP (Cooper), Lords Carmont and Russell) at p.224 (p.231); Gilbert-Ash (Northern) Ltd v Modern Engineering (Bristol) Ltd Lord Diplock at [1974] A.C., pp.717–718. *1491

 

 

 

[15]. The contractual terms in the present case go no further than stating that adjudication (and a notice of dissatisfaction) is necessary before proceeding to arbitration. The terms do not seek to attempt to deprive the pursuers of their right to raise court proceedings. They do not refer to the court at all. Raising a court action does not per se breach the terms. A party relying on an ADR provision is entitled to tender the appropriate plea and, if sustained, the court will not entertain the merits of the dispute ( Brodie v Ker consulted judges at p.223 (p.230)). Here, the defenders have insisted on the dispute being determined by the contractual ADR procedure. In those circumstances the court will enforce the parties’ agreement ( North British Railway Co v Newburgh and North Fife Railway Co LP (Dunedin) at p.719 (p.271)). It will not engage with the merits of the dispute unless the agreed method fails to resolve the dispute. Otherwise, the court’s competence to hear the case is not affected. The right to proceed by the alternative method may be waived or it may fail for a variety of reasons.

 

 

 

[16]. Whether the action is of any utility or purpose is not a matter which the court is required to determine at this stage. There is no plea that the action is either hypothetical, academic or premature. It is, ex facie , a competent action seeking a practical result. Even if it cannot be pressed to a conclusion at present, the raising of an action may, whether or not there is an ADR provision, be necessary to prevent the operation of prescription, to secure diligence on the dependence or for other reasons. For aught yet seen, the arbitration, which is now in prospect, may fail. Whether that is so or not, the procedure to be followed is to sist the cause meantime.

 

[17]. Section 10 of the Arbitration (Scotland) Act 2010 provides that, on an application by a party to legal proceedings concerning any matter under dispute, the court “must” sist those proceedings, if there is an arbitration agreement covering that matter (whether immediately or after other ADR processes), unless the applicant has indicated a desire to have the dispute resolved by the legal proceedings. Notwithstanding the defenders’ submission to the contrary, it is plain that the legal proceedings (i.e. the present action) concern a “matter under dispute” arising under the parties’ contract. The court heard argument on who the applicant might be for the purposes of s.10and whether, if it was the pursuers, they had indicated a desire to have the dispute resolved by the legal proceedings. Given that the pursuers are content that the dispute proceeds to arbitration, and have explained that the reason for raising the action related to fears about the application of prescription, it is by no means clear that they have indicated a desire that the merits of the dispute be resolved by the court. Be that as it may, the issue of the application of s.10 is better resolved by having regard to the defenders’ second plea in law. This seeks a reference to arbitration, if the raising of the action is not contractually barred. Since the court has rejected the latter argument, it becomes the defenders who are seeking a sist in terms of that plea. That being so, the court must sist the cause in terms of s.10 .

 

 

 

[18]. For completeness, the two first instance cases from, respectively, England and Wales are not in point. In any event considerable care would require to be taken before applying dicta in them to this court’s procedure. Anglian Water Services v Laing O’Rourke Utilities was about the validity of a notice of dissatisfaction. Edwards-Stuart J’s reference (at para.16) to “starting” proceedings, if correct in English law (cf. Channel Tunnel Group v Balfour Beatty Construction Lord Mustill at pp.353–355), runs contrary to Hamlyn & Co v The Talisker Distillery . In Dawnus Construction Holdings v Amey LG , HHJ Keyser QC asked the correct question of whether the failure to serve a notice of dissatisfaction prevented the court from “finally determining” the relevant issue.

 

 

 

[19]. The reclaiming motion must be allowed, the commercial judge’s interlocutor of 3 February 2021 will be recalled and the action will be sisted pending the outcome of the ADR processes.

 

 

 

 

 

Representation

 

Counsel for Petitioner and Reclaimers, Ellis, QC; Solicitors, Burness Paull LLP Counsel for Defenders and Respondents, MacColl, QC ; Solicitors, Brodies LLP.

*1492

 

 

(c) W. Green & Son Limited

 

NEC3: Option C of the Engineering and Construction Contract

 

Iain Suttie, Berwin Leighton Paisner LLP

 

The most commonly used of the main payment options in the NEC3 Engineering and Construction Contract (ECC) is Option C: target contract with activity schedule. It encourages transparency, which in turn, and importantly, contributes to more effective management of the works. This article sets out the key features of Option C, provides an overview of how it operates, and identifies some important commercial and drafting issues.

 

 

 

 

Key features of Option C

 

 

An overview of Option C and its benefits

 

Option C promotes, and potentially maximises, many of the perceived benefits of adopting the ECC. For example:

•           Closer employer/contractor working relationships.

 

•           A clear and balanced approach to risk management.

 

•           A focus on delivering increased project value.

 

•           Enhanced contractor profit (if savings are achieved).

 

Option C is one of the ECC's two target price mechanisms. (The other is Option D: target contract with bill of quantities.)

A target price contract is essentially a variant of a cost reimbursable contract, under which a contractor is entitled to be reimbursed for the costs incurred in carrying out work, and paid a percentage fee to cover overheads and profit.

Under Option C, the employer and the contractor agree a target price. In addition, they also agree their respective shares of any savings made if the cost of carrying out the works is less than the target price, or any cost incurred if the target price is exceeded. These agreed percentages are inserted into the ECC's "Contract Data".

 

Option C therefore provides a means by which financial "pain" and "gain" are shared between the employer and the contractor: a "painshare/gainshare" mechanism.

The Option C mechanism is very flexible. It anticipates that the parties may agree several share percentages, each relating to a particular share range. For example, the parties may agree to share the first 10% of any cost savings or overruns on a 50/50 basis; with lower share percentages for any savings or overruns in excess of 10%. This provides an incentive for both parties to agree a realistic target, and minimises the risk of the contractor making an excessive profit or loss.

Alternatively, if the employer wishes to cap his ultimate exposure to cost overruns, he may seek to impose a 100% "painshare" on the contractor above a certain level, in effect creating a "guaranteed maximum price" arrangement. The commercial implications of particular share percentages and ranges need to be carefully considered by both employer and contractor.

 

Key issues in the drafting and operation of Option C

 

Important points relating to the key features of Option C include: •           The target price is subject to adjustment as a result of the

occurrence of compensation events, such as changes to the Works Information. (The fundamental role played by the Works Information in the ECC is discussed in the "tender documents" section of the NEC's Guidance Notes for the NEC Engineering and Construction Contract.) This rule applies even under a guaranteed maximum price contract.

 

•           The contractor is paid the full cost of carrying out the works (subject to any "Disallowed Cost"), regardless of the target price, until completion of the whole of the works. Only then is the contractor's share of any savings or overruns assessed and taken into account by way of a payment adjustment.

 

•           Given the cost-reimbursable nature of Option C, the function of the "activity schedule" under this option is necessarily limited. This is particularly the case when compared with its function under Option A: lump sum-priced contract with activity schedule. In an NEC contract, the activity schedule sets out the various component parts and stages

 

of the works. Each of these elements is priced in the tender submitted by the contractor. With Option C, the activity schedule is used only in relation to assessing the value of compensation events and working out the amount of the contractor's share upon completion of the works.

 

•           In order to operate Option C successfully, it is critically important that the parties set realistic targets at appropriate points in the procurement process:

 

o       a realistic target is one that is as accurate an estimate as possible of the outturn cost (the total cost of the completed project), taking into account known risks and a contingency for unknown risks;

 

o       if a target is set before the contractor has sufficient information to formulate a detailed view on project risk, the contractor will be inclined to "price" unknown risk by demanding an excessively generous target;

 

o       a target that is unrealistically high is likely to lead to the contractor being over-rewarded. The contractor may become entitled to a "gainshare" without having realised efficiencies and added value through innovative working practices and/or value engineering. This is alien to the NEC's philosophy of transparent costs and fair rewards;

 

o       a target that is set too low is likely to lead to behaviour which is discouraged by NEC. In particular, a scenario where the contractor may submit an inflated or speculative claim so as to secure an increase in the target price in order to avoid a cost overrun, therefore protecting its profit margin;

 

o       low targets may also lead to projects where resourcing and quality are compromised; and

 

o       realistic targets should be allied to appropriately calibrated gainshare percentages and share ranges. However, if a target is set at too realistic a level, there may be little benefit to the

 

employer to provide the contractor with an incentive to complete the works at a cost that is massively below that target.

 

Generally speaking, the target should be set at such a time, and at such a level, that it encourages the parties to work together in a co-operative manner to realise a product from which both the employer and the contractor derive genuinely earned value.

Given this, and the emphasis on risk-sharing, it may never be appropriate for Option C to be used to achieve a guaranteed maximum price arrangement.

 

 

How Option C works

 

The practical operation of Option C requires considerable management input, particularly on the part of the Project Manager (principally in relation to assessment of amounts due to the contractor). In addition, the drafting of some of its clauses is not entirely clear. Nevertheless, the way in Option C is intended to operate is relatively straightforward.

For more information on the role of the Project Manager under NEC contracts, see Practice note.

 

Allowable and disallowed cost

 

NEC3 with Option C is a cost reimbursable form of contract. During the carrying out of the works, the contractor is entitled to be paid the "Defined Cost" of carrying out the works. Clauses 52.2 and 52.3 of Option C require the contractor to make its cost records available to the Project Manager on an open book basis.

(The NEC2 ECC used the term "Actual Cost", not Defined Cost. This gave rise to some confusion, due to Actual Cost not being equivalent to the actual cost incurred by the contractor. The change in terminology is intended to underline the distinction between actual cost incurred and those costs for which the contractor is entitled to reimbursement.)

The full definition of Defined Cost is given at clause 11.2(23) of Option C, but defined Cost comprises:

•           The amount of payments due from the contractor to sub-contractors for sub-contracted parts of the works plus the cost of components

 

listed in the Schedule of Cost Components for work that is not sub-contracted.

 

•           Less "Disallowed Cost".

 

In relation to payments to a sub-contractor, the Project Manager does not consider the "actual" cost incurred by the sub-contractor, unless the form of sub-contract is itself cost reimbursable. Obviously, the assessment of the contractor's share is made more complicated if the Project Manager must first assess sub-contractor level painshare and gainshare.

The Schedule of Cost Components specifies the cost items in relation to which the contractor is entitled to be reimbursed by the employer, provided that the cost has been incurred in providing the works. The schedule in the NEC3 ECC has been amended from NEC2 ECC so as to promote greater cost transparency. It is not intended that either party should price the schedule in advance. Instead, the Schedule of Cost Components is simply a list of allowable costs for which the contractor is entitled to payment, if incurred.

The full list of disallowed costs is set out at clause 11.2(25) of Option C, but Disallowed costs include:

•           Cost not justified by the contractor's accounts and records.

 

•           Cost which should not have been paid to sub-contractors or suppliers in accordance with their contracts.

 

•           Cost incurred due to the contractor not following a procedure stated in the Works Information or not giving an early warning.

 

•           The cost of correcting defects after completion of the works.

 

•           The cost of correcting defects caused by the contractor not complying with a constraint on how the works are to be provided stated in the "Works Information". (An example of a constraint is a requirement in the works information that a specific type of material or process be used.)

 

•           Cost incurred in relation to plant, materials and resources not used in the works, allowing for reasonable wastage and materials not used due to changes in the Works Information.

 

Note that under ECC, the contractor is entitled to be paid the cost of correcting a defect before completion of the whole of the works, even if the defect results from its own default. The only exception to this general position is where the contractor has not complied with a constraint in the Works Information regarding how the works are to be carried out.

 

Payment: during the carrying out of the works: cost reimbursement

 

During the carrying out of the works, the contractor is paid (reimbursed) the "Price for the Work Done to Date". This is defined as the total Defined Cost which the Project Manager forecasts, at each payment assessment date, will have been paid by the contractor before the next assessment date, plus the contractor's fee. Under NEC2 ECC, the Price for the Work Done to Date was the "Actual Cost" that the contractor has paid. Strictly interpreted, this required the contractor to have paid its sub-contractors before including the relevant amounts in a payment application. This could lead to the contractor having to finance the works for a significant period. The intention behind the change is to make Option C more "cash neutral" for the contractor.

The fee is calculated by applying the respective percentages specified in the contract data to the sub-contracted and non-sub-contracted parts of the Defined Cost. The relevant percentage is specified in the contract data. Clause 50.1 of NEC3 sets out how assessment dates are fixed.

(In NEC2 ECC, the fee was calculated by application of a single "global" fee percentage. This was seen as unclear and inflexible in practice. The change reflects ECC's general policy of drawing a clear distinction between the financial treatment of sub-contracted and non-sub-contracted parts of the works.)

 

Payment: after the completion of the works: the contractor's share

 

The contractor's share is one of:

•           A sum due to the contractor (if there is a gainshare resulting from the Defined Cost being less than the target cost).

 

•           A sum due to the employer (if there is a painshare resulting from the Defined Cost exceeding the target cost).

 

Although, if the Defined Cost is equal to the target cost, there is no pain or gain share.

Clause 53.1 of Option C sets out the mechanism for calculating the share. The drafting is not particularly easy to follow. Nevertheless, the clause provides that:

•           The contractor's share is calculated on the difference between the (reimbursable) price for work done to date and the target price (which is the total of the prices included in the activity schedule, adjusted to take account of compensation events).

 

•           The difference is split into "increments", relating to the share ranges specified in the contract data.

 

•           Each increment is multiplied by the appropriate share percentage set out in the contract data.

 

•           The products of these multiplications are then added together to give the contractor's share.

 

The NEC3 ECC guidance notes provide a useful worked example, illustrating how clause 53.1 is intended to operate.

A preliminary assessment of the contractor's share is made by the Project Manager at completion of the whole of the works, using the Project Manager's forecasts of:

•           The final price for work done to date (that is, Defined Cost plus the Fee).

 

•           The final target price.

 

The final assessment of the contractor's share is made once the Defined Cost incurred by the contractor and the final target are known.

 

 

 

 

 

Commercial and drafting issues

 

In practice, there are a number of issues that users of Option C may wish to consider.

 

Correcting defects

 

The definition of Disallowed Cost in clause 11.2(25) of the ECC (incorporating Option C) is frequently amended in practice to provide that the contractor has no entitlement to be reimbursed any cost incurred in relation to correcting defects. This is particularly common where the parties use the contract in a design and build context.

While it may seem natural for an employer to wish to make a contractor bear the full cost of correcting defects, it is important to understand the rationale underlying Option C. If a contractor has no entitlement to be reimbursed the cost of correcting defects generally, it will make provision for this cost elsewhere, either within the fee structure or through an increase in the target cost. In either case, cost transparency is lost, which is completely against the spirit of NEC3 (particularly Option C). Option C depends for its effective operation on a transparent employer/contractor relationship, where the cost of delivering the works is dealt with in an upfront and clear manner.

In the NEC3 Option C world, the most appropriate way of allocating the cost of correcting defects is through setting appropriate targets and contractor share percentages.

 

Schedule of Cost Components

 

Some employers prefer to replace the Schedule of Cost Components with their own bespoke schedule. This is likely to be because they consider that a bespoke schedule is more closely aligned to their company's internal cost management procedures.

 

However, given that NEC3's Schedule of Cost Components is integral to the operation of Option C, and is understood by contractors, it may be preferable for it to be retained and only modified insofar as is necessary. In addition, some individual cost components may benefit from being specified in greater detail. However, given the philosophy behind NEC drafting (a concise approach coupled with balanced, fair and practical interpretation) and that the parties to NEC contracts are typically experienced parties, the point and value of extensive amendments may be lost.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Funding requirements

 

Prior to completion of the whole of the works the employer is, broadly speaking, required to pay the contractor the full costs incurred by that contractor for carrying out the works. This means that in the case of a cost overrun, the contractor will receive payment in excess of the target price. This in turn means the employer will have to claw back the contractor's share of the overspend once the painshare has been assessed.

The reasoning behind this position is to avoid contractors taking on large-scale financing obligations in relation to projects. However, some employers and their funders do not accept this and require Option C to be modified. The range of possible modifications includes:

•           Modifying Option C so that the contractor has no interim entitlement to payment of amounts in excess of the total lump sum prices in the activity schedule. Such a modification prevents the employer being placed in a position where he needs to claw back any excess payment.

 

•           Inserting a provision to the effect that the contractor's entitlement to interim payment is limited by reference to the payments scheduled in a cash flow forecast. Such a forecast may be contained in the development appraisal prepared for the funder. The purpose of such a provision is to prevent the interim amount due

 

to the contractor at any point exceeding the development funding which the employer is entitled to draw down. (See Standard clause, Modifying Option C so that, in relation to interim payments, the contractor is only entitled to be paid a proportion of cost incurred in excess of the total lump sum prices in the activity schedule. The proportion of the excess payable would be calculated by the Project Manager and based on his assessment of the anticipated total final painshare. The effect of such a modification would be to minimise the amount that the employer has to claw back after completion of the works.

 

However, before any such clause is incorporated into an ECC Option C contract, employers and their funders should give careful consideration to two issues:

•           The likelihood of contractors seeking to protect their position by holding out for an inflated target.

 

•           The possible lack of incentive on the part of contractors arising from the removal of their right to interim reimbursement.

 

The following z clauses are intended for UK Government clients when using the NEC3 forms of contracts. These clauses are additional conditions to the main NEC3 contract and are not intended for independent use. Whilst optional, public sector users should consider their use in conjunction with the main contract. NEC and the Office of Government Commerce have produced the generic clauses in collaboration to ensure compatibility with both the NEC3 suite of contracts and public sector terminology.

 

 

 

NEC3 engineering and construction contract Z clauses

 

Z1        Official Secrets and confidentiality

 

Z1.1    The Official Secrets Act 1989 and, where appropriate, the provisions of section 11 of the Atomic Energy Act 1946 apply to this contract from the starting date until the Defects Certificate or a termination certificate has been issued.

 

Z1.2     The Contractor notifies his employees and his Subcontractors of their duties under these Acts.

 

Z1.3     The Contractor does not use or disclose information concerning the contract obtained either by the Contractor or by any person employed by him except for the purposes of the contract.

 

Z2        Security

 

Site admittance

 

Z2.1     The Contractor submits to the Project Manager details of people who are to be employed by him and his Subcontractors in connection with the works. The details include a list of names and addresses, the capacities in which they are employed, and other information required by the Project Manager.

 

Z2.2     The Project Manager may instruct the Contractor to take measures to prevent unauthorised persons being admitted on to the Site. The instruction is a compensation event if the measures are additional to those required by the Works Information.

 

Passes

 

Z2.3    Employees of the Contractor and his Subcontractors are to carry an Employer’s pass whilst they are on the parts of the Site stated in the Contract Data.

 

Z2.4     The Contractor submits to the Project Manager for acceptance a list of the names of the people for whom passes are required. The Project Manager issues the passes to the Contractor. Each pass is returned to the Project Manager when the

 

employee no longer requires access to that part of the Site or after the Project Manager has given notice that the employee is not to be admitted to the Site.

 

Photographs

 

Z2.5     The Contractor does not take photographs of the Site or the works or any part of them unless he has obtained the acceptance of the Project Manager.

 

Z2.6     The Contractor takes the measures needed to prevent his and his Subcontractors’ people taking, publishing or otherwise circulating such photographs.

 

Guidance on NEC3 Engineering and Construction Contract Z clauses

 

Site admittance

 

Any general requirements for Site security should be set out in the Works Information. Clause Z2.2 allows the Project Manager to instruct a higher level of security whenever necessary.

 

Passes

 

Z2.3 and Z2.4 are used when access is to be controlled by the issue of passes. An entry should be made in the Contract Data as follows:

 

“The parts of the Site where employees are to carry a pass are....”

 

Photographs

 

Z2.5 and Z2.6 should be used if the Contractor is to be restricted in taking photographs of the Site.

 

NEC3 engineering and construction short contract Z clauses

 

Z1        Official Secrets and confidentiality

 

Z1.1    The Official Secrets Act 1989 and, where appropriate, the provisions of section 11 of the Atomic Energy Act 1946 apply to this contract from the starting date until the Defects Certificate or a termination certificate has been issued.

 

Z1.2     The Contractor notifies his employees and his subcontractors of their duties under these Acts.

 

Z1.3     The Contractor does not use or disclose information concerning the contract obtained either by the Contractor or by any person employed by him except for the purposes of the contract.

 

Z2        Security

 

Site admittance

 

Z2.1     The Contractor submits to the Employer details of people who are to be employed by him and his Subcontractors in connection with the works. The details include a list of names and addresses, the capacities in which they are employed, and other information required by the Employer.

 

Z2.2     The Employer may instruct the Contractor to take measures to prevent unauthorised persons being admitted on to the site. The instruction is a compensation event if the measures are additional to those required by the Works Information.

 

Passes

 

Z2.3    Employees of the Contractor and his subcontractors are to carry an Employer’s pass whilst they are on the parts of the site stated in the Contract Data.

 

Z2.4     The Contractor submits to the Employer for acceptance a list of the names of the people for whom passes are required. The Employer issues the passes to the Contractor. Each pass is returned to the Employer when the employee no longer requires access to that part of the site or after the Employer has given notice that the employee is not to be admitted to the site.

 

Photographs

 

Z2.5     The Contractor does not take photographs of the site or the works or any part of them unless he has obtained the acceptance of the Employer.

 

Z2.6     The Contractor takes the measures needed to prevent his and his subcontractors’ people taking, publishing or otherwise circulating such photographs.

 

NEC3 professional services contract Z clauses

 

Z1        Official Secrets and confidentiality

 

Z1.1    The Official Secrets Act 1989 and, where appropriate, the provisions of section 11 of the Atomic Energy Act 1946 apply to this contract from the starting date until the, the date of correction of any Defect notified before the defects date, or until a termination certificate has been issued.

 

Z1.2     The Consultant notifies his employees and his Subconsultants of their duties under these Acts.

 

Z1.3     The Consultant does not use or disclose information concerning the contract obtained either by the Consultant or by any person employed by him except for the purposes of the contract.

 

Z2        Security

 

Z2.1 to Z2.4 not used

 

Photographs

 

Z2.5     The Consultant does not take photographs of work carried out in connection with the services unless he has obtained the acceptance of the Employer.

 

Z2.6     The Consultant takes the measures needed to prevent his and his Subconsultants’ people taking, publishing or otherwise circulating such photographs.

 

NEC3 term service contract Z clauses

 

Z1        Official Secrets and confidentiality

 

Z1.1    The Official Secrets Act 1989 and, where appropriate, the provisions of section 11 of the Atomic Energy Act 1946 apply to this contract from the starting date until the expiry of the service period or until a termination certificate has been issued.

 

Z1.2     The Contractor notifies his employees and his Subcontractors of their duties under these Acts.

 

Z1.3     The Contractor does not use or disclose information concerning the contract obtained either by the Contractor or by any person employed by him except for the purposes of the contract.

 

Z2        Security

 

Admittance to Affected Property

 

Z2.1     The Contractor submits to the Service Manager details of people who are to be employed by him and his Subcontractors in connection with the service. The details include a list of names and addresses, the capacities in which they are employed, and other information required by the Service Manager.

 

Z2.2     The Service Manager may instruct the Contractor to take measures to prevent unauthorised persons being admitted to Affected Property. The instruction is a compensation event if the measures are additional to those required by the Service Information.

 

Passes

 

Z2.3    Employees of the Contractor and his Subcontractors are to carry an Employer’s pass whilst they are on the parts of the Affected Property stated in the Contract Data.

 

Z2.4     The Contractor submits to the Service Manager for acceptance a list of the names of the people for whom passes are required. The Service Manager issues the passes to the Contractor. Each pass is returned to the Service Manager when the employee no longer requires access to that part of the Affected Property or after the Service Manager has given notice that the employee is not to be admitted to the Affected Property.

 

Photographs

 

Z2.5     The Contractor does not take photographs of Affected Property or of work carried out in connection with the service unless he has obtained the acceptance of the Service Manager.

 

Z2.6     The Contractor takes the measures needed to prevent his and his Subcontractors’ people taking, publishing or otherwise circulating such photographs.

 

Topic 7: NEC3 ECC - Main and Secondary options

 

 

Topic Preview

 

This topic will consider the following: • Contract strategy

•     Details of the main options.

•     Details of the Secondary Options in NEC3 ECC.

 

 

Topic Content

 

1. The Main Options and Contract Strategy

The NEC3 ECC structure allows a complete contract to be formed by choosing a Main Option and adding it to the nine core clauses. There are six main options in the NEC3 ECC, these are:

 

Option A- priced contract with activity schedule • Option B- priced contract with bill of quantities • Option C- target contract with activity schedule • Option D- target contract with bill of quantities • Option E- cost reimbursable contract

Option F- Managementcontract

 

The Main Options serve multiple purposes; they are primarily the vehicle for determining the payment method for the contract. They are also useful in determining contract strategy including price risk, allocation of design responsibility and could indicate the Employer's intentions regarding early mobilization to site. This section will discuss briefly how the choice of a main option interacts with the contract strategy for a project, and then the next section will examine each of the options in detail.

 

Contract Strategy refers to a range of issues that aids the Employer to choose an appropriate contract to achieve his objective for each project. The issues include:

•     Which party is responsible for design?

•     Which is the higher priority, certainty of price or time of completion?

•     How definite and sufficient is the Employer’s requirements for the project and what level of flexibility is expected?

•     Is the Employer keen on a single point responsibility the Employer keen on a single point responsibility contract?

The effects of the choice of the NEC3 ECC main options on some of the above issues are covered below.

 

1.1. Risk in price

It is a testament to the flexibility of the NEC3 ECC form that a wide spectrum of choices is provided in the main options for the management and distribution of the risk in price. These range from fixed price contracts to a management contract. In between, we have target price contracts and cost reimbursable contracts. In the absence of price increases caused by changes to the WorksInformation document, Option A (priced contract with activity schedule) provides the maximum level of certainty of price for the Employer while Option F

1 | P a g e

 

Option A is a priced contract, where a lump sum is tendered for each activity on the Activity Schedule (an activity schedule is a list of activities expected to be undertaking by the contractor in constructing the works). The contractor tenders a firm price for the works based on each activity in the schedule and an ascertainable total contract sum is easily established.

 

Option B is a priced contract based on a bill of quantities (a bill of quantities contains a list of work items and quantities with the unit of measurement and a method of measurement). The Contractor tenders rates and prices for the items on the bill of quantities. Option B provides lesser certainty of price when compared to Option A. This is because the quantities stated may change thus affecting the price; this is often the case. The Contractor is paid for work done based on the actual quantities used. Usually, the risk of changes to the quantities stated in the bill of quantities is borne by the Employer who traditionally prepares the document. The Contractor bears the risk of the adequacy of the tendered rates and prices.

 

Option C is a target contract based on an Activity Schedule. Option C is next to option A with regards to certainty of price. Option C provides for a maximum price - that is the target price. Above this price the Contractor is liable to pay the Employer back at agreed percentages. Option D is a target contract based on a bill of quantities. Because it is based on a bill of quantity, it offers lesser certainty of price than Options A and C, as changes to the quantities contained in the bill of quantity will significantly affect the price of the contract.

 

Options E and F offer the least certainty on price. Under Option E, the Employer pays for all allowable costs incurred in constructing the works. The Contractor quotes his fee for carrying out the works and this is paid along with all other legitimate costs incurred by the Contractor in constructing the works. As there is no assurance as to the value of the costs and no incentive to keep the costs down, there is even lesser certainty with regards to the price of contract than previous options.

 

Option F is a management contract, apart from the works that the Contractor is expected to complete, his main duty is to manage works let out to various sub-contractors. It is the Employer that bears the risk of the costs of the various sub-contracts.

 

1.2. Employer's Requirement

The Employer's requirement (note that this is now called the ‘Scope’ under NEC4) sets out the specifications and description of the works required by the Employer. Depending on circumstance of a project, the Employer's requirement may be finalised or may be developing and subject to changes as the project proceeds. The main Options provide the Employer with a mechanism to manage this risk.

 

Options A and B being priced contracts are most suitable for projects where the Employers requirements are finalised and subject to few changes as the work progresses. Options C and D provide more flexibility than the priced contracts. However, to allow realistic target prices to be set, a reasonable level of definition of the Employer's requirement is required. An Employer that is keen on having maximum flexibility in developing or changing his requirements for a project while the construction work proceeds is best advised to use either Options E or F. These are costs reimbursable contracts and can accommodate the Employer

 

2 | P a g e

 

1.3. Design

In the Works Information documents, the parties provide for the division of design responsibilities in the NEC3 ECC. The parties are at liberty to assign this responsibility to either the Contractor or the Employer. They are also at liberty to assign the design responsibility to both the Contractor and the Employer, specifying the aspects of the project to be designed by each party. The main options support this choice. However, some main options are more suited to certain devolution of design responsibility than others.

 

Option A is flexible on design. While it is suitable for the Contractor’s design of the project, it is ideally suitable for an Employer's design. The essential element in Option A is that the design is complete at commencement (preferably at the tender stage). Option B relies on a bill of quantity prepared by Employer and so is more suited to the Employer's design of the project. Option C is like Option A. However, since there is a target price and therefore an incentive to complete the works for less than the target price, the Contractor has greater flexibility and motivation to develop a cost effective and appropriate design. Option D shares the same fate with Option B and is more suited for the Employer's design.

 

Option E permits maximum design flexibility. It is suited for design by either party and allows the development of the design as the works proceed. Option F is not very suitable for Contractor’s design. Itis particularly suitable for sub-contractor design and relieson specialist sub-contractors who undertake their own designs.

 

1.4. Early Start

In some projects the predominant priority is timely completion. One of the variables that may determine this is an early mobilization to site for the construction to commence. The main options provide a mechanism to manage this. If it is the desire of the Employer to have early mobilisation, the least favourable options are Options A and B. Being fixed priced contracts they require the complete finalisation of many aspects before commencement and therefore have the longest lead times.The intermediate choice is Option C and D, being target contracts they require a reasonable level of finalisation but lesser than the priced contracts and therefore have a shorter lead-time than Options A and B.

 

Options E and F provide the ideal choice for early mobilisation and start.As costs reimbursable contracts, work may commence with a lesser amount of definition and therefore the shortest lead-time.

 

1.5. Allocation of Risks and Compensation events

It is often asked: how the main options relate to the allocation of risks under the NEC3 ECC and the compensation events that may arise from these risks? The main options, apart from the price risk discussed above and the introduction of some specific compensation events to cater for certain main options (i.e., compensation events for bill of quantities), have no effect on the risk distribution of the NEC3 ECC and compensation events. The NEC3 ECC deliberately pursues a policy of common allocation of risks throughout the main options. This is to ensure consistency in the application of the core clauses and compensation events.

 

In conclusion, the appropriate choice of a Main Option by the Employer reduces the probability

 

3 | P a g e

 

more depth the working of the main options.

 

2. Examination of the Main Options

The Main Options labelled A - F may be categorised into three classes, to wit: •         Priced Contract

•     Target Contracts

•     Cost reimbursable contracts

 

We will examine these classes in the above order.

 

2.1. Priced Contracts

Priced contracts require the Contractor to tender a firm price at the tender stage. There are two priced contract options to wit: Option A priced contract with an Activity Schedule; and Option B priced Contract with bill of quantities.

 

Option A

In option A, the Employer pays the Contractor for activity completed. The activity schedule sets out a list of activities that the Contractor will need to provide the works required by the Employer. For instance, in a construction activity taking place in an area of forest growth -clearing the area will form an activity item. For each item on the schedule, the Contractor provides a lump sum quotation. The contract price is the sum of the lump sums of all the activities listed.

 

The Contractor is paid for activities that are completed by each assessment date. The amount to be paid is the amount entered in the tender against that activity. Because of these, it is important that the description of the activities is not lengthy to allow for regular cash flow to the Contactor. Theoretically, fewer compensation events should occur in Option A contracts since there is a well-defined and finalised works information supported by an appropriate lump sum amount. However, this is not always the case. Where there is compensation event, the assessment of any compensation event that is implemented will be added to the lump sum price of the relevant activity. The assessment of the Compensation events is priced using the schedule of costs components- and under NEC3 ECC, only the shorter schedule of costs components is used. The Schedule of Costs Components is a complete identification of the components of cost for which the Contractor will be reimbursed. It includes such headings such as People, Plant,Machinery, and Equipment. The Shorter Schedule of Costs Components is a simpler and less itemised version of Schedule of Costs Components.

 

Option B

Option B is a priced contract with bill of quantities. A bill of quantities is a list of work items and quantities that includes the unit of measurement and a method of measurement. The method of measurement describes the items to be included in the list and how the quantities are to be calculated. The Employer, who bears the risk of the changes in quantities contained therein, usually prepares the bill. Option B requires that the Contractor at the time of making the tender should provide rates and prices against each item included in the bill of quantities. The Contractor is paid for the actual quantity of work completed as identified on the bill of quantities. The amount is determined by the prices that were tendered against the items on the bill of quantities. The rates and prices are multiplied to the measured quantity of the work

 

4 | P a g e

 

Unlike Option A, this Option does not require any activity or work to be completed before payment. Where a compensation event occurs, the parties are to use the Schedule of Cost Components, except the Contractor and the Project Manager agree to use the bill of quantities. Option B also contains three additional compensation events (B60.4, B60.5 and B60.6) that reflect the inaccuracy that may arise in the bill of quantities and such related issues.

 

 

 

2.2. Target Contracts

In target contracts, the Contractor submits a bid that accounts for his assessed costs for doing the works, his overhead costs, profit, and any other tender issue. The amount on the bid when accepted by the Employer becomes the target price. During the construction, the Contractor is paid at Assessment dates his defined costs (costs that he has already expended) plus the fee. When the works are completed, the Employer would then assess the final Price on Work Done to Date (PWDD) and the target price. Where the PWDD is above the target price, the Contractor will be expected to pay the Employer back some of the money paid to him at a pre-agreed percentage. Where thePWDD is less than the target price, the Contractor is entitled to further payments based on a pre-agreed formula. In a target contract, the parties share the pain or the gain.

 

Central to target contracts in the NEC3 ECC,is the concept ofdisallowed costs. This ensures that the Employer does not pay for the inefficiency of the Contractor. Disallowed costs are items that will not be considered when assessing payments due under the target contracts; they are also used in the cost reimbursable contracts. They include such items as costs of correcting faulty work by the Contractor, costs of correcting defects caused by the Contractor, not complying with Works Information, costs of Plants and Materials not used to provide the works among other items.

 

There are two target contracts in the NEC3 ECC that is Option C (target contracts with an activity schedule) and Option D (target Contract with a bill of quantities).

 

Option C

Option C requires the Contractor to tender alump sum price to an activity listed in the activity schedule. The sum of all the prices constitutes the target price. The Contractor is paid at assessment dates in accordance with the activity schedule. Payment at such dates covers the Contractor’s defined costs i.e. - amounts due sub-contractors, plus amount due according to the Schedule of Cost Components, plus profit and overhead costs less disallowed costs. Changes to prices quoted by the Contractor for implemented compensation events are used to change the prices in the activity schedule. This allows the target price to be realistic and follow the changes in the works.

 

On completion, PWDD (final Price on Work Done to Date) is compared to the target price. The Contractor and the Employer in a predetermined fashion share the difference between the two amounts. Where the PWDD is greater than the target price, then the Contractor pays his share of the difference. If on the other hand the PWDD is less than the target price, the Contractor receives his share of the difference.

 

5 | P a g e

 

Option D

 

Option D follows the discourse on Option C above except that in Option D, a bill of quantities is used and the risk of the accuracy of the quantities lies with the Employer.

 

2.3. Cost reimbursable Contracts

In cost reimbursable contracts the Contractor is reimbursed all expenditures less any disallowed costs. He is also paid his quoted fee. The cost reimbursable contract can be well-managed using forecasts and audits. There are two cost reimbursable contracts in the NEC3 ECC; these are the Option E and Option F.

 

Option E

In option E the Contractor is required to tender his fee for undertaking the contract. During the construction, the Contractor is paid his defined costs (expenditure on constructing the works less any disallowed costs) plus fee. In terms of costs, compensation events assume less prominence under this option. A more costs conscious regime would require the Contractor to provide forecasts of defined costs regularly.

 

Option F

Option F is a management contract. The Contractor contracts directlywith the sub-contractors and manages them on behalf of the Employer. The Contractor is paid a fee for his work and the Employer bears the price risk of the value of the sub-contracts. The Contractor is also at liberty to indicate in the contract data that he intends to undertake some of the construction himself. The discourse above covers the critical issues relating to the Main Options under the NEC3 ECC. The resources section provides an article which considers Option C further.

 

3. Secondary Options in the NEC3 ECC

There are eighteen different secondary options in the NEC3 ECC. Although combining one of the main options to the core clauses completes a NEC 3 ECC contract, rarely in practice does a NEC3 ECC contract fail to include a selection of some of the secondary options. The reason the NEC3 ECC adopts the pick and mix approach is that some of the secondary options may result in extra costs or may not be suited to the relationship between the parties. While the traditional contracts include these options irrespective of the conditions, the NEC3 ECC offers the parties a choice. For instance, retention or performance bond will incur costs for the Contractor, which will be reflected in the bid. An Employer not requiring this option in a relationship with the Contractor could save it some costs by not choosing it. The list of secondary options includes the following:

 

 

 

• Option Xl: price adjustment for inflation • Option X2: changes in the law.

•     Option X3: multiple currencies.

• Option X4: parent company guarantee. • Option X5: sectional completion

• Option X6: bonus for early completion. • Option X7: delay damages.

•     Option X12: partnering.

 

6 | P a g e

 

•     Option X14: advanced payment to the contractor.

•     Option X15: limitation of the contractor’s liability for its design to reasonable skill and care.

•     Option X16: retention.

•     Option X17: low performance damages/low service damages. •     Option X18: limitation of liability.

•     Option X19: task order.

•     Option X20: key performance indicators.

•     Option X29: climate change (to be published in consultative

•     Option Y(UK) 2: The Housing Grants, Construction and Regeneration Act 1996 (dealing with payment and supervision).

•     Option Y (UK) 3: The Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999

 

The final secondary Option Z: is additional Conditions of contract. Most of the options are self-explanatory, below is an analysis of some of the secondary options:

 

Options X13 (performance bond) and Option X 4 (parent company guarantee):

These are alternatives and should not be used together. The NEC3 ECC provides the Works Information is to specify the form of the bond. This gives the parties maximum flexibility in structuring the requirement of the bond to meet the specific needs of the project.

 

Option X14 (advanced payment):

This option is usuallyused where the Contractor is to undertake a financially intensive activity at the start of the construction. It allows the Employer to lend money to the Contractor and be repaid at the later stages. Information on the advanced payment is to be provided in the contract Data. It includes the amount of the advanced payment, the period that the Contractor will be required to commence repayment instalments, the amount of the instalments and, if required, an advance payment bond.

 

Option X3 (multiple currencies):

This could be especially important in an international contract. It allows payment to proceed in different currencies. In the Contract data the parties are to specify the currency of the contract, the exchange rate and a list of items and activities that will be paid in a currency other than the currency of the contract.

 

Option X5 (sectional completion):

This option allows the Employer takeover sections of the work that has been completed. Where used, this option sets out separate completion dates for sections of the works.

 

Option X15 (design liability limitation):

As the name implies, places limits on the Contractor's design liability. Where Option X 15 is not part of the contract, the Contractors design must be fit for the purpose; this option reduces this liability to the limit of the application of reasonable skill and care.

 

Option X1 (price adjustment for inflation to be used with main options A - D): Option E and F are cost reimbursable and do not require adjustment for inflation. This option is used to link prices of parts of the contract to the inflation rate.

 

7 | P a g e

 

Option X16 (retention):

This allows the Employer to retain some money due to the Contractor until after the defects correction period.

 

Option X6 (bonus for early completion):

This option allows the Employer to provide incentives for the Contractor and encourage him to complete the contract early. The amount per day is to be stated in Contract Data.

 

Option X7 (delay damages):

This is a form of liquidated damages imposed on the Contractor for not meeting the completion date. The amount of delay damages is to be stated in the Contract Data. It is important that in common law jurisdictions, the damages are realistic estimates because penalties will be unenforceable.

 

The New Option X29 (Climate Change)

The NEC published the secondary Option X29 in July 2022 after a consultative version of a new secondary option on climate change was released in April same year. The aim of this option, according to the NEC, is to ‘incentivise the NEC supply chain to meet the client’s emissions and sustainability targets, and to link these into core processes of the contracts, such as early warnings, the programme and compensation events. In addition, contractors will be encouraged to propose changes to the scope that will reduce the climate-change impact of both the construction and operation of the client’s asset.’1 As NEC points out, emission reduction and sustainability are technical issues which, ideally should be taken care of within the scope of the project. Option X29 has been developed to work with the diverse types of NEC forms. So, there is a specific Option29 tailored to requirements of the ECC form. Copies of the new Optionx29 documents and the Guidance are available on Moodle.

 

Option Z:

This option is to be used where the parties intend to introduce additional conditions of contract to the NEC3 ECC. It is therefore one of the most important options as it allows the parties amend theNEC3 ECCto fit their purpose. This completesour studyof the main and secondary options provided for in the NEC3 ECC. The next topic provides an overview of the changes introduced by the NEC4 ECC.

 

 

 

4.Dispute Resolution options

 

The NEC 3 ECC provides two options for dispute resolution. These are described as Options W1 and W2. Whilst Option W1 can be used in all situations, Option W2 is designed for use on UK contracts to which the Housing Grants, Construction and Regeneration Act 1996 applies. Also note that under the NEC4 ECC, a third Option W3 has been introduced. We will say more on that next week. The parties are to indicate in the Contract Data Part I, which of the options has been chosen for the project. As we will see below, the two options have many identical clauses, the differences between the two options are that while option W1 sets out specific timescales for notifications of disputes, and category of disputes to be notified by either party, W2 allows the reference of any dispute by either party at any time. A summary of the

 

1 https://www.neccontract.com/About-NEC/News-and-Media/New-NEC-secondary-option-will-incentivise-net-zero-emissions

8 | P a g e

 

Option W1

 

1. Clause W 1.2 (1) provides that the parties are to appoint the adjudicator jointly at the commencement of the contract.

 

2. Clause W 1.2 (2) states that the Adjudicator is to act impartially and decide disputes as an independent Adjudicator and not as an Arbitrator. Without the second arm of this clause, some jurisdictions would treat the adjudication proceedings as arbitration.

 

3. Clause 1.3 (1) sets out the schedule for adjudication specifying which disputes could be referred to adjudication by the Employer and the Contractor. Generally, the Employer may not refer to adjudication an action of the Project Manager or the Supervisor, except where a Compensation Event                      quotation is deemed accepted because the Project Manager failed to respond within the timescales set out in the contract.

 

4. Clause 1.4 (5) provides that where the tribunal selected is arbitration. The details of the seat of arbitration, the law of arbitration on other related concepts are to be set out in Contract Data part I.

 

5. Clause 1.4 (6) provides that the adjudicator may not be called as a witness. Clause 1.3 (11) entitles the adjudicator to correct clerical and ambiguities within two weeks of making the decision.

 

6. Clause 1.4 (3) allowseither party to proceed to the tribunal stagewhere the adjudicator fails to notify his decision within the stipulated time. The party intending to proceed to the tribunal stage must notify the other party within four weeks after the date that the adjudicator should have made his decision known.

 

Clause 1.4 (4) stipulates that the tribunal settles the dispute referred to it and may review any decision of the adjudicator and any actions taken by the Project Manager or Supervisor. It also states that parties are not limited to the information and evidence provided during the adjudication during the arbitration proceedings.

 

Option W2

 

1. Clause W 2.1 (1) provides that the parties may refer to adjudication any dispute arising from or is in connection with the contract to adjudication at any time. This is the major difference between the two options.

 

2. Clause W 2.2 (1) and (2) has the same clause content as clauses W1 1.2 (1) and (2) discussed above (clauses relate to joint appointment of the adjudicator and impartiality of the adjudicator).

 

3. Clause W 2.3 (1) deals with notification of adjudication. It provides that party referring a dispute to adjudication is to serve a notice of adjudication. The notice is to set out a

 

9 | P a g e

 

other party and the adjudicator named in the Contract Data. The adjudicator is to inform the parties whether he will be able to decide the dispute or not within 3 days of receiving the notification. If he does not do so, either party may act as if he has resigned.

 

4. Clause W 2.3 (7) deals with assessment of costs or time and is identical to W 1.3 (7) discussed above.

 

5. Clause W 2.3 (8) specifies that the adjudicator's decision is to be notified within twenty-eight days from the referral of the dispute. It allows for a further fourteen days on the agreement of the referring party. It also allows the parties to agree to further extensions.

 

6. Clause W 2.3 (9) deals with the effect of notification of the dispute to the adjudicator and is identical to clause 1.3 (9) above.

 

 

 

7. Clause W 2.3 (11) is identical to clause 1.3(10) discussed above. Clause W 2.3 (12) is identical to 1.3 (11) discussed above. Clause 2.4 (2) has identical provisions to Clause 1.4 (2) mentioned above. Clause 2.4 (3) is identical to Clause 1.4 (4) on powers of the tribunal discussed above. Clause 2.4 (4) is identical to Clause 1.4 (5) above, which discusses arbitration, and finally Clauses 2.4 (5) and 1.4 (6) are identical in their provisions that an adjudicator may not be called as a witness at the tribunal.

 

 

 

 

References

 

1. Mitchell B, et al, Introduction to the Engineering and Construction Contract - Managing Reality - Book one, Thomas Telford publishing, 2005.

2. Broome J, The NEC Engineering and Construction Contract- A user's guide, Thomas Telford publishing, 2005.

3. Eggleston B, The NEC 3 Engineering and Construction Contract- A commentary. Blackwell Publishing Company 2006.

4. Michael Rowlinson, A practical guide to the NEC3 engineering and construction contract (2015) [Available as eBook in the RGU Library through the Reading List]

5. Copies of the NEC3 ECC contract forms (Core Clauses, Main and Secondary options are available in a folder on Moodle.

6. The NEC3 ECC Guidance Notes are also available on Moodle via the NEC3 Folder.

7. J. Mante, ‘Mutual trust and co-operation under NEC 3&4: a fresh perspective’ Const. L.J. 2018, 34(4), 231-252 (on Westlaw)

8. J. Mante, Good faith, Mutual trust, and cooperation: recent judicial insights. Construction law journal, 2022 (on Westlaw)

 

 

 

See also

9. Fraserburgh Harbour Commissioners v McLaughlin & Harvey Ltd, 2021 S.L.T. 1487 (2021)

10 | P a g e

 

CSOH 115

11.Van Oord UK Ltd v Dragados UK Ltd, 2021 WL 04533227 (2021)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

11 | P a g e

 
 
 

 

 

 

NEC 4 ECC Whats New?

 

 

 

 

 

 

Dr Joseph Mante

 

Outline Introduction

Why NEC4?

Relationship between NEC3 & NEC 4 NEC4 - Structure and Forms

Change in Terminology

Key Changes to Core clauses Key changes to the Options Conclusion

 

 

 

 

Part I

 

 

 

 

 

 

Introduction to NEC4

 

Why NEC4 ?

 

Support new approaches to procurement

 

 

 

 

Provide greater stimulus to good project management

 

 

 

 

Inspire increase use of NEC in new markets

 

 

 

 

Respond to feedback from industry

 

NEC 4: Philosophy and concepts same as NEC3

 

 

 

 

Flexibility

 

 

 

Multidisciplinary Design

Pricing

Applicability

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Clarity and simplicity

 

•      Plain English

•      Departure from traditional legal drafting •         Present tense

•      Short sentences

      No cross-referencing etc.

 

Stimulus to good management

 

Collaborative foresight

Clear allocation of responsibility Early warning procedure

Change management Programming facility

 

 

Culture Change mutual trust and cooperation

 

NEC4 : Retains Structure of NEC3

 

 

Core Clauses (9)

 

Main Options (6) – based on payment arrangements

 

Dispute Resolution Options - W1,W2 &W3 Secondary Options

Other documents : Schedule of cost components; Contract Data (Parts 1&2), Scope etc.

 

NEC4 A Revolution or an Evolution?

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Matthew Garratt

Commercial Director, Thames Tideway Tunnel project at Costain (CVB JV)

 

“Users who are familiar with NEC3 contracts will have no trouble moving to NEC4. The style, layout, terminology and key project management processes that run through in NEC contracts remain”.

 

NEC4 :Forms I

 

 

 

Service Contracts Business Case

 

 

NEC4 Engineering NEC4 Engineering

 

Professional Service Contract Professional Service Subcontract

 

NEC4 Engineering Professional Service Short Contract

 

 

 

Works Contracts –Design and Construction NEC4 Engineering and Construction Contract

NEC4 Engineering and Construction Subcontract

NEC4 Engineering and Construction Short Contract

NEC4 Engineering and Construction Short Subcontract

 

NEC4 :Forms II

 

 

 

Service Contracts – Operations NEC4 Term Service Contract

NEC4 Term Service Subcontract

NEC4 Term Service Short Contract

 

 

 

Supply Contracts – Procurement of goods& related service NEC4 Supply Contract

NEC4 Supply Short contract

 

 

 

NEC4 Framework Contract

 

NEC4 : New Forms

 

 

 

NEC4 Design Build and Operate Contract (DBOC)

For the appointment of a contractor to design, build and operate or maintain an asset for a defined period

Not DBFO

NEC4 Alliance Contract (ALC) Multi-party

Aim to fully integrate delivery team, risk and reward system Consultation form

 

 

 

NEC4 Dispute Resolution Service Contract

 

Change in Terminology

 

‘Employer’ now ‘Client’

Works Information’ (described the work being provided) now ‘Scope’ ‘He’/ ‘she’ now replaced with ‘it’ - gender neutrality

‘Risk Register’ now ‘Early warning register’ –to distinguish it from the project risk register –see Clause 11.8

Core clause 8 previously titled ‘Risks and Insurance’ now ‘Liabilities and Insurance’

Option x4 –‘Parent company guarantee’ now ‘Ultimate Holding Company Guarantee’

X12 ‘Partnering’ now ‘Multi-Party Collaboration’

 

Part II

 

 

 

 

 

 

NEC4 - Key changes to Core Clauses

 

Key Changes to Core Clause 1

 

 

Clause 10 now has two sub-clauses emphasising the two separate but related duties of the parties, the

Project Manager(PM) and the Supervisor

 

A corrupt act -

This is dealt with under Clauses 11(2) (5), 18 and 91(8) of the NEC4. A corrupt act is defined and constitute a basis for

termination. Contractor is to include equivalent provisions on corruption into subcontracts

Rationale for change – to keep abreast with legislative changes ( Bribery Act,2010) /demands and avoid the use of Z-clauses

 

Key Changes to Core Clause 1

 

Clause 13 Communication

Different forms of communication (instruction, submission, proposal, instruction, acceptance, reply etc.) to be

communicated in a form that can be read, copied and recorded cl. 13.1

 

Communication system –

Rules on using communication system – a communication has an effect when it is communicated through the agreed system

possibility of using electronic communication, provided this is specified in scope – cl.13.2

 

Parties encouraged to track communications.

 

Key Changes to Core Clauses 1&2 Contractor’s Proposal – Clause 16

The Contractor may proposed a change to the Scope which may reduce cost

This change implies that both parties have the opportunity to propose improvement to the project scope

 

Transfer of benefits(Assignment) cl.28

Right to transfer benefits of the contract to a third party stated in Clause 28

Exercise of the right subject only to the condition the beneficiary must intend to act in the spirit of mutual trust and co-operation

Rationale – Client demand and avoiding use of z-clauses

Disclosure - Confidentiality and Publicity cl.29

Restriction on disclosure of project information – cl. 29.1 of NEC4

Contractor to publicise Works only with Client’s agreement – cl.29.2

 

Key Changes to Core Clause 3

 

 

Programme

A gap in NEC3 regarding what happens when the PM fails to notify the Contractor of its acceptance or otherwise of the programme within 2 weeks of receipt

Clause 31.3 – submitted programme to be treated as ‘accepted’ where the PM fails to notify acceptance or non acceptance of a programme and also fail to respond to a notification of the failure.

Acceleration-

Clause 36 – note change here in regard to who may propose acceleration ; under NEC3 PM, under NEC4 either Contractor or PM may propose acceleration.

See connection with clause16 on value engineering. Instruction to start/stop cl.34.1

 

Key Changes to Core Clause 4

 

 

Quality Management System

 

 

 

complies with requirements in the Scope – clause 40

Contractor must operate a quality management system (QMS) which

 

 

 

 

plan – to be provided for acceptance whether demanded in the Scope or no

Note the two elements to the QMS – quality policy statement and a quality t

 

 

 

 

Contractor to correct it. What if the contractor fails to comply with the PM’s

Failure to comply with quality plan ,not a compensation event; PM to instruct instruction to correct?

 

 

see Clause 11.2(15)

Contractor’s responsibility for quality is part of its duty to Provide the Work –
 

Key Changes to Core Clause 5 Payment Clause 50

Application for payment by Contractor now required for periodic assessment. See clause 50.2&3

No application by assessment date, PM to assess amount due as the ‘same, or lower than, the previous assessment, and the Contractor will

not get any further payment’ - see clause 50.4.

Payment due to Client to be assessed by the PM and payment certified

Approach previously used under the short contract (NEC3)– now applicable across all contracts

 

Clause 51.3 -Interest on a corrected amount due in a later certificate note the addition of a third reason

 

Key Changes to Core Clause 5 Assessing the amount due Clause 50.9 (new)

Sub-clause found in Main Options C, D, E and F

Assessment/ periodic finalising of defined cost – procedure:

The contractor notifies the PM when a part of a Defined cost is finalised Makes available for inspection records confirming correct assessment

PM review record made available within 13 weeks of the notification

PM has three options (i) Accept that part of Defined Cost as correct; (ii) notifies the contractor that further records needed; or (iii) notifies the contractor of errors in its assessment

Contractor response within 4 weeks of PM’s notice

PM reviews records provided, accept cost as correct or notify Contractor of correct assessment

Failure by PM to respond as per clause 50.9, contractor’s assessment treated as correct

 

Key Changes to Core Clause 5 Final Assessment Clause 53 (new)

 

 

 

Provisions aim at getting parties to reach a final amount

 

 

Project Manager to issue a final assessment of payment due to the contractor within 4 weeks of the issue of the Defect Certificate or 13 weeks of termination certificate

 

 

Final Assessment to be challenged within four weeks or become final

 

 

NOTE: In Term Service contracts, an option is included to bring annual finality to payment

benefits – closure/finality to transaction; post-project dispute reduction.

 

Key Changes to Core Clause 6

 

 

 

 

Additional Compensation Events

NEC4 allows other compensation events to be added by the Client via the Contract Data – cl.60(1)(21)

Benefit – no need for a z-clause to alter the risk profile of the contract - provision made under Contract Data Part One.(para 6 on Compensation Events)

New compensation event – cost of preparation of quotations for proposed instruction which are rejected by the PM – Clause 60(1)(20)

 

Key Changes to Core Clause 6

 

 

Proposed Instructions Clause 65

Deals with a situation where the PM is considering issuing an instruction (e.g. to change Scope –clause 60.1; considering a

proposal from the contractor under clause 16.2) but want to know the effect of such an action on time and cost first

Timescales to be indicated

Contractor not to put the proposed instruction into effect Three possible responses from PM:

Requirement for a revised quotation Acceptance of quotation

Rejection – decision not to proceed

 

Key Changes to Core Clauses 7&8

 

 

The Contractor’s use of materials Clause 74

The contractor now has a right to use material provided by the Client only to Provide the Works. The contractor may make this right available to a Subcontractor

Liabilities and Insurance Clause 80

Note the minor changes in expression in clause 80 – e.g. the word ‘wear’ removed from the clause

Provision in NEC3,clause 81: ‘…the risks which are not carried by the Employer are carried by the Contractor’ has been replaced with a relatively elaborate outline of liabilities –

Consequence for removal of ‘wear’ from Clause 80?

Indemnity clause is now ‘recovery of cost ‘clause’ – cl.82

 

Key Changes to Core Clause 9

 

 

Termination clause 90

Under NEC3, the Employer could terminate as a matter of convenience – this was part of the core clause 9 – clause

90(2).

Under NEC4, this provision has been made a Secondary Option – Option X11

Client may now terminate if the Contractor engages in a Corrupt Act - clause 91.8

It was optional under the NEC3 Professional Service Contract. Now made Optional under all relevant NEC4 Contracts.

 

Part III

 

 

 

 

 

 

NEC4 - Key changes to the Options

 

Changes to the Options - Main & Secondary

 

 

The number of NEC3 Main Options remain unchanged

 

 

 

Dispute Resolution Options now increased to three.

Option W3 – used when a Dispute Avoidance Board is the method of dispute resolution and the HGCRA (as amended) not applicable

 

Secondary Options under NEC3 – X1-X7,X12 – X18,X20, Y(UK)1, Y(UK)2, Y(UK)3, Z

 

 

 

Options X8 –X11 and X19 were not used under NEC3 ECC

 

 

 

NEC4 has rationalised the numbering by filling in the gaps with new Options, only X19 remain omitted

 

Changes to Secondary Option Clauses

 

 

 

Option X8 – Undertakings to the Client or Others

Option X9 – Transfer of Rights Option

Option X10 – Information Modelling

Option X11 – Termination by the

 

Client

Option X21 – Whole Life

Option X22 – Early Contractor Involvement.

Option X29 Climate Change

 

Ultimate Holding Company Guarantee (Option X4)

 

 

 

Ultimate Holding Company (UHC) Guarantee is to be by Contractor to Client by Contract Date or within thereafter

 

provided 4 weeks

 

 

Failing this, PM to notify default under clause 91.2 (R.12). If guarantee not provided within 4 weeks thereafter, Client may

terminate

 

 

New sub-clause (Option X4.2) addresses situations difficult for UHC guarantee to be obtained – an

guarantee by another subsidiary of UHC acceptable

 

where it is alternative

 

Undertakings to the Client and Others/third parties Collateral warranties (Option X8)

 

A new Secondary Option on collateral warranties.

Contractor provides a separate undertaking to Others as indicated in the Contract Data

Where work subcontracted, Contractor obtains subcontractor undertaking to third parties or to the Client.

Time frame for the signing of collateral warranties provided - three weeks

Form of the warranty to be included in the scope

 

 

Collateral warranties alternative under the 1999

 

still in use in spite Contracts (Rights of

 

of the statutory Third Parties) Act

 

Transfer of Rights - Option X9

 

 

The Client is entitled to /‘owns’ the Contractor’s right over material prepared for the design of the Works

unless stated otherwise in the Scope

 

Documents transferring such rights are to be made available to the Client by the Contractor.

 

Equivalent rights of the Subcontractor over materials prepared by the Subcontractor to be transferred to the

Client through the agency of the Contractor

 

See also cl.22.1 - on Client’s right to use contractor design and materials prepared by sub-contractor

 

Information Modelling (BIM) - Option X10

 

 

Option X10 incorporates clauses supporting the implementation of BIM

 

The Client provides the Information Model – the electronic database integrating project information from Client and other

providers as per the Information Model requirement

 

Early warning obligation on Contractor and PM regarding creation of Information Model – Cl.X10.3

 

Contractor to provide an Information Execution Plan* , which is to be accepted by the PM

 

Information Modelling (BIM) - Option X10

 

 

Information Model Requirement :- Requirements for creating or changing the Information Model is to be identified in the

Scope.

 

The Contractor provides the Project Information (PI).

PI is used to create or change the Information Model and the Information Execution Plan .

 

Plan must satisfied the BIM requirement set out by the Client.

This Option addresses issues regarding use/ownership and liability of the parties under the BIM arrangement

 

Information Modelling (BIM) - Option X10

 

 

Client liable for faults and errors in

Information Model other than a Defect in the Project Information

information provided by Information Providers other than the Contractor

 

Contractor only liable for fault and error in the Information Model if it fails to provide the information with skills and care

normally used by professionals providing similar information.

 

Contractor to provide insurance for claims under this provision

Alteration of Information Execution Plan, a compensation Event

 

Termination for Convenience Option X11

 

 

 

 

The provision was a core term under clause 90.2 of the ECC

 

It was not liked by many contractors due to the discretion it offered Clients to simply walk away from

contracts

 

The approach under the NEC3 Professional Service Contract now replicated throughout all relevant forms

 

Multiparty Collaboration Option X12

 

 

Formerly referred to as ‘Partnering’.

Option X12.2(1) at the heart of Option X12:

 

 

 

The partners collaborate with each other to achieve

the objectives of every Partner stated in the Schedu e of

Par ners’

thetPromoter's objective stated in the Contract Datal and Phrase ‘work together’ replaced with ‘collaborate’.

 

Contract data) sets the objectives of the parties

decisions on behalf of the Partners

The ‘Client’ under Op ion X12 now replaced with

The Core Group expressly defined ’ as ‘…Partners selected to take ‘Promoter’(under thetECC, the Client will likely be the Promoter) The Promoter, also a Partner (Option X12.1) (named in the

 

 

Contractor’s Design Option X15

 

 

Formerly – ‘Limitation of the Contractor’s liability for his design to reasonable skill and care’

 

Still focused on limitation of design liability

Standard of liability – ‘reasonable skill and care’ replaced by ‘ the skill and care normally used by

professionals designing works similar to the works’ – Option X15.1

 

Does this make any difference?

 

Contractor’s Design Option X15

 

 

Three additional sub-clauses

Intellectual Property - Contractor permitted to use materials provided by it unless

 

Ownership transferred to Client Scope states otherwise

Note core clause 74(1)

 

 

Retention of documents clause - Contractor retains copies of materials used for the design for the period of retention

Insurance cover for breach of the skill and care obligation.

 

Retention Option X16

 

 

 

 

 

Option X16(3) :

 

 

Note the new provision allowing the Contractor to provide a retention bond by a bank or an insurer instead of retention monies

being held

 

 

 

Monies retained prior to the acceptance of the Retention bond by the PM to be paid to the Contract in the next assessment

 

Limitation of Liability Option X18

 

Option provides four different types of liability caps: Client’s direct or inconsequential loss

Loss of or damage to the Client's property Defects due to Contractor’s design

Total liability cap - for all matters in terms of both time and money, except the excluded matters (loss of damage to Client’s property, delay

damages(Option X7), low performance damages (Option 17) and Contractor’s share if Option C or D applies).

 

Option X18.1 requires that each limit to the Contractor’s liability be stated in the Contract Data. If this is not done, no limit will apply to that entry.

 

Whole Life cost Option X21

 

This Option incentivises the supplier to put forward proposals which reduces the cost of operating and maintaining the asset.

 

With this Option the Contractor may propose a change to the Scope if this will reduce the cost of operating and maintaining the asset

 

Detail quotation regarding how cost reduction is to be achieved required.

 

Need for consultation before instruction for quotation

If quotation rejected, PM cannot subsequently change Scope to reflect changes previously proposed by Contractor

 

Early Contractor Involvement Option X22

 

 

Clauses first published in 2015 now included as new Secondary Option – Option X22

 

To be used with Main Options C and E

Contractor appointed early to contribute to design

Benefits – enhances ‘buildability’ (avoiding situations where construction considerations are not taken into account at an

early stage) and collaboration – provide opportunity for innovation and elimination of problems and possible risks.

 

Early Contractor Involvement Option X22

 

 

Contractor to provide detailed forecast of the total Defined Cost and design proposals

 

 

 

 

Contractor receives what is referred to as a budget incentive at the end of the works if the Project Cost is

less than the Budget – see Option X22.7

 

 

 

 

‘Budget’ and ‘Project Cost’ defined under X22.1(1)&(2)

 

Climate Change Option X29

 

A consultative version about to launch Aim of this option is to:

incentivise the NEC supply chain to meet the client’s emissions and sustainability targets

To link incentives to core processes of the contracts, such as early warnings, the programme and compensation events.

Contractors will be encouraged to propose changes to the scope that will reduce the climate-change impact of both the construction and operation of the client’s asset’

 

Dispute Resolution Options

 

Now there are three DR Options :

Option W1 – Used when Adjudication is the main method of DR and the HGCRA (as amended) does not apply

 

 

 

Option W2 - Used when Adjudication is the main method of DR and the HGCRA (as amended) applies

 

 

 

Option W3 – Used when Dispute Avoidance Board is the main method of DR and the HGCRA (as amended) does not

apply

 

Consensual dispute resolution

 

A major loophole in the NEC3 Dispute edifice now fixed

NEC4 introduces a consensual/mandatory four-week period of dispute resolution/negotiation

 

Both Options W1 and W2 now have provisions which allow senior representatives of the parties to attempt

an amicable resolution of disputes

mandatory for Option W1, consensual for Option W2

Benefit - to enhance likelihood of negotiated settlement and maintain collaboration

 

Dispute Resolution Option W3

 

Dispute Avoidance Board (DAB)

Constitution - one or three members; where three, third person to be jointly appointed

To be set up at the starting date DAB to act impartially

DAB to visit project site at intervals stated in contract data Agenda visits proposed by parties, decided by DAB

No liability clause – exception – acting in bad faith

Roles of DAB

Help parties resolve potential disputes

 

Dispute Avoidance Board (DAB) - Procedure

 

Potential dispute to be notified and referred to DAB between two to four weeks after notification of issue to the other party and PM

Option W3(2)(4) set out materials to be made available to DAB Visit on receipt of referral mandatory?

DAB visits site and inspect the Works

Reviews all potential disputes ‘and helps the parties settle them without the need for the dispute to be formally referred

Prepares notes of the visit

Unless dispute resolved by the end of visit, provide a recommendation for resolving it?

Board to take initiative

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

The End

 

Topic 9: Topical Issues in NEC3&4 ECC

 

 

 

 

Topic Preview

 

This topic continues our examination of the NEC3 Engineering and Construction Contract, and to a very limited extent, NEC4. Below are the issues examined in this lecture notes:

•     The Engineering and Construction (NEC3 ECC)- Contract Documents

 

•     Control of Time and Quality in the NEC3 ECC

 

•     Risks and Compensation Events

 

•     Termination and Dispute Resolution

 

•     Criticisms of the NEC3 ECC and the outlook for the future.

 

•     Brief reflection on NEC4

 

 

 

Topic Content

 

 

 

I.     NEC3 ECC Contract Documents

 

Documents within an NEC3 ECC contract should be drafted to compliment and interact with each other. The typical sets of documents that form an NEC3 ECC contract include:

•     Form of contract/Articles of agreement such as Core clauses, Main Option, Secondary Options, and form of tender, letter of acceptance.

 

•     Contract Data which is divided into two parts, Part 1 is prepared by the Employer and Part II is prepared by the contractor.

 

•     Pricing document such as Activity Schedule, Bill of quantities, Schedule of Cost Component.

 

•     Works Information and

 

•     Site Information.

 

At the heart of the list of NEC3 ECC contract documents outlined above, is the Works Information document. It holds the key to essential terms in the NEC3 ECC and is referred to over 30 times in different clauses of the NEC3 ECC. Unlike the FIDIC form, an NEC3 ECC contract does not expressly provide for a hierarchy of documents. It has been argued that there is no hierarchy of contract documents in NEC3 ECC contracts except that, in a Contractor designed contract, the Works Information provided by the Employer shall take precedence over the Contractor's proposals.

 

This section will discuss the following three contract documents that form part of the NEC3 ECC:

• The Works Information • The Site Information

•     The Contract Data

 

Works Information

The Works Information (now known as ‘Scope’ under NEC4) is defined in Clause 11. 2 (19) of the NEC3 ECC as '... Information which specifies and describes the works and states any constraints on how the Contractor is to provide the works’. The NEC3 ECC Works Information is more than a mere specification document. Majority of disputes arising under the NEC3 ECC relates to the Works Information document and the management of it. For instance, the Contractor's principal obligation in Clause 20.1 is dependent on the Works Information- thus the Contractor is to provide the works in accordance with the Works Information.

 

Another example is Defect. Defects are defined in the NEC3 ECC as those parts of the works that are not in accordance with the Works Information. Although comprising of many important items, the Works Information document is not to contain commercial terms or contractual information, these are to be found in the Contract Data Part One of NEC3 ECC.

 

Structure and Content of the Works Information documents

The documents forming the Works Information cover a wide array of subjects. A typical list could include:

1. General description of the works and management of works.

 

2. Works Specification

 

3. Employer's requirements for Contractor designed work, where necessary

 

4. Safety, health, and welfare requirements

 

5. Reinforcement schedules and drawings

 

Some of the listed items above and others are examined further below.

 

A general description of the whole works (Clause 20.1) of NEC3 ECC

 

This should include the Employer's objectives, followed by a detailed description of the scope of the works. This information is to be contained in the Works Information document even if it has been given elsewhere. Another way to deal with this is to incorporate the description by reference to another document which with information on the scope of work. While this alternative meets the legal criteria, it is notrecommended andthebetter option is toreproduce itin the Works Information document, ensuring that the (reproduced) description meets all the requirements of the ECC 3. The description of the whole works should also include the Contractor designed elements of the works.

 

Management of the works

This should cover administrative aspects like site progress meetings, industrial relations, and the place where accounts and records are to be kept among other things.

 

Work to be done by the completion date (Clause 11.2(2))

The Employer is to define what should be achieved and what deliverables are needed for completion to have occurred. The default position where the Employer fails to do this is that completion will be deemed to be when the Contractor has done all that is necessary for the Employer to use the works and for others to do their work.1

 

Health and Safety requirement (Clause 27.4)

There is no need to recite any statutory provisions under this section. The NEC3 ECC already provides that the Contractor is required to adhere to the law. This section should be used to specify additional health and safety requirements for the site.

 

Subcontracting requirements

The Works Information should state whether any part of the construction of the works can be subcontracted. Nominated subcontractors are not a feature of the NEC3 ECC. This section of the Works Information outlines the basic qualification of sub-contractors and required criteria for subcontracting.

 

Contractors Design (Clause 21.1)

In the NEC3 ECC, where the Employer requires the Contractor to design part or all the works, the Employer is to state this in the Works Information document. Also, to be included are the particulars of the design to be submitted to the Project Manager and the timescale and procedure for submission. The NEC3 ECC allows the Employer to copy or use the Contractor's design for any purposes connected with construction, the use or demolition of the works, unless otherwise stated in the Works Information and for any other purposes stated in the Works Information.The Works Information should therefore contain the limits to the use of the Contractor's design or in the alternative contain any other additional purposes that it may be used for.

 

 

1 See the decision in RWE npower Renewables Ltd v JN Bentley Ltd [2014] EWCA Civ 150

 

Works by the Employer and/ or others

The Works information is to provide information on aspects of the works to be constructed by the Employer and in a multi-contracting environment, the part of the works to be carried out by other Contractors.

 

Sharing the Working Areas (Clause 25.1)

The Works information should provide details of others who will be working at the site, the duration of their period of work on site and the working areas or part of working areas they will occupy. The other self-explanatory items that are also covered by the Works Information document include:

(i)          Details on what should be shown on the Contractor's Programme

 

(ii)          Details on the provision of facilities and services at the site

 

(iii)         Details on the use of Parts of the works by the Employer before take over, where this is intended.

 

(iv)         Tests and Inspections to be carried out by the Supervisor as part of quality control of the works.

 

(v)          Accounts and records to be kept by the parties.

 

(vi)         Performance Bond or Parent Company Guarantee, and issues related to Advanced Payment depending on the choice of Secondary Options.

 

(vii)        Details on marking Equipment, Materials and Plants. Details of Equipment and Materials including samples to be tested/inspected before being allowed on site.

 

(viii)       Facilities for the test and inspection.

 

(ix)         Title to materials from excavation and demolition.

 

 

 

Locating the Works Information document

The NEC3 ECC provides that the Works Information is the document(s), which the Contract Data (Part I- that is provided by the Employer) states that it is. The information contained in the Works Information may be changed as provided in the NEC3 ECC. A change usually triggers a Compensation Event.

 

In conclusion, in drafting the Works Information, the parties should bear in mind the spirit and principle of the NEC3 ECC form. It should therefore be clear, unambiguous, andwritten in plainEnglish. Particular care should be takento avoid the so-called classic statements i.e., 'the works is complete based on the Engineer’s opinion when he believes or considers that the work is complete'. This

 

is important otherwise the Works Information may contradict the standard terms of the NEC3 ECC.

 

The Site Information

The Site Information is defined as 'information, which describes the Site and its Surroundings' (Clause 11.2 (16)). The Site is defined as the area within the boundaries stated by the Contract Data to be the site. The Site Information will cover items such existing buildings, existing mains services, access to site and description of the physical conditions.

 

The Site Information is contained in documents that the Contract Data states that it is in. An example of documents that could form part of the 'Site Information' is geological surveys of the site. The Site information has particular significance with respect to Compensation Events for physical conditions (60.1 (12)). The Contractor is to consider the Site Information in assessing the risk under the contract (Clause 60.2). Also, where there is inconsistency in the Site Information, the Contractor is assumed to have taken account of the physical conditions most favourable to doing the work (Clause 60.3).

 

The Contract Data

The Contract Data contains commercial and contractual information including specific information relating to the contract. It serves the purpose of the Appendix to Tender in traditional standard forms.

 

- Part I of the Contract Data is to be provided by the Employer initially to all the contractors submitting a tender.

 

- Part II of the Contract Data is to be filled by Contractor and returned with the bid. It contains specific details relating to the Contractor's company and the tender.

 

The model forms incorporated within the NEC3 ECC contains all the necessary entries. Some of the information to be found in the Contract Data (Part I) include the following:

•     Choice of main option

 

•     Choice of Secondary Options (this would include Options Z clauses adding to or amending the conditions of contract)

 

•     Decision to include a programme with the tender and the frequency of future programmes

 

•     Extension of payment periods after assessment date (if required)

 

•     Insurance and parties’ responsibilities regarding insurance

 

•     Name and address of the Employer, Project manager and Supervisor. The name and address of the Adjudicator is included in the model forms. It is important that this isdone with the agreement of the Contractor as provided for within the NEC3 ECC conditions.

 

•     Identification of the documents forming the Works Information. Sample wording: 'The Works Information is in the document titled the 'Works Information' and all documents referred to in it'.

 

•     The specification of the Site Information and information identifying the site and its boundaries.

 

•     The language of the Contract, the Law of the Contract, and the choice of tribunal (arbitration or courts)

 

•     The currency of payment and the period and frequency of assessment dates.

 

•     Specification varying the length of time for replying to communications (if required).

 

These are some of the items in the Contract Data.

 

Part II of the Contract Data is filled by the Contractor and should contain the following information amongst others:

•     The name address of the Contractor

 

•     The Contractor's fee percentage

 

•     The Working Areas

 

•     The Key People who will be participating in the project - names, job responsibilities in the project, qualification, and experience.

 

•     The location of the documents containing the Contractor's design (where required)

 

•     The location of the documents containing the programme (where required at the tender stage)

 

•     Depending on the Employer's choice of main options, the activity schedule, and entries for the bill of quantities.

 

•     The Schedule of Cost Components (SCC): It is important for the Contractor to understand the contractual significance of the SCC. There are two versions of this document namely, Schedule of Cost Components (SCC) and the Shorter Schedule of Costs Components (SSC). These schedules provide

 

a finite list of cost items for which the Contractor will be directly reimbursed, and which are admissible for assessment of changes to price as a result of a compensation event. Any other item not on these schedules is deemed covered by the Contractor's fee.

 

In options A and B (refer to your lecture notes on Topic 7), the SSCC is used only for assessing compensation events. Under option B, the Project Manager and the Contractor may agree to use the bill of quantities instead of the SSCC.

 

In options C, D and E the SCC is used during assessment to calculate the amounts due to the Contractor for the work completed. In options C and D, the prices on the activity schedule and the bill of quantities are relevant only to the extent of providing the target price at completion and taking account of changes during compensation events to ensure that the target price remains realistic. To make SCC fully effective, the Contractor is required to fill out the required information in the schedule to Part II of the Contract Data.

 

The Works Information document, Site Information document and the Contract Data are the important contractual documents forming the NEC3 ECC along with the standard terms contained in the core clauses, main and secondary options. The next section deals with two matters paramount in most Employers’ minds when procuring construction projects i.e., control of time and quality.

 

II. Control of Time and Quality in the NEC3 ECC

The NEC3 ECC from inception aligns the importance of time and quality to the achievement of the objectives of any project. The NEC3 ECC has been drafted specifically togivethe Employer greater control overthesetwoissues.Thissection will examine how these provisions operate.

 

Time

Time is dealt with in the NEC3 ECC primarily under Clause 3. Other clauses impacting on time also exist under other sections of the core clauses and Secondary Option. These other clauses include the following:

i.       Contract date defined in Clause 11.2 (4). This is when the contract came into existence and should be found in the Form of contract/Articles of agreement (letter of acceptance, letter of award etc.)

 

ii.       Starting Date – This is to be identified in the Contract Data Part 1, this refers to the date when the Contractor starts work. It incorporates off-site work like design; it is not necessarily the date that work commences on site.

 

iii.      Access Date - this is also to be identified in the Contract Data Part I. This refers to the date the Contractor is allowed to start work on the site. Before this date work may not commence on site.

 

iv.      Completion is defined in Clause 11.2 (3). This is the date that the Contractor has done all the work, which the Works Information states is required by Completion Date, and has corrected Defects, which could have prevented the Employer from using the works.

 

v.       Completion Date defined in Clause 11.2 (3). This is the date stated in the Contract Data as the Completion Date unless changed later in accordance with the contract.

 

vi.      Key Date is defined in Clause 11.2 (9). This is the date by which work on the project is to meet a specific condition (milestone) stated in the Contract Data to be met by that date exceptlater changed in accordance with the Contract.

vii.     Sectional Completion (Secondary Option X 5) - this is the option to be incorporated by the Employer where he intends sectional completion of the project and take over upon completion of each section.

 

viii.    Secondary Option X7, this is the option to be incorporated by the Employer where he intends to recover damages for failure to complete on time.

 

Programme

The main feature of Clause 3 of NEC3 ECC Contract is the programme. It is the main time management tool in the NEC3 ECC. The NEC3 ECC relies on the existence of an Accepted Programme (which is defined by the NEC3 ECC as the latest programme accepted by the Project Manager) to track and manage the progress of the works and provides sanctions where the Contractor fails to submit an Accepted Programme. The programme is best understood from the requirements the NEC3 ECC places on its content. It is important to note that the NEC3 ECC programme is not just simple programme in a bar/Gantt chart; it is detailed and comprehensive.

 

Contents of the Programme

Clause 31.2 provides that each programme submitted for acceptance must include the following information:

•     Dates: This would include starting date, access date, key dates, planned completion, completion date, dates that the contractor intends to meet the key dates and completion. Dates the Contractor will require access to parts of the site not made available on the access date, dates of acceptances, the date(s) plant, and materials to be provided by the Employer is expected, and date when information required from others will be available.

 

•     Order and timing of the operations that the Contractor plans to do e.g., design and manufacturing of parts to be done off-site

 

•     The order and timing of the works of the Employer and Others as last agreed with the Contractor or stated in the Works Information.

 

•     A statement of how the Contractor plans to do his work, identifying the principal equipment and other resources he intends to use.

 

•     Provisions for float, time risk allowances, health and safety requirements and procedures set out in the contract.

 

•     Any other information that the Works Information requires to be shown on the programme.

 

In addition to the above, if the programme being submitted is not the first programme i.e., revised programme, the following additional information should be provided:

 

•     Actual progress achieved on each operation and its effect on the timing of the remaining work.

 

•     The effects of implemented compensation events and of notified early warning events.

 

•     Details on plans to deal with the time element of correcting notified defects

 

•     Any other changes that the Contractor intends to make to the Accepted programme.

Where managed in accordance with contract, the programme is a comprehensive tool for the Project Manager to manage time in the project. It also helps the Project Manager and the Contractor in assessing the time effects of compensation events. Unlike other standard forms, the NEC3 ECC backs up the importance of its programme with an acceptance regime and sanctions for non- submission.

 

Acceptance of the Programme and Sanctions for non-submission

The Project Manager may or may not accept the first and subsequent programmes submitted by the Contractor. Four reasons for non-acceptance are set out in Clause 31.3 namely the contractor’s plan (i) is not practicable; (ii) does not meet the contract requirements;(iii) does not represent the Contractor’s plans realistically or (iv) does not comply with the Works Information.

 

The Project Manager has two weeks from the date of submission of the proposed programme toreply to theContractor either accepting theprogramme orproviding reasons for not accepting the programme. Failure to meet this timescale is a compensation event (failure to reply to a communication within time), entitling the Contractor to assessment for extra time and additional money on the project.

 

The sanctions on the Contractor for non-submission of an Accepted Programme are also onerous. Clause 50.3 empowers the Project Manger to retain one quarter of the price for the 'Work Done till Date' where the Contractor fails to submit a

 

firstprogramme showingthe informationrequired. Clause64.2 also empowers the Project Manager to assess a Compensation Event independent of the Contractor's input if there is no accepted programme.

The next item to consider is quality management under the NEC3 ECC.

 

Quality

The quality framework of the NEC3 ECC is built on the principle that people and processes achieve quality. The NEC3 ECC builds provisions to ensure that both People and Processes work to ensure the delivery of quality projects. We will examine the provisions of quality under the heading of People and Processes.

 

People

Quality management is embedded in roles and responsibilities of the key players in the NEC3 ECC contract. The Contractor has the duty to provide the works to meet the requirements of the Works Information document (including the quality requirement for the works). This requirement extends to the design responsibilities assigned to the Contractor by the Works Information document. The Contractor also has the duty of rectifying all defects including those that he may not have been notified of by the Supervisor.

 

The Contractor is required to appoint quality 'Key Persons' for the key positions connected to the contract. The NEC3 ECC ensures that some thought and effort is spent in providing quality key personnel by requiring that the qualification and experience of the Key Persons being proposed for appointment be specified in Part II of the Contract Data. The requirement of procuring quality human resources extends to the Contractor proposing subcontractors to the Project Manager for approval.

 

The Project Manager plays an important role in ensuring quality assurance. The Project Manager is expected to assess, accept, or refuse to accept the Key Persons and sub-contractors proposed by the contractor. It is the role of the Project Manager to accept or refuse the programme that contains the section on how the contractor intends to do its work. This section sets out important resources that impact directly on quality. The other duties of the Project Manager relating to quality include:

i.       Arranging for the Employer to give access to the Contractor for the purposes of correcting a Defect after the Employer’s 'takeover' of the Project.

 

ii.       Accepting or refusing the Contractor's design.

 

iii.      Giving instructions to the Contractor on quality matters where necessary.

 

iv.       Arranging to have defects corrected by others, where necessary; and

 

v.       Approving or refusing a Contractor’s proposal to circumvent a defect by changing the Works Information (where this is made) or to propose changes of the Works Information to the Contractor in order to avoid correcting a Defect.

 

vi.      Accepting defects

 

The Supervisor is the Employer's personnel directly involved with quality management. The Supervisor is to:

i.       conduct or be present at the different test/inspection provided for by the Works Information document.

 

ii.       instruct the Contractor to search for defects and /or carry out further tests and inspection not included in the Works Information document.

 

iii.      notify the Contractor of any defects that are found and issue a Defects certificate.

 

The Employer also has role in quality assurance:

i.       The Employer is obligated to provide facilities, materials and samples for tests and inspections as specified by the Works Information document.

 

ii.       It is the Employer's duty to give access to the Contractor to correct Defects after his takeover of the project.

 

Processes

The NEC3 ECC processes impacting on quality assurance include the following:

 

The Early Warning procedure contained in Clause 16.1 among other things places on the Project Manager and the Contractor the duty to inform each other as soon as they have notice of any matter that may affect performance (quality). Failure to adhere to this may result in reduced Compensation Event assessment for the Contractor where it is adjudged that he failed to provide an early warning of such incident. For the Employer, it may result in higher expenditure to achieve the desired quality.

 

Clause 3.12 provides that the Programme should contain a statement of how the Contractor plans to do his work identifying the principal equipment and resources he intends to use. This section can be used to ensure that the plans and indicated resources would deliver a quality project. The NEC3 ECC provides specific procedures for testingand inspection. Clause 40 provides for tests and inspections that are required by the applicable Law and the Works Information document. It is important that the Works Information sets out the tests and inspections required; the timing for the tests, the party to undertake the tests, the area of the Works Area to be used for the Tests, and the criteria for passing the tests.

 

Clause 40.2 places on the Contractor and Employer the duty to make available materials, facilitiesandsamplesfortests and inspections as provided by theWorks Information.

 

Clause 40.3: ensures that the Supervisor notifies the Contractor and the Project Managerbeforecarrying outthe required testsandalsonotifiesthem oftheresults ofthe tests carried out.Thesamenotification obligation extendsto the Contractor, where the Contractor is carrying out the tests.

 

Clauses 40.4 and 40.6 are concerned with repeat tests/inspections and their costs respectively.

Clause 41.1 provides for a test prior to acceptance to site of plant and material specified in the Works Information for such test and inspection. The Defect correction procedure is central to quality assurance. Defect is defined in Clause 11.2 (5) as part of the works not in accordance with the Works Information or is not in accordance with the applicable law or the Contractor's design, which was accepted by the Employer.

 

Clause 42.1 gives the Supervisor the powers to order the Contractor to search for Defects; he is to give reasons for such instructions. Clause 42.2 provides that the Supervisor and the Contractor are to notify each other of the defects they find before the Defect Date. Clause 43.1 imposes on the Contractor the responsibility to correctall Defects andto correct allnotifiedDefects before the endof the Defect Correction period.

 

Clause 43.3: the Supervisor is to issue the Defects Certificate at the later of the Defect Date and the end of the last Defect Correction period (Defect Correction Period is defined as the time the Contractor has to correct notified defects existing or arising after completion. The specification of this period is to be set out in the Contract Data and is typically 52 days). The Defect Certificate unlike similar certificates under other standard forms is defined in Clause 11.2 (6) as a list of Defects that the Supervisor has notified before the defects Date and which the Contractor has not corrected and if there is no such defect, a statement that there is none.

The issuance of the Defects certificate does not affect the Employer’s right in respect of a Defect, which the Supervisor has not found or notified. The purpose of the Defects certificate is to put on record the state of the project with regards to notified defects.

 

Anotherimportant legal aspectis the enforcement ofthe quality criteria. The NEC3 ECC creates four legal avenues for the enforcement of compliance with the quality requirements of the contract, these include:

i.       Removal of the Contractor's Employees: The Project Manager is given the authority to instruct the Contractor to remove any employee from the site and to state the reason for doing so (Clause 24.2). One commonreasonforinstructing the removal ofemployees is low standard of work and non-conformance to policy.

 

ii.       Correction of Defects by Others: Clause 45.1 entitles the Employer to correct Defects identified in the project using other contractors where the original Contractor fails to correct them within the prescribed period. The cost of such correction is then charged to the original Contractor. This is most effective in contracts where the retention arrangement has been chosen as a Secondary Option.

 

iii.      Reduction of Contract price and low performance damages: Clause 44 empowers the Project Manager to accept a Defect that has not been corrected in certain circumstances. It is argued that incidental to this power is the reduction of the contract price in light of such accepted Defects. Secondary Option X 17 entitles the Employer to recover damages for low performance as stated in the Contract Data. Thus, where the works fails to reacha specifiedlevel of performance due to a design or other fault attributable to the Contractor, the Employer is able to recover damages for such low performance as pre-estimated and set out in the Part I of the Contract Date

 

iv.      Termination: This is the last contractual resort for the Employer for failure to satisfy the quality criteria. The NEC3 ECC entitles the Employer to terminate the contract, if after a four-week period the contractor fails to rectify a notified defect.

 

III. Risk and Compensation Events

The NEC3 ECC takes a direct approach when compared to other standard forms on the issue of Risk Allocation. It identifies the risk to be borne by the Employer and expressly places all other risks on the Contractor. This removes any confusion on who bears which risk. It also ties in the Compensation Events procedure to risk. Thus, the Contractor is only entitled to compensation when a risk classified as the Employers Risk eventuates. This section will consider both issues.

 

Risks

Clause 80.1 outlines risks that are to be borne by the Employer. The list of Employers risks could be broadly classified into five categories, to wit:

 

i.       Unavoidable Damage or loss resulting naturally from the works being constructed, damage resulting from the intended use of the works, delays, losses, and damages caused by the Employer's fault i.e., change in the instructions issued by the Project Manager, Supervisor delays etc.

 

ii.       Loss or damage due to Employer supplied goods

 

iii.      Wars, riots, and similar uninsurable events including occurrences beyond the control of either party i.e., outbreak of an epidemic.

 

iv.      Loss and damage after Employer's takeover especially with regards to sectional takeover.

 

v.       Loss and damage after termination and any other risks stated by the Employer to be an Employer risks in the Contract Data.

 

The risks not identified as the Employer's risks are to be borne by the Contractor. The Contractor is expected to undertake a rigorous risk assessment before the commencement of the project. The risk of the Contract price is managed using the Main Options as discussed in Topic 9.

 

Compensation Event

The NEC3 ECC is based on the principle that foresight applied collaboratively mitigates and reduces risks. The Early Warning procedure and the risks register, anticipates changes before they occur and enables the parties to work together to reduce its effects on the project. The NEC3 ECC however acknowledges that change is often times inevitable in a construction project and the Compensation Events procedure enables the parties to manage change when it occurs. Compensation Events are basically events that are at the Employer's risk and entitle the Contractor to an assessment of its effect on the price of the contract and the stated Completion Date. There are nineteen Compensation Events set out in Clause 60.1, plus a further three Compensation Events where main options B and D are chosen and an additional set of compensation events where Secondary Options X2 and X14 are incorporated into a Contract.

 

The NEC3 ECC also allows the Employer to insert further Compensation Events as it may require in the Contract. This is done through Part I of the Contract Data. The following is a summary of the Compensation Events provided for in the NEC3 ECC:

 

1. Clause 60.1 (1) provides that a Compensation Event occurs when the Project Manager gives an instruction changing the Works Information. This does not extend to changes to accept a Defect or changes to accommodate a change by the Contractor of the Works Information. A Contractor drafts sectionsof the WorksInformation when thedesign responsibility is assigned to him. Changes made to bring those sections written by the Contractor in such cases in line with                                  the Employers requirements do not constitute a Compensation Event.

 

2. Clause 60.1 (2) creates a Compensation Event where the Employer fails to give access to the Contractor or allow the use of parts of the site on dates entered in the Contract Data Part I or the Accepted Programme that such access or use would be granted.

 

3. Clause 60.1 (3) makes it a Compensation Event that the Employer fails to provide something which is shown on the Accepted Programme that he will provide on the date stated therein.

4. Clause 60.1 (4) provides that a Compensation Event occurs when the Project Manager gives an instruction to stop or not to start any work (suspension) or to change a Key Date. One reason that the Project Manager may order a suspension of the works relates to safety issues. As this clause does not provide this as an exception, the Employer may use Secondary Option Z to include this as exception to an order to stop or not to start a work constituting a Compensation Event.

 

5. Clause 60.1 (5) creates a Compensation Event where the Employer or Others do not work within the times shown on the Accepted Programme or carry out work not stated in the Works Information.

 

6. Clause 60.1 (6) provides a Compensation Event for the failure of the Project Manager or Supervisor to reply to a communication within time.

 

7. Clause 60.1 (7) creates a Compensation Event for an instruction by the Project Manager to the Contractor dealing with the handling of an object of value or of historical interest or of other interest found in the site.

 

8. Clause 60.1 (8) makes it a Compensation Event when the Project Manager or Supervisor changes a decision that was previously communicated.

 

9. Clause 60.1 (9) provides a Compensation Event for the Project Manager withholding an acceptance (other than an acceptance of a quotation for an acceleration or for not correcting a defect) for a reason not stated in the NEC3 ECC.

 

10.Clause 60.1 (10)makes it Compensation Event where the Supervisor orders the Contractor to search for defects and none is found. The exception to this is where the search is due to insufficient notice of doing work that obstructed a required test or inspection. In the same vein, Clause 60.1 (11) makes it a Compensation Event where there is unnecessary delay by the Supervisor in carrying out his test and inspection duties.

 

11.Clause 60.1(12) makes it a Compensation Event when the Contractor encounters physical conditions within the site, which are not weather conditions, and are conditions which an experienced Contractor would have judged at the contract date to have such a small chance of occurring that it would have been unreasonable for him to have accounted for it. The assessment of this Compensation Event is limited to the difference between the physical conditions encountered and those for which it would have been reasonable to take account of. Generally, this Compensation Event is the NEC3 ECC version of the ground conditions variation available in other standard forms. The NEC3 ECC limits this only to conditions on the site, it discounts weather conditions (dealt with separately) and adopts the

 

experienced contractor standard. Therefore, where an experienced contractor could have made provisions for such physical conditions then a Compensation Event has not occurred.

 

12.Clause 60.1 (13) creates a Compensation event where a weather measurement is taken at a place stated in the Contract Data and the value of it by comparison with weather data shows that on the average it occurs less frequently than once in ten years.

 

13.Clause 60.1 (14) provides that a Compensation Event occurs when an event stated as the Employer’s risk in the contract occurs.

 

14.Clause 60.1 (15) provides that a Compensation Event occurs where the Project Manager certifies takeover of a part of the works before both Completion and the Completion Date.

 

15.Clause 60.1 (16) creates a Compensation Event where the Employer fails to provide materials, facilities and samples for test and inspections as stated in the Works Information.

 

16.Clause 60.1 (17) provides that a Compensation Event occurs when the Project Manager notifies the Contractor of a correction to an assumption which he has stated about the nature of a compensation event.

 

17.Clause 60.1 (18) provides that a breach of the contract by the Employer, which is not provided under other compensation event clauses shall constitute a Compensation Event.

 

18.Clause 60.1 (19) provides that an event, which meets the following four criteria, would constitute a Compensation Event:

 

a. Stops the Contractor from completing the works or stops the Contractor from completing the works by the date shown on the programme.

b. Neither party could prevent.

c. An experienced contractor would have adjudged to have a small chance of occurring that it would be unreasonable to account for.

d. Is not covered by one of the other compensation events clauses. This is the NEC3 ECC's version of a force majeure variation/ prevention.

 

Main options B and D create three additional compensation events relating to using the Bill of quantities, these are:

(i)          Clause 60.4, the difference between the final total quantity of work done and the quantity stated in the Bill of Quantities is a Compensation event if (a) the difference is not as a result of a change in the Works Information; (b) the difference causes the Defined Cost per unit of quantity to change; or (c) the rate in the Bill of Quantities when multiplied by the final total quantity of work done is more than 0.5 % of the total prices of the contract.

 

(ii)          Clause 60.5 creates a Compensation Event where the difference between the final total quantity of work done and the quantity for an item stated in the Bill of Quantities results in delays to Completion or the meeting of a Key Date.

 

(iii)         Clause 60.6 creates a Compensation Event where the Project Manager corrects mistakes in the Bill of Quantities which are departures from the method of measurement or are due to ambiguities or inconsistencies.

 

Secondary Options X2 creates a Compensation Event, if after the contract date a change in the law that affects the contract occurs.

 

Secondary Option X14 creates a Compensation Event, where there is a delay by the Employer in making an advanced payment as provided for under the option. There is also secondary Option X 15.2; this applies when the parties adopt the option limiting the Contractor's liability for design. This clause makes it a compensation event, where the Contractor corrects a defect for which he is not liable.

 

Administration of Compensation Events

The parties are to notify each other when a Compensation Event occurs. The rules for notification are strict especially on the part of the Contractor and failure to notify within the rules could result in the defeat of all claims related to the event. Either the Contractor or the Project Manager can notify a Compensation Event. The NEC3 ECC creates specific instances where a Project Manager should notify a Compensation Event, these are:

 

i.   When the Project Manager gives an instruction changing the Work Information.

 

ii.       When the Project Manager gives an instruction to stop or not to start any work (suspension) or to change a Key Date.

 

iii.      When the Project Manager gives instructions to the Contractor dealing with the handling of an object of value or of historical interest or of other interest found in the site.

 

iv.      Where the Project Manager or Supervisor changes a decision that was previously communicated

 

v.       Where the Supervisor orders the Contractor to search for defects and none is found. The exception to this is where the search is due to insufficient notice of doing work that obstructed a required test or inspection.

 

vi.      Where the Project Manager certifies takeover of a part of the works before both Completion and the Completion Date (unless it is for a reason stated in the Works Information).

 

vii.     The Project Manager notifies a correction to an assumption, which he has stated about the nature of a compensation event.

 

Apart from these seven events, the Contractor is to notify all other Compensation Events set out in the contract. The Contractor may notify a Compensation Event under the following circumstances:

i.       The Contractor believes that the Event is a Compensation Event.

ii.       It is less than eight weeks since the Contractor became aware of the event

iii.      The Project Manager has not notified the event.

 

In practice, the Contractor is advised to notify all events including those that the Project Manager should have notified. However, the division between the Events that the Project Manager should notify and those that the Contractor should notify is of important legal significance. Clause 61.3 provides thus:

If the Contractor does not notify a compensation event within eight weeks of becoming aware of the event he is not entitled to a change in Prices, the Completion Date or a Key Date unless the Project Manager should have notified the event to the Contractor but did not'

In effect, the Contractor notify a Compensation Event to the Project Manager within eight weeks of becoming aware of it. Where the event is not one of the seven events listed above as those that the Project Manager should notify, then the right to claim compensation for such event lapses after the eight weeks.

 

If it is an event that the Project Manager should have notified (one of the seven events listed above), the time bar does not operate, since the Project Manager ought to have notified the event.

 

Assessment of the Compensation Event

AftertheContractor notifies of theCompensation Event, it is thedutyoftheProject Managerto assess theeventand determine whether it qualifies as a compensation event. Clause 61.4 provides that within two weeks of being notified of the event, the Project Manager is to reply to the Contractor. Otherwise, it will be deemed that the Project Manager accepts the event as a compensation event and has issued an instruction for a quotation to be submitted. The four-point test to enable the Project Manager assesses an event is as follows:

 

1.      Does the event arise from the fault of the Contractor? No 2. Has the event happened or is it expected to happen? Yes 3.      Does the event affect Defined Cost or Completion? Yes

4.      Is the event one of the Compensation Events stated in the Contract? Yes.

 

The test must return the answers as stated above. If it fails to do so in any one of thefourquestions, thenotified eventis not a Compensation Event. If it does return the answers as stated above the event is a compensation event and is to be assessed.

 

The Project Manager is empowered to request from the Contractor quotations on how to deal with compensation event as well as discuss alternative methods of dealing with event. The Project Manager isalsotodecidewhether an Early Warning would have been given of the event by an experienced contractorand whether the Contractor gave such a warning timely.

 

The Contractor in providing quotations is to include a revised Programme that proposes themanner thetime element of theeventwillbe dealtwith.An important principle to note is that in the assessment of Compensation Events, the NEC3 ECC does not reference tendered rates shown in the activity schedules or bill of quantities.

 

IV. Termination and Dispute Resolution

The parties to the NEC3 ECC (the Contractor and the Employer) may terminate the contract according to the provisions of contract. The Project Manager cannot terminate the contract.

Termination is governed by clause 90 of the NEC3 ECC. Clause 90.2 provides a table of reasons why the parties may terminate the contract. The reasons for terminating maybe classified as follows:

i.       Insolvency of either parties –R1 - R10

 

ii.       Specified Contractor defaults- R11 - R15

 

iii.      Non-Payment by the Employer- R16

 

iv.      Release under the Law- R17

 

v.       Prolonged suspension- R 18- R20

 

vi.      Force Majeure - R 21.

 

Additionally, the Employer is allowed to terminate for any reason. On termination, the Project Manager accesses and certifies the amount due to or from the Contractor within thirteen (13) weeks. Three (3) weeks after the Project Manager issues the certification, payment falls due of the certified amounts.

 

The calculation of the amount due on termination is dependent on the reason for termination and the framework for these is set out in Clauses 93.1 and 93.2. The minimum amount due applies to the termination based on insolvency or default by the Contractor and it is the valuation of work done at termination less the costs of completing the project. The maximum amount due is for termination at the

 

convenience of the Employer, Employer’s fault, or insolvency. This is calculated at the valuation of work done at termination plus the contractor's costs of removing his equipment plus the full percentage applied to the uncompleted work.

 

Calculation of the amount due on termination is governed by reference to four classes of costs. These are:

 

i.       A1 The base amount - this usually includes the valuation of the work done till date of termination, amounts retained by the Employer, unpaid advanced payments, Defined Costs of materials and equipment brought into the working area for which the Employer has title and the Contractor had accepted delivery, and any other Defined Costs incurred in expectation of completing the work

ii.       A2- the forecasted defined costs of removing the Contractor’s equipment from site. This is included in all calculations of the amount due on termination except where the termination is based on Contractor's insolvency or Contractor's default.

 

iii.      A3- the forecasted additional costs of the Employer completing the works. This is deducted from the amount due the Contractor where the termination is because the Contractor is insolvent or has defaulted on his duties set out in the contract.

 

iv.      A4- the direct fee percentage applied to amount due on the uncompleted sections of the works. This is done by applying the direct fee percentage to the difference between the tendered prices for the whole works and the work done at the date of termination. This is added to the amount due the Contractor when the Employer has terminated for convenience, or termination is because the Employer is insolvent or has defaulted on his duties under the contract.

 

 

Administration of Termination

 

Employer Termination

The Employer terminates according to the following procedure (note that the Employer may terminate for convenience):

 

i.       The Employer notifies the Project Manager and the Contractor that he wishes to terminate and gives reasons for his intention to terminate.

 

ii.       If the reason is R11 - R15, the Project Manager is to check and confirm that the default has been notified to the Contractor and that four weeks has passed since the notification. If the reason is R18 (prolonged suspension due to the Contractor's fault) or R20 (prolonged suspension due to any other reason and not the fault of the parties), the Project Manager is to check and confirm that 13 weeks has passed since the

 

instruction to stop or not to start was issued and that no further instruction allowing the work to restart has been issued.

 

iii.      The Project Manager issues the Termination Certificate promptly if the reason for termination complies with the contract.

 

iv.      The Contractor does no further work necessary to complete the works.

 

v.       The Employer commences procedure for termination this is dependent on the reason for termination.

 

vi.      Within 13 weeks the Project Manager certifies the amount due on termination.

 

Contractor Termination

The Contractor terminates the contract according to the following procedure (note that aContractor cannot terminate for convenience, and mayonlyterminate based on the reasons stated in the contract):

 

i.       The Contractor notifies the Project Manager and the Employer that he wishes to terminate and gives reasons for his intention to terminate.

 

ii.       If the reason is R16 (non-payment by the Employer), the Project Manager is to check and confirm the date of the certificate and those thirteen weeks has passed since the certificate without payment. If the reason is R19 (prolonged suspension due to the Employer’s instructions or fault) or R20 (prolonged suspension due to any other reason and not the fault of the parties), the Project Manager is to check and confirm that 13 weeks has passed since the instruction to stop or not to start was issued and that no further instruction allowing the work to restart has been issued.

 

iii.      The Project Manager issues the Termination Certificate promptly if the reason for termination complies with the contract.

 

iv.      The Contractor does no further work necessary to complete the works.

 

v.       The Contractor and the Employer commence the procedure for termination; this is dependent on the reason for termination.

 

vi.      Within 13 weeks the Project Manager certifies the amount due on termination.

 

Dispute Resolution

The procedures in the NEC3 ECC are aimed at encouraging collaborative working and reducing disputes. However, disputes occur from time to time in commercial arraignments. The NEC3 ECC has created its own dispute resolution procedure to deal with incidence of disputes in a project procured under it. The main thrust of the NEC3 ECC dispute resolution procedure is adjudication. This is on the site

 

resolution of disputes between the parties, by an independent person (the adjudicator) jointly appointed and paid by both parties. The NEC3 ECC was the first construction contract to have an inbuilt adjudication process as its first stage of dispute resolution. In the United Kingdom (UK), the Housing Grants, Construction and Regeneration Act 1996 (HGCR Act 1996) makes adjudication compulsory for all contracts coming under it. Ironically, in the UK the ECC 2 adjudication process was found to be non-compliant with provisions of the 1996 Act (see the case of Mowlem & Co Ltd v Hydra Tight Ltd TCC (2001) 17 Const. L.J. 358 – case available on Westlaw). These necessitated amendments, which are now incorporated into NEC3 ECC.

 

Where the adjudication process fails to settle the dispute, the parties may then refer their dispute to a tribunal (either litigation through the courts or arbitration) as set out in the Contract Data Part I. The dispute resolution options in the NEC3 ECC are lettered Options W1 (to be used where the HGCR Act does not apply) and W2 (which is HGCR Act 1996 compliant). For more on the Dispute resolution Options, see Topic 7.

 

V. Criticisms and future outlook

The NEC3 ECC was received at inception with thunderous applause as well as stinging criticisms. This pattern has persisted to date. Some people have moved to the middle ground. Accepting the contract for its advantages and working to eliminate its disadvantages using the Secondary OptionZ clauses.Below are some of the criticisms levelled against the NEC3:

 

 

 

1. Over-simplicity - critics say that the NEC3 ECC oversimplifies complex construction concepts creating uncertainty and ambiguity. They also criticise the language of the contract as being confusing and lacking precision. The NEC’s communication provisions are criticised for being unwieldy and capable of distracting from the business of construction.

 

2. Unintentionally adversarial - the strict timescales contained in the NEC3 ECC are seen as potential hotbeds for disputes and ill feeling between the parties

 

3. Not universally suitable - Not universally suitable - Although there are optional clauses, doubts have been expressed about the suitability of the NEC3 ECC for a wide range of projects. This may not be unconnected to the fact that it was used during its early years on large projects by leading companies. This created the impression that it was unsuitable for smaller projects. Doubts have also been raised about its applicability internationally.

 

4. Future Outlook - The NEC3 contract (including the NEC3 ECC) has been endorsed by the Office of Government Commerce in the UK. It is presently the contract of choice for public sector procurement in the UK. Internationally, the NEC3 ECC is still growing. Some studies like the one conducted by Nevan

 

Wright and Warwick Fergusson (see the further reading articles in the reading List) point to significant advantages of using the NEC3 ECC over other contract forms in other jurisdictions. Whether or not it will become the leading international contract form will depend largely on the success or otherwise of the projects on which it is being used.

 

NEC4 ECC

NEC4 representsan evolution from NEC3 rather than a revolution. Themain theme of the new suites of contract is the promotion of teamwork and collaboration. The new forms, as we learnt from Topic 8, have introduced some new sub-clauses across the Contract suite such as new terms (e.g., Employer is to be ‘client’, Risk Register to be known as Early warning register etc.). There is a continuation of the use of ‘plain English’ in present tense as was the case under NEC3. Some new forms and options have been introduced. The new forms include a Design, Build and Operate (DBO) and Alliance Contract. Options introduced include a secondary option on professional indemnity insurance requirements, Contractor’s Design (Design and Build) option etc. On dispute resolution, a third Option focusing on Dispute Avoidance has been introduced, whilst the earlier options have been supplemented with provisions which allow Senior Representatives of parties to attempt resolution of disputes via ADR of their choice. For more information on the new NEC4, please see Topic 8.

 

Compared to the NEC3, there is still limited information on experiences from the field on the use of NEC4. As noted earlier, recently, the NEC has amended the new forms in response to user feedback. Assessment of compensation events, the uptake of the new forms – e.g., the Alliance Contract, matters relating to the use of the new forms of dispute resolution, and how the NEC4 response to the dominance of the FIDIC forms in the international arena are some of the issues to watch in the future.

 

Eggleston highlights some areas of interaction between the NEC4ECC and existing legal concepts which need monitoring/attention:

1. Entire agreement - see Cl.12.4 of NEC4 ECC states that the contract is the entire agreement between the parties. What does this mean? Is it intended to exclude common law remedies, or it aims to confine the parties’ agreement to the documents forming the contract? What if the partiesmake supplementary agreements – will that be covered? Should the clause indicate how the original agreement may be amended? What will be the status of a supplementary agreement between the parties made without an amendment of this clause?

2. Exclusion of Common law rights – e.g., to damages? Does the NEC exclude all common law rights? Answer not settled.

3. Condition precedent to compensation event claims – As Eggleston notes, this issue goes beyond the NEC conditions; it is a general contract issue. The NEC4 ECC maintain strict timelines for parties to inform each other of compensation events. What happens if this is not complied with? Are there

 

exceptions? See the decision in Northern Ireland Housing Executive v Healthy Building (Ireland) Ltd.

4. Prevention – Cl. 19 of NEC4 ECC – some Clients may be uncomfortable with the scope of responsibility placed on them by the clause and may modify it.

5. Dispute Resolution Processes under NEC4 ECC.

 

To the above list I will add the long-standing issues around the clause 10 duty under the NEC3 and NEC4 – see Joseph Mante, “Good faith, mutual trust and co-operation: recent judicial insights” Const. L.J. 2022, 38(2), 75-92. Abstract on Westlaw.

 

Topic 10 examines briefly international construction practice in some jurisdictions.

 

Further Reading

 

1. Mitchell B, et al, Introduction to the Engineering and Construction Contract - Managing Reality - Book Two, Thomas Telford publishing, 2005

 

2. Mitchell B, et al, Introduction to the Engineering and Construction Contract - Managing Reality - Book Three, Thomas Telford publishing, 2005

 

3. Mitchell B, et al, Introduction to the Engineering and Construction Contract - Managing Reality - Book four, Thomas Telford publishing, 2005

 

4. Mitchell B, et al, Introduction to the Engineering and Construction Contract - Managing Reality - Book five, Thomas Telford publishing, 2005

 

5. Eggleston B, The New Engineering and Construction Contract- A Commentary, Blackwell publishing, 2006. 5. [Available in the RGU library through ASPIRE]

 

6. Nevan Wright, J., Fergusson, W., ‘Benefits of the NEC ECC form of contract: A New Zealand case study’ (2009) 27 International Journal of Project Management 243–249 [Available in the RGU library through ASPIRE].

 

7. Humphrey Lloyds, Some Thoughts on NEC3 [2008] ICLR 468 [Available in the RGU library through ASPIRE]

 

8. The NEC3 Engineering and Construction Contract and the accompanying Guidance notes [ See NEC3 Contract suite on CampusMoodle]

 

9. J. Mante, ‘Dispute resolution under the FIDIC and the NEC conditions: paradox of philosophies and procedures?’ 35 International Construction Law Review 182

 

10.Nicolas Gould, NEC3: construction contract of the future? (2008) Const. L.J. 286 [Westlaw]

 

11.NEC , ‘NEC4: The Next generation- An Explanation of changes and benefits’ Available here and on Moodle

12.Joseph Mante, “Good faith, mutual trust and co-operation: recent judicial insights” Const. L.J. 2022, 38(2), 75-92. Abstract on Westlaw.

 

 

 

 

Cases

 

1. Fermanagh DC v Gibson (Banbridge) Ltd (Court of Appeal (Northern Ireland) [2014] NICA 46

 

2. RWE npower Renewables Ltd v JN Bentley Ltd [2014] EWCA Civ 150

 

3. Anglian Water Services Ltd v Laing O'Rourke Utilities Ltd [2010] EWHC 1529 (TCC)

 

4. Northern Ireland Housing Executive v Healthy Building (Ireland) Ltd [2014] NICA 27; 153 Con. L.R. 87

 

5. Eurocom Ltd v Siemens Plc [2014] EWHC 3710 (TCC)

 

6. Atkins Ltd v Secretary of State for Transport [2013] EWHC 139 (TCC)

 

7. Imperial Chemical Industries Ltd v Merit Merrell Technology Ltd [2015] EWHC 2915 (TCC)

 

8. Fraserburgh Harbour Commissioners v McLaughlin & Harvey Ltd, 2021 S.L.T. 1487 (2021)

9. Greater Glasgow Health Board v Multiplex Construction Europe Ltd [2021] CSOH 115

10.Van Oord UK Ltd v Dragados UK Ltd, 2021 WL 04533227 (2021)

 

11.Van Oord UK Ltd v Dragados UK Ltd, 2021 S.L.T. 1267 (2020)

 
 
 

Topic 12: Overview of Five Major Jurisdictions

 

 

TopicPreview

 

This topic will examine international construction practices of the following countries:

•     United States

•     United Kingdom

• United Arab Emirates • South Korea

•     Republic of South Africa

 

 

Topic Content

 

1. Introduction

In the previous eleven topics, we have examined the provisions of two major international construction contracts, the FIDIC and NEC suites of contracts. In this concluding lesson, we will briefly examine the practice of international construction in

five world jurisdictions. The topic is based on a few Practical Law Company surveys of international construction practice carry out between 2010 and 2018. The information is supplemented by other more recent reports on domestic and international construction practice (such as the thirteenth edition of ‘Construction’ published by Lexology Getting the Deal through)1 where necessary. The analysis will follow the framework below:

 

•     Brief general overview of the current situation of the construction industry in the jurisdiction

•     Main players

•     Outline of the Standard forms of construction contracts in the jurisdiction and the contract of choice for international construction projects.

•     Terms commonly negotiated when bargaining for construction contracts in the jurisdiction.

•     Outline of the common Dispute Resolution methods in the jurisdiction •       Current reform proposals, if any.

 

2. International Construction - Overview of the United States

The construction industry in the US suffered severe slowdown in the wake of the global

economic crises of 2009. Many projects were suspended or terminated. In the years immediately following the downturn, many entities in the industry registered negative growth. A survey conducted in 2013 reported a rise in the number of litigation when compared to the percentage in the previous years. However, the downward trend in the construction industry started reversing around 2012. A report by the FMI Corporation, a consulting Group on the US Markets Construction Overview published in 2016 revealed that most of the construction sub-sectors in the USA (e.g., residential, commercial, transportation, manufacturing, power, and roads) registeredreasonable levels of growth. It was reported that in 2016, the US Construction

 

 

1 Robert S Peckar and Michael S Zicherman (ed), 2019. Construction 2020, London: Law Business Research Ltd

 

expected in 2017. There is evidence that the 2019 figures point to growth in public infrastructure segments (power, highway, sewage and waste disposal, water supply etc.) and mixed public and private non-residential building segment.2 Thus, infrastructure recovered from the previous year’s decrease of 2.2% to achieve an increase of 4.2% in 2019. However, the overall national construction activity ended the year 3.7 % down because of declines in the commercial and residential sectors.3                                                            The construction industry globally is in a precarious position with the outbreak of the COVID 19 and is likely to see decline in the USA and North America generally for another year.

 

Main Stakeholders

The main stakeholders of a typical construction project in the United States will include:

 

•     The owner/developer

•     A construction manager/general contractor

•     Design professionals (that is, architect and engineers) •     Trade contractors

• Suppliers • Vendors

•     Labourers

• Sureties, and • Insurers

 

Standard forms of contracts

The standard forms of contracts for construction popular in the United States include the following:

 

•     American Institute of Architects (AIA) standard forms used mainly for commercial building projects. Note the pivotal place of its A201 document which sets out general conditions of contract for general construction contracts.

•     The Consensus Docs first published in 2007 by a coalition led by the Associated General Contractors (AGC)

•     Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (EJCDC) –These are contract forms for engineering and construction contracts. The products of a joint venture of four major professional organisations namely the American Council of Engineering Companies (ACEC), the National Security of Professional Engineers (NSPE); the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE); and the AGC.

•     The Design Built Institute of America forms.

 

It is worth noting that there are standard clauses prescribed by the Federal Acquisitions Regulations (FAR) for construction contracts involving the US Government. These are required to be incorporated into affected contracts regardless of the standard form the parties are using. Most large projects use bespoke or heavily modified contracts. The larger the project, the more likely it is that the parties will use a bespoke contract rather than a standard contract form. US contractors involved in international projects will usually use the FIDIC forms, contractual documents prevalent in the jurisdiction in which the work is carried out or a bespoke contract.

 

Contractual issues

 

2 FMI, US Market Construction Overview 2020: https://www.fminet.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/02/Overview2020_FINAL.pdf , p.9.

3 Cumming Insights Construction Market Analysis, Q1- 2020: https://ccorpinsights.com/summary/ , p.23

 

unanticipated site conditions. Therefore, the contractor usually assumes the risk for:

 

• Schedule and any delay.

• Labour and materials price escalation. • Material availability.

• Labour availability. • Labour productivity.

• Subcontractor performance. • Vendor performance.

• The design (in D&B contracts).

 

Contractors can limit or avoid liability for these risks by agreeing clauses, which limit their liability, caps delay, and/or performance liquidated damages or waives of consequential damages.

 

In the US, owners do not usually accept risk for circumstances that would excuse a contractor's performance, even where the circumstances are outside of the contractor's control. Force majeure clauses, per se, are not often found in US contracts. However, they are available (in substance, not often in the form the English lawyer or construction professional will be familiar with) in negotiated contracts and are generally enforceable. US contracts typically provide for an extension of time for events that in international projects are known as force majeure events.

 

An important risk not covered above is the payment risk. The mechanisms typically used by the contractor to mitigate the risk of non-payment include surety bonds, parent company guarantees and letters of credit. The use of surety bonds should be weighed against their cost, which is typically a percentage of the contract price. Whether the obligee/owner or principal/contractor pays the bond premium directly to the surety, the obligee/owner ultimately pays. Most public works projects require performance and payment bonds. Federal projects are bonded under the Miller Act and state projects are bonded under what is called Little Miller Acts. Many private improvement works also require performance and payment bonds.

 

Contractual terms commonly negotiated

The following contractual provisions are usually heavily negotiated: • Liquidated damages/bonuses for early completion.

• Indemnity provisions. • Limitation of liability.

•     Insurance cover, particularly if there are unique environmental issues.

•     Contract sum and Guaranteed Maximum Price (GMP) (that is, which costs are reimbursable and which costs are not).

•     Reimbursement for delay.

•     Mark-up on change orders or decreased fees for deduct change orders (that is, change orders that result in a reduction in scope and contract sum).

•     Schedule.

•     Bases for time extension.

•     Termination or suspension for non-payment, or suspension by owner.

•     Change orders.

•     Ownership of documents (owner-architect agreements). Termination of licences to use documents (owner-architect agreements).

 

The most common dispute resolution methods in use in the construction industry in America include litigation, mediation, arbitration, and dispute review boards. The answer to the question which domestic court handles a particular construction dispute depends on the parties to the dispute:

 

•     Disputes between private parties: state and federal courts of general jurisdiction.

•     Disputes between contractors and local governmental agencies: either courts of general jurisdiction or governmental administrative boards.

•     Disputes between contractors and state governmental agencies: governmental administrative boards or state special courts of claims.

•     Disputes between contractors and federal government: federal agency administrative boards or court of federal claims.

 

Cross-border Issues

Each state has its own scheme of licensing of foreign businesses (that is, entities not domiciled within the relevant state). Before doing business in any state, a business entity must review (preferably with an attorney licensed in that state) the doing business requirements of the relevant state.

 

 

3. International Construction in the United Kingdom (England and Wales)

 

Overview of the construction sector

After years of difficulty due to the credit crunch, the construction sector in the UK rebounded.

Both housebuilding and infrastructure development in both London and the Northern powerhouse region (Manchester, Leeds etc.) have registered growth since 2014.4 In relation to major projects, the energy and transport/infrastructure sectors remain the most buoyant. In the energy sector, the main developments include the nuclear new build scheme and the offshore wind project. In the transportation sector, Crossrail is in the construction phase whilst plans are underway to commence High Speed (HS) Rail 2.

 

In 2010, Infrastructure UK was set up to support major infrastructure projects involving public sector capital, drive the PFI policies and to negotiate infrastructure guarantees to support government projects. Around the same time, the Major Projects Authority was established with a mandate to oversee large government projects. The Governments Major Project Portfolio amounted to some £500 billion involving over 200 projects. In view of the related roles played by these organisations, the government decided late 2015 to merge the two organisations. Consequently, the government’s knowledge, skill, and expertise in the delivery of major economic projects has been brought under a single entity.5 The establishment of the National Infrastructure Commission and the launch of the National Infrastructure Delivery Plan 2016 to 2021 are seen as evidence of good prospects in infrastructure development in the UK, with major energy and transport infrastructure projects (such as Crossrail and HS2) mainly unaffected by Brexit. That said, it is worth bearing in mind that the current Brexit negotiations and related matters may affect construction in the UK, especially as it relates to private investments in the sector. Also note that the unexpected global outbreak of COVID 19 is likely

 

 

 

4 Note this has been slowed by the COVID pandemic the last two years.

5 https://www.gov.uk/government/news/government-creates-new-body-to-help-manage-and-deliver-major-projects-for-uk-economy

 

Main Stakeholders

The main stakeholders commonly found in construction projects in the UK include the following:

 

•     Client: The party who wants to get the project completed (for example, a landowner, lease holder or developer) also called the Employer.

•     Consultant team: The design team plus parties such as a contract administrator, quantity surveyor and a CDM coordinator (this is a required health and safety role).

•     Design team: An architect and one or more engineers (a mechanical and electrical engineer, a structural engineer and/or a civil engineer, as required) working on the design part of the project on behalf of the Employer.

•     Contractor: One or more contractors employed by the client to construct the works or part of them. They may also have design responsibilities depending on the procurement method.

•     Funder: Parties who provide finance to the client in return for security.

 

Standard forms of contracts

There are many standard form contracts in use in the UK. These include the Joint Contracts

Tribunal (JCT) contracts, Institution of Civil Engineers (ICE) contracts, Institute of Chemical Engineers (IChemE) contracts and the New Engineering Contracts (third and fourth edition) (NEC3 & 4). The GC/Works contracts are standard government forms of contract intended for use in connection with government construction works and published by the Stationery Office for the Property Advisors for the Civil Estate (PACE).

 

For international contracting, the International Federation for Consulting Engineers (Federation Internationale des Ingenieurs­ Conseils) (FIDIC) is the leading standard form contract for large projects. In recent times, the NEC3 and NEC4 have been used to execute international projects outside the UK.

 

Contractual issues

There is no standard form of risk allocation for unforeseen ground conditions. However, the FIDIC Silver Book (which is widely used on international contracts) seeks to pass ground risk fully to the contractor. Typically, the client instructs a ground survey but seeks to pass the risk

on to the contractor. If this is the case the contractor could require a letter of reliance or collateral warranty from the ground surveyor to cover this risk. The contractor may also protect its position by procuring its own surveys.

 

Risks relating to price fluctuations are usually borne by the contractor. Some UK standard form contracts include fluctuation provisions, but these are usually excluded in international contracts (and even in UK contracts, the standard form is often amended to exclude these provisions). The contractor can exclude liability, except liability for death or personal injury, by including a suitable exclusion clause in the building contract. The validity of exclusion of liability clause depends on the bargaining position of the parties and its reasonableness (see the Unfair Contracts Act 1977).

 

Typically, the exclusion of consequential loss is the primary aim of negotiation on this subject. Consequential losses are the most unpredictable and are often expensive. What is deemed as a consequential loss turns on the individual facts of the case and the courts in some instances have found loss of profits to be direct loss. It is therefore important that the types of losses that the contractor is seeking to exclude are carefully defined in the contract.

 

contractor's liability has cost saving implications for the client. Limitations of liability, if included in the contract, are usually agreed at a sum no less than the level of Professional Indemnity insurance that the contractor must maintain. Caps may apply in the aggregate, so that the client has a single source to draw from in the event of any claims, or on an each-and-every claim basis.

 

Other contracts contain express caps on the total loss recoverable from the contractor. However, specific liabilities such as third-party indemnities and intellectual property infringements may well be found outside the limits of these caps. The contractor may also require separate caps in warranties and/or third-party rights that are offered to other parties with an interest in the project.

 

Force majeure provisions are enforceable where they have been included in the contract. In its absence, a party which cannot perform its obligations due to an unforeseeable event outside its control would rely on the doctrine of frustration to avoid liability for non-performance of the agreement.

 

The contract must specify the impact of force majeure events on performance of the contract by the parties. Unless the contract states otherwise, the party alleging that force majeure has occurred must prove it on the balance of probabilities. The alleging party is under a duty to mitigate its loss.

 

Commonly negotiated Contractual terms Price and payment

The price, the length of the payment period, and the way in which both unforeseen and anticipated increases in costs are managed is of key concern to both parties. The Housing, Grants, Construction and Regeneration Act 1996 dictate certain aspects of payment under the

contract, such as withholding and giving notice of payments.

 

Design responsibility

The client may require the contractor to assume full design responsibility for the project. The contractor may want to limit this by, for example, excluding liability for any design prepared by or on behalf of the client, and capping its liability under the contract.

 

Time

The duration of the construction period is usually agreed at the outset, and the building contract usually contains provisions dealing with variations to the Programme.

 

Others

Other negotiated provisions include those relating to:

 

• Entitlement to extensions of time and/or loss and expense. • Termination provisions and payment on termination.

•     Insurances.

•     Limitations on liability.

•     Third party requirements (that is, collateral warranties or third-party rights). •       Bonds and guarantees.

 

Construction dispute resolution

Since the passage of the Housing Grants, Construction and Regeneration Act1996, adjudication has become the most common dispute resolution method in the UK construction industry. Adjudication is a private 28-day procedure introduced to speed up the dispute resolution

 

right to refer disputes to adjudication; parties cannot contract out of this right. An adjudicator’s decision is binding until set aside by a superior tribunal and monies awarded must be paid.

 

Public construction litigation is a popular next stage of dispute resolution. Construction disputes which reach litigation are normally dealt with by the Technology and Construction Court (TCC), which is part of the High Court, Queen's Bench Division.

 

With a few exceptions (see the TCC Practice Guide, paragraph 1.3.1), the TCC will not usually accept cases with a value of less than £250,000. Cases below this value go to the County Court, as a rule. This guideline is not rigid though, and where a case meets one or more of the factors set out under paragraph 1.3.1 of the TCC Guide, they could be listed before the High Court. For more on the division between High Court and County Court cases, please see paragraphs 1.3.6 of the TCC Guide.

 

In the High Court, the TCC in London has several judges who deal only with TCC work. Outside London, High Court TCC claims can be issued in any District Registry, but not all have TCC judges available. County court TCC cases must only be brought in specified District Registries where TCC judges are usually available, or in the Central London Civil Justice Centre.

 

Claims for less than GB£5,000 (about US$7,160) will usually be allocated to the small claims track and dealt with in the county court.

 

Arbitration is also very popular as an alternative to public litigation as the next stage of dispute resolution. Arbitration in England and Wales is regulated by the Arbitration Act 1996. The other main ADR methods are:

 

•     Mediation: A neutral third party discusses the dispute with the parties in pursuit of a middle ground and to facilitate constructive solutions to the problem, which is acceptable to all parties.

•     Dispute review/avoidance boards (DRBs): DRBs are often appointed at the outset of international construction projects, to follow the course of the project and provide interim solutionsto disputes asthey arise, sotheproject cancontinuepending arbitration or litigation.

•     Expert Determination: This is used occasionally, mainly in the context of property dilapidations claims. The parties choose an expert to privately resolve their dispute and agree to accept his decision

 

Cross-border issues

Beforeengaginganysubcontractors,all Contractorsmustregisterwiththe HMRC's Construction Industry Scheme (CIS), which applies to non-resident contractors in the same way as UK based contractors. Under the scheme, contractors ensure that all their subcontractors are registered with HMRC and make appropriate tax deductions from subcontractor pay. The scheme applies

to a Contractor who pays subcontractors for construction work being carried out within the UK or a subcontractor who gets paid by contractors for doing construction work in the UK.

 

 

4. Construction Practice United Arab Emirates

 

The construction sector

The UAE construction sector experienced novel difficulties at the height of the global economic crises. However, there are clear signs of recovery, andin some cases, growth in the

construction industry in the UAE. Many projects halted during the global economic crises are

 

significantinfrastructural/constructionactivitiesacrossthecountry.Itwasreportedin2018that Dubai had ‘awarded approximately 47 construction contracts with the total value of AED11 billion(US$3billion)tolocalandforeigncompanies’aspartofitspreparationforthe2020Work Expo.6 These included the following:

•     Expo 2020 initiative of the Dubai Metro Red Line Extension.

•     Container Terminal 4 of the Jebel Ali Port Expansion project; and

•     New Royal Atlantis Resort and Residences located in Palm Jumeirah.7

 

For some years now, the UAE has experienced growth in the construction industry due to the Government’s drive to develop infrastructure to support the Expo 2020. Projections for industry growth in 2020 have been high. Survey of construction industry leaders in 2019 by KPMG revealed that about 53% of those surveyed expected 6-10% growth in the industry in 2020. Studies looking at Post-Expo2020 UAE also confirm that growth trends may continue due togovernmentprogrammes and strategiesandincrease in investorconfidence. There is no doubt that most of the above prediction would not have taken the current COVID 19 crisis into account. This will have some impact on the industry in the UAE. That said, there are indications that the industry will likely bounce back in the years ahead due to high public spending. The government isstillinvesting in construction. The Energy Strategy 2050, the Sheikh Zayed Housing programme, digitization of government services and the Tourism strategy are programmes which indicate positive prospects for the industry in future.

 

 

 

Main Stakeholders

The main stakeholders in a construction project in the UAE include:

•     The employer: - This is the public or private developer commissioning the works.

•     The contractor: - This is the construction company engaged by the employer to carry out the works, usually under a standard form of construction contract (often amended to the precise requirements of the project or parties).

•     The engineer: - This is the contract administrator engaged by the employer under a services contract to supervise and administer the construction contract.

•     Consultants: - These are specialist advisers engaged by the employer or contractor (depending on the procurement approach) under services contracts, to advise on various technical and design matters.

•     Subcontractors: - These are contractors engaged by the main contractor under a form of subcontract to carry out a discrete part of the works.

•     Suppliers: - Suppliers supply materials, plant, and equipment for the works under supply agreements with the procuring contractor or subcontractor.

 

Standard forms of contracts in use in the UAE TheFIDICconditionsofcontractarecommonlyusedforlargeconstructionprojects.Inthepast, Dubai typically used the 1987 edition of the FIDIC Conditions of Contract for Works of Civil Engineering Construction (1987 Red Book), but the use of the 1999 editions of the FIDIC Conditions (the 1999 Red, Yellow and Silver Books) are becoming more prevalent in Dubai and elsewhere in the UAE. Abu Dhabi generally uses the 1999 Red Book.

 

The Abu Dhabi government has commissioned its own construction contracts based on the 1999 Red Book and the 1999 Yellow Book. Under Abu Dhabi Law No 21 of 2006, Abu Dhabi government departments must use these contracts. For its 500 hectare US$15 billion (about EUR11.8 billion) Raha Beach development, Aldar adopted the third edition of the New

 

 

6 Andrew Mackenzie, Gordon Prestige, Sally Kotb, and Khalil Mechantaf, Baker McKenzie Habib Al Mulla and Nick Roberts, Construction and projects in United Arab Emirates: overview, Global Guide 2018 Construction and Projects. Accessed from the PLC website: https://uk.practicallaw.thomsonreuters.com/

7 ibid

 

simplified language and partnering concepts in the NEC3 were particularly attractive, given the multinationalandmulticulturalcharacteroftheemployerandcontractororganisations.TheUAE is a civil law jurisdiction in which different local laws apply in each of the seven Emirates. Abu Dhabi and Dubai especially have Emirate-specific laws relating to construction. Federal law applies uniformly across the UAE. Sharia principles may also apply unless there is a statutory provision to the contrary. Most important contract provisions are contained in the Civil Code (Federal Law No 18 of 1993: Code of Commercial Practice (Commercial Code)). UAE laws and regional practice combine to provide the following:

 

•     Prohibitions on purchasing goods or services from Israel.

•     Permissible variations (often +/- 20% of the project value) without the employer being liable for additional cost.

•     Simple interest on late payment (compound interest is not permitted under UAE law). •     Pre-agreement that court approval is not required in the event of contract

termination.

•     Provisions widening the scope of decennial liability (that is, the contractor being liable absolutely (without proof of fault) for hidden defects for ten years from completion for structural defects.

 

Contractual Issues

Traditionally, all major risks associated with the execution and completion of the works was typically allocated to the contractor, including the risk relating to the physical conditions of the site.However,changingmarketconditionsbeforethecreditcrunchledtoemployersbeingmore willingtosharerisk.Thecreditcrunchseemstohavereversedthistrend.Priortoit,theconcept of foreseeable risks (used in the 1999 Red Book) was being adopted. This meant that the employerwasliableforthetimeandcostconsequencesofthecontractorencounteringphysical conditions that were not reasonably foreseeable by an experienced contractor at the date of submission of the tender. Mechanisms to adjust cost to consider inflation (found in the FIDIC 1999 editions) are also sometimes adopted, entitling the contractor to recover cost escalation according to a cost adjustment formula based on agreed indices. Generally, only a limited numberofcostsaresubjecttotheescalationmechanism.TheAbuDhabigovernmentcontracts contain similar provisions at the express requirement of government, demonstrating the equitability of such a provision. However, the limited availability of appropriate price indices in the UAE can hinder the operationof these clauses. Contracts let on a remuneration or cost-plus basis are becoming more common, particularly in the energy sector. Often procured on a fast-trackbasis,thesecontractssometimesprovideforlaterconversiontoalumpsumafterdetailed requirements have been determined. Apart from terms dealing with risk allocation under variousFIDICforms,youalsoneedtokeepaneyeonstatutoryprovisionsaffectingconstruction in the UAE, the Construction Chapter of the UAE Civil Transactions Code – see Articles 875(2), 894, 887 and 889.

 

Contractors commonly seek to exclude or limit certain liabilities in their contracts. Liability caps are relatively common. Parties can fix in their contracts the amount of compensation payable for breach of contract (that is, liquidated damages), but such terms must reserve the right of judges and arbitrators to vary the agreement on an application by a party to compensate for loss. Any agreement to the contrary is void.

 

DamagesfordelayareacommonfeatureofUAEandregion-wideconstructioncontracts.Given the inherent risks of delays due to shortages of labour and materials, among others, contracts commonly cap liability at a percentage of the contract value. The Abu Dhabi government construction contracts specify this cap in the Appendix to Tender at 20% of the final contract price (although 10% is common in many contracts). In addition, the total liability of the contractor, under or in connection with the contract, must not exceed the sum stated in the particular conditions or accepted contract amount (Clause 17.6, 1999 Red Book). Parties often fail to provide a sum in the particular conditions, meaning that the accepted contract amount

 

than may realistically be incurred. This exposes the Employer to potential unrecoverable loss.

 

One of the parties may apply to the court to overrule a compensation arrangement stipulated in the contract and to amend the compensation due to other party to the actual amount of loss suffered (Article 390, Civil Code). This may have an impact on delay damages clauses. Article 249 of the Civil Code also empowers a court to reduce a contractual obligation of any of the parties to a "reasonable level", where the following criteria exist:

 

•     The court deems the obligation to be oppressive.

•     There are public policy reasons to support such decision; and

•     The party charged with such obligation is threatened with "grave loss".

 

Liability is not capped in the case offraud or reckless misconduct, or in respectofclaims brought against the contractor by any third party (unless third party rights apply).

 

Certain provisions in the Civil Code limit or cap the liability of a contracting party. For example: •     Articles 290 and 291 provide a contributory negligence regime, permitting a judge to reduce damages payable where the claimant caused or aggravated the

damage.

•     Articles 880 to 883 create decennial liability. A contractor and designer are jointly liable for ten years from the date of completion (unless the contract specifies a longer period) to compensate the employer for both total and partial collapse of the constructed building or installation and defects that threaten the stability or safety of the building.

•     Article 882 provides that any agreement contradicting Articles

880 to 883 are void. Therefore, the contractor and architect must pay compensation arising under Article 880, irrespective of any contractual exclusions or caps on liability.

 

Force Majeure

Force majeure is also available and enforceable in the UAE. In the absence of an agreed provision to the contrary, if a party proves that the loss arose out of an extraneous cause in which he played no part (such as a natural disaster, unavoidable accident, force majeure, act of a third party or act of the person suffering loss) he is not liable to compensate (Article 287, Civil Code). Clause 19 of the FIDIC form of contract defines force majeure as an exceptional event or circumstance. It also sets out a non- exhaustive list of events that may constitute a force majeure.

 

Construction dispute resolution

Construction disputes were historically resolved amicably through negotiation; however, litigation and arbitration have been on the increase.

 

Litigation

Litigation is conducted in Arabic courts. A complex process of appeals could follow before the dispute is determined. The Abu Dhabi government has proposed that a specialist construction court be established.

 

Arbitration

Arbitration is a viable and attractive alternative to litigation. The UAE government supports arbitration and the UAE acceded to New York Convention on the Recognition and Enforcement of Foreign Arbitral Awards in 2006. The two most recognised regional arbitration centres in the UAE are the:

•     Abu Dhabi Commercial Conciliation and Arbitration Centre (ADCCAC). •       Dubai International Arbitration Centre (DIAC).

 

LawNo.6of2018(UAEArbitrationLaw),whichbecameeffectiveon16June2018nowgoverns arbitration in the UAE. The new law is based on the UNCITRAL Model Law on International Commercial Arbitration.                      The new law specifically repeals articles 203-218 of the Civil Procedures Code, Federal Law No 11 of 1992 (CPC), which governed arbitration in the UAE before the new law came into effect. According to Article 2, the 2018 Law applies to

 

1. any Arbitration conducted in the State, unless the Parties have agreed that another law should govern the Arbitration, provided there is no conflict with the public order and morality of the State

2. any international commercial arbitration conducted abroad, if the Parties have chosen this Law to govern such Arbitration.

3. any arbitration arising from a dispute in respect of a legal relationship, whether contractual or not, governed by State law, save as excepted by special provision.

 

The new law does not cover the Dubai International Financial Centre (DIFC) and the Abu Dhabi Global market (ADGM); these have separate governing laws.

 

Please note that the recent amendment to Article 257 of the UAE Criminal Code which imposed criminal sanctions on court-appointed experts and arbitrators who do not abide by the duty to be fair and impartial has been repealed by UAE Federal Law No. 24 of 2018 (the Amending Law). This is a welcome news as the previous amendment had a negative impact on the development of arbitration in the UAE.

 

Dubai International Finance Centre (DIFC)

The DIFC constitutes a separate legal jurisdiction from the rest of the UAE. It has its own laws andaseparatecourtsystem.DIFClawisessentiallycommonlawbased.DIFCcourtsonlyhave jurisdiction over entities based in the DIFC. However, the new DIFC Arbitration Law 2008 permits parties not directly connected with the DIFC to arbitrate there. Awards under the DIFC Arbitration Law and ratified by the DIFC courts are automatically enforceable in Dubai without any power of review by the Dubai courts. The DIFC - LCIA Arbitration Centre, a joint venture between the DIFC and the London Court of Arbitration (LCIA) allowing parties access to the LCIA's database of arbitrators, was established in February 2008.

 

Negotiation, mediation, and adjudication are the most common methods of ADR. The 1999 edition of the FIDIC standard forms of contract provide for the referral of disputes to a Dispute Adjudication Board (DAB), comprising one or three members. The DAB must reach a decision within 84 days of the referral, although this can be extended. The Abu Dhabi government construction contracts include DAB provisions amended to provide that a decision must be reached within 42 days of the referral. The DAB is ad hoc (that is, formed only for a particular dispute rather than being constituted at the start of a project). Expert determination is sometimes provided for where disputes are likely to be straightforward, although the court can intervene and review this decision if one of the parties requests it to do so. There is growing interest in mediation. However, there is some reluctance to engage in mediation as the UAE does not have the 'without prejudice rule' (that is, a rule protecting a party from prejudice arising from the disclosure to a court or arbitrator of any offer to settle). In practice, careful management of mediation may avoid this issue.

 

The Abu Dhabi Global market (ADGM)

This is a financial free zone entity established in Abu Dhabi in 2013. It is similar in many respects to the DIFC in terms of the laws applicable and the structures, the key difference being that unlike the DIFC, the ADGM applies English law.

 

Cross-border issues

To operate in the UAE, all foreign companies must establish one of the following in the UAE:

•     Local agent: This involves appointing a local commercial agent or local distributor in

 

•     Branch office: This is essentially an extension in the UAE of the foreign company. A local sponsor is required.

 

•     Joint participation: A foreign company can establish a presence by obtaining sponsorship from a UAE entity. The foreign company then trades by virtue of (and in the name of) the UAE entity.

•     Joint venture: The preferred vehicle for foreign equity investments in the UAE is the Limited Liability Company (although there are five other possible vehicles). The company must have a minimum of either 51% of its capital owned by a UAE national (or a company fully owned by UAE nationals) and set amount as share capital.

 

5. International Construction - South Korea

 

The construction sector

The construction sector experienced a decline in the domestic market due to the economic downturn.However,itsexposurehasincreasedinforeignjurisdictions,particularlyintheMiddle East, North Africa and India. For example, the number of contracts for foreign construction projects reached a record high in 2008. The most significant contracts involved large social overhead capital (SOC) projects (that is, where capital is spent on social infrastructure, such as schools, universities, hospitals, and libraries). Since 2014, there have been signs of recovery. It is reported that the industry has been registering some modest growth rates since 2014. Analysthaveattributedtherecoverymainlytotherelaxationofmortgagerulesandthestimulus packageintroducedbythegovernment.The2018PyeongChangWinterOlympicsalsospawned some infrastructure projects. There are also on-going high value energy projects.

 

Main Stakeholders

The main stakeholders involved in a construction project are the owners, general contractor, financial institutions, and asset management companies. In some instances, Special Purpose Vehicles (SPVs) are used in both domestic and international contracts. The main underlying rationale for the use of SPV is to limit liability and tax burden of developers.

 

Standard forms of contract

Several standard form contracts are available for use. A number of these are published by various government entities. These include Standard contracts published by the Ministry of Land, Infrastructure and Transport (MOLIT) and the Korean Fair-Trade Commission (KFTC) and the Ministry of Strategy and Finance (MSF). The standard forms published by the latter namely the General Terms and Conditions of Construction Contracts (GTCCC) is mainly used for government projects. General Terms and Conditions of Technical Services Contracts of Local Governments published by the Ministry of Safety and Public Administration (MOSPA) are commonly used as the general terms and conditions for local government projects.

 

Forprivateprojects,therearenostandardizedformsofcontract.TheGTCCCarenotmandatory but have been widely used. Each major general contractor uses its own form of construction contract. These contracts are identical in most material respects. For international Construction projects, the FIDIC forms are used.

 

Contractual issues

Contractors are not necessarily allocated more risks than the developer, as the standard construction contracts generally allocate risks equally between the parties. However, the contractorshouldassumecertainresponsibilitiesandrisks.Forexample,inrelationtoaturnkey project procured by a national or local government, contractors usually bear the risk of price fluctuation and take responsibility for confirming the facts and information specified in the blueprint that the government provides as part of the bidding invitation (which generally includesthelocationandsizeoftheprojectsite,timetablefortheprojectandsoon),particularly for international projects, and bear the risk of any related loss and expenses. The contractor's

 

Successfully claiming special damages (for example, indirect or consequential losses) from a contractor is uncommon and is only possible if the contractor knew or should have known that the damage was likely to occur as a result of its act or omission.

 

It is possible to limit liability in the contract. However, unreasonable limitation may violate the Regulation of Standardized Contracts Act (2008) or the Fair Trade Act (2009). Liquidated damages for delay in a construction's completion usually amount to 0.1% of the contract price per day. The total amount payable is often capped at 10% of the contract price.

 

Force majeure exclusions are available and enforceable. However, if they are not freely negotiated between the contracting parties (that is, where unreasonable conditions are forced on a party due to its relative bargaining power (or lack of it)), they may be considered void. Force majeure clauses are usually incorporated into construction contracts and the primary issue is typically whether a force majeure event has in fact occurred.

 

Commonly negotiated Terms

The main contractual provisions that are commonly negotiated are those relating to the contract price and variation. Other terms heavily negotiated include the following:

•     Causes for contract termination

• Causes and process for suspension of construction. • Inspection of construction.

• Extension of the construction period. • Repair of defects.

•     Subcontracting.

•     Party responsible for obtaining insurance.

•     Price fluctuation and adjustment of the contract price due to variations.

 

For international projects, negotiation is also necessary with respect to: •       The inspection authority.

•     Method of payment for construction works (party responsible for loss on foreign currency transactions).

•     Dispute resolution method and governing law.

 

Construction dispute resolution

Construction disputes are typically resolved by court litigation or court mediation. Both arbitrationandprivatemediationarerarelyusedintheconstructionindustry.UnlikeArbitration where there are separate rules for foreign and domestic arbitration, court rules for litigation apply to both foreign and domestic cases.

 

Courts and arbitration organisations Courts

There are no separate courts for construction disputes. Such disputes are resolved by general civilcourtproceedings.SeoulCentralDistrictCourtandSeoulHighCourt,thetwolargestcourts at first and second instance level, have specialized panels that hear construction-related disputes. For example, the Seoul Central District Court has seven construction divisions and two redevelopment and reconstruction divisions.

 

Arbitration institutions

For local projects, parties have increasingly opted for arbitration governed by the Korean Commercial Arbitration Board (KCAB) rules. For international arbitration, the ICC rules are mostly used. The most popular forum for arbitration is the Korean Commercial Arbitration Board. The Construction Dispute Resolution Commission under the Ministry of Land, Transport, and Maritime Affairs also provides mediation services. Additionally, there has recently been an increase in arbitration for construction projects at the Korean Commercial Arbitration Commission. Where one of the parties is a national or local government, or public corporation,

 

The Public Private Partnership Dispute Conciliation Committee was established in 2012 under the Ministry of Strategy and Finance, to resolve disputes between public and private parties. However, dispute resolution through this Committee is neither mandatory nor are its results binding and is not widely used in practice.

 

Cross-border issues

Foreign contractors can carry out their business operations upon registering their licences for construction business and real estate development under the local law and regulations. There are no special licences or other requirements.

 

 

5. International Construction in South Africa - Overview

 

The construction sector ThereisasteadyincreaseinpublicsectorinfrastructureinvestmentinSouthAfricaintheareas of energy generation, natural resources processing and transportation. Current ongoing major projects are in the power sector and include projects in the hydro, wind, solar and thermal energy sub-sectors.

 

Main Stakeholders

The main stakeholders to a construction and engineering project are the Employer, the Employer's agent, and contractors. The construction and engineering environment are sophisticated (both from a legal and market perspective), and therefore procurement arrangements vary.

 

Standard forms of contracts

The most common standard forms of contracts used for large construction and engineeringprojects include the following:

•     The FIDIC forms

•     The NEC3/4 forms

•     Joint Building Contracts Committee (JBCC) 2000 suite of contracts (last updated in 2007) produced by the JBCC.

•     The General Conditions of Contract for Construction Works 2004 (GCC) produced by the South African Institute for Civil Engineering

 

Public sector construction procurement must be undertaken on the above standard form contracts (and certain other standard form contacts approved or prepared by the Construction Industry Development Board (CIDB) (CIDB Act 38 of 2000 (CIDB Act) Regulations (CIDB Regulations)). The CIDB also encourages the use of these standard form contracts for private sector construction procurement to promote efficiency.

 

Contractual issues

Risk allocation typically follows international trends and is largely determined by the nature of the works and the procurement methodology. Generally, the FIDIC or NEC risk allocation regimes is used in the construction market. Fixed and firm price contracts (particularly where the contract period is more than 12 months) are used exceptionally. This is largely because of relatively high interest and inflation rates. Construction and engineering contracts typically include change-in cost provisions linked to acceptable indices.

 

Contractors are not usually required to assume the risk for changes in the cost of labour, materials, or other inputs except for a pre­ determined fixed portion (usually between 5% and 15%). Employers similarly avoid unnecessary price premiums, which are otherwise associated with a fixed and firm price and retain the benefit of downward price movements for these input costs.

 

African currency (the Rand) and by the Exchange Control Regulations. The Exchange Control RegulationsprohibitpaymentsinforeigncurrencybySouthAfricanpersonsandentities,except with the prior approval of the Exchange Control Department of the South African Reserve Bank (ExchangeControl).ItalsoregulatesthereceiptofforeigncurrencypaymentsbySouth African persons and entities. Typically, as a result foreign or multiple currency contracts are only appropriate where the contractor is a foreign entity or comprises a joint venture or consortium with one or more foreign entity members (in which case the employer can, subject to prior Exchange Control approval, make foreign currency payments to these foreign entities). The employer then assumes the risk of currency fluctuation and obtains forward cover (that is, secures foreign currency at a pre-determined rate, in advance) to mitigate this risk.

 

Contracts with local contractors or between local entities are denominated and paid in Rand. The contractor assumes the risk of foreign currency-related input cost changes (and usually obtains forward cover to mitigate this risk).

 

Parties can contractually limit or exclude liability for consequential and indirect loss and for negligence. However, a party cannot exclude its liability for intentional loss or damage. Contracts typically exclude liability for consequential and indirect loss and cap the contractor's liability for direct damages. The cap is usually determined as a percentage of the contract price and is subject to negotiation. The cap often depends on the nature of the works. Civil engineering contracts typically have a lower cap than design-build contracts. Generally, the following are not considered in determining limitation of liability:

 

•     Proceeds from principal-controlled insurances (that is, where the building contract parties are automatically covered under a blanket insurance policy, for all approved works).

•     Liability from the annulment of principal-controlled insurance policies. •     Delay damages.

•     Low performance damages.

 

However, this is subject to negotiation and depends on the level of the cap. Force majeure exclusions are available and enforceable. Common law recognises force majeure exclusions. Construction and engineering contracts typically expressly regulate the parties' rights and obligations with force majeure events. For the common law exclusion to be effective and to discharge the contract, the "supervening impossibility" must be absolute (as opposed to probable and relative) and must not be the fault of or under the control of either party. The courts do not recognise commercial impracticability as a supervening impossibility.

 

Commonly Negotiated Terms

The parties often heavily negotiate the following terms:

•     Contractor's liability for latent defects in the works.

•     Governing law and dispute resolution provisions, where one of the parties is foreign. South Africa is a signatory to the UN Convention on the Recognition and Enforcement of                              Foreign Arbitral Awards 1958 (New York Convention) and public sector construction contracts are typically regulated by South African law, with South Africa as the dispute resolution forum.

 

Construction dispute resolution

Unless otherwise provided for in a construction contract or subsequently agreed to between litigants, the default position is that disputes are dealt with either in the High court or Magistrates' court: Jurisdiction depends on the monetary value of the claim. The parties generally contractually agree for disputes to be referred to adjudication followed by private arbitration.

 

The conduct of private arbitration is regulated by terms of reference and rules agreed to by the

 

subjecttotheprovisionsoftheArbitrationAct42of1965,whichprovidesastatutoryframework for domestic arbitrations and the International Arbitration Act, 2017(Act 15 of 2017) which came into operation on 20 December 2017.The new international arbitration law in modeled on the UNCITRAL Module Law and accommodates requirements under the New York Convention. Adjudication (whether by a single adjudicator, through dispute review or adjudication boards) is commonly used as a first step dispute resolution mechanism for construction disputes. Mediation is also a common form of ADR. Both adjudication and mediation are contractual voluntary processes, which are regulated by terms of reference and rules agreed to by the parties, either in the construction contract, or subsequently in terms of a separate agreement.

 

Cross-border Issues

The CIDB Regulationsrequire that any enterprise (including foreign contractors) that tenderers entering a contract for construction works with the public sector be registered with the CIDB. A foreign contractor can apply for registration with the CIDB. The process can take several months, and the cost depends on the specific grade of registration required. For example, the cost of a grade nine application (being for contracts with a value greater than ZAR 10 million (about US$993,000)) is proximately ZAR40, 000 (about US$4,000). For registration in the requiredgradetobegranted,acontractormustproveitsrecordofexperienceincontractswith a similar nature and value. Further visa requirements apply to foreign nationals working in South Africa.

 

The government has also implemented certain policies and legislation regarding economic transformation, local content, skills development, and sustainable growth in South Africa, namely the: National Industrial Participation Programme (NIPP), South African government's Accelerated and Shared Growth Initiative (ASGISA) and Broad Based Black Economic Empowerment Act (B-BBEE Act).

 

The NIPP and ASGISA are aimed at developing sustainable industry and growth in South Africa and apply only to state-owned entities and those parties contracting with state owned entities. Black Economic Empowerment (BEE) is a central part of the South African government's economic transformation strategy. The BEE Act is the key legislation through which the BEE process is managed. It does not set out offences or penalties relating to BEE performance but rather seeks, through economic measures, to facilitate a uniform approach to BEE in the South African economy.

 

Other than in state licensing, permitting and authorisation processes, there is no "hard law" requiring that any entity in South Africa must meet specific B-BBEE targets or must implement a B­ BBEE policy within the entity. However, from a practical perspective any company (including a foreign contractor) wishing to do business in South Africa must consider and develop its B­ BBEE position as, in addition to the pressures from government, an entity that does not have a good B-BBEE rating or does not strive to improve its B-BBEE rating, is obstructed in the conduct of day­ to-day business with the government, organs of state and privatesectorcustomers.Inrelationtoexchangecontrolrestrictions,thefollowingarerelevant: •     Exchange controls have limited application to non-residents (although some rules do

apply).

•     A non-resident can operate a non-resident bank account with a South African bank, which allows it to freely receive foreign currency and convert Rand amounts received into foreign currency.

•     Expatriate individuals are not subject to exchange control restrictions, provided they confirm their status as temporary workers with an authorised dealer, such as any of the commercial banks.

 

In practice, there are no legal obstacles to a foreign company opening bank accounts, renting office space, or hiring local services or other local supports for its daily operations in South Africa.

 

Further Reading

 

1. See country reports on Construction and Projects on the PLC website.

2. Andrew Mackenzie, Gordon Prestige, Sally Kotb, and Khalil Mechantaf, Baker McKenzie Habib Al Mulla and Nick Roberts, Construction, and projects in United Arab Emirates: overview, Global Guide 2018 Construction and Projects.

3. Mark R Berry, Peckar & Abramson, PC, Construction and Projects - United States, PLC 2017.

4. Todd R Metz, Construction and Projects - United States, PLC 2013.

5. Marcus Harling, William Gard, Steven James, Construction and Projects in the UK (England and Wales): Overview - United Kingdom, PLC 2016

6. Marcus Harling, William Gard, Steven James, Construction and Projects in the UK (England and Wales): Overview - United Kingdom, PLC 2014

7. Andrew MacKenzie, Philip Stevens, Leonie Sellers, Construction and Projects -UAE, PLC 2016.

8. Young Seok Lee, Ju Bong Park, Sae Youn Kim and Kyung Jun Lee, Construction and Projects - South Korea, PLC 2014.

9. Rob Morson, Daniella Zussa, Bowman Gilfillan, Construction and Projects - Republic of South Africa, PLC 2016.

10.Claire Tucker and Tumisang Mongae, Bowman, Construction and Projects in South Africa, PLC 2016.

11. Cumming Insights Construction Market Analysis, Q1- 2020: https://ccorpinsights.com/summary/

12.FMI, US Market Construction Overview https://www.smacna.org/docs/default-source/business-management/fmi-s-2016-u-s-markets-construction-overview.pdf?sfvrsn=2

13.FMI,    US    Market          Construction    Overview         2020: https://www.fminet.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/02/Overview2020_FINAL.pdf

 

14.Thomas R Snider, John Gaffney and Dalal Al Houti Al Tamimi & Company, Commercial Arbitration – United Arab Emirates, 2018 Global Arbitration Review https://globalarbitrationreview.com/jurisdiction/1004937/united-arab-emirates

 

15.Robert S Peckar and Michael S Zicherman (ed), 2019. Construction 2020, London: Law Business Research Ltd https://www.lexology.com/gtdt

 

16.Country Q&A on Westlaw

 

 

 

Task(s) - content

 

Scenario

In 2019, the Carri Windfarm Authority (CWA) of Carriland, a country in the Caribbean with the same laws as England, advertised a tender for the design and construction of twenty (20) large, three-blade horizontal wind turbines as part of a flagship renewable clean energy project near the coast of Carri city, the capital of Carriland. Each of the 8.8 MW wind turbines was to generate about 20 million kWh of power every year. That puts the estimated total output of the farm at approximately 400million kWh per annum. Lifelong Contractors, a well-known clean energy construction company, were selected after the bidding process and entered into an agreement based on the FIDIC Conditions of Contract for Plant and Design-Build (the Yellow Book), 1999 (unamended except as indicated in this scenario).

 

At paragraph 14 of the technical documents specified in the Employer’s Requirement, it is noted that ‘‘the design of the turbines shall ensure a lifespan of 12 years in every aspect without planned replacements. The choice of structure, materials, corrosion protection system, operation and inspection programme shall be made accordingly.” In the contract itself, the parties had included a clause which states that the design standard shall be the usual standard applicable to contracts of this nature and the professionals involved. Twenty-five months after all required tests had been completed and the project had been handed over to CWA, eight of the turbines began to function below par. Engineers of CWA and several independent experts (the “team”) inspected the wind turbines and confirmed that they will function at current below par levels, generating less than a third of the power originally intended for about the first 5 years of operation and after that are likely to deteriorate. Notwithstanding the problem, the team reports that there is no indication that designers had ignored international best practice in the manufacture of the wind turbines. There is also no indication that the wind turbines were not properly fitted. The defect notification period is 24 months. CWA argues that the contractor is in breach of the construction contract and liable for damages. Lifelong’s lawyers have signalled that their client has ‘gone above and beyond its professional service responsibility to use reasonable skill and care’ and has met the standard required under the contract and are therefore not in breach. They point to fluctuating wind speed and recent regular occurrence of gust which has led to the turbines being switched off intermittently to avoid damage as the cause of the below par performance. The independent experts have found that the wind speed data shows only limited instances of unusual flows.

 

Question

With the contract and the applicable laws in mind, critically analyse design responsibility and liability under the Yellow Book, 1999 as it relates to this scenario and evaluate the respective positions of the parties. You should also discuss if your answer would be different if the Conditions of Contract the Parties used was the NEC4 ECC without Option X15?

 

Individuals should carefully consider the assessment in the context of the material and syllabus for the project. That is not to say that only the project materials are relevant, additional research is required. The lecture notes and other materials provided in the project should be considered thoughtfully as part of your preparation for this coursework. The forum posting activities and other real time engagements via zoom, Teams and other media should also be seen as important aspects of the knowledge required for this assessment.  Seminars 1 and 2 will consolidate your knowledge of the FIDIC contract forms. Seminars 3 and 4 will provide insight into how the NEC contract forms operate. These engagements will ultimately provide the needed background information to aid your understanding of the final assessment. Individuals should not consider their engagement with the forums complete after posting to the forum pages; you should also pay attention to the feedback on your contributions. This will provide an important material that feeds forward into subsequent exercises including this assessment.

Individuals are allowed to make reasonable assumptions and inferences from the scenario, but this should be done sparingly and circumspectly as too much of this will likely change the character/ nature of the original question. Always provide some basis for any inference or assumption and cover off the alternative position if the inference or assumption is wrong. The detail of that alternative depends on the inference being made.

 

Task(s) - format

 

Individuals should provide a comprehensive answer to the question posed, in line with the requirements. The key is clarity of expression, structure, and presentation. It must also comply with the following.

 

  1. All propositions of law referred to in the legal problem question should be supported by an appropriate reference to a case or statute or, in the case of a reference to a standard form of building contract by an appropriate reference to the relevant contract.

 

  1. As noted above, the word count should be stated on the front cover of the submission. Remember the word limit includes FOOTNOTES.

 

  1. Individuals should note that abstracts, tables of contents, figures, tables in general and appendices are not expected. Some of these can be helpful for individuals in their own working and the position on word count should be noted. Definitions and glossary may be helpful. That depends on the approach to the answer. The key point is that the answer should be clear.  On the point about tables and graphics, experience says that these tend to be of limited value in explaining the answer: they organise the information but do not – themselves – explain it.

 

  1. The OSCOLA referencing system is to be followed. This means, among other things, that footnotes should be included in the answers and that footnotes must be used for referencing only and should contain as little text as possible.

 

  1. A bibliography and reference list should appear at the end of the answer to each part of the work.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Expert answer

 

This Question Hasn’t Been Answered Yet! Do You Want an Accurate, Detailed, and Original Model Answer for This Question?

 

Ask an expert

Stuck Looking For A Model Original Answer To This Or Any Other
Question?


Related Questions

What Clients Say About Us

WhatsApp us